1

General View
HOME › INTRODUCTION

What’s ScriptCase?
ScriptCase is a complete development tool. Having a friendly web interface, ScriptCase creates PHP applications extremely fast, with quality, saving your time, reducing costs,
gain productivity and integrating your development team. You’ll be able to create applications of the type Grid, Chart, Form, Calendars and many other applications that
ScriptCase offers. Installing on a web server, ScriptCase can be accessed simultaneously by many developers from the browser, allowing remote and collaborative development.
The source code is in PHP and it works independently of the tool, allowing your deployment to work on any Web Server that’s has PHP enables

How does ScriptCase work?

ScriptCase works with the generation of web applications in PHP, relating the content always with the most used databases on the market.

Source Code
ScriptCase generates (PHP, JavaScript, HTML and AJAX) source code. The generated code is totally independent from the tool and can be published on a PHP enabled web server.
The PHP language is free(GNU) and can be used on (Windows, Linux or Mac), each PHP process is done on the Server.
 1
Accessing Scriptcase
HOME › INTRODUCTION › ACCESSING SCRIPTCASE

When accessing ScriptCase you’ll be presented the initial screen of the tool, where you’ll inform the username and password.

At your first access, the username and password is admin

Login Screen

After validating the username and password according to the profile, ScriptCase will offer the options that the user has access.

The user of the type “Administrator” has access privileges to all the functionalities of ScriptCase, also the ability to create new users.
 1
General View
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION

The ScriptCase installer comes with PHP 7.0, Apache 2.4 and Source Guardian Loader.

The installation process will be described according with the Operating System.

It’s really simple to install ScriptCase, select your operating system, follow the tutorial and in a few steps learn how to install and use ScriptCase.
 1
ScriptCase Installer for Windows
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLER FOR WINDOWS

ScriptCase’s installer is an executable file for Windows. An application that automatically extracts the configuration of the APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE to your operating
system.

It’ll be installed automatically on your Operating System:

Apache Web Server 2.4.15

PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.

Source Guardian 11.0.6

Scriptcase 9

Before proceeding with the installation, it’s recommended not having any other web environment installed (XAMP, Zend Server, etc…) installed on the operating system. We
recommend using the SQLite database for the ScriptCase installation.

This manual describes the installation of ScriptCase in 2 steps:

1: Select the configurations of the installer.

2: Execute ScriptCase.

Selecting the configurations on the installer

1 - Selecting the language of the installation.

Language: We can select the language that the content will be displayed in the installation process. This step doesn’t select the language for the interface of ScriptCase, only for the
installation.

Click on Ok to continue.

2 - “Welcome” Message.

This window displays the “Welcome” message of the installer.

Click on Next to continue.

3 - License Agreement.
 2

Do you accept this license? : You should accept the terms before continuing.

Click on Next to continue.

4 - Installation Directory.

The predetermined installation path is “C:\Program Files (x86)\NetMake\v9". Don’t alter this path unless it’s necessary.

Installation Directory : Define the installation path for ScriptCase.

: This button allows you to select a directory or create a new folder.

Click on Next to continue.

5 - Apache Configuration.

Port : This defines the port on which the Apache service will run. We recommend using the predetermined value.

Administrator Email: This is the email for the Apache administrator. It’ll be a configuration for the Apache, and not for ScriptCase.

Apache Domain: The Apache Domain should be defined here. We recommend using the predetermined value.

PHP Timezone: Select your Timezone.

Click on Next to continue.

6 - Ready to Install.
 3

Click on Next to install ScriptCase.

Progress Bar : Displays the overall progress of the installation.

7 - All the Apache to run in a private and public network (Firewall)

You should check the two options so that the execution of the ScriptCase Apache can work on your Operating System.

8 - Completing the Installation.

 4
View “Readme” File : When clicking on finish, the “Readme” file”

Open Scriptcase 9.0 : When clicking on finish, ScriptCase will start.

Click on “Finish” to complete the process.

Using ScriptCase
To access your ScriptCase, open the browser and inform the local IP and the port that you informed in the installation ( Apache Configuration).

Ex: http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase
 1
ScriptCase Installer for Linux
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLER FOR LINUX

ScriptCase’s installer is an executable file for Linux. An application that automatically extracts the configuration of the APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE to your operating system.

It’ll be installed automatically on your Operating System:

Apache Web Server 2.4.15

PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.

Source Guardian 11.0.6

Scriptcase 9

Before proceeding with the installation, it’s recommended not having any other web environment installed (XAMP, Zend Server, etc…) installed on the operating system. It’s
recommend to know the basic shell commands to use the terminal(shell). We recommend using the SQLite database for the ScriptCase installation.

This manual describes the installation of ScriptCase in 3 steps:

1: Execute the ScriptCase Installer.

2: Select the configurations of the installer.

3: Execute ScriptCase.

Executing the ScriptCase Installer

1 - Access the folder where the installer is stored using the command cd .

Ex: user@computer:~$ cd /folder/of/downloads

The installer requires permissions to do some changes to your system. We need to give the administrator permission (also known as “root permission”) to the installer.

2 - Request access to the root using sudo su and informing the password (if necessary).

Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ sudo su

3 - Give permissions to run the installation file.

Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ chmod 777 scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v9.0.000.run

4 - Execute the installation file.

Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ ./scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v9.0.000.run

Selecting the configurations on the installer

1 - Selecting the language of the installation.

Language: We can select the language that the content will be displayed in the installation process. This step doesn’t select the language for the interface of ScriptCase, only for the
installation.

Click on Ok to continue.

2 - “Welcome” Message.
 2

This window displays the “Welcome” message of the installer.

Click on Next to continue.

3 - License Agreement.

Do you accept this license? : You should accept the terms before continuing.

Click on Next to continue.

4 - Installation Directory.

The predetermined installation path is “/opt/NetMake/v9/”. Don’t alter this path unless it’s necessary.

Installation Directory : Define the installation path for ScriptCase.

![Installation Browsing][browse_img_install] : This button allows you to select a directory or create a new folder.

Click on Next to continue.

5 - Apache Configuration.
 3

Port : This defines the port on which the Apache service will run. We recommend using the predetermined value.

Administrator Email: This is the email for the Apache administrator. It’ll be a configuration for the Apache, and not for ScriptCase.

Apache Domain: The Apache Domain should be defined here. We recommend using the predetermined value.

PHP Timezone: Select your Timezone.

Click on Next to continue.

6 - Ready to Install.

Click on Next to install ScriptCase.

Progress Bar : Displays the overall progress of the installation.

7 - All the Apache to run in a private and public network (Firewall)

![Firewall Permission][permiso_apache_install]

You should check the two options so that the execution of the ScriptCase Apache can work on your Operating System.

8 - Completing the Installation.

 4

View “Readme” File : When clicking on finish, the “Readme” file”

Open Scriptcase 9.0 : When clicking on finish, ScriptCase will start.

Click on “Finish” to complete the process.

Using ScriptCase
To access your ScriptCase, open the browser and inform the local IP and the port that you informed in the installation ( Apache Configuration).

Ex: http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase
 1
ScriptCase Installer for MacOS
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLER FOR MACOS

ScriptCase’s installer is an executable file for MacOS. An application that automatically extracts the configuration of the APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE to your operating system.

It’ll be installed automatically on your Operating System:

Apache Web Server 2.4.15

PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.

Source Guardian 11.0.6

Scriptcase 9

Before proceeding with the installation, it’s recommended not having any other web environment installed (XAMP, Zend Server, etc…) installed on the operating system. It’s
recommend to know the basic shell commands to use the terminal(shell). We recommend using the SQLite database for the ScriptCase installation.

This manual describes the installation of ScriptCase in 2 steps:

1: Select the configurations of the installer.

2: Execute ScriptCase.

Selecting the configurations on the installer

1 - Selecting the language of the installation.

Language: We can select the language that the content will be displayed in the installation process. This step doesn’t select the language for the interface of ScriptCase, only for the
installation.

Click on Ok to continue.

2 - “Welcome” Message.

This window displays the “Welcome” message of the installer.

Click on Next to continue.

3 - License Agreement.
 2

Do you accept this license? : You should accept the terms before continuing.

Click on Next to continue.

4 - Installation Directory.

The predetermined installation path is “/Applications/NetMake/v9/”. Don’t alter this path unless it’s necessary.

Installation Directory : Define the installation path for ScriptCase.

: This button allows you to select a directory or create a new folder.

Click on Next to continue.

5 - Apache Configuration.

Port : This defines the port on which the Apache service will run. We recommend using the predetermined value.

Administrator Email: This is the email for the Apache administrator. It’ll be a configuration for the Apache, and not for ScriptCase.

Apache Domain: The Apache Domain should be defined here. We recommend using the predetermined value.

PHP Timezone: Select your Timezone.

Click on Next to continue.

6 - Ready to Install.
 3

Click on Next to install ScriptCase.

Progress Bar : Displays the overall progress of the installation.

7 - All the Apache to run in a private and public network (Firewall)

![Firewall Permission][permiso_apache_install]

You should check the two options so that the execution of the ScriptCase Apache can work on your Operating System.

8 - Completing the Installation.

View “Readme” File : When clicking on finish, the “Readme” file”

Open Scriptcase 9.0 : When clicking on finish, ScriptCase will start.

Click on “Finish” to complete the process.

Using ScriptCase
To access your ScriptCase, open the browser and inform the local IP and the port that you informed in the installation ( Apache Configuration).

Ex: http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase
4
 1
Installing PHP 7.0 - Windows
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › INSTALLING PHP 7.0 - WINDOWS

This Article will describe the PHP 7.0 installation with Apache 2.4 to use ScriptCase.

Supported Operating Systems:

Windows Server
2008 SP2

2008 R2 SP1

2012

2012 SP2

2016

Windows
7 SP1

Vista SP2

8.1

10

Necessary Files:

PHP 7.0: Click Here

Apache 2.4: Click Here

mod_Fcgi: Click Here

SourceGuardian Loader: Click Here

You should download PHP 7.0 NTS ( x86 or x64 ), Apache 2.4 ( x86 or x64 ) and mod_fcgi ( x86 or x64 ).

After downloading, extract the PHP and Apache files in your C: drive of your Operating System

Rename the PHP folder to php and the Apache folder to Apache24

Extract the modfcgi file, and copy the file mod_fcgid.so to the folder C:\Apache24\modules

Setting up Apache
Edit the file httpd.conf located in C:\Apache24\conf\

Add the content below after the last line of the #LoadModule

LoadModule fcgid_module modules/mod_fcgid.so FcgidInitialEnv PHPRC "c:/php" AddHandler fcgid-script .php FcgidWrapper "c:/php/php-cgi.exe" .php

Still in the httpd.conf look for #ServerName www.example.com:80 and alter is to #ServerName localhost:80

Change the content of the directive <IfModule dir_module> acoording to example below:

<IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html index.php index.phtml </IfModule>

Add the text: Options ExecCGI on the directive Directory “c/:Apache24/htdocs”

 2

Look for IfModule mime_module and add the content below: `<Directory “c:/php”> AllowOverride None Options None Require all granted

</Directory>`

Apache Installation
Access the command prompt with the Administrator privileges and run the command below:

c:\apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k install

Important: In cas of an error, and informed that the file msvcr110.dll is missing, you can download the file clicking here. Extract and place the file in the directory :
C:\Windows\System and C:\Windows\System32. Run the command again in the command prompt.

Setting up PHP
Access the PHP folder in C:\ and rename the file php.ini-development to php.ini

Edit the file php.ini , look for extension_dir and apply this value “C:\php\ext”

Activate the extensions listed below (just remove the (;) from the start of each line) extension=php_bz2.dll extension=php_curl.dll extension=php_gd2.dll extension=php_imap.dll
extension=php_interbase.dll extension=php_ldap.dll extension=php_mbstring.dll extension=php_exif.dll extension=php_mysql.dll extension=php_mysqli.dll extension=php_oci8.dll
extension=php_pdo_firebird.dll extension=php_pdo_mssql.dll extension=php_pdo_mysql.dll extension=php_pdo_oci.dll extension=php_pdo_odbc.dll extension=php_pdo_pgsql.dll
extension=php_pdo_sqlite.dll extension=php_pgsql.dll extension=php_pspell.dll extension=php_shmop.dll extension=php_sqlite.dll extension=php_sqlite3.dll extension=php_xmlrpc.dll
extension=php_xsl.dll extension=php_zip.dll

Important: By default some of the PHP functions are disable, but they are important for ScriptCase. Access the php.ini file and alter the line of the item disable_functions
according to the example below: * disable_functions= ““
 3
Setup the TimeZone according to your region. You need to use the value available at the PHP documentation Click Here to view

Save the modifications.

Restart the Apache service using the command ( in the cmd with Administrator privileges ):
c:\apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k restart

Enabling SourceGuardian Loader

Extract the file below

Copy the file ixed.7.0.win to the folder c:\php\ext

Edit the file php.ini, at the end of the file place the content below:

[SourceGuardian] zend_extension=C:\php\ext\ixed.7.0.win

Restart the Apache service using the command (in the cmd with Administrator privileges):
c:\apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k restart
 1
Installing PHP 7.0 - Linux
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › INSTALLING PHP 7.0 - LINUX

This Article will describe the PHP 7.0 installation with Apache 2.4 to use ScriptCase.

Supported Operating Systems:

Linux
Debian

CentOS\RHEL

OpenSuse

Necessary Files:

SourceGuardian Loader: Click Here

Setting up PHP
Access the terminal ( shell ) and execute the command below to use the superuser (root):
sudo su

Execute the command below to install PHP:

apt-get install php-7.0 php7.0-dev php7.0-cli php7.0-pear

Accept the installation of the dependencies.

Verify the version of the PHP by executing the command below:

php -v

Important: By default some of the PHP functions are disable, but they are important for ScriptCase. Access the php.ini file ( /etc/php5/apache2/php.ini ) and alter the line of the
item disable_functions according to the exemple below:

Setup the TimeZone according to your region. You need to use the value available at the PHP documentation Click Here to view

Activating the extension of the Database:

Microsoft SQL Server:
apt-get install php7.0-mssql

PostgreSQL:
apt-get install php7.0-pgsql

MySQL:
apt-get install php7.0-mysql

SQLite:
apt-get install php7.0-sqlite

FireBird:
apt-get install php7.0-interbase

Odbc:
apt-get install php7.0-odbc

Activating the GD library

This library is necessary to render the images.

Use the command below:

apt-get install php7.0-gd

Accept the installation of the dependencies.

Enabling SourceGuardian Loader

Create a folder to place the file ixed.7.0.lin
sudo mkdir /usr/lib/php7/sourceguardian

Copy the file ixed.7.0.lin that was downloaded according to your architecture to the folder /usr/lib/php7/sourceguardian
cp ixed.7.0.lin /usr/lib/php7/sourceguardian

Configure the permission to Total Control for this folder:

 2
chmod 777 -R /usr/lib/php7/sourceguardian

Edit the file php.ini and add the to the end of the file the content below:
[SourceGuardian] zend_extension=/usr/lib/php7/sourceguardian/ixed.7.0.lin

Restart the Apache service using the command below:

sudo /etc/init.d/apache2 restart
 1
Installing PHP 7.0 - Mac
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › INSTALLING PHP 7.0 - MAC

This Article will describe the PHP 7.0 installation with Apache 2.4 to use ScriptCase.

Supported Operating Systems:

Mac
El Captain

Sierra

Necessary Files:

SourceGuardian Loader: Click Here

Setting up PHP
Access the terminal (shell) and execute the command below to use the superuser (root):
sudo su

Execute the command below to install PHP:

curl -s http://php-osx.liip.ch/install.sh | bash -s 7.0

Installation Directory
/usr/local/php5

Setting up Apache
Edit the file httpd.conf:
nano /etc/apache2/httpd.conf

Add the content below to the end of the modules:

LoadModule php7_module /usr/local/php5/libphp7.so

Edit the file paths:

sudo nano /etc/paths

Add the content below to the start of the file:

/usr/local/php5/bin

In /Library/WebServer/Documents/ create a file called info.php with the content below:

<?php phpinfo(); ?>

Access, it using the browser:

http://localhost/info.php

Enabling SourceGuardian Loader

Copy the file ixed.7.0.dar that was downloaded according to your architecture to the folder /usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions
cp ixed.7.0.dar /usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions

Configure the permission for the file:

chmod 777 -R /usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions/ixed.7.0.dar

Edit the file php.ini in /usr/local/zend/etc/ and add them to the end of the file the content below:
[SourceGuardian] zend_extension=/usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions/ixed.7.0.dar`

Restart the Apache service using the command below:

sudo /usr/sbin/apachectl stop

sudo /usr/sbin/apachectl start

 1
ScriptCase Manual Installation
HOME › SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION › SCRIPTCASE MANUAL INSTALLATION

Download ScriptCase with the extension zip at www.scriptcase.net and extract it on the root of your webserver.

After extracting, rename the folder to scriptcase.

Access Scriptcase from your browser using the url below:

http://127.0.0.1/scriptcase

By default, the selected language is English.

By default the selected language is English.

Verifying the necessary extensions for ScriptCase to work and the modules for the database connections.

Verifying the necessary extensions for ScriptCase to work and the modules for the database connections.

Typical Installation
On this option, ScriptCase will be installed with the default settings.

On this option, ScriptCase will be installed with the default settings.

Login Screen.
 2

Login Screen.

Custom Installation
On this option, the user will choose the settings for the installation.

On this option, the user will choose the settings for the installation.

Verify the permissions of the system directory

Verify the permissions of the system directory

We can choose the database that ScriptCase will use to store the data in.

We can

choose the database that ScriptCase will use to store the data in.

Displaying the creation of the ScriptCase tables.

 3

Displaying the creation

of the ScriptCase tables.

Setting up the user to access ScriptCase.

Setting up the user to access ScriptCase.

Finishing the custom installation

Finishing the custom installation

Login Screen.
 4

Login Screen.
 1
General View
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE

Main Menu
On the superior part of the page, is available the main menu containing all the available options in ScriptCase.

Toolbar
Right below the main menu is located the toolbar. You can find the main functions that are used in the applications development.

Project List
On this part is located the list of all the projects for the logged user.

Project Explorer
On this area, you can find all the folders created to organize the applications. There’s also the folder that contains all the applications of the project in one place.
 2

List of Applications
After opening the project you’ll see the page below, on which you can view a list of the applications that are in the selected folder in the Project Explorer present on the left side.

Taskbar
This bar holds the tabs of all applications that were opened for editing.
 1
Main Menu
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › MAIN MENU

On the main menu is all of the functionalities of the tools for the projects and the applications. These functionalities are organized in these items below:

File
New Project : Starts the process to create a new project.

Open Project : List all the projects that the current user has permission to access.

Close Project : Closes the current project.

New Application : Opens the application wizard that supports the creation of the applications (Grids, Report PDF, Forms, Tabs, Control, Menu, Search, Dashboard or Blank).

Batch Applications: Allows you to create various applications simultaneously.

Restore Applications : Displays the last applications edited, allowing to select a restore point and the Applications name to which it’ll be restored too.

Export Project : Used to export projects developed in ScriptCase.

Import Project : Used to import projects developed in ScriptCase (Same Version).

Home: Navigate to the Project Explorer.

Logout: Logout of ScriptCase

View
Source Code : Displays the generated source code of the current application that’s be edited.

Data in Session : Displays all the session variables of the current applications in runtime, also the ScriptCase session variables.

Project
Properties: Displays the page that has the configurations of the project.

Default Values : Displays the list of all default values for the current project.

Version History: Displays the list of all versions of the current project.

Increment Version : Increments the version of current project.

Generate Source Code : Generate Source Code for all the applications in the current project.

Deploy Applications : Opens the wizard for the deployment procedure.

Export Applications : Generates an export file containing an application of the current project.

Import Applications : Imports a backup file that contains an application from another or the same project.

Delete Project : Deletes the current project.

Reports:
Application List : List the applications of the current project.

Developers Summary : Displays the total of applications in the current project by Developers.

Show Diagram : Displays the Project Diagram.

Application Search : Allows you to search for texts in the entire project.

Database
New Connection : Displays the wizard to create a new connection for the current project.

Edit Connection : Allows to edit the connections of the current project.

Import ACCESS: Allows you to import an ACCESS database to one of your other database connections.

Import EXCEL: Allows you to import an EXCEL to one of your databases.

Import CSV : Allows you to import an CSV to one of your databases.

SQL Builder: Tool that rapidly generates SELECT statements.

Database Builder: An interface that allows you to Administrate your database from within ScriptCase.

Application
Save Application : Saves the current Application.

Generate Source Code : Generate Source Code for the current Applications.

Run Application: Run the current Application.

 2

Tools
Data Dictionary: Allows the user to define standards for the tables (Names, Field Types, etc.).

_Express Edit : Opens a Window to edit various applications at once.

HelpCase: Tool that allows you to create a documentation for your current project.

External Libraries: Allows you to create scripts in various languages that can be used in the whole project.

Internal Libraries: Allows you to create PHP scripts that’ll be used in various applications.

To-Do List : Allows you to create a To-Do list.

Messages : Send messages between developers.

Converters:
Version 5 : Converts your projects from ScriptCase version 5 to this current version.

Version 6 : Converts your projects from ScriptCase version 6 to this current version.

Version 7 : Converts your projects from ScriptCase version 7 to this current version.

Layout
CSS Applications (Themes) : This option allows you to create themes for the applications.

CSS Buttons : This option allows you to create button themes.

HTML Templates : This option allows you to modify a diversity of elements of HTML that will contain your application.

CSS Menus : This option allows you to change CSS of the menus.

Menu Icons: Allows you to change the icons of the menu application.

Image Manager : This option manages the existing images in the project also allowing you to add, delete and copy images.

Chart Themes : This option allows you to modify the themes used in the Chart applications.

HTML Editor Templates : Allows you to configure the functionalities present in the html editor field that the application will use.

Locales
Application Language: Allows to define custom messages that’ll be used in different applications.

Regional Settings : Allows you to define some parameters of monetary units, date and numbers according to the Country or Region where your application will be used.

Modules
Security: This option allows you to implement access rules to your system, creating a complete system with access control in your project.

Log :
Create/Edit Log Module : Allows you to create and/or edit a log module.

Applications Related to the log : Allows you to reference which applications will use the log.

Create Query with Log Report : Allows you to create a Grid application that’ll display a log report.

Options
Settings: Access all the ScriptCase settings.

My ScriptCase : Allows you to customize the settings for the current user.

Change Password: Allows the current user to change their current password.

My Toolbar : Allows you change the position of the icons on the toolbar.

Help
WebHelp : Allows you to access the manual.

Technical Support: Access ScriptCase online support.

Diagnosis: Displays the settings of the Environment/Server where ScriptCase is installed.

Check Version : Verifies if the version is updated.

Update Version: Allows you to update ScriptCase to the latest version available.

License Registration : Access the page to register your ScriptCase.

About: Information about ScriptCase.

 1
Toolbar
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › TOOLBAR

On the toolbar is located the main elements that can be used in the applications.

1. Home: Returns to the Project Explorer.

2. New Project : Starts the process to create a new project.
3. Open Project : List all the projects that the current user has permission to access.
4. Close Project : Closes the current project.
5. New Connection : Displays the wizard to create a new connection for the current project.
6. Edit Connection : Allows to edit the connections of the current project.
7. SQL Builder: Tool that rapidly generates SELECT statements.
8. New Application : Opens the application wizard.
9. Batch Applications: Allows you to create various applications simultaneously.
10. Save Application : Saves the current Application.
11. Generate Source Code : Generate Source Code for the current Applications.
12. Run Application: Saves the current application, generates the source code and runs the applications.
13. Deploy Applications : Opens the wizard for the deployment procedure.
14. Data Dictionary: Allows the user to define standards for the tables (Names, Field Types, etc.).
15. Application Language: Allows to define custom messages that’ll be used in different applications.
16. Help : Allows you to access the manual.
17. Logout: Logout of ScriptCase
 1
Project List
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › PROJECT LIST

In this area is located all the projects that the user has access to.
 1
Project Explorer
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › PROJECT EXPLORER

On this area, you can find all the folders created to organize the applications.

1. Create : Create a new folder to organize the applications of the project.

2. Rename: Rename the selected folder.
3. Delete: Deletes the selected folder.
4. All Applications: Lists all applications from the folders and the existing subfolders.
5. My Applications : Lists all the applications from the folders and subfolders that the current user created.
6. Recent: List of all the recent generated applications.
7. Search : Does the search of the names of the applications.
 1
List of Applications
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › LIST OF
APPLICATIONS
On this area, all the applications are listed.

Application: Application’s Name.

Friendly URL : Friendly URL for the application.

Description: Application Description.

Creator: Application Creator.

Generation: Date of Source Code Generation.

Status: Status of the application (updated and outdated).

Options: Activity buttons to Run, Copy, Edit and Rename the Application. (These buttons are also available at the footer of the application list).
 1
Taskbar
HOME › GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE › TASKBAR

This bar contains the tabs of all the applications that were opened for editing.

This bar is only displayed when at least one application has been opened.

The applications open in tabs in the taskbar, where you can navigate between applications in a fast and easy way.

The “x” presented at the side of the Application name is used to close the application.
 1
General View
HOME › PROJECT

Scriptcase uses the concept of projects to manage the development of the applications. You will use the projects to organize your system development in a simple and practical
way.

In a project, it’s possible to define the applications development standards using the default values, work with project versioning, deploy all the applications or part of them,
create developers work flow reports, display application diagrams.

Each project from Scriptcase can have 3 privilege levels for users or user groups. These privileges can be set inside the menu options.

To create a Scriptcase project, there needs to be an interaction with a Database. So you can create the applications based on database tables and views.

We recommend you to review your database tables and relationships to ensure that you have them correctly structured and organized. This will make your work on creating
applications easier and fast when perform fields lookups and etc. You can view the current database structure before start creating the applications through the menu >
Database > Diagram ER, after the project creation.

Click here to see the steps in order to create a project.

 1
New Project
HOME › PROJECT › NEW PROJECT

The process of creating a project is very simple and intuitive, this process is divided in 5 steps that’ll be detailed below.
All projects created will be displayed within the option Project list. The project will be displayed according to the user’s permissions.

Start – Configuring the Project

Inside the project creation interface you have two options: Create a blank project or to import a project using a system template.

List of all the options to create a project.

In this tutorial you will see the steps to create a blank Project.

First, it is necessary to name the project, the project name must contain 1-32 alphanumeric characters, without space neither special characters. The other information, such as
description and image, are optional, they will just be displayed inside Scriptcase project list.

Project Details.

Project Icon - You can select a project icon for display purposes in the project list. This field is not required, and may be changed after creation inside project properties.
 2
Project Name - The name of the project is required for its creation. The project name must contain 1-32 alphanumeric characters, without space neither special characters.

Project Description - This where you’ll give a brief description of the project and it’s not required, also able to inform after the creation of the project.

Language
In this step you should select the languages that’ll be available for the system development.

Scriptcase can easily create multilingual systems. You just need to add more than one language in this step of the project. All the languages you choose will be available to be
used within the project, you must to choose one as standard. You can also have the same language more than once using different regional settings.

Scriptcase will automatically translate and apply the regional settings to your project applications (for buttons and internal messages for example). You can also use another tool
from Scriptcase called Data dictionary to import and translate your database fields. You will be able to see, create or customize the messages inside the menu > Locales >
Application languages.

Language - List of languages that are used in the projects.

Regional Settings - Contains the standard regional settings for the selected language. Regional Settings allows you to define some parameters of monetary units, dates and numbers
according to the country or region where your application will be used.

Charset - Sets the character encoding format that will be used in the application. This encoding must be the same used in your database. By default, the charset is filled according to the
language, and may be changed after creation in project properties.

Default - Sets the project default language. Project applications will be performed and displayed using this default language, it can also be changed individually within the application settings.

Delete - Removes the language of the project. In this way the language removed will no longer be available. It may also be included or deleted after the project creation within the Menu >
Project > Properties.

After selecting the language, regional setting and charset, click “Add” and then “Save” to move forward.

Themes
Scriptcase offers some ready themes available for you to apply to your project applications. The themes are going to define the visual presentation (layout and CSS) of your
applications.

In the themes selection you can choose more than one theme for your project. You can also customize or create new themes inside the projects by accessing the menu
Layout > CSS Application (Themes).
 3

All - Lists all the available themes for use in your project.

Scriptcase - Lists all Scriptcase standards themes.

Public - Lists all themes defined in the Public level.

Selected themes - Lists the themes selected for use in the project.

To add a theme to your project you only need to select it, then it is going to be listed inside the selected themes. You should select a theme to be used as default, for this click on
the “default” icon of the selected theme. The default theme will be the one selected every time you create a new application, you will be also able to select a different one
according to the options available within the selected themes.

Databases
During the connection creation Scriptcase will listed all database systems according to your license. If you’re evaluating Scriptcase will display all database systems available. You
have to select your database and proceed to the next step to inform the database connection details.

The information required to connect is different for each database. In this example we’ll be using MySQL. To learn more about other connections please access this link.
 4

Database connection details.

Connection Name : Define the name of the connection. You will not be able to change this name in the future.

DBMS Driver : Defined as MySQL PDO. It can also be MySQLi.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Enter the IP of the server where the database is located. If the database is on the same machine of Scriptcase you can use the IP 127.0.0.1 __ or localhost. If the
database is

Port : Define the port of the connection that’ll be used. By default, the port is 3306.

User : Inform the username that you’ll use to connect to your Database.

Password : Inform the password that you’ll use to connect to your Database.

Database Name : Click on the “List Database” and select the desired Database.

Test Connection : Displays the connection status if it succeeded or not.

End
The project has been created successfully with the basic settings, and now you can create the applications. Visit the Applications menu to learn more about each application and
to see the steps to create them.
 1
Open Project
HOME › PROJECT › OPEN PROJECT

This option redirects to the Project List page, without closing your current project. To return to the application list, just click on the home icon. If you access another project, your
current project is closed

Access PRoject > Open Project or click on the Open Project icon on the toolbar.

Next, you’ll view the project list. It’s possible to identify the project that’s located on the top right, as shown in the image below.
 1
Close Project
HOME › PROJECT › CLOSE PROJECT

Closes the current project, redirecting to the the Project List.

Access Project > Close Project or click on the Close Project Icon on the toolbar.
 1
Properties
HOME › PROJECT › PROPERTIES

This option is only available when in a project

Edit Project
We can edit some of the project information, like the description and the use of the index.

Project Name - The name of the project informed on its creation. The project name doesn’t allow special characters, and can’t be altered after its creation.

Project Description - Description informed on the project creation.

Use Index Page - Allows the use of friendly URLs in the applications. By default, this option is enabled.

Project Information - Detailed description of the project.

Locales
Define the languages that’ll be used in the project. The languages are selected the moment you create your project, but can be added more or removed.
 2
Language - List of languages that are used in the projects.

Regional Settings - Contains the standard regional settings for the selected language. Regional Settings allows you to define some parameters of monetary units, dates and numbers
according to the country or region where your application will be used.

Charset - Defines the encoding used by the selected language.

Default - Defines the default language for the project, all the applications created will be executed with the default selected language.

Trash Can - Removes the language from the project. This way, the removed language won’t be available for changing dynamically changing in runtime.

Themes
Define the available themes in the project and the default theme that’ll be used by the applications. To define a default theme for your project, select the name of the desired
theme and click on Set a default Theme, the “default” notation will appear beside the theme name. In this image the default theme is Sc8_BlueWood.

All Themes - List of all the present themes from ScriptCase.

Project Themes - List of available themes in the project.

 1
Default Values
HOME › PROJECT › DEFAULT VALUES

With this configuration, it’s possible to standardize the creation of the applications of the current project, increasing the productivity in development of the applications.

Common Settings

Logo - The favicon that’s going to use with the project. Customize the project using the same favicon in all the application.

Records per page - Amount of records per page.

Display Line Number - Defines the display of the line number existing in each application.

Display Titles - Displays the title of the application in execution.

Show Summary - Displays the number of records in the page and the total of the records in the application. This option will execute only if the line option in the Grid toolbar is disabled.

Use the old quick search - Defines the use of the old quicksearch, where we can specify which field do we want it to search for.

Use old Chart theme palettes - Defines the use of the old scheme of colors on the charts

Initial sort fields - Defines the initial sorting of the fields types.

Grid

Table Width - Defines the length for the application table. this option is available to select Pixel or Percent in the table width unit.

Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the width of the application. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the size of the fields); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that should
be informed in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)

Format Row Counter - Configuration of visualization of the display summary option of the Grid. The Display summary option will be displayed and executed only if the line option in the
toolbar isn’t enabled

Tab a Group By - Defines the left margin of the Group By.

Separates the Group - Defines the margin between two Group Bys.

Records per page - Available values in the Record button, on the toolbar

Templates - Defines the templates used by default on the Header and Footer. It’s possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
beside the field of the template selection.

Grid fields alignment - It’s possible to define the default alignment specifically for the fields that contain numbers and dates and the other types of fields.

Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons that’ll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications. We can setup the toolbar for the Grid, detail and summary.
 2
Form

Table Width - Defines the length for the application table. this option is available to select Pixel or Percent in the table width unit.

Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the width of the application. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the size of the fields); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that should
be informed in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)

Format Row Counter - Configuration of visualization of the display summary option of the Form on a horizontal orientation. The Display summary option will be displayed and executed only
if the line option in the toolbar isn’t enabled

Automatic tab - Enables the automatic tab when finishing to inform a field.

Highlight Text on Focus - Allows the content of the fields to be Highlighted when the field is focused.

Highlight Field with Error - When occurring an error on a field, being also required for example, the focus will be applied to this field.

Error Position on the field - Position of the field error.

Show the Error Title in the Application - Defines the display of the title of the application error.

Show the Error Title in the Field - Defines the display of the error Title for the field.

Error Title - Defines the error Title.

Display message - Defines the display for the message if the field is required.

Templates - Defines the templates used by default on the Header and Footer. It’s possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
beside the field of the template selection.

Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons that’ll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.

Control

Highlight Text on Focus - Allows the content of the fields to be Highlighted when the field is focused.

Highlight Field with Error - When occurring an error on a field, being also required for example, the focus will be applied to this field.

Error Position on the field - Position of the field error.

Show the Error Title in the Application - Defines the display of the title of the application error.

Show the Error Title in the Field - Defines the display of the error Title for the field.

Error Title - Defines the error Title.

Display message - Defines the display for the message if the field is required.

Templates - Defines the templates used be default on the Header and Footer. It’s possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
beside the field of the template selection.
 3
Search

Empty Search - Defines hoe the search will treat the informed conditions. “AND” (Should satisfy all the conditions so that the search can return some results) “OR” (Should satisfy any
condition informed so that the search can return some results)

Horizontal Alignment - Horizontal Alignment of the search.

Display Condition - Displays the condition of the search, so that the user can do their choice. (“AND” or “OR”)

Keep Values - Keep the values of the previous searches done when accessing the search again.

Keep Columns and Order Selection - Preserve the position of the fields and the sorting of the previous search.

Table Width - Defines the length for the application table. this option is available to select Pixel or Percent in the table width unit.

Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the width of the application. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the size of the fields); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that should
be informed in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)

Use Iframe - Allows the use and the display of the application searched in the same page within an iframe.

Initial State - Defines how the application will be displayed at first when using the search with an iframe, if the application will be displayed at first or only the search will be displayed.

Iframe Height - Defines the height of the iframe in pixels.

Error Position on the field - Position of the field error.

Show the Error Title in the Application - Defines the display of the title of the application error.

Show the Error Title in the Field - Defines the display of the error Title for the field.

Error Title - Defines the error Title.

Display message - Defines the display for the message if the field is required.

Templates - Defines the templates used be default on the Header and Footer. It’s possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
beside the field of the template selection.

Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons that’ll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.

Calendar
 4

Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons that’ll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.

New Chart

Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons that’ll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.

Old Chart
 5

Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons that’ll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.

Tab

Tab Alignment - Display alignment of the tabs in the application.

Templates - Defines the templates used by default on the Header and Footer. It’s possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
beside the field of the template selection.

Menu

Horizontal Alignment of the Menu - Menu alignment.

Horizontal Alignment of the Items - Menu item alignment

Templates - Defines the templates used by default on the Header and Footer. It’s possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
beside the field of the template selection.

Dashboard

Templates - Defines the templates used by default on the Header and Footer. It’s possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
beside the field of the template selection.

HTML Editor
The HTML Editor has to options of configurations, depending on the option selected on Use template in the HTML Editor .
 6
Use template in the HTML Editor - Selecting Yes (Image Below), you will be using the new templated of the HTML Editor field, these themes should be setup in Layout > HTML Editor
Templates .

HTML Editor template - Defines the template for editing of the field HTML Editor.

Field Preview - Default Text of the HTML Editor Fields.

Use template in the HTML Editor - Selecting No (Image Below), you won’t be using the new templated of the HTML Editor field, in this case the options should be setup in the field its self.

Properties - Defines the display properties.

Location - Defines the position of the items in the field. Top or Bottom

Buttons Alignment - Defines the alignment of the items in the field. Left, Center, Right.

Status bar - Position of the Status Bar.

Toolbar Count - Amount of the bars to organize the items.

Buttons’ Organization - Set the available items in the bars.

Internal Libraries
Define the libraries that’ll be use in the project.

Level - Access level of the library.

List of Libraries - List of all the libraries available for use in the project.
 1
Version History
HOME › PROJECT › VERSION HISTORY

Lists all the versions of the current project. The Version History page manages the versions of the project, created in the option of version incrementation, here we can return to
earlier versions, open a previous version or deletes created versions.

Version - Project Versions.

Description - Project version description.

Creation - Date of the version creation.

Delete - Delete the selected version of the project and all its applications. Applications from the other versions are not affected.

Status - Defines if the version of the project is opened or closed.

Edit - Allows to edit the selected version of the project. This option is available for the version that have the status Open.
 1
Version Incrementation
HOME › PROJECT › VERSION INCREMENTATION

Allows the control over the project in development, separating it in versions. The versioning of the project allows you to protect the functionalities existing in the system, before
doing any important modifications, by creating a new version of the current project.

The version increment allows only the latest version of the project is increased.

Current Version - Informs the current version of the project.

New Version - Defines the number of the new version of the project.

Description - New project description.

 1
Generate Source Code
HOME › PROJECT › GENERATE SOURCE CODE

Allows you to generate the source code for all the applications in the project, select the desired application or generate the source code for the outdated ones.

All - Generates the source code for all the applications in the current project, when selecting this option, you’ll be redirected to the page where the code will be generated, where you can also
see the log.

Outdated Applications - Generates the source code only for the outdated applications (recently modified applications that weren’t generated yet), when selecting this option, you’ll be
redirected to the page where the code will be generated, where you can salon see the log.

Select Applications - This option allows you to select the applications that you want to generate the source code, when selection this option you’ll be redirected to the application selection
page.

Selecting Applications

All the applications from the project are listed here, you should select the applications that you want to generate the source code. The application can be listed in two ways, using
the filter to list by Application types or by folders, as shown below.

After selecting the application that will be generated, you’ll be redirected to the page where the code will be generated, where you can also see the log.
 2

We can see in the highlighted folder of the image some filter options.

Open Folder Icon - Allows the display of possible errors when generating the code.

Closed Folder Icon - Allows to hide the possible errors when generating the code.

Document ok - Displays only the applications that haven’t had any problems generating the code.

Document error - Displays only the applications that had any problems generating the code.
 1
Export Project
HOME › PROJECT › EXPORT PROJECT

This option allows you to create a .zip file with all the applications from the current project and all the necessary files so the project can work.

Access File > Export Project .

Next, select the project that you want to export.

When finishing the process, the file will be available for download.
 1
Import Project
HOME › PROJECT › IMPORT PROJECT

Allows you to import a project exported by ScriptCase, will all the files necessary to function.

Access File > Import Project.

Next, we need to select the project file that we want to import.

After finishing the process, we should inform the name of the project that’s being imported.

In case the is a project with the same name in your ScriptCase, the project that’s being imported will overwrite the existing project.

After finishing the import, we can open the project.

 1
Delete Project
HOME › PROJECT › DELETE PROJECT

To delete a project, you need to have one opened. In the project, access Project > Delete Project . All the information relating to the project and the applications will be deleted.

The exclusion of the project can’t be undone.

 1
Reports
HOME › PROJECT › REPORTS

We offer two typed of reports for projects, where we can visualize a list of all the created applications, with various information about each one of them and also a production
report about each developer of this project.

To generate the reports, access Project > Reports

Application List
Displays a list with all the applications existing in the current project and the inserts of the tables. TO generate the report, firstly you need to define the which information to you
want to be available.

Select Columns - Defines the columns that will be part of the report.

Sorting - Defines the fields and the sorting that’ll be available.

Order By - Defines the initial sorting for the report, it’ll use Ascendant by default if not informed.

Group By - Defines the grouping of the report, by type(application) or by folder (Directory of project files).

After finishing the configurations, click on Report .

 2

Developers Summary
Generates a summary with every that the developer did, showing the total applications and their types and the total lines of the code that the user did in the application.

This same report is available in charts, with three types of visualization.

Applications - Total of applications in the project grouped by their type.

Developers - Total of application created by developer in the project.

Applications x Developers - A junction of the other two charts.

 1
Show Diagram
HOME › PROJECT › SHOW DIAGRAM

Generates a diagram of relationships between applications in the project. On this diagram, you can see in a clear way which applications are related and which is the method
used to do the relation.

This example we’re showing the relationship of all the applications in the sc_album project.

There are some options that can help viewing the diagram.

We can display a minimap of all the diagrams, to help with the display. To view it, click on the icon on the lower left side of the diagram.

There are other options of views, instead of the minimap, as shown below.
 2
Diagram Format - Build the Diagram according to the ties positioning.

Reading Mode - Defines the perspective of reading for the diagram when it’s created.

Space - Defines the space between the columns(Horizontal) and the layers(Vertical).
 1
Application Search
HOME › PROJECT › APPLICATION SEARCH

It does a search in the project with all the content informed by the search.

The location on which the search will look for defined by a checkbox.

At least one of the options need to be selected.

All - Does a search in all the options listed below.

SQL - Searches only in the SQL areas of the applications.

Field Name and label - Does a search for the name and label of the field.

Links - Does a search only for the name of the applications.

Lookup - Searches inky in the lookup area of the fields.

Themes - Searches only for theme names.

Template Name - Searches only for HTML templates names.

Libraries - Searches for internal libraries that contain this specific name.

Header and Footer - Searches only for the Application Titles.

Block Name and Label - Searches only for the name or label of the block informed.

THe results will be disaplyed as shown below.

Application - Name of the applications found that satisfies the search

Item - Location on which the was located the informed criteria.

Values - Part of the area where was found the informed data.
 1
Importing a template project.
HOME › PROJECT › IMPORTING A TEMPLATE PROJECT.

The process of creating the sample project is simple and intuitive, this process is divided into just two steps which are detailed below.
The projects created with access permission for the user, appear in Project List.

Start
During the first step of the project creation you will be able to create a Blank projector to Import a template according to the options below.

Our projects templates include some examples for most of the features from Scriptcase, you can preview them on the website. When you import a project template Scriptcase
will delivery some ready applications and also the database tables. Hereinafter you will see the steps to import one template project, the “Samples”.

First, you need to chose the project and customize the details. Description and image, are optional.

Project Icon - You can select a project icon for display purposes in the project list. This field is not required, and may be changed after creation inside project properties.

Project Name - The name of the project is required for its creation. The project name must contain 1-32 alphanumeric characters, without space neither special characters.

Project Description - This where you’ll give a brief description of the project and it’s not required, also able to inform after the creation of the project.

Additional Project information - Here you can add some additional information you want for the project. This field is not required, and may be changed after creation in properties in the
project.

Database
Our template projects are available for MySQL, Oracle, SQL Server, Postgres, Access, SQLite, Firebird.
You can choose to use the default connection or to configure a new connection to your own database.

Use default connection (SQLite)

By clicking on the option “Use default connection (SQLite)” Scriptcase undertakes to create a database, with the SQLite database, and insert all the information of tables and
records. The database file with the project tables and some dummy records will be stored within Scriptcase’s directory.

The project will be created and configured with all the basic information. Generate the source code to compile and applications and then “open project” and view all the
applications created or “Run” the project to open the initial application

Create a new connection to my database

After selecting the database you want to connect, enter the required data to perform the connection.

The information needed to create a connection vary according to the selected database. In the example below, we will show with MySQL connection. For more details on how to
connect your database click here.

Connection Name : Define the name of the connection. You will not be able to change this name in the future.

DBMS Driver : Defined as MySQL PDO. It can also be MySQLi.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Enter the IP of the server where the database is located. If the database is on the same machine of Scriptcase you can use the IP 127.0.0.1 __ or localhost. If the
database is

Port : Define the port of the connection that’ll be used. By default, the port is 3306.

User : Inform the user name that you’ll use to connect to your Database.

Password : Inform the password that you’ll use to connect to your Database.

Database Name : Click on the “List Database” and select the desired Database.

Test Connection : Displays the connection status if it succeeded or not.

If you don’t have a database created in your database, click on the button “Create Database” and the window below will appear.

The option of Create Database is available for: MySQL/MariaDB, MSSQL Server and PostegreSQL
 2

Enter a name for your database and click “OK”. After that the database created it will be displayed database list. To create a database directly from Scriptcase you need to have
the correct permissions within the database system itself, sometimes this permission is refused, specially when you have the database in another server. In this example we have
the database located on the same server, localhost.

After you finish Scriptcase undertakes to create all the tables and insert all information to be used in applications.

All set! now the project will be created and configured with all the basic information. Generate the source code to compile and applications and then “open project” and view all
the applications created or “Run” the project to open the initial application
 1
General View
HOME › CONNECTIONS

ScriptCase Connections

Access

IBM DB2

Firebird

Informix

Interbase

MySQL

Oracle

PostgreSQL

SQL Server

SQLite

Generic ODBC
 1
Access
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ACCESS
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ACCESS › WINDOWS

Before proceeding with this tutorial check the architecture of your PHP within the phpinfo (). Accessing the phpinfo of your scriptcase, for example
http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase/info.php, you will find the PHP architecture.

Architecture x86 = 32 bits

Architecture x64 = 64 bits

If you are using Scriptcase’s automatic installer the PHP architecture will be the same as the installer you downloaded.

MS Access ODBC
Setting up Access connection via ODBC on Windows

Requirements
The Access Database (.mdb or .accdb files) needs to be stored on the same server as ScriptCase.

Have one or more tables created.

Microsoft Microsoft 2010 Access Database Engine Driver installed.

Enabling the extension

First we must download the 2010 Access Database Engine according to the architecture of your PHP.
First we must download the 2010 Access Database Engine according to the architecture of your PHP.

To download the 64-bit engine click here

To download the 32-bit engine click here

At the end of the download, follow the Access Database Engine installation wizard.

Installing the Access Database Engine.

Installing the Access Database Engine.

 2

Installing the Access Database Engine.

Installing the Access Database Engine.

Creating a Data Source (ODBC)

Go to Control Panel> Systems and Security> Administrative Tools> ODBC Data Sources (32 or 64 bits), according to your PHP architecture.
If you have a data source configured, proceed to Creating a Connection in ScriptCase .

Accessing and Configuring the ODBC Data Source.

Select the System DNS tab and click Add.

Accessing and Configuring the ODBC Data Source.

 3
Choose one of the available drivers, you can choose from the following drivers:
Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb)

Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb, *.accdb)

Select the driver according to the file extension created by your Access database.

ODBC driver available.

After selecting the driver, the following screen will be displayed:

Two fields are required for data source configuration:
Data Source Name : Name of the data source that will be used when creating the connection in Scriptcase;

Database: Path pointing where the database is stored;

Creating the Data Source.

After entering the Data Source Name, click “Select” to select the database that will be used.

Select Database.

Drivers: List of computer drives (HD Partition) that will have your folders listed in Directories;

Directories: Computer Drives folder list (HD Partition) selected under Drivers;

Database Name : List of files in the folder selected in Directories (Files listed according to their extensions);

List Files of Type : Extension of the files listed in Database Name;

After selecting the database, click OK to complete the configuration.

Creating the Data Source.

Returning to the ODBC Data Source Administrator screen you can view the already configured connections.
 4

Creating the Data Source.

MS Access ADO
Setting up ADO Access in Windows

Requirements
The Access Database (.mdb or .accdb files) needs to be stored on the same server as ScriptCase.

Have one or more tables created.

Microsoft Microsoft 2010 Access Database Driver installed.

Installing the 2010 Access Database Engine

First we must download the 2010 Access Database Engine according to the architecture of your PHP.
To download the 64-bit engine click here

To download the 32-bit engine click here

At the end of the download, follow the Access Database Engine installation wizard.

Installing the Access Database Engine.

Installing the Access Database Engine.

 5

Installing the Access Database Engine.

Installing the Access Database Engine.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “MS Access” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 6

Connecting with Windows

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Defines the driver with ODBC.

ODBC Name : On the option ODBC Name, inform the data source (ODBC) name that was created in the Windows Control Panel.

Username : Inform the username for Windows database (Just in case you are in fact using one).

Password : Inform the password for Windows database (Just in case you are in fact using one).

Test Connection : Displays the connection status (Success or Failed).

Finalize: Save connection.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Windows database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

 7
Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
IBM DB2
HOME › CONNECTIONS › IBM DB2
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › IBM DB2 › WINDOWS

The automatic installation already comes with the IBM DB2 preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the IBM DB2 extension in PHP.

DB2
Setting up DB2 on Windows

Pre-Requirements
Have the database installed and setup on a server or locally.

Have at least one table created.

Have the Instant Client installed on the same machine as ScriptCase.

If all the requirements are met, the DB2 extension will be enabled, in this case you can proceed to Creating a Connection with Scriptcase.

In case it’s not enabled, follow the steps below to enable the DB2 extension:

Enabling the Extension

Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits, x64 ou x86 bits
DsDriver Windows ( x86 )

DsDriver Windows ( x64 )

After downloading, follow the wizard of the installation and click to advance to maintain the default values of the installer.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Accept the terms and advance with the installation.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

 2
Click on Advance, to maintain the default values of the installer

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Install, to start the installation procedure

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Finish, to Finish the installation.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

DB2 Native ODBC

Setting up DB2 Native ODBC on Windows

Pre-Requirements
 3
Have the database installed and setup on a server or locally.

Have at least one table created.

Have the Instant Client installed on the same machine as ScriptCase.

If all the requirements are met, the DB2 extension will be enabled, in this case you can proceed to Creating a Connection with Scriptcase.

In case it’s not enabled, follow the steps below to enable the DB2 extension:

Enabling the Extension

Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits, x64 ou x86 bits
DsDriver Windows ( x86 )

DsDriver Windows ( x64 )

After downloading, follow the wizard of the installation and click to advance to maintain the default values of the installer.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Accept the terms and advance with the installation.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Advance, to maintain the default values of the installer

 4

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Install, to start the installation procedure

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Finish, to Finish the installation.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

DB2 Generic ODBC

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC on Windows

Pre-Requirements
Have the database installed and setup on a server or locally.
 5
Have at least one table created.

Have the Instant Client installed on the same machine as ScriptCase.

If all the requirements are met, the DB2 extension will be enabled, in this case you can proceed to Creating a Connection with Scriptcase.

In case it’s not enabled, follow the steps below to enable the DB2 extension:

Enabling the Extension

Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits, x64 ou x86 bits
DsDriver Windows ( x86 )

DsDriver Windows ( x64 )

After downloading, follow the wizard of the installation and click to advance to maintain the default values of the installer.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Accept the terms and advance with the installation.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Advance, to maintain the default values of the installer

 6

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Install, to start the installation procedure

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Finish, to Finish the installation.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower on Windows

Pre-Requirements
Have the database installed and setup on a server or locally.
 7
Have at least one table created.

Have the Instant Client installed on the same machine as ScriptCase.

If all the requirements are met, the DB2 extension will be enabled, in this case you can proceed to Creating a Connection with Scriptcase.

In case it’s not enabled, follow the steps below to enable the DB2 extension:

Enabling the Extension

Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits, x64 ou x86 bits
DsDriver Windows ( x86 )

DsDriver Windows ( x64 )

After downloading, follow the wizard of the installation and click to advance to maintain the default values of the installer.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Accept the terms and advance with the installation.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Advance, to maintain the default values of the installer

 8

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Install, to start the installation procedure

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Click on Finish, to Finish the installation.

Setting up DB2 DsDriver.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”
 9
Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “DB2” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with

Windows database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: DB2 Generic ODBC, DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or lower, DB2, DB2 Native ODBC.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located.

Database Name : Inform name of the database.

Schema : You can inform the Schema (Optional), in case you want to use the tables that are part of a Schema.

Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for the Windows database

 10
autocommit - Activates or deactivates the functionality of the auto commit.

i5_lib - A value of characters that indicates the default library that’ll be used to resolve the un qualified file references. This isn’t valid if the the connection using the system nomination.

i5_naming - Activate or deactivate the system nomination mode of the DB2 UDB CLI iSeries. The files are qualified when using dash (/) delimiter. Unqualified files are resolved using the list of
libraries to work.

i5_commit - Select the desired option treating the date of the IBM DB2.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › IBM DB2 › LINUX

The automatic installation already comes with the IBM DB2 preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the IBM DB2 extension in PHP.

DB2
Setting up DB2 on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the IBM DB2 preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Install the dependencies below:

UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install ksh - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install pam
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
- sudo wget ftp://195.220.108.108/linux/centos/6.7/os/i386/Packages/ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install nano
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

DsDriver Linux ( x86 )

DsDriver Linux ( x64 )

Installing DsDriver IBM DB2

Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo cp sudo cp x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo cp x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/Db2/x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/x64/db2/x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz
sudo ksh /opt/IBM/Db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver sudo ksh /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver
sudo source /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/db2profile
Restart the Apache Server: sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart

DB2 Native ODBC

Setting up DB2 Native ODBC on Linux

The automatic installation already comes with the IBM DB2 preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Install the dependencies below:

UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install ksh - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install pam
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
- sudo wget ftp://195.220.108.108/linux/centos/6.7/os/i386/Packages/ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
 2
UBUNTU\DEBIAN - sudo yum install nano
CENTOS\RHEL
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

DsDriver Linux ( x86 )

DsDriver Linux ( x64 )

Installing DsDriver IBM DB2

Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo cp sudo cp x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo cp x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/Db2/x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/x64/db2/x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz
sudo ksh /opt/IBM/Db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver sudo ksh /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver
sudo source /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/db2profile
Restart the Apache Server: sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart

DB2 Generic ODBC

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC on Linux

The automatic installation already comes with the IBM DB2 preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Install the dependencies below:

UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install ksh - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install pam
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
- sudo wget ftp://195.220.108.108/linux/centos/6.7/os/i386/Packages/ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install nano
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

DsDriver Linux ( x86 )

DsDriver Linux ( x64 )

Installing DsDriver IBM DB2

Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo cp sudo cp x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo cp x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/Db2/x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/x64/db2/x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz
sudo ksh /opt/IBM/Db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver sudo ksh /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver
sudo source /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/db2profile
Restart the Apache Server: sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart

DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the IBM DB2 preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Install the dependencies below:

UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
 3
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib CENTOS\RHEL
UBUNTU\DEBIAN - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install ksh - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install pam
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
- sudo wget ftp://195.220.108.108/linux/centos/6.7/os/i386/Packages/ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install nano
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

DsDriver Linux ( x86 )

DsDriver Linux ( x64 )

Installing DsDriver IBM DB2

Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo cp sudo cp x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo cp x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/Db2/x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/x64/db2/x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz
sudo ksh /opt/IBM/Db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver sudo ksh /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver
sudo source /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/db2profile
Restart the Apache Server: sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “DB2” connection

Selecting a Linux

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 4

Connecting with Linux

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: DB2 Generic ODBC, DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or lower, DB2, DB2 Native ODBC.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Linux database is located.

Database Name : Inform name of the database.

Schema : You can inform the Schema (Optional), in case you want to use the tables that are part of a Schema.

Username : Inform the user to access the Linux database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Linux database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for the Linux database

autocommit - Activates or deactivates the functionality of the auto commit.

i5_lib - A value of characters that indicates the default library that’ll be used to resolve the un qualified file references. This isn’t valid if the the connection using the system nomination.

i5_naming - Activate or deactivate the system nomination mode of the DB2 UDB CLI iSeries. The files are qualified when using dash (/) delimiter. Unqualified files are resolved using the list of
libraries to work.

i5_commit - Select the desired option treating the date of the IBM DB2.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Linux

database
 5
Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Firebird
HOME › CONNECTIONS › FIREBIRD
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › FIREBIRD › WINDOWS

The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the FireBird extension in PHP.

Firebird
Setting up FireBird on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “FireBird” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Windows

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: FireBird.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located.

Database Name : Inform name of the database.

 2
Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Windows database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › FIREBIRD › LINUX

The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the FireBird extension in PHP.

Firebird
Setting up FireBird on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “FireBird” connection

Selecting a Linux

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Linux

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: FireBird.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Linux database is located.

Database Name : Inform name of the database.

 2
Username : Inform the user to access the Linux database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Linux database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Linux database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Linux

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › FIREBIRD › MAC OS X

The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the FireBird extension in PHP.

Firebird
Setting up FireBird on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Pre-Requirements
Download the installation: Client FireBird

Install the client.

Restart the Apache Server.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “FireBird” connection

Selecting a Mac OS X

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Mac OS X

 2
database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: FireBird.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Mac OS X database is located.

Database Name : Inform name of the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Mac OS X database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Mac OS X database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Mac OS X database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Mac OS X

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Informix
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INFORMIX
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INFORMIX › WINDOWS

Currently ScriptCase offers the connection to the Informix through the SDK. The Informix extension comes disabled in the installer.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the Informix extension in PHP.

Informix PDO
Setting up Informix on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO Informix preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

ClienteSDK Windows ( x86 )

ClienteSDK Windows ( x64 )

Installing ClienteSDK Informix

Unzip the file into any folder. e.g.: client informix

Unzipping the file.

Access the CMD from your windows by searching for a command prompt in Windows Search or by pricing ctrl + r and typing cmd in the search.

Accessing Windows Command Prompt.

When starting the CMD , access the folder where the file was saved after the download using the cd command and informing the path. Example:
 2
Accessing the client folder.

Then run the .exe file with the -i and GUI parameters. Example: installclientsdk.exe -i GUI__

Running the installer.

Follow the client installation wizard, clicking next, to maintain the default installation values. Pay attention to the Security Features step.

Installation Wizard.

At this point you can choose whether or not to use a password to access the Informix Administration Application (OTA)

OTA Definition.

Set your login and password, if you have checked the OAT password protection

OTA password Definition.

Select NO and proceed with the installation normally.

 3

Installation Wizard.

Proceed with the installation by clicking Done and wait for the process to end.

Finish the Installation.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “Informix” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 4

Connecting with

Windows database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Informix PDO.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located.

Database Name : Inform name of the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Windows database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

 5
Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INFORMIX › LINUX

Currently ScriptCase offers the connection to the Informix through the SDK. The Informix extension comes disabled in the installer.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the Informix extension in PHP.

Informix PDO
Setting up Informix on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO Informix preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Install the dependencies below:

UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install ksh - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install pam
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
- sudo wget ftp://195.220.108.108/linux/centos/6.7/os/i386/Packages/ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install nano
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

ClienteSDK Linux ( x86 )

ClienteSDK Linux ( x64 )

Installing ClienteSDK Informix

Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo tar -xf x86_clientsdk.3.70.UC8DE.LINUX.tar sudo tar -xf x64_clientsdk.4.10.FC6DE.LINUX.tar
Nota: O diretório de instalação do client Informix deve ser: /opt/IBM/ifx Nota: O diretório de instalação do client Informix deve ser: /opt/IBM/x64/informix
sudo ./installclientsdk sudo ./installclientsdk
Selecione 1 para aceitar os termos. Selecione 1 para aceitar os termos.
Selecione as opções: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17 Selecione as opções: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17
Prossiga com a instalação. Prossiga com a instalação.
Restart the Apache Server:

sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “Informix” connection
 2

Selecting a Linux

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Linux

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Informix PDO.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Linux database is located.

Database Name : Inform name of the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Linux database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Linux database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Linux database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:
 3

Filtering the Linux

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INFORMIX › MAC OS X

Currently ScriptCase offers the connection to the Informix through the SDK. The Informix extension comes disabled in the installer.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the Informix extension in PHP.

Informix PDO
Setting up Informix on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO Informix preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Download the instant client

ClienteSDK Mac OS X

Extract the .tar file

Do the installation through the terminal, accessing the extracted folder and executing the command below:
sudo ./installclientsdk

Install in the default directory ( /Applications/IBM/informix )

Choose options from 1 to 17

Restart the web server.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “Informix” connection

Selecting a Mac OS X

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with Mac OS

X database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Informix PDO.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Mac OS X database is located.

Database Name : Inform name of the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Mac OS X database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Mac OS X database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Mac OS X database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Mac OS X

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

 3
Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Interbase
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INTERBASE
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INTERBASE › WINDOWS

The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the InterBase extension in PHP.

InterBase 6.5 or Higher

Setting up InterBase 6 or Higher on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

InterBase
Setting up InterBase on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “InterBase” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with

Windows database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Interbase 6.5 or Higher.

IP:PATH : Inform the IP and path of the server to the location of the Windows database
PATH :path of the Windows database

Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Windows database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

 3
Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INTERBASE › LINUX

The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the InterBase extension in PHP.

InterBase 6.5 or Higher

Setting up InterBase 6 or Higher on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

InterBase
Setting up InterBase on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “InterBase” connection

Selecting a Linux

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with Linux

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Interbase 6.5 or Higher.

IP:PATH : Inform the IP and path of the server to the location of the Linux database
PATH :path of the Linux database

Username : Inform the user to access the Linux database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Linux database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Linux database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Linux

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

 3
Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › INTERBASE › MAC OS X

The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the InterBase extension in PHP.

InterBase 6.5 or Higher

Setting up InterBase 6 or Higher on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the Interbase preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Pre-Requirements
Download the installation: Client InterBase

Restart the Apache Server:

/Applications/NetMake/v9/components/xamppfiles/xampp restart

InterBase
Setting up InterBase on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Pre-Requirements
Download the installation: Client InterBase

Restart the Apache Server:

/Applications/NetMake/v9/components/xamppfiles/xampp restart

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “InterBase” connection

Selecting a Mac OS X

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with Mac OS

X database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Interbase 6.5 or Higher.

IP:PATH : Inform the IP and path of the server to the location of the Mac OS X database
PATH :path of the Mac OS X database

Username : Inform the user to access the Mac OS X database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Mac OS X database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Mac OS X database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Mac OS X

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

 3
Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
MySQL
HOME › CONNECTIONS › MYSQL
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › MYSQL › WINDOWS

The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the MySQL extension in PHP.

MySQL PDO
Setting up MySQL PDO on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

MySQLi
Setting up MySQLi on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “MySQL” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with

Windows database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: MySQL PDO.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located.

Port : Define the port used for the connection. By default it’s 3306.

Database Name : Select the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

Setting up security with

Windows

Use SSL : Activates or deactivates the use of secure connections with Windows.

Client Key : Path to the client’s private identification key in the format PEM.

Client Certificate : Path to the client’s public certificate key.

AC Path : Path to the directory that contains the Authority Certification (AC) in the format PEM, if used, it should specify the same certificate used by the server.

AC Certificate : Path to the Authority Certificate (AC) in the format PEM. This option, if used, should specify the same certificate as the server.

Specific Chipper : A list of permitted numbers to use with the cryptography of the connection. If one of the numbers isn’t supported, the SSL connection won’t work.

For more details, consult: Setting up MySQL to use secure connections

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

 3

Advanced setup for the

Windows database

client_encoding : Database Encoding.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › MYSQL › LINUX

The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the MySQL extension in PHP.

MySQL PDO
Setting up MySQL PDO on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

MySQLi
Setting up MySQLi on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “MySQL” connection

Selecting a Linux

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with Linux

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: MySQL PDO.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Linux database is located.

Port : Define the port used for the connection. By default it’s 3306.

Database Name : Select the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Linux database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Linux database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

Setting up security with

Linux

Use SSL : Activates or deactivates the use of secure connections with Linux.

Client Key : Path to the client’s private identification key in the format PEM.

Client Certificate : Path to the client’s public certificate key.

AC Path : Path to the directory that contains the Authority Certification (AC) in the format PEM, if used, it should specify the same certificate used by the server.

AC Certificate : Path to the Authority Certificate (AC) in the format PEM. This option, if used, should specify the same certificate as the server.

Specific Chipper : A list of permitted numbers to use with the cryptography of the connection. If one of the numbers isn’t supported, the SSL connection won’t work.

For more details, consult: Setting up MySQL to use secure connections

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

 3

Advanced setup for the

Linux database

client_encoding : Database Encoding.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Linux

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › WINDOWS

The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the MySQL extension in PHP.

MySQL PDO
Setting up MySQL PDO on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

MySQLi
Setting up MySQLi on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “MySQL” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with

Windows database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: MySQL PDO.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located.

Port : Define the port used for the connection. By default it’s 3306.

Database Name : Select the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

Setting up security with

Windows

Use SSL : Activates or deactivates the use of secure connections with Windows.

Client Key : Path to the client’s private identification key in the format PEM.

Client Certificate : Path to the client’s public certificate key.

AC Path : Path to the directory that contains the Authority Certification (AC) in the format PEM, if used, it should specify the same certificate used by the server.

AC Certificate : Path to the Authority Certificate (AC) in the format PEM. This option, if used, should specify the same certificate as the server.

Specific Chipper : A list of permitted numbers to use with the cryptography of the connection. If one of the numbers isn’t supported, the SSL connection won’t work.

For more details, consult: Setting up MySQL to use secure connections

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

 3

Advanced setup for the

Windows database

client_encoding : Database Encoding.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Oracle
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ORACLE
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ORACLE › WINDOWS

The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the Oracle deve ser habilitada no PHP.

Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher

Setting up Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

*Enter Oracle’s website (www.oracle.com) and download Instant Client Basic according to the architecture of your operating system (x64 or x86)

Note: PHP 7.0 is only compatible with instant client 11 or higher

Download Instant Client 12.

Extract the instant client basic package from your computer (e.g.: C:\instantclient_12_1).

We should put in the folder PHP(NetMake/v9/components/php/) the following DLLs:

Copy the dll oraociei12.dll (it is inside the folder of the instant client (e.g.: C: \ instantclient_12_1)).

Add to the system PATH the path of this folder:

Go to Control Panel> System> Advanced System Settings.

On the Advanced tab> Click Environment Variables. Advanced Settings.

 2

Add the path as shown below: Adding client path.

Restart the web server

Oracle ODBC
Setting up Oracle ODBC on Windows

The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

*Enter Oracle’s website (www.oracle.com) and download Instant Client Basic according to the architecture of your operating system (x64 or x86)

Note: PHP 7.0 is only compatible with instant client 11 or higher

Download Instant Client 12.

Extract the instant client basic package from your computer (e.g.: C:\instantclient_12_1).

Extract the instant client odbc package inside the instant client basic folder ( e.g.: C:\instantclient_12_1).

We should put in the folder PHP(NetMake/v9/components/php/) the following DLLs:

Copy the dll oraociei12.dll (it is inside the folder of the instant client (e.g.: C: \ instantclient_12_1)).

Add to the system PATH the path of this folder:

Go to Control Panel> System> Advanced System Settings.
 3

On the Advanced tab> Click Environment Variables. Advanced Settings.

Add the path as shown below: Adding client path.

Restart the web server

Oracle 8
Setting up Oracle 8 on Windows

The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

*Enter Oracle’s website (www.oracle.com) and download Instant Client Basic according to the architecture of your operating system (x64 or x86)

Note: PHP 7.0 is only compatible with instant client 11 or higher

Download Instant Client 12.

 4
Extract the instant client basic package from your computer (e.g.: C:\instantclient_12_1).

We should put in the folder PHP(NetMake/v9/components/php/) the following DLLs:

Copy the dll oraociei12.dll (it is inside the folder of the instant client (e.g.: C: \ instantclient_12_1)).

Add to the system PATH the path of this folder:

Go to Control Panel> System> Advanced System Settings.

On the Advanced tab> Click Environment Variables. Advanced Settings.

Add the path as shown below: Adding client path.

Restart the web server

Oracle 7 or Lower
Setting up Oracle 7 or Lower on Windows

The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

*Enter Oracle’s website (www.oracle.com) and download Instant Client Basic according to the architecture of your operating system (x64 or x86)

Note: PHP 7.0 is only compatible with instant client 11 or higher

 5

Download Instant Client 12.

Extract the instant client basic package from your computer (e.g.: C:\instantclient_12_1).

We should put in the folder PHP(NetMake/v9/components/php/) the following DLLs:

Copy the dll oraociei12.dll (it is inside the folder of the instant client (e.g.: C: \ instantclient_12_1)).

Add to the system PATH the path of this folder:

Go to Control Panel> System> Advanced System Settings.

On the Advanced tab> Click Environment Variables. Advanced Settings.

Add the path as shown below: Adding client path.

Restart the web server

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase
 6
After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “Oracle” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Windows

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher.

TSNAME : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located with the Service Name created in the Windows installation.

Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

 7

Advanced setup for the

Windows database

client_encoding : Database Encoding.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ORACLE › LINUX

The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the Oracle deve ser habilitada no PHP.

Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher

Setting up Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Install the dependencies below:

UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install pam
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

Client basic Linux ( x86 )

Client devel Linux ( x86 )

Client basic Linux ( x64 )

Client devel Linux ( x64 )

Installing Oracle Client

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
CENTOS\RHEL
Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
Restart the Apache Server:

sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart

Oracle ODBC
Setting up Oracle ODBC on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Install the dependencies below:

UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install libstdc++
 2
UBUNTU\DEBIAN - sudo yum install pam
CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

Client basic Linux ( x86 )

Client devel Linux ( x86 )

Client devel Linux ( x86 )

Client basic Linux ( x64 )

Client devel Linux ( x64 )

Client devel Linux ( x64 )

Installing Oracle Client

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
CENTOS\RHEL
Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
Restart the Apache Server:

sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart

Oracle 8
Setting up Oracle 8 on Linux

The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Install the dependencies below:

UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install pam
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

Client basic Linux ( x86 )

Client devel Linux ( x86 )

Client basic Linux ( x64 )

Client devel Linux ( x64 )

Installing Oracle Client

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
CENTOS\RHEL
 3
Architecture x86
CENTOS\RHEL Architecture x64
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
Restart the Apache Server:

sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart

Oracle 7 or Lower
Setting up Oracle 7 or Lower on Linux

The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Install the dependencies below:

UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install pam
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits

Client basic Linux ( x86 )

Client devel Linux ( x86 )

Client basic Linux ( x64 )

Client devel Linux ( x64 )

Installing Oracle Client

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
CENTOS\RHEL
Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
Restart the Apache Server:

sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “Oracle” connection
 4

Selecting a Linux

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Linux

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher.

TSNAME : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Linux database is located with the Service Name created in the Linux installation.

Username : Inform the user to access the Linux database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Linux database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for the

Linux database

client_encoding : Database Encoding.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

 5
Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Linux

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ORACLE › MAC OS X

The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the Oracle deve ser habilitada no PHP.

Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher

Setting up Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Download the Oracle Instant Client

Client Oracle 12 Mac OS X

Create the folder /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/

Extract all content from the downloaded file into /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/

Restart the web server.

Oracle ODBC
Setting up Oracle ODBC on MAC

The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Download the Oracle Instant Client

Client Oracle 12 Mac OS X

Create the folder /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/

Extract all content from the downloaded file into /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/

Restart the web server.

Oracle 8
Setting up Oracle 8 on MAC

The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Download the Oracle Instant Client

Client Oracle 12 Mac OS X

Create the folder /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/

Extract all content from the downloaded file into /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/

Restart the web server.

Oracle 7 or Lower
Setting up Oracle 7 or Lower on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

Download the Oracle Instant Client

Client Oracle 12 Mac OS X

Create the folder /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/

Extract all content from the downloaded file into /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/

Restart the web server.

 2
Creating a Connection with ScriptCase
Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “Oracle” connection

Selecting a Mac OS X

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Mac OS X

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher.

TSNAME : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Mac OS X database is located with the Service Name created in the Mac OS X installation.

Username : Inform the user to access the Mac OS X database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Mac OS X database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

 3

Advanced setup for the

Mac OS X database

client_encoding : Database Encoding.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Mac OS X

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
PostgreSQL
HOME › CONNECTIONS › POSTGRESQL
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › POSTGRESQL › WINDOWS

The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the PostgreSQL extension in PHP.

PostgreSQL 7 or Higher
Setting up PostgreSQL 7 or Higher on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

PostgreSQL PDO
Setting up PostgreSQL PDO on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “PostgreSQL” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with

Windows database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: PostgreSQL PDO.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located.

Port : Define the port used for the connection. By default it’s 5432.

Database Name : Select the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for the

Windows database

client_encoding : Database Encoding.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:
 3

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › POSTGRESQL › LINUX

The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the PostgreSQL extension in PHP.

PostgreSQL 7 or Higher
Setting up PostgreSQL 7 or Higher on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

PostgreSQL PDO
Setting up PostgreSQL PDO on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “PostgreSQL” connection

Selecting a Linux

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with Linux

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: PostgreSQL PDO.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Linux database is located.

Port : Define the port used for the connection. By default it’s 5432.

Database Name : Select the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Linux database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Linux database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for the

Linux database

client_encoding : Database Encoding.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:
 3

Filtering the Linux

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › POSTGRESQL › MAC OS X

The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the PostgreSQL extension in PHP.

PostgreSQL 7 or Higher
Setting up PostgreSQL 7 or Higher on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

PostgreSQL PDO
Setting up PostgreSQL PDO on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “PostgreSQL” connection

Selecting a Mac OS X

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with Mac OS

X database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: PostgreSQL PDO.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Mac OS X database is located.

Port : Define the port used for the connection. By default it’s 5432.

Database Name : Select the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Mac OS X database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Mac OS X database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for the

Mac OS X database

client_encoding : Database Encoding.

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:
 3

Filtering the Mac OS X

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
MSSQL Server
HOME › CONNECTIONS › MSSQL SERVER
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQL SERVER › WINDOWS

If you are using a Microsoft Azure server, see more configuration details click here.

MSSQL Server Native SRV

Setting up MSSQL Server Native SRV on Windows

The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server preconfigured, only needing to install the Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server so that you can do the
connection.

Supported Operating Systems: Windows Server (from the 2008 SP2 version) and Windows (from the 7 SP1 version).

Installing Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server

Download the Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server according to the operating system architecture:

ODBC Driver 11 64 bits

ODBC Driver 11 32 bits

After downloading the file, run the installer and follow the steps below:

Installation wizard.

Accept the terms of the license agreement and click next.

Installation wizard.

In this option leave the option “Client components” checked.

Check the “ODBC Driver for SQL Server SDK” option, because the components we are going to need are also in this option.
 2

Installation wizard.

Click Install to begin the client installation.

Installation wizard.

The features of the program you selected are being installed.

Installation wizard.

Click Finish to exit.

Installation wizard.
 3
MSSQL Server Native SRV PDO
Setting up MSSQL Server Native SRV on Windows

The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server preconfigured, only needing to install the Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server so that you can do the
connection.

Supported Operating Systems: Windows Server (from the 2008 SP2 version) and Windows (from the 7 SP1 version).

Installing Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server

Download the Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server according to the operating system architecture:

ODBC Driver 11 64 bits

ODBC Driver 11 32 bits

After downloading the file, run the installer and follow the steps below:

Installation wizard.

Accept the terms of the license agreement and click next.

Installation wizard.

In this option leave the option “Client components” checked.

Check the “ODBC Driver for SQL Server SDK” option, because the components we are going to need are also in this option.

Installation wizard.
 4
Click Install to begin the client installation.

Installation wizard.

The features of the program you selected are being installed.

Installation wizard.

Click Finish to exit.

Installation wizard.

MSSQL Server ODBC

Setting up MSSQL Server ODBC on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server preconfigured, only needing to install the Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server so that you can do the
connection.

Supported Operating Systems: Windows Server (from the 2008 SP2 version) and Windows (from the 7 SP1 version).

Installing Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server

Download the Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server according to the operating system architecture:

ODBC Driver 11 64 bits

ODBC Driver 11 32 bits

After downloading the file, run the installer and follow the steps below:
 5

Installation wizard.

Accept the terms of the license agreement and click next.

Installation wizard.

In this option leave the option “Client components” checked.

Check the “ODBC Driver for SQL Server SDK” option, because the components we are going to need are also in this option.

Installation wizard.

Click Install to begin the client installation.

Installation wizard.
 6
The features of the program you selected are being installed.

Installation wizard.

Click Finish to exit.

Installation wizard.

Configurando fonte de dados

To connect to MS SQL Server ODBC you will need to create a system data source on the same Scriptcase server.

To do so, go to: Control Panel > System and Security > Administrative Tools> ODBC Data Sources

After creating the system data source, you just need to create an MS SQL Server ODBC connection in the Scriptcase.

MSSQL Server ADO

Setting up MSSQL Server ADO on Windows
Important: This connection causes problems in nchar and nvarchar data recovery with SQL Server databases from the 2008 release. Therefore, we do not recommend using
this connection for the most up-to-date SQL Server databases.

The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server ADO driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “MSSQL Server” connection
 7

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with

Windows database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Native SRV PDO, Native SRV or ODBC.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP\INSTANCE of the server where the Windows database is located.

Database Name : Select the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Windows database

 8
Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Unicode Converter - Select if there’s going to be conversion of characters to Unicode.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQL SERVER › LINUX

The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the MSSQL Server extension in PHP.

If you are using a Microsoft Azure server, see more configuration details at: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/sql-database/sql-database-get-started-portal

PDO DBLIB
Configurando DBLIB Server no Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO BDLIB preconfigured, only needing to install the FreeTDS and unixODBC so that you can do the connection.

Access the shell(terminal) with root and install the packages below:

Distribution: Debian

sudo apt-get install unixODBC unixODBC-dev gcc nano wget make

Distribution: Ubuntu

sudo apt-get install unixodbc unixodbc-dev gcc nano wget make

Distribution: RHEL\CentOS

sudo yum install unixODBC unixODBC-devel gcc nano wget make

Distribution: Suse\OpenSuse

sudo zypper install unixODBC unixODBC-devel gcc nano wget make

Download FreeTDS:

wget http://cdn1.netmake.com.br/download/freetds-0.95.95.tar.gz

Descompact the FreeTDS:

tar -zxf freetds-0.95.95.tar.gz

Enter in the FreeTDS folder:

cd freetds-0.95.95

Run the command below to compile and install the FreeTDS :

sudo ./configure --with-tdsver=7.4 --with-unixodbc=/usr --disable-libiconv --disable-static --disable-threadsafe --enable-msdblib --disable-sspi --with-gnu-ld --enable-sybase-compat && make
&& make install

Edit the FreeTDS configuration file:

Distribution: Debian\Ubuntu
sudo nano /usr/local/etc/freetds.conf

Distribution: RHEL\CentOS
sudo nano /usr/local/freetds/freetds.conf

Distribution: Suse\OpenSuse
sudo nano /usr/local/freetds/freetds.conf

Sample settings:

[MSSQLServer] host = 192.168.254.171 instance = SQLEXPRESS port = 1433 tds version = 7.0

You need to use the name “MSSQLServer” ( it’s the DNS from FreeTDS ) in the option “Server/Host (Name or IP)” to do the connection with your SQLServer database.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”
 2
Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “MSSQL Server” connection

Selecting a Linux

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Linux

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Native SRV PDO, Native SRV or ODBC.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP\INSTANCE of the server where the Linux database is located.

Database Name : Select the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Linux database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Linux database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

 3

Advanced setup for

the Linux database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Unicode Converter - Select if there’s going to be conversion of characters to Unicode.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Linux

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQL SERVER › MAC OS X

The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the MSSQL Server extension in PHP.

If you are using a Microsoft Azure server, see more configuration details at: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/sql-database/sql-database-get-started-portal

PDO DBLIB
Setting up PDO DBLIB on Mac OS X
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO DBLIB driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “MSSQL Server” connection

Selecting a Mac OS X

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Mac OS

X database
 2
Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Native SRV PDO, Native SRV or ODBC.

Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP\INSTANCE of the server where the Mac OS X database is located.

Database Name : Select the database.

Username : Inform the user to access the Mac OS X database.

Password : Inform the password to access the Mac OS X database.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Mac OS X database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Unicode Converter - Select if there’s going to be conversion of characters to Unicode.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Mac OS X

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
SQLite
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQLITE
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQLITE › WINDOWS

The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the SQLite extension in PHP.

SQLite PDO
Setting up SQLite on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite driver only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “SQLite” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with

Windows database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: SQLite PDO.

PATH : Inform the complete path to the SQLite file.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.
 2
For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Windows database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQLITE › LINUX

The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the SQLite extension in PHP.

SQLite PDO
Setting up SQLite on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “SQLite” connection

Selecting a Linux

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Linux

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: SQLite PDO.

PATH : Inform the complete path to the SQLite file.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.
 2
For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Linux database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Linux

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › SQLITE › MAC OS X

The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the SQLite extension in PHP.

SQLite PDO
Setting up SQLite on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “SQLite” connection

Selecting a Mac OS X

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Mac

OS X database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: SQLite PDO.

PATH : Inform the complete path to the SQLite file.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.
 2
For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Mac OS X database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Mac OS X

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
ODBC
HOME › CONNECTIONS › ODBC
 1
Windows
HOME › CONNECTIONS › GENERIC ODBC › WINDOWS

The ODBC Generic connection e normally used to create connections with the databases: dBase (.dbf), Progress, Dataflex, Paradox, Visual FoxPro, etc.

You only need to have the ODBC driver corresponding with the database installed.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the ODBC extension in PHP.

Generic ODBC
Setting up ODBC on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the ODBC only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “ODBC” connection

Selecting a Windows

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with

Windows database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Select the Generic ODBC.

 2
Specific driver : Defined as Generic ODBC, allows you to connect to specific Data Sources: DBF, FileMaker, Progress or Visual FoxPro.

ODBC Name : On this option, you’ll inform the name of the Data Source that you’ve created.

Username : Inform the username of the Windows database, only if there are any.

Password : Inform the password of the Windows database, only if there are any.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Windows database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Windows

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Linux
HOME › CONNECTIONS › GENERIC ODBC › LINUX

The ODBC Generic connection e normally used to create connections with the databases: dBase (.dbf), Progress, Dataflex, Paradox, Visual FoxPro, etc.

You only need to have the ODBC driver corresponding with the database installed.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the ODBC extension in PHP.

Generic ODBC
Setting up ODBC on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the ODBC only needing to install the UnixODBC driver so that you can do the connection.

UBUNTU\DEBIAN x86_64 CENTOS\RHEL x86_64

- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update

- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install unixODBC

UBUNTU\DEBIAN i386 ( x86 ) CENTOS\RHEL i686 ( x86 )

- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update

- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install unixODBC

Restart the Apache Server:

sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc81 restart

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “ODBC” connection

Selecting a Linux

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:
 2

Connecting with Linux

database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Select the Generic ODBC.

Specific driver : Defined as Generic ODBC, allows you to connect to specific Data Sources: DBF, FileMaker, Progress or Visual FoxPro.

ODBC Name : On this option, you’ll inform the name of the Data Source that you’ve created.

Username : Inform the username of the Linux database, only if there are any.

Password : Inform the password of the Linux database, only if there are any.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Linux database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Linux

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

 3
Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
Mac OS X
HOME › CONNECTIONS › GENERIC ODBC › MAC OS X

The ODBC Generic connection e normally used to create connections with the databases: dBase (.dbf), Progress, Dataflex, Paradox, Visual FoxPro, etc.

If you’re using your own environment, preconfigured, you’ll need to enable the ODBC extension in PHP.

Generic ODBC
Settin gup ODBC on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the ODBC driver, only needing to create the data source to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

The path of odbc.ini is: /Applications/Scriptcase/components/apache/bin/unixODBC/etc/

Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase

After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access “Database > New Connection”

Creating a new connection

After that, you’ll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a “ODBC” connection

Selecting a Mac OS X

database connection

New connection : You’ll place the information of the connection to your database here:

Connecting with Mac OS

X database

Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver : Select the Generic ODBC.

 2
Specific driver : Defined as Generic ODBC, allows you to connect to specific Data Sources: DBF, FileMaker, Progress or Visual FoxPro.

ODBC Name : On this option, you’ll inform the name of the Data Source that you’ve created.

Username : Inform the username of the Mac OS X database, only if there are any.

Password : Inform the password of the Mac OS X database, only if there are any.

Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.

For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:

Advanced setup for

the Mac OS X database

Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.

Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that don’t close when finishing a script.

Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.

Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:

Filtering the Mac OS X

database

Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.

Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.

System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.

Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.

Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.

Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owner’s setup.
 1
General View
HOME › APPLICATIONS

ScriptCase offers various applications that allows the developer to create a complete system, still offers the integration of the applications with the external libraries giving more
potential for the tool on developing the systems.

Se below the types of applications available.

Grid – An application that displayed data, this application has the behavior of a report where you can export to PDF, XLS, XML and other formats.

Procedure – Similar to the Grid, this application is only available for a few databases (MSSQL Server, Oracle and Db2) when selecting a connection, in case there’s a procedure that returns an
information, this application will be displayed.

Form - An application that allows to insert and update data, there are 4 types of orientations.
Single Record – Manipulate only 1 record per page.

Multiple Records – Manipulate various records per page where the interaction can be done on various lines at the same time.

Editable Grid – Various records per page, where each interaction with the records needs to be done individually and all the lines are enabled for modifications.

Editable Grid View - Various records per page, where each interaction with the records needs to be done individually and the lines are disabled for modifications, to edit the records you
need to click on the edit icon next to the record line you want to edit.

Tabs – This application allows you to create tabs where you can place other applications in them, like the Grid and Form applications.

Control – This application is used to make custom controls in a system, it’s not tied to a table, and requires the creation of at least one field for it to work. An example is the creation of a login
screen.

Menu - Allows you to create a hierarchical navigation structure of the system applications. There are two types of menus available, Horizontal Menu and Tree Menu, that the difference is
only the display.

Search - This application is used exclusively with the form application.

PDF Report – This application is responsible for generating the reports using some predefined formats, where you can position the data in the report.

Dashboard – Allows you to display various applications placed in the widgets.

Blank – This application allows you to insert PHP / HTML code to display some processing results. The advantage of using this application is the possibility of using the macro and native
integration with the other applications.

Calendar – An application where you can maintain an agenda of events, also being linked to the google calendar.

New Application
The process of creating an application is simple and intuitive. First select the application desired.

Application Data
On this tab you need to select a connection (only in the case it needs it) that’ll be used by the application. Selecting the connection, the tables will be loaded and listed in the
Tables Field.

It’s possible to select more tables when creating the applications, with the exceptions the Form and Calendar.

After selecting the tables and the fields that’s going to be part of the application, you need to inform the name and language.
 2

Connection - Define a connection that’s going to be used while creating the application. It’ll list the existing connections of the project.

Table - Defines the tables that’ll be used in the application. (Forms and Calendars only use one table).

Fields - Defines the fields that are part of the applications.

SQL Select Statement - Displays the the Select statement created after selecting the tables and the field. This field allows to insert a SQL previously created, although it needs to contain the
tables that exist in the selected database connection.

Name - Name of the applications that’s being created, it can’t contain special characters.

Localization - Language of the application created. The default project language is selected automatically.

Relationship

When selecting two or more tables, the Relationship tab will be displayed. On this tab, you’ll view the relationship created between the tables, where you can edit the field
relationship.

Below is the form to edit the field relationship.

Edit Fields

List of fields that’ll be created in the application, like their names and display types. Here you can do some configurations on the fields, like the modifications for the label or it’s
data type.

In case of a SQL error when creating an application, this screen will display blank.
 3

Fields - Name of the fields in the database.

Label - Name of the fields that’ll be displayed in the generated application.

Datatype - Data Type of Field.

Grid - Defines the fields available in the Grid.

Search - Defines the fields available in the Search.

Schema

Definition of the application schema, the default theme of the project (that can be viewed in Project > Properties) will be selected automatically.

Schemas - List of schemas available in the project.

After creating the application, you’ll be redirected to the configuration of the application created.

Batch Application Creation

With this tool, it’s possible to create multiple applications (Form and Grid).

When creating grids and forms using the same table, the applications are created with an application link between them, allowing to edit the record from the Grid application.

To start the process of creating the application, you need to select a connection so that the tables can be listed.

Next, you need to select the tables that are going to be used to create the applications. When selecting the tables, you can define which applications (Forms and Grids) are going
to be created.
 4

For last, you need to define the name, description and type, in case for the Forms.

Name - Name of the application that’s going to be created.

Description - Application Description.

Type - This option is only available for Forms, defines the type of form that’s going to be created (Single Record, Multiple Rows, Editable Grid and Editable Grid “View”).

Generate Source - Selecting this option all the applications to be created will have their source code generated.

To edit - Selecting this option all the applications created will be open for modifications right after creation.

Restore Applications
This feature allows to restore the applications of the project that has been modified recently. When saving the application, ScriptCase stores automatically a limited number
(defined in Settings > System Settings on the option Number of automatic application copies) of copies of the application, so that they can be restored. First, we need to select the
application that you want to restore.

Previously, you need to select the restore point that you desire and also define a name for the restored application.

Save Applications
This option saves the application that’s open in edit mode. This option can be found in the Application’s menu or on the toolbar.

Generate Source Code

 5
Different from generating the source code found in the project menu, this option saves and generates the source code only for the application that’s open in edit mode. This
option can be found in the Applications menu or in the standard toolbar.

Run
Save and run the application that’s open at the moment in edit mode. This option can be found in the Applications Menu or on the default toolbar.

Advanced Deploy
This option works the same way as any deployment, the only difference is that this option option is only available for the application open at the moment to edit.

For more information about deployment, access Deployment.

Export Applications
Allows to export all the applications of a project or you can select the desired applications. In this export, the necessary files that are used in the applications are also added to
the export.

This option can be found in the Application Menu.

First, you need to select if you want to export all the applications from the project or some applications applications from the project.

Selecting all the applications, you’ll view the export log with the download link for the file.

In this example, the option Select Applications was used, in this case the applications were list according to the type or folder.

To continue, select the desired applications and click on export. After that you’ll view a log of the exported files with a link to download the generated export file.
 6

Import Applications ## {id-9}

Allows you to import the applications exported by ScriptCase, although the exported applications need to be exported in the same version of ScriptCase that they are being
imported to.

This option can be found in the Application Menu.

First, you need to select the file that you want to import.

Next, in case of conflict with the selected file and the existing projects, you’ll have a couple of options for you to decide.

The options are:

Overwrite - Overwrites the files of the project with the ones being imported.

Don’t Overwrite – Maintain the local project files and ignore the files being imported.

Rename – Maintain the local project files and import the selected files with different names.

On the next step, you’ll view a summary of the import.

 1
Grid Modules
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › GRID MODULES

Initial Module
Allows you to set in which mode the application will start when executed.

Grid Application Modules

Filter : Application will be started by the filter view, so you can filter the records before the next application, that can be a Grid, PDF, Summary… you can configure that options within the
Filter’s settings.

Grid : Application will be started by the Grid itself, this is the default option.

Summary : Application will be started by the Summary. To use the Summary as initial application it’s mandatory to create at least one Group, using the Static Group By settings.

Chart : Application will be started by the Chart. To use the Chart as initial application it’s mandatory to create at least one Group, using the Static Group By settings.

Print : Application will be started by the print mode, according to the select command.

PDF : Application will be started with the option to view or download a PDF file.

Word : Application will be started with the option to view or download a Word file( .doc or .docx ).

Excel : Application will be started with the option to view or download an Excel file ( .xls or .xls ).

RTF : Application will be started with the option to view or download a RTF file ( .tft ).

XML : Application will be started with the option to view or download a XML file.

CSV : Application will be started with the option to view or download a CSV file.

Filter

Grid Filter Settings

 2
Filter Module : This option configures which application will be called after the Filter.

Use Iframe : This option configures the filter to be displayed within an Iframe (displaying the Filter itself and the search results on the same page). This option is available only when the initial
module is set to be the Filter.

Show Results : Display the search results on the same page when loading the application for the first time when the “Use Iframe” option is set as “Yes”, otherwise, the results will be displayed
only after the search.

Iframe Height : Iframe height, in pixels, used to display the search results.

Search Modal : This option configures the Filter Application to open in a modal window.

Search Modal Height : Search Modal box height (in pixels). Option available only when the Search Modal box is enabled.

Search Modal Width : Search Modal box Width (in pixels). Option available only when the Search Modal box is enabled

Table Width : Filter application table width. This value can be in percent, pixel or automatic (set by Scriptcase). If you change the value you will also need to set the “Table Width Unit”

Table Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the table width (percent, pixel or automatic). The value itself must to be set within the option “Table Width”.

Grid

Grid Settings

Orientation : This option configures the Grid records’ orientation (Horizontal, Vertical, Slide or User Defined). When using the “User Defined” option you can design the HTML manually inside
the option “Layout » HTML templates” and select within the Layout settings.

Fixed Label : This option will fix the columns’ label at the top of the page (it is only available when the Grud records’ orientation is set as Horizontal).

Pagination : This option sets the Grid paging type: Partial (pagination according to the amount of records set per page), Total (displays all records) or Infinite Scroll (automatic srolling acording
to the increment)

Lines Per Page : This option sets the amount of records per page for the Grid

Infinite Scroll Increment : This option sets the number of rows displayed on each increment of new records. It is available only when paging is configured with Infinite Scroll.

Open windows using modal : For Grids apps with the Infinite Scroll paging enabled, this option will set the links between applications and details of the Grid, that are configured to open in
iframe, to open using a modal instead.

Maintain records : It configures if the amount of records displayed will be preserved when the application navigates to another window and go back.

Grid height : Defines a altura da consulta em pixels. Caso esteja vazio

Table Width : Grid application table width. This value can be in percent, pixel or automatic (set by Scriptcase). If you change the value you will also need to set the “Table Width Unit”

Table Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the Grid table width (percent, pixel or automatic). The value itself must to be set within the option “Table Width”.

Detail
 3

Grid Detail settings

Display Detail : Allows you to set where the detail will open within the Grid Application * Beside the Grid : Displays the Grid Details to the right of the record, in the same
window where Grid is being displayed. * Below the Grid : Displays the Grid Details below the Grid records, in the same window where Grid is being displayed. * In another
page : Displays the Grid Details in another page, replacing the Grid view. * In another window : Displays the Grid Details in a separated browser window. * Modal : Opens a
pop-up window to the display of the Grid Detail.

Alignment : Using this option you can set an alignment (center, right or left) for the Grid Detail when it’s using the “Display Detail” setting as “Beside the Grid” or “Below the Grid”.

Detail Width : This option sets the Grid Detail width when it’s using the “Display Detail” setting as “Beside the Grid”, “Below the Grid”, “In another page” or “In another window”.

Width of the modal : Allows you to customize the Grid Detail width when it’s using the “Display Detail” option as “Modal”.

Height of the modal : Allows you to customize the Grid Detail height when it’s using the “Display Detail” option as “Modal”.

Detail Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the “Detail Width” (percent, pixel or automatic).

Summary

Grid Summary

Settings

Summary Display : Sets the Grid Summary display option ( On another page, On the last page, On every page). The Summary Application Module is only available when a group is created in
the Group By settings.

Chart
 4

Grid Chart settings

Charts display mode : Sets the Chart Summary display option ( New window, Same page, Other page ).The Chart Application Module is only available when a group is created in the Group By
settings.

Display before summary : Sets whether the Chart is displayed above or below the Summary. Available when the Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.

Number of columns : Sets the Chart number of columns per line (one in each column). Available when Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.

Margin : Sets the Charts horizontal margin. Available when Charts display mode is configures in the Same page.

Horizontal alignment : Sets the Charts horizontal position (Left, Right, Center). Available when Charts display mode is configures in the Same page.

Vertical alignment : Sets the Charts vertical position (Top, Center, Bottom). Available when Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.

View settings in the chart window : Sets the chart settings display on the same page. Available when the Char display mode is configured on Other page or new window.

Related videos
Advanced Reports

Initial Modules of a Grid

 1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SETTINGS

Grid application advanced settings

Friendly URL : This field allows you to change the URL that will be called by the application. Allowed characters are the same available on URLs: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_. This option can also be
changed on the home screen, on the “Friendly URL” column at the applications list.

Display Line Number : This option sets whether to display or not the sequence number of each Grid row.

Display Titles : This option sets if the column title (column label) will be displayed or not.

Line break in title : This option sets if the column line title will break or not.

Margins : Sets the application margins in pixels (up, down, right and left).

Alignment : Allows you to set the fields alignment for when the Grid orientation is set as Vertical or Slide.

Table Columns : Sets the column widths type: Provides (It will assume the informed width values at field level in the configuration of the visualization), Calculated (Calculate size according to
type and the field size) and Automatic (The alignment will be according to the browser criteria).

Refresh Interval : Allows you to set a reload interval for the page, in seconds. When is set as zero, there will be no page reload.
 1
Edit Fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › EDIT FIELDS

Edit Fields

Fields :Allows to access the configuration of the field (icon on the left) and dragging the fields can change the field position and choose weather or not the field will be displayed.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 1
Fields Positioning
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › FIELDS POSITIONING

Allows to set the order that the fields will be displayed.

Field Positioning

The box to the left represents the fields that aren’t displayed int he application.

The box to the right represents the fields that are displayed int he application.
 1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › TOOLBAR

The application’s toolbar is divided into two parts: Top Toolbar and Bottom Toolbar, so that it is possible to define which buttons will be displayed in one or both positions. The
buttons selection for the top and bottom toolbars are independent, for example, a button can be positioned in the two bars at the same time.

You can also organize the toolbar according to the device and separate which buttons will be displayed when the application is accessed on a mobile device or desktop, and its
respective positions on the toolbar.

Desktop : Within this option the toolbar can be organized for exhibition type “Classic Web Version”, i.e, these configurations will be used when the application is accessed by a Desktop .

Mobile : Within this option the toolbar can be organized for exhibition type “Mobile Version”, i.e, these configurations will be used when the application is accessed by a Mobile.

Toolbar

Grid Buttons positioning

Attributes :
Navigation : Within this attribute you can find the options to set the Grid navigation buttons.

Next Moves forward to the next page of the Grid.

Left Returns to previous page of the Grid.
First Sends to the first record of the Grid.
Last Sends to the last record of the Grid.
Exit Ends the application.
Navigation by page Displays the link to pages. ie. 1 2 3 4 5
Export : Sets the format available for generating exports. ScripCase can generate exports in the following file formats:

PDF Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a PDF file type.
WORD Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a WORD doc.
XLS Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a XLS (Excel).
XML Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a XML file.
CSV Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a CSV file.
RTF Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a RTF file.
Print Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a HTML printable page.
Others : Some more options available for the application, according to its settings.

Jump to Creates a button that allows the user to skip and position to a specific grid record.
Rows Limit Creates a check box with the maximum number of lines per page. This value can be set within the option “Records per page”. eg. 10,20,30, all
Search Creates a link button to access the Advanced Search form (Filter module). Settings for this button can be configured within the option “Search » Settings » Advanced Search”.
Dynamic
Creates a link button to access the fields for the Dynamic Search. Settings for this button can be configured within the option “Search » Settings » Dynamic Search”.
Search
Columns Creates a button to manage the columns display dynamically within the application, you can configure the columns that will be available within the option “Grid » Columns” .
Sorting
Creates a button to manage the fields sorting dynamically, you can configure the sorting options within the option “Grid » Sorting”
options
Group By Creates a button that allow the user to select the Group by. This button will be automatically activated once you create a Dynamic or Static Group By to the Grid.
Creates a button to save the current Grid (For example when the user applies a search condition or a Group By inside the application, it can be saved for a future view). You can
Save Grid
create criteria for this button within the option “Grid » Save Grid”
 2
QuickSearch Creates a link to access the QuickSearch options within the Grid. Settings for this button can be configured within the option “Search » Settings » QuickSearch”.
Gantt Chart Creates a link to a Gantt Chart. This button will be automatically activated once you create a Gantt Chart within the option “Grid » Gantt Chart”
Creates a link button to access the Summary Module. This button will be automatically activated once you create a Dynamic or Static Group By to the Grid, so you the user can
Summary see the records summary and its options according to the data group. You can configure the Summary options within the option “Grid » Grid Modules” and also within the
“Summary” area in the left menu.
Form Displays the Form application buttons configured when a link between the Grid and the Form is created. You can configure the application links within the “Links” area in the left
Buttons menu.
Creates a combo box with the languages added to the project during the project creation. You can add or remove languages to your project or application accessing the main
Languages
menu “Project » Properties » Locales”.
Creates a combo box with the themes added to the project during the project creation. You can add or remove css themes to your project or application accessing the main
Themes
menu “Project » Properties » Themes”.
Rows
This option if activated will display a record counter within the application toolbar
Counter
HelpCase Creates a link to the application documentation (WebHelp). You can configure the documentation settings within the main menu option .
Separator

————————- Creates a separation line between the buttons for better display, specially for grouped buttons

Button Group : The Group allows to create group buttons.

Add Button Groups

Button Group Configuration

Name : Allows to define a name for the button group.

Label : Allows to define a name for the button group that’s going to be displayed for the user.

Hint\Title : Allows to define a hint for the group of buttons that’s going to be displayed to the user.

Button Type : Allows to define a display format for the button group ( Button, Image, Link).

Image : Allows to define an image for the button if its display format is and Image.

Display : Defines if the button will display only the Text, only the image or both.

Display Position : Defines the position of the Text or Image ( Text to the right, Image to the right ).

After creating a button group, its necessary to position the buttons below the Button Group and to the right. Like the image below:
 3

Positioning the buttons of the button group

Button Settings

Grid Buttons’ Settings

Button Displays the buttons available in the application.

Allows you to customize the buttons name from current application. You can also use the option “Application Language” (placed within the main menu “Locales”) to change the button
Label
labels for the whole project.
Hint Allows you to set a hint for the buttons. The hint will help the user to understand the button’s action.
Shortcut Allows you to set a shortcut key to run the button action. Important note: Each browser has its own shortcut combinations and reserved words, you need to check it before
key implementing this option.

Options

Grid Options

Attributes
Display Summary : Allows you to define if the Summary button is going to be displayed for each page.

Format Row Counter : Allows you to set the format that will displayed for the rows counter. Ex: [1 to 10 of 200]. You can define it manually or using the lang variable accessing the main
menu “Project » Properties » Locales”

The number of links displayed : Allows you to set the amount of links per pages, when the page navigation option is enabled.

Jump to : Allows you to define the “jump to” option, if the page redirect is going to per page or record.

Records per page : Allows you to define which options of rows quantity will be displayed in the combo box. To enable the option to show all records use the option “all”. eg. 10,20,30, all

Toolbar buttons : Allows you to define the toolbar buttons display type, how the toolbar buttons will open. If it will open in modal (default) or in a DIV below the toolbar.

Toolbar Mobile
 4

Positioning the mobile buttons

Contains the same options as the Desktop version, adding only the item “Copy from Desktop”, on which, when clicked it copies the items from the Desktop toolbar to the
Mobile toolbar.
 1
Export Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › EXPORT SETTINGS

PDF Settings

PDF export configuration

Attributes

PDF Orientation Allows to define the orientation in Portrait or Landscape if the print.
PDF Format Allows to define the format that the PDF will be printed in (Letter, A4, etc).
Print Type Defines the print color (Black/White or Color).
Records per Page Applies to the Grids with the horizontal alignment, also defines the amount of records that’ll be printed per page.
Rows per Page in Summary Define the amount of records printed in the summary PDF.
Complete Lines Until Footer Complete with the empty line until the footer.
Open PDF Directly Open the PDF file without using a page in between to display a link to the file.
Create Charts Create the summary charts in the PDF.
Configurable PDF Allows the user to configure the parameters to create the PDF during runtime.
Generate Bookmarks Generate the bookmarks automatically, the bookmarks are generated relating to the group by.
Page Numbers Format Number format of the page, if simple (1,2,3,4,5,…), Complete(1/n, 2/n, 3/n,…) or not use the Numbers.
Page numbering height Allows to align the numbers vertically, top or bottom.
Horizontal position of the page numbering Allows to align the numbers horizontally (Left, Center, Right).
Margin The value informed needs to be in millimeters so that it can be applied to the PDF margins (Top, Bottom, Right, Left).
Print Background Allows to print the background in the PDF file.
JS execution time Time(milliseconds) for the server to wait for the JS to run in the HTML file.
Timeout for chart’s image creation Time to generate each chart individually in the PDF.

Word Settings

Grid - Word export settings

Print Type Allows you to set the print mode for the word file (Both, Black & White, Color).
Rows per Page in Grid Allows you to set the number of lines per page of the query will be displayed in the file.
Rows per Page in Summary Allows you to set the number of lines per page in the Summary that be displayed in the file.
Open Word Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
 2
CSV Settings

Grid - CSV export settings

Lines Separator Allows you to set the separator for character.

Columns Separator Allows you to set the column separator for character and records.
Text Delimiter Allows you to define the character used to delimit the text columns.
Open CSV Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Add Label Allows you to define if the columns label will be added to the file.

XLS Settings

Grid - XLS export settings

Open XLS Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Format Allows you to define the format of the generated document (xls or xls).

Print Settings

Grid - Print export settings

Print Mode Allows you to define the contents of the file printing (Both, Current Page or Full Report).
Print Type Allows you to set the print mode for the file (Both, Black & White, Color).
Rows per Page Allows you to set the number of lines per page of the query will be displayed in the file.
Rows per Page in Summary Allows you to set the number of lines per page in the Summary that be displayed in the file.
Print Background Allows you to define whether the background will appear for printing.

Other Formats

Grid - XML and RTF export settings

Generate XML directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Generate RTF directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
 1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SQL

SQL Settings

Grid SQL

configuration

SQL Select Statement Allows you to define the main SQL of the application. You can edit this SQL to add or delete fields.
Limit Lets you limit the amount of records that will be retrieved by SQL for the view in the query.
SQL Preparation You can enter SQL commands or procedure names that should be executed before the main select of the application.
Connection Displays the name of the connection used. This connection can be changed to another connection that has the same table.
Use Customized Message Lets you define whether the “no records” message is displayed.
No Records Message Allows you to set the message to be displayed if the query does not return any records.
Font Lets you set the font for the message, click the icon next to it field and choose the font. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Font Size Allows you to set the font size. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Font Color Allows you to set the font color. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Variable for Table These fields informed with value, allows part of the table name defined in the select to be changed before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.
The first field must be filled with the name of the variable. The second field must be filled with the part of the name of the table to be replaced.

Fields Variables Lets you exchange the name of a select field with the contents of a variable. This switch occurs before the command is executed.
The first field must contain the name of the variable, in the second field should be selected the name of the field to be replaced.

Case sensitive Allows you to configure whether the connection will be case sensitive or not. (Differentiating case).
 1
Columns
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › COLUMNS

You can display or hide fields dynamically inside the Grid application using the button “Columns”. This option is used to select the fields/columns that will be part of this dynamic
fields selection.

Grid columns’ settings

The box in the left represents the fields that are NOT being displayed within the dynamic fields selection.

The box in the right represents the fields that are being displayed within the dynamic fields selection.
 1
Sorting Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SORTING SETTINGS

Field Settings

Field Sorting Configuration.

This property has the objective to define the fields that allow sorting. The sorting of a field of the application is done in runtime, just by clicking on the column (field) that you
want to sort by. By default, the Group Bys are respected while sorting the fields. Also by default, the first six fields are already marked (presenting an asterisk beside the field), so
that they can be sorted without the user worrying about this detail.

Sorting Fields Selection Configuration.

Sort Fields
Define the configuration of the sorting for each field of the application, being “Ascendant” or “Descendant”.

Sort Fields Configuration.

Advanced Sorting
Define the fields that are available when clicking on the “Sorting” of the Grid.
 2

Advanced Sort Fields Configuration.

Use displayed fields : Defines that all the fields are available when clicking on “Sorting” button of the application.

Use columns : Defines that all the fields, configured in the “Columns” option of ScriptCase, will be available when clicking on the “Sorting” button of the Grid.

Define Columns : Allows to select the fields freely:

Advanced Sort Fields Configuration.

 1
Group Label
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › GROUP LABEL

With this option, you can insert the one or more titles for the columns in the applications, allowing to modify its size, color, font and position.

If you have fields with a dynamic display, the Group Label won’t work.

Editing Group Label cell properties

Attributes

Title Allows to define a title that’ll be displayed in your Group Label.

Font Allows to define the group label title’s font.
Font Size Defines the font size for the group label title.
Horizontal Alignment Allows to define the horizontal alignment of the group label title. Being Left, Center or Right.
Vertical Alignment Allows to define the vertical alignment of the group label title. Being Middle, Bottom or Top.
Font Color Allows to define the font color for the group label title.
Background Color Allows to define to color of the background for the group label title.
 1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SECURITY

Application Security Configuration

When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.
 1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › LOG

Application Log configuration

Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
 1
Gantt Chart
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › GANTT CHART

Gantt Chart settings

A Gantt chart is a type of bar chart that illustrates a project schedule. Gantt charts illustrate the start and end dates of the terminal elements and summary elements of a project.
Terminal elements and summary elements comprise the work breakdown structure of the project.

Output Format Output format, you can choose of HTML or HTML5 (the default option is HTML5)
Field label Field containing the record label of the Gantt chart. You can choose which field will appear within the left column to describe the tasks.
Width Gantt chart width. The default unit for this width is pixels, however you can also apply it in percent by adding the “%” sign after the number (i.e: 100%).
Height Gantt chart height. The default unit for this width is pixels, however you can also apply it in percent by adding the “%” sign after the number (i.e: 100%).
Months Allows you to set the number of months that will be displayed in the Gantt chart.
Start Date Using this combo box you can choose the field that stores the start date, you need to have this record within the connected table.
End Date Using this combo box you can choose field that stores the end date, you need to have this record within the connected table.
Display format Allows you to set the display format of the fields date type.
Percent Using this combo box you can choose the field that stores the information regarding the task completion (percentage), you need to have this record within the connected
Completed table.
Resource Field containing the name of the resource allocated to the task.
 1
Save Grid
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SAVE GRID

Grid Save button settings

Enable Public Displays the Save button within the Grid application
Use Rules Using this option you can enable more rules for the save button
 1
Fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › FIELDS

In the application menu: Fields, only the fields that were selected within the option select fields will be available for advanced settings.

Application fields list

According to the selected field different attributes can be changed depending on the data type selected, that is only for appliation level, not for the database.

Text
General Settings

Text field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a text, it accepts letters, numbers and special characteres.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Case Settings : Convert the letter from the field when losing focus. The options are:
Upper case : All in Upper Case

Lower case : All in Lower case

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the first word

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the the words

Show HTML content : Determines if the html contained in the field will be displayed or not. If enabled, the html will be displayed, otherwise the html will be intepreted by the browser.

Grid Mask : Defines the mask for the field display.There are two typed of masks described below:

Character Description
Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is
X
required).
Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at
Z
the mask left.

Mask Examples

Mask Field Value Formatted Value

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.
 2

Run content in Javascript : If enabled, the javascript will be intepreted by the browser, otherwise the javascript will be displayed.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.
 3
Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.
 4

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

 5
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.
 6

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Charts settings

By using this option, you’ll see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.

On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that you’re working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
“Column for Label”.
 7

Bar Chart Interface.

Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.

Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.

Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.

Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.

Column for Label : Selecting the column that’ll be the label for the field.

Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.

Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.

Chart layout

Interface de configuração de layout do gráfico.

Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
 8

Multiple Lines Text field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Multiple Lines Text, it accepts letters, numbers and special characteres in multiple lines.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Case Settings : Convert the letter from the field when losing focus. The options are:
Upper case : All in Upper Case

Lower case : All in Lower case

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the first word

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the the words

Show HTML content : Determines if the html contained in the field will be displayed or not. If enabled, the html will be displayed, otherwise the html will be intepreted by the browser.

Grid Mask : Defines the mask for the field display.There are two typed of masks described below:

Character Description
Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is
X
required).
Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at
Z
the mask left.

Mask Examples

Mask Field Value Formatted Value

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.

Run content in Javascript : If enabled, the javascript will be intepreted by the browser, otherwise the javascript will be displayed.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.
 9

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Charts settings
By using this option, you’ll see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.

On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that you’re working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
“Column for Label”.
 10

Bar Chart Interface.

Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.

Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.

Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.

Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.

Column for Label : Selecting the column that’ll be the label for the field.

Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.

Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.

Chart layout

Interface de configuração de layout do gráfico.

Integer
General Settings
 11

Integer field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Integer, it’s allowed to define the format of a number.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Accumulated : When enables, define that the field will be accumulated with the values of another field. This option is only available on virtual fields.

Accumulator field : Only available when the option “Accumulated” is enabled. This configuration defines which field will be used to accumulate the values. The chosen fields needs to be
Integer, Currency or Decimal.

Grid Mask : Defines the mask for the field display.There are two typed of masks described below:

Character Description
Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is
X
required).
Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at
Z
the mask left.

EMask Examples

Mask Field Value Formatted Value

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Interface of Values Format

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the fields. When not enabled, you’ll view attributes grouped, Negative Symbol and negative number format.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’ll be used to separate the thousand.
 12
Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.

Color of Negative : Defines a color for the field when the value is nagative.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

 13
This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

 14
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

 15

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

 16
Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Line Chart

Using this guide, you can define ac chart for each line.

Line Chart Interface.

Line Chart Type : There are two types of charts that can be used. Below you can see their description:

Bar Chart : This option allows to display a bar chart relating to the column that you’re working with. The size of the bars is done by math relating to the Grand Total of the
column. The value informed in the width of the chart defines the size of the images that’ll be displayed.

In the example shown above, the width of the Chart is 200px.

Line Chart : This option allows to display a Line Chart relating to the column that you’re working with . The amount of lines are done by dividing the value of a column by the
value informed to the number of icons.
 17

In the example above, the field Number of Icons, it was informed the value 1000, so the number of stars besides, it determined by dividing the displayed value by 1000.

Display Value : It’ll display the value and the chart at the same time, the value being on the left or right side of the bar or lines.

Number of Icons : Determines the amount of icons (figures) that’ll appear for each value on this field. This value will be presented by the dividing the value of the column by the Number of
Icons.

Chart width : Width of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart. In case it isn’t informed, the value used is 200px.

Chart height : Height of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart.

Margin : Charts margin. This option is only used by the bar chart.

Image / Positive Color : The way that it’s informed will variate depending on the options below:
Bar Chart : Inform a color for the field that’ll be used to form the chart image. Click the icon beside to choose the color.

Line Chart : Inform an image name for the field that’ll be used like an icon. Click the icon beside to choose the image “Icon”.

Image / Negative Color : The information passed to this field follows the same criteria as the Image / Positive Color field. This parameter will be used in the case the value is negative.

Charts settings

By using this option, you’ll see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.

On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that you’re working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
“Column for Label”.

Bar Chart Interface.

Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.
 18
Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.

Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.

Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.

Column for Label : Selecting the column that’ll be the label for the field.

Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.

Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.

Chart layout

Interface de configuração de layout do gráfico.

Decimal
General Settings

Decimal field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Decimal, it’s allowed to define the format of a decimal number.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Accumulated : When enables, define that the field will be accumulated with the values of another field. This option is only available on virtual fields.

Accumulator field : Only available when the option “Accumulated” is enabled. This configuration defines which field will be used to accumulate the values. The chosen fields needs to be
Integer, Currency or Decimal.

Grid Mask : Defines the mask for the field display.There are two typed of masks described below:

Character Description
Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is
X
required).
 19
Z
Character Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at
Description
the mask left.

Mask Examples

Mask Field Value Formatted Value

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the fields. When not enabled, you’ll view attributes grouped, Negative Symbol and negative number format.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’ll be used to separate the thousand.

Decimal Separator : Defines the character that’ll be used to separate the decimal.

Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.

Color of Negative : Defines a color for the field when the value is nagative.

Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places. This value is part of the field size.

Complete with Zeros : Defines the decimal places that will or not be completed zeros to the right. Example: The value is 125,50, but the decimal precision is 3. If the option is enabled, then
the value will 125,500.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 20

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 21

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

 22
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

 23

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

 24
Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Line Chart

Using this guide, you can define ac chart for each line.

Line Chart Interface.

Line Chart Type : There are two types of charts that can be used. Below you can see their description:

Bar Chart : This option allows to display a bar chart relating to the column that you’re working with. The size of the bars is done by math relating to the Grand Total of the
column. The value informed in the width of the chart defines the size of the images that’ll be displayed.

In the example shown above, the width of the Chart is 200px.

Line Chart : This option allows to display a Line Chart relating to the column that you’re working with . The amount of lines are done by dividing the value of a column by the
value informed to the number of icons.
 25

In the example above, the field Number of Icons, it was informed the value 1000, so the number of stars besides, it determined by dividing the displayed value by 1000.

Display Value : It’ll display the value and the chart at the same time, the value being on the left or right side of the bar or lines.

Number of Icons : Determines the amount of icons (figures) that’ll appear for each value on this field. This value will be presented by the dividing the value of the column by the Number of
Icons.

Chart width : Width of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart. In case it isn’t informed, the value used is 200px.

Chart height : Height of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart.

Margin : Charts margin. This option is only used by the bar chart.

Image / Positive Color : The way that it’s informed will variate depending on the options below:
Bar Chart : Inform a color for the field that’ll be used to form the chart image. Click the icon beside to choose the color.

Line Chart : Inform an image name for the field that’ll be used like an icon. Click the icon beside to choose the image “Icon”.

Image / Negative Color : The information passed to this field follows the same criteria as the Image / Positive Color field. This parameter will be used in the case the value is negative.

Charts settings
By using this option, you’ll see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.

On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that you’re working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
“Column for Label”.

Bar Chart Interface.

Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.
 26
Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.

Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.

Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.

Column for Label : Selecting the column that’ll be the label for the field.

Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.

Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.

Chart layout

Interface de configuração de layout do gráfico.

Percent
General Settings

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Accumulated : When enables, define that the field will be accumulated with the values of another field. This option is only available on virtual fields.

Accumulator field : Only available when the option “Accumulated” is enabled. This configuration defines which field will be used to accumulate the values. The chosen fields needs to be
Integer, Currency or Decimal.

Grid Mask : Defines the mask for the field display.There are two typed of masks described below:

Character Description
Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is
X
required).
Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at
Z
the mask left.

Mask Examples
 27
Mask Field Value Formatted Value
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the fields. When not enabled, you’ll view attributes grouped, Negative Symbol and negative number format.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’ll be used to separate the thousand.

Decimal Separator : Defines the character that’ll be used to separate the decimal.

Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.

Color of Negative : Defines a color for the field when the value is nagative.

Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places. This value is part of the field size.

Complete with Zeros : Defines the decimal places that will or not be completed zeros to the right. Example: The value is 125,50, but the decimal precision is 3. If the option is enabled, then
the value will 125,500.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 28

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 29

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

 30
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

 31

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

 32
Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Line Chart

Using this guide, you can define ac chart for each line.

Line Chart Interface.

Line Chart Type : There are two types of charts that can be used. Below you can see their description:

Bar Chart : This option allows to display a bar chart relating to the column that you’re working with. The size of the bars is done by math relating to the Grand Total of the
column. The value informed in the width of the chart defines the size of the images that’ll be displayed.

In the example shown above, the width of the Chart is 200px.

Line Chart : This option allows to display a Line Chart relating to the column that you’re working with . The amount of lines are done by dividing the value of a column by the
value informed to the number of icons.
 33

In the example above, the field Number of Icons, it was informed the value 1000, so the number of stars besides, it determined by dividing the displayed value by 1000.

Display Value : It’ll display the value and the chart at the same time, the value being on the left or right side of the bar or lines.

Number of Icons : Determines the amount of icons (figures) that’ll appear for each value on this field. This value will be presented by the dividing the value of the column by the Number of
Icons.

Chart width : Width of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart. In case it isn’t informed, the value used is 200px.

Chart height : Height of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart.

Margin : Charts margin. This option is only used by the bar chart.

Image / Positive Color : The way that it’s informed will variate depending on the options below:
Bar Chart : Inform a color for the field that’ll be used to form the chart image. Click the icon beside to choose the color.

Line Chart : Inform an image name for the field that’ll be used like an icon. Click the icon beside to choose the image “Icon”.

Image / Negative Color : The information passed to this field follows the same criteria as the Image / Positive Color field. This parameter will be used in the case the value is negative.

Charts settings
By using this option, you’ll see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.

On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that you’re working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
“Column for Label”.

Bar Chart Interface.

Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.
 34
Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.

Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.

Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.

Column for Label : Selecting the column that’ll be the label for the field.

Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.

Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.

Chart layout

Interface de configuração de layout do gráfico.

Currency
General Settings

Currency field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Currency, it’s allowed to define the format of a currency.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Accumulated : When enables, define that the field will be accumulated with the values of another field. This option is only available on virtual fields.

Accumulator field : Only available when the option “Accumulated” is enabled. This configuration defines which field will be used to accumulate the values. The chosen fields needs to be
Integer, Currency or Decimal.

Grid Mask : Defines the mask for the field display.There are two typed of masks described below:

Character Description
Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is
X
required).
 35
Z
Character Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at
Description
the mask left.

Mask Examples

Mask Field Value Formatted Value

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Interface of Values Format.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the fields. When not enabled, you’ll view attributes grouped, Negative Symbol and negative number format.

Currency Format : Defines the content of the field that if it’ll be presented with the currency format.

Currency Symbol : Defines the character that represents the Currency Symbol.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’ll be used to separate the thousand.

Decimal Separator : Defines the character that’ll be used to separate the decimal.

Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.

Color of Negative : Defines a color for the field when the value is nagative.

Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places. This value is part of the field size.

Complete with Zeros : Defines the decimal places that will or not be completed zeros to the right. Example: The value is 125,50, but the decimal precision is 3. If the option is enabled, then
the value will 125,500.

Exibir valor por extenso : O valor será exibido por extenso. Exemplo: 2.100 (Dois mil e cem).

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 36

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 37

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

 38
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

 39

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

 40
Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Line Chart

Using this guide, you can define ac chart for each line.

Line Chart Interface.

Line Chart Type : There are two types of charts that can be used. Below you can see their description:

Bar Chart : This option allows to display a bar chart relating to the column that you’re working with. The size of the bars is done by math relating to the Grand Total of the
column. The value informed in the width of the chart defines the size of the images that’ll be displayed.

In the example shown above, the width of the Chart is 200px.

Line Chart : This option allows to display a Line Chart relating to the column that you’re working with . The amount of lines are done by dividing the value of a column by the
value informed to the number of icons.
 41

In the example above, the field Number of Icons, it was informed the value 1000, so the number of stars besides, it determined by dividing the displayed value by 1000.

Display Value : It’ll display the value and the chart at the same time, the value being on the left or right side of the bar or lines.

Number of Icons : Determines the amount of icons (figures) that’ll appear for each value on this field. This value will be presented by the dividing the value of the column by the Number of
Icons.

Chart width : Width of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart. In case it isn’t informed, the value used is 200px.

Chart height : Height of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart.

Margin : Charts margin. This option is only used by the bar chart.

Image / Positive Color : The way that it’s informed will variate depending on the options below:
Bar Chart : Inform a color for the field that’ll be used to form the chart image. Click the icon beside to choose the color.

Line Chart : Inform an image name for the field that’ll be used like an icon. Click the icon beside to choose the image “Icon”.

Image / Negative Color : The information passed to this field follows the same criteria as the Image / Positive Color field. This parameter will be used in the case the value is negative.

Charts settings
By using this option, you’ll see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.

On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that you’re working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
“Column for Label”.

Bar Chart Interface.

Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.
 42
Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.

Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.

Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.

Column for Label : Selecting the column that’ll be the label for the field.

Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.

Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.

Chart layout

Interface de configuração de layout do gráfico.

Percent (Calculated)
General Settings

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Accumulated : When enables, define that the field will be accumulated with the values of another field. This option is only available on virtual fields.

Accumulator field : Only available when the option “Accumulated” is enabled. This configuration defines which field will be used to accumulate the values. The chosen fields needs to be
Integer, Currency or Decimal.

Grid Mask : Defines the mask for the field display.There are two typed of masks described below:

Character Description
Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is
X
required).
Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at
Z
the mask left.

Mask Examples
 43
Mask Field Value Formatted Value
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the fields. When not enabled, you’ll view attributes grouped, Negative Symbol and negative number format.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’ll be used to separate the thousand.

Decimal Separator : Defines the character that’ll be used to separate the decimal.

Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.

Color of Negative : Defines a color for the field when the value is nagative.

Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places. This value is part of the field size.

Complete with Zeros : Defines the decimal places that will or not be completed zeros to the right. Example: The value is 125,50, but the decimal precision is 3. If the option is enabled, then
the value will 125,500.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 44

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 45

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

 46
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

 47

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

 48
Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Line Chart
Using this guide, you can define ac chart for each line.

Line Chart Interface.

Line Chart Type : There are two types of charts that can be used. Below you can see their description:

Bar Chart : This option allows to display a bar chart relating to the column that you’re working with. The size of the bars is done by math relating to the Grand Total of the
column. The value informed in the width of the chart defines the size of the images that’ll be displayed.

In the example shown above, the width of the Chart is 200px.

Line Chart : This option allows to display a Line Chart relating to the column that you’re working with . The amount of lines are done by dividing the value of a column by the
value informed to the number of icons.
 49

In the example above, the field Number of Icons, it was informed the value 1000, so the number of stars besides, it determined by dividing the displayed value by 1000.

Display Value : It’ll display the value and the chart at the same time, the value being on the left or right side of the bar or lines.

Number of Icons : Determines the amount of icons (figures) that’ll appear for each value on this field. This value will be presented by the dividing the value of the column by the Number of
Icons.

Chart width : Width of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart. In case it isn’t informed, the value used is 200px.

Chart height : Height of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart.

Margin : Charts margin. This option is only used by the bar chart.

Image / Positive Color : The way that it’s informed will variate depending on the options below:
Bar Chart : Inform a color for the field that’ll be used to form the chart image. Click the icon beside to choose the color.

Line Chart : Inform an image name for the field that’ll be used like an icon. Click the icon beside to choose the image “Icon”.

Image / Negative Color : The information passed to this field follows the same criteria as the Image / Positive Color field. This parameter will be used in the case the value is negative.

Charts settings

By using this option, you’ll see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.

On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that you’re working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
“Column for Label”.

Bar Chart Interface.

Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.
 50
Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.

Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.

Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.

Column for Label : Selecting the column that’ll be the label for the field.

Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.

Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.

Chart layout

Interface de configuração de layout do gráfico.

HTML Image
General Settings

HTML Image field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as HTML Image, it allows to place an image to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Image : Defines an image that’ll be displayed. The icon “Select Image”, lists all the standard images from scriptcase and also the image that you’ve uploaded to scriptcase. The icon “Upload an
image” allows the developer to send an image to the server which is from another machine.

Border : Border size for the image in Pixels.

Width : Define the width of the image in Pixels.

Height : Define the height of the image in Pixels.

Display Settings
 51
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Credit Card Number

General Settings

Credit Card Number Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Credit Card Number, it’s allowed to define some rules for the display format of the Credit Card.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.
 52

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

 53
E-mail
General Settings

Email field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as an Email, when you click on the field you be offered a choice for your email client and send an email to that
specific email.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.
 54
Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

URL
General Settings

URL field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a URL, it sets the value as a clickable link (Only if it contains a valid path).

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.
 55

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

YouTube
General Settings

YouTube field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a YouTube, it allows to display a video from youtube on the field.
 56
Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Display Mode : Defines how the you video will display in the application.

Width : Width of the video in pixels.

Height : Height of the video in pixels.

Link Type : The display settings of the link, if it’s going to be a Text or a Button.

Link text : A text that’ll link to the video.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Google Maps
General Settings
 57

Google Maps field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as Google Maps, it’ll use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Grid Applications

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Home : Defines what type of parameters will be used in the API.

Home Configuration Interface.

Display Mode : Indicates the display of the map. It can be opened in a Modal or in a new Window.

Width : Defines the width of the map that’s going to be displayed.

Height : Defines the height of the map that’s going to be displayed.

Zoom : Defines the initial Zoom (available from the Google API) of the Map location.

API Key : API Key for authorization to use Google Maps in the Application. (Required only for the versions 2 or earlier of the Google API.)

The API Key is a unique key, composed by a string(text) alphanumeric, which is the license to use the service. When you subscribe to use the service, the key is tied to the
domain and the directory of the server. All the pages that use the API needs to be in the same directory that was used for the subscription. In case you have a web server on
your local machine, you just need to possess a key for testing, and to do this you only need to place http://localhost in the domain of the subscription.

To get your API Key access the site by clicking here

Link Type : Defines how the link will be displayed.

Text Link : Text to call the Map.

Marker Description : Displays the description for each marker displayed on the map.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.
 58

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Date
General Settings

Date field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Date and Time, it’s allowed to define the format of the date.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.
 59

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Format of Values without Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separater attribute (Check the Regional Settings).

Display : Offers a series of formats predefined for displaying dates.

Detail Mask : Define the format of the field in the Grid, following the standards the PHP function Date.

d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e Y Thursday, 25 of January of 2009
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s 123:43:27 (accumulating the hours)

Format Table
 60

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters Y , M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.
Example 1 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(8) where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year, the positions 5 and 6 is the month and the position 7 and 8 is the day, define
the internal format like: YYYYMMDD

Example 2 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(6) where the positions 1 and 2 represents the month and the positions 3 to 6 is the year, define the internal format like: MMYYYY

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.
 61
Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Charts settings

By using this option, you’ll see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.

On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that you’re working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
“Column for Label”.

Bar Chart Interface.

Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.

Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.

Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.

Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.

Column for Label : Selecting the column that’ll be the label for the field.

Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.

Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.

Chart layout
 62

Interface de configuração de layout do gráfico.

Time
General Settings

Time field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as Time, it’s possible to define a Time Format.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format
 63

Format of Values with Regional Settings..

Format of Values without Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separater attribute (Check the Regional Settings).

Display : Offers a series of formats predefined for displaying dates.

Detail Mask : Define the format of the field in the Grid, following the standards the PHP function Date.

d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e Y Thursday, 25 of January of 2009
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s 123:43:27 (accumulating the hours)

Format Table

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters A, M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.
Example 1 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(8) where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year, the positions 5 and 6 is the month and the position 7 and 8 is the day, define
the internal format like: AAAAMMDD

Example 2 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(6) where the positions 1 and 2 represents the month and the positions 3 to 6 is the year, define the internal format like:
MMAAAA

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.
 64

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Charts settings

By using this option, you’ll see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.

On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that you’re working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
“Column for Label”.
 65

Bar Chart Interface.

Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.

Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.

Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.

Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.

Column for Label : Selecting the column that’ll be the label for the field.

Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.

Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.

Chart layout

Interface de configuração de layout do gráfico.

Date and time

General Settings
 66

Date and Time field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Time, it’s allowed to define the format of the time.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Do Not Repeat Value : Don’t repeat the value of the field in case it’s the same as the previous record.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Format of Values without Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separater attribute (Check the Regional Settings).

Display : Offers a series of formats predefined for displaying dates.

Detail Mask : Define the format of the field in the Grid, following the standards the PHP function Date.

d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e Y Thursday, 25 of January of 2009
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s 123:43:27 (accumulating the hours)

Format Table
 67

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters Y , M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.
Example 1 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(8) where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year, the positions 5 and 6 is the month and the position 7 and 8 is the day, define
the internal format like: YYYYMMDD

Example 2 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(6) where the positions 1 and 2 represents the month and the positions 3 to 6 is the year, define the internal format like: MMYYYY

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.
 68
Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Image (Database)
General Settings

Upload field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as an Image ( Database), all the Images files are stored and loaded directly from the Database.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Image Border : Width of the Image border. Value in Pixels.

Image Height : Image height size. Value in Pixels.

Image Width : Image width size. Value in Pixels.

Maintain Aspect : Maintains the original aspect ratio of the image when resizing it.

Open in Another Window : Allows to open the image in another window.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.
 69

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Image (File Name)

General Settings
 70

Upload field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as an Image (File Name), all the images files are stored and loaded in a directory of the server (Only the image name
is stored in the database).

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Image Border : Width of the Image border. Value in Pixels.

Image Height : Image height size. Value in Pixels.

Image Width : Image width size. Value in Pixels.

Maintain Aspect : Maintains the original aspect ratio of the image when resizing it.

Open in Another Window : Allows to open the image in another window.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).
 71
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Document (Database)
General Settings

Upload field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Document ( Database), all the document files are stored and loaded directly from the Database.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Icon : Displays an icon beside the field to identify the type of document.

File Name : Defines the field that contains the name of the document stored in the database ( the field that contains this information also needs to be stored in the database).

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.
 72
Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Document (File Name)

General Settings

Upload field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Document (File Name), all the document files are stored and loaded in a directory of the server (Only the
document name is stored in the database).

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Subfolder : Subfolder’s name that the files are stored.

Icon : Displays an icon beside the field to identify the type of document.

File Name : Defines the field that contains the name of the document stored in the server ( the field that contains this information also needs to be stored in the database).

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.
 73

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

Bar code
General Settings

Configuration Interface of the Barcode Field.

Data Type : DataType of the field for the application.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Database field type.

Barcode
 74

Configuration Interface of the Barcode Field.

Type : Type of Barcode.

Text : Barcode Text for illustration purposes.

There are 18 types of barcodes , that are listed below:

Barcode configuratio interface.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).
 75
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

QRCode
General Settings

QRCODE field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a QRCODE, allows you to set values into a QRCODE.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Interface of Values Format.

Level of error correction : Codewords are 8 bits long and use the Reed–Solomon error correction algorithm with four error correction levels. The higher the error correction level, the less
storage capacity.

Image Size : Size of the QRCODE.

Margin : Margin of the QRCODE.

Interface of Values Format.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.
 76

Display Settings configuration Interface.

Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, that’ll be applied to the application field.

Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.

Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.

Don’t truncate : Don’t truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.

Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Background Image : Background Image of the field.

Line Break : Allows the Line Break.

Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.

Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.

Width : Allows to define a width to the field.

Height : Allows to define a height to the field.

Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.

Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.

Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.

 1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › LAYOUT

Blocks
Conceptually a block is a “container” where you can position the fields of the Applications: Form, Control or Grid with Slide orientation.

By default, the applications created in ScriptCase are built with a only one block, with the same name as the application. You can add the amount of blocks that you want to
organize in a more convenient way. The page below, observe that theirs a column Organization, and that is where you’ll define if the next block will be set beside or below the
current one.

Application Block configuration

On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second is to delete the block.

Organizing the position of the Blocks

See below how to modify the display order of the Blocks in one Page.

Click and drag the block that you desire to modify to its new position.

Application Block Display configuration

See how to remove a block from display

Click on the block desired and drag it to the item “Blocks not Shown”. This way, you can also drag the block to another page if desired. See the images below.

Application Block Display configuration

Application Block Display configuration

Attributes
Block
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Title
Display : Flag that controls the title display of the block.

Label
Display : Flag that controls id the label of the fields will be displayed in the block.

Position : Options to display label :

Above : The label will be displayed above the field.

Beside : The label will be displayed beside the field.

Below : The label will be displayed below the field.

Fields
 2
Columns : Amount of columns that are displayed side by side in the block.

Position : The way that the fields are displayed in the block :
Below : The fields are displayed one below the other respecting the amount of columns.

Beside : The fields are displayed one beside the other respecting the amount of columns.

Line : The fields are displayed one beside the other without the tabulation.

Organization
Next : The way that the blocks are displayed in the page:
Below : Indicates that the next block will be placed below the current one.

Beside : Indicates that the next block will be placed beside the current one.

Tabs : Indicates that the next block will be placed in a different tab then the current one.

Width : Specifies the width that block will occupy in pixels or percentage, in case the value is in percentage, inform the (%).

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

Create New Block

To include new blocks in an Application, click on the button . Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the name and label of the block. At the end
click on Create.

Creating application blocks configuration

Attributes
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Edit Blocks

To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the parameters of the blocks. At the end click on
save.

Application Block editing interface

Attributes
Name : Name of the block.

Title : Block title for display.

Display Title : This option, when active, allows to display the block title.

Title Font : Font applied to the block title.

Font Size : Size of the font applied to the block title.

 3
Font Color : Font color for the block title.

Background Color : Background Color of the block title.

Background image : Background image for the block title.

Title Height : Height in pixels of the block title line.

Horizontal Alignment : Horizontal Alignment of the block title (Left, Center and Right).

Vertical Alignment : Vertical Alignment the block title (Top, Middle and Bottom).

Display Label : Display the labels of the fields in the block.

Columns : Amount of field columns in a block.

Columns Width : How the width of the block is defined.

Label Color : Color of the field labels.

Fields Organization : How the fields are organized in the block.

Label Position : Position of the field labels relating to the data.

Next Block : Position of the next block relating to the current block.

Border Color : Border color for the block.

Border Width : Border Width for the block.

Block Width : Width for the block.

Block Height : Height for the block.

Cell Spacing : Cell Spacing in the block.

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

 4
Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

Header & Footer

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.
 5

Drag the selected option to the “Menu Items” area to create a new “Layer” where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the “Menu items” area.

After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the “pencil” icon to edit the layer options or click on the “trash” icon to delete it .

Layer editing

Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.

Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the “Menu Width” option
within the Menu “Settings”, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.

Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.

Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.

Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on “Application Title” within the menu “Header & Footer”.

Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y

Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.

Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].

Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option “Tools » External Libraries” from the main menu.

Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option “PHP Programming”
within the menu “Programming”

Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.

Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.

Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.

Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.

Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.

Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.

Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

 1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › EVENTS

Scriptcase uses the events to enable the developer to customize the application code. Using the events you can program custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a
record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, …) and for a specific application type. In the event areas you can use global and local variables, JavaScript, CSS,
HTML, PHP codes and also Scriptcase macros.

onApplicationInit
This event runs only once, when initializing the application.

onNavigate
This event runs when navigating between pages in the application.

OnScriptInit
This event runs the moment that the scripts of the application is initialized. This is executed before the event OnLoad ( when present ), although, it’s always executed when
running, reloading or navigating in the application.

onRecord
This event runs the moment that the record line is loading. The evemt OnRecord runs in a loop for each record to be loaded.

onHeader
This event runs in the header of the application.

onFooter
This event runs in the footer of the application.
 1
Ajax Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › AJAX
EVENTS

OnClick
The ajax event OnClick is executed when the field that it’s based on is clicked.

Creating a new ajax event

Creating a new ajax event

Selecting a field

Selecting a field of the ajax event

Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.
 1
Buttons
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › BUTTONS

In addition to the buttons that comes automatically with the applications, you can also create your own buttons. All the buttons are displayed within the application toolbar.

New buttons creation settings

Creating a new button

To create a new button, click on the “New Button” option and enter a name and a button type.

The button Types are: JavaScript, PHP, Link and Run.

Grid buttons type

Deleting a button
To delete a button click on Delete icon (represented by a recycle bin image) in the right of the button name, at the application menu under the Buttons option.

Deleting a button

JavaScript
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the javascript button in Image, Button or Link.

Button

Setting up Javascript Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the javascript button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.
 2
Image

Setting up Javascript Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the javascript button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Link

Setting up Javascript Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Type Description of the created button.

Code Block

Javascript button coding block.

In this block, only JavaScript is accepted.

PHP
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the PHP button in Image, Button or Link.

Button

Setting up PHP Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Type Description of the created button.
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).
 3
Image

Setting up PHP Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Type Description of the created button.
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).

Link

Setting up PHP Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Type Description of the created button.
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).

Code Block

*Ajax button coding block. *

In this block, you can use macros, PHP code and JavaScript.

Link Button
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the link button in Image, Button or Link.

Button
Setting up Link Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Image

Setting up Link Button.

 4
Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Link
Setting up link Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Type Description of the created button.

Setting up the Link

Selecting the applications

Choosing the application for the button link.

You should select an application to be called from the button link.

Link Parameters

Choosing the parameters for the button link.

Field Allows you to use an existing field from the current application as a parameter for the link.
Variable Allows you to use a global variable from the current application as a parameter for the link.
Fixed Allows you to inform a fixed value as a parameter for the link.
Empty No value will be passed as a parameter for the link.
Link Properties ( Grid )

Configuring the properties for the link button when the destined application is a Grid.

Link Operation Mode How the link will open (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal ).
Exit URL for the target application URL or an application that be redirect to when exiting the Grid application.
Initial Mode Allows you to define the initial mode of the grid application ( Search or Grid ).
Number of Lines Allows you to define the amount of lines displayed in the Grid.
Number of Columns Allows you to define the amount of columns displayed in the Grid.
Paging Enable the paging in the Grid.
Display Header Enable the Grid Header.
Active Navigation Buttons Enable the navigation button (First, Back, Next and Last) in the Grid.
Link Properties ( Form )

Configuring the properties for the link button when the destined application is a Form.

Link Operation Mode How the link will open (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal ).
Exit URL for the target application URL or an application that be redirect to when exiting the Form application.
Enable insert button on target application Enable the “New” button in the Form Application.
Enable update button on target application Enable the “Update” button in the Form Application.
Enable delete button on target application Enable the “Delete” button in the Form Application.
Enable navigation button on target application Enable the navigation button (First, Back, Next and Last) in the Form.
Enable button to edit a grid record Enable the buttons that allow you to edit the records of a Grid

RUN
D I S P L AY O P T I O N S

We can configure Run Button display as Link, Image or Button:

Button
 5

Grid’s Run Button settings - Button type

Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose button, image or link.
Label Application button title (text that will be displayed for the button within the application)
Hint Using this option you can set a message for the button hint
Confirmation
Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you don’t need to display a message.
Message
CSS for the the button, if you do not change this option Scriptcase will apply the default application/project CSS. You can customize the buttons’ CSS using the option within
CSS Style
the main menu “Layout » CSS Buttons”
Reload quantity of
Option used to update the amount of application records.
records
Type Button type description.
Target This option allows you to set the target window where you will run the button code (the same window, other window, modal)

Image

Grid’s Run Button settings - Image type

Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose image, button or link.
Icon Button display icon. You can use this option to select an image (from Scriptcase images or from you computer) to represents the button within the application toolbar.
Hint Using this option you can set a message for the button hint
Confirmation Message Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you don’t need to display a message.
Reload quantity of records Option used to update the amount of application records.
Tipo Button type description.
Target This option allows you to set the target window where you will run the button code (the same window, other window, modal)

Link

Grid’s Run Button settings - Link type

Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose link, button or image.
Label Text that will be displayed on the button (on running application).
Hint Application button title (text that will be displayed for the button within the application)
Confirmation Message Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you don’t need to display a message.
CSS Style CSS class name, style created in the theme buttons editor .
Reload quantity of records Option used to update the amount of application records.
Type Button type description.
Target This option allows you to set the target window where you will run the button code (the same window, other window, modal)

Coding Area

Grid’s Run Button settings - Coding area

 6
There are two types of events in the Run button

OnRecord : Runs after processing on each record selected.

OnFinish : Runs after processing all records selected.

In this coding area you can use Scriptcase macros, PHP and JavaScript.
 1
Detail Module
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › DETAIL MODULE

The Grid Detail Module allows you to organize the information displayed according to its importance. It’s a complementary application it displays the data in detailed form. In
order to see the Grid Detail within the Grid the final user needs to click on that is displayed for each record.

To enable the Grid Detail Module, access the “Grid Modules” and enable the check box, it uses to come enabled by default:

Detail Settings
In this function, the user can define how the detail of a particular record should be displayed when it is selected and which registry information should be displayed in this detail.

Choosing the fields for the detail

Attributes
Fields selection for the detail page. : Allows you to select the desired fields. Just click the field and then click the “On/Off” button to enable/disable the fields.

Detail Keys
Through this interface you can chose the fields that will be part of the WHERE clause, it will return the corrected information according to the selected record. ScriptCase uses to
identifies the table primary keys, that is being used within the application SQL, automatically. However, Sometimes it is necessary to set the primary key manually, especially in
cases where the application has a SQL JOIN, involving more than one table.

Detail key fields settings

Selecr here the fields that are keys to the Detail. The application will execute another select command, and you can configure which fields will be passed for this WHERE clause:

On/Off : Select the field to be displayed in detail. The selected field (On) gets an asterisk.

All : Check “On” to all fields.

None : Check “Off” to all fields.

Desktop Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. A button can even be part of both parts
simultaneously.
 2

Detail buttons settings

Attributes
Navigation : Navigation Buttons
Exit : Ends or return to the previous application depending on how the “Display Detail” is configured. You can change the label within the “Button Settings”.

Exports : Sets the formats for printing generation:

Print : Creates a complete report with all Grid Detail data within a HTML printable page.

PDF : Creates a complete report with all Grid Detail data within a PDF file type.

Othes
Separator : Creates a separation line between the buttons for better display, specially for grouped buttons.

Mobile Toolbar

Detail buttons settings for mobile views

It has the same options of Desktop version, by adding only the item “copy of the desktop”, in which, when clicked, performs a copy of toolbar items from Desktop to Mobile.

Button Settings

Grid Detail button label settings

 3
Button Displays the buttons available in the application.
Allows you to customize the buttons name from current application. You can also use the option “Application Language” (placed within the main menu “Locales”) to change the button
Label
labels for the whole project.
Hint Allows you to set a hint for the buttons. The hint will help the user to understand the button’s action.
Shortcut Allows you to set a shortcut key to run the button action. Important note: Each browser has its own shortcut combinations and reserved words, you need to check it before
key implementing this option.

Header
In this block is where the content variables that will be part of the header is set.

Grid Detail header settings

This screen will change depending on the format chosen header within.

Display Header : This flag determines whether the header is displayed.

Detail Title : Using this option you can set a title for the application, it uses bring a value from the Grid application as default. However it can be customized.

Header Variables : Variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, you must associate a content. Below we describe the existing types:
Field : Quando se escolhe a opção do tipo “ Campo”, abrirá um Combobox ao lado com os campos que fazem parte do “Select”. Escolhendo um desses campos, estará associando o
valor do campo para exibição no cabeçalho.

Title : This option when selected will display in the header the value filled in “ Detail Title ”.

Date : When you select the “ Date” type, the system date in the format dd/mm/yyyy will be displayed in the header. There are several display formats using server date and time. The
format can be reported in the text field that appears next. Click in the question mark to check out the available formats.

Image : Quando selecionado o campo tipo imagem, aparece um campo para o preenchimento do nome da imagem existente no servidor. Para localizar as imagens existentes e
selecionar uma, clique no ícone “Escolher imagem ” e para disponibilizar novas imagens no servidor clique em “ Fazer upload de uma imagem ” .

Value : Quando selecionado o tipo “ Valor”, o conteúdo preenchido no campo texto que aparece ao lado será exibido no cabeçalho, pode ser informado textos e “ Variáveis globais ”. Ex:
“Nome do Funcionário: [v_nome]”.
 1
Nested Grid
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › NESTED GRID

Subqueries/Nested grids are used when you need to display hierarchical data, such as customers and their respective applications. The main Grid encapsulates other Grids,
showing in each of its subqueries additional data records. Note the image below in which for each customer is displayed a subquery with its applications.

Customer Grud with an order nested grid.

Settings
In the application menu, by clicking on the item folder Configuration Subqueries, can be changed the General attributes of the subqueries.

Nested grid menu.

Nested grid general settings.

Atributos
Title in the same line : This attribute enables you to configure the Nested Grid title display. If it is displayed on the same line, Nested Grid table will be incorporated into the main Grid.

Example using Nested Grid title on the same line.

PDF : This option allows you to enable/disable the nested grid display in PDF reports.

Enable TreeView : This option enables an option to hide/display the Nested Grid within the main Grid records. By choosing “Yes”, the option “Title in the same line” will be automatically
disabled.

Using tree view in the Nested Grid.

 2
Position : This option allows you to configure the Nested Grid placement in the main Grid. This option is not available if you enable “Title in the same line”. You will be able to position
the Nested Grid within the records. The options are:
In one column

Displaying the Nested Grid in the same row of the

main Grid record.

Below the record

Displaying the Nested Grid in a separate row of

the main Grid record.

Alignment : Allows you to set the Nested Grid alignment in the main Grid interface when “Position” is set set as Below the record. The options are: left, right and Center.

Set individually

Any of the attributes that use the value “Set individually” requires the property to be configured on each created link settings.

Links
To create a Nested Grid link click on the “New link” within the Link folder.

Creating a new Nested Grid

Adding a new Nested Grid : Enter the name and the label for the link that will be created.

Adding a new Nested Grid

Application list : All Grid applications from current project, that contain global variables, will be listed.

Grid application selection.

For an application to be used as a Nested Grid, it must have within its SQL command (Grid > SQL) a WHERE clause with a global variable to receive the parameters from the main Grid.

SQL query configuration to the Grid be used as Nested Grid.

 3
Parameters setting : Setting the value that will be passed to the variable(s) of the Nested Grid SQL statement.

Informing the parameter to the variable

In the screen above, on the left side, it is displayed the Nested Grid input parameters (global variables created within the Nested Grid WHERE clause), on the right side, you must
select the parameter option. The options are:

Attributes
Field : Used to assign a Grid field value as a parameter.

Fix : Used to assign a fixed value as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option will not be assigned any value as a parameter.

Save button : By clicking this button the Nested Grid creation will be completed and saved.

Editing an existing Nested Grid link

All Nested Grid links created will placed within its menu options, inside the folder “Links”. By clicking on the Nested Grid name there will be an interface for settings edition.

Editing a Nested Grid

General settings

Nested Grid general settings

This interface can be used to edit the following Nested Grid attributes:

Label : Nested Grid title for the application

Link : In this attribute are displayed the current Nested Grid connection data, showing the application and parameters used. To change any link attribute just click to edit Link.

Display : This attribute allows you to set which Nested Grid items, if it uses any of these resources, will be displayed in the main Grid.

Display settings

* __1__ : Display Title.

* __2__ : Sequential display (number line).
* __3__ : Display Totals.

Inherit view : When marked it sets that the Nested Grid view will be equal to that of the main Grid.

Set individually
If the value of one of the attributes in the Nested Grid settings has been selected as “Set Individually”, these values must be configured in the Nested Grid editing screen for each
called link.
 4

Nested Grid settings.

Display settings

These options will only appear if all of the following conditions are true:

Attribute Value
Title in the same line No
Enable Tree view No
Position In one column

Nested Grid display settings

Attributes
Horizontal Alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid horizontal alignment. It can be aligned left, right or Center.

Vertical Alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid vertical alignment. It can be aligned to the top, middle, or End.

Background color : Here you can set the background color. If it is not filled it will get the Grid default background color.

Title horizontal alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid label horizontal alignment. It can be aligned Left, Right or Center.

Title vertical alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid label vertical alignment. It can be aligned to the top, middle, or End.

Bold : This option sets the Nested Grid title (label) in bold.
 1
Sorting Rules
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SORTING RULES

Sorting rules settings

Attributes
Sorting rules sorting : Allows you to change the sort display of the sorting rules. To configure this option, an icon is displayed (set up ordering) that when clicked allows the choice of the
field and your display order ascending (ASC) or descending (DESC) .

Integrate sorting rules : This option allows you to set whether to use the sorting rules together with the regular sorting options or not. You can choose the display options between:

Sorting Fields/Rules(default) : This option allows you to apply the rules that have been created together with the regular fields sorting (descending or ascending)

Sorting Fields : This option allows you to apply the fields sorting only, discarding the sorting rules (descending or ascending)

Sorting Rules : This option allows you to apply the sorting only according to the rules that have been created, discarding the fields sorting.

Creating a Sorting Rule

Adding sorting Rule interface

Attribute
Name : Field to inform the new rule name.

Label : Field to inform the name that will be displayed in the application.

Setting up a sorting Rule

Sorting rule configuration interface..

Attributes
Label : This option allows you to enter a name that will be displayed when the application is executed.

Select the fields for a sorting rule : Allows you to select through the selection bar which fields will be displayed (fields that are in the frame at the right side) and the fields will not be
displayed (fields that are in the left side frame). To sort the fields the way you want, use the sort bar located on the right side of the frame. To apply the sorting type to the field, simply
select the straight side frame field and select the Ascending mode, where displays a “+” or a “-“ by the field side to indicate if the sort order is Descending.
 1
Refined Search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › REFINED SEARCH

The refined search is a feature where you can integrate a search interface, next to the Grid, limiting values according to a universe that exists in the connected database.

Grid application running with refined search activated

Settings

Refined search settings

Attributes
Move searched above : When you filter by a field, this field will be moved to the top of the refined search stack.

Show quantity : Alongside the values of the fields, you will see the existing amount. Ex.: Brazil (1547)

Start mode : This option sets whether the fields select options will start open or closed.

Minimum width : This option sets the minimum width for the refined search fields, value in pixels.

Maximum width : This option sets the maximum width for the refined search fields, value in pixels.

Minimum height : This option sets the minimum height for the refined search fields results, value in pixels.

Maximum height : This option sets the maximum height for the refined search fields results, value in pixels.

Select fields
Refined Search fields

The refined search is automatically added to the Grid application when one or more Grid fields are selected in the tab “select fields”.
 2

Selecting fields of refined search

Edit fields

In the tab “Edit fields”, you can configure each field according to what you need to display within the application.

Refined Search fields edition

Attributes
Fields : Listing of selected fields in the tab “select fields”.

Range : This option activate a slider with intervals between the smallest and largest value.

Increment : When using the range this option will set an integer value to increase the range.

Show value : When checked, displays the range values in the slider.

Multi select : Enables multiple selection values to perform the filter.

Start opened : This option sets the initial mode for fields selection display in refined search.

See more : When checked, enables the option to “see more” for the filter records. This is recommended when the selected field has a big amount of records. You will be able to click to
“see more” or “see less”

Quantity : This option sets the initial amount of records to be displayed for each field selected.

Date : This option sets the date format that is displayed in the date fields inside the filter.

Sorting : This option sets the records sorting for each selected field

Message for empty fields : This option sets a message to be displayed when the field has empty values. You can also use a variable from Scriptcase language system.
 1
Refined Search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › REFINED SEARCH

The refined search is a feature where you can integrate a search interface, next to the Grid, limiting values according to a universe that exists in the connected database.

Grid application running with refined search activated

Settings

Refined search settings

Attributes
Move searched above : When you filter by a field, this field will be moved to the top of the refined search stack.

Show quantity : Alongside the values of the fields, you will see the existing amount. Ex.: Brazil (1547)

Start mode : This option sets whether the fields select options will start open or closed.

Minimum width : This option sets the minimum width for the refined search fields, value in pixels.

Maximum width : This option sets the maximum width for the refined search fields, value in pixels.

Minimum height : This option sets the minimum height for the refined search fields results, value in pixels.

Maximum height : This option sets the maximum height for the refined search fields results, value in pixels.

Select fields
Refined Search fields

The refined search is automatically added to the Grid application when one or more Grid fields are selected in the tab “select fields”.
 2

Selecting fields of refined search

Edit fields

In the tab “Edit fields”, you can configure each field according to what you need to display within the application.

Refined Search fields edition

Attributes
Fields : Listing of selected fields in the tab “select fields”.

Range : This option activate a slider with intervals between the smallest and largest value.

Increment : When using the range this option will set an integer value to increase the range.

Show value : When checked, displays the range values in the slider.

Multi select : Enables multiple selection values to perform the filter.

Start opened : This option sets the initial mode for fields selection display in refined search.

See more : When checked, enables the option to “see more” for the filter records. This is recommended when the selected field has a big amount of records. You will be able to click to
“see more” or “see less”

Quantity : This option sets the initial amount of records to be displayed for each field selected.

Date : This option sets the date format that is displayed in the date fields inside the filter.

Sorting : This option sets the records sorting for each selected field

Message for empty fields : This option sets a message to be displayed when the field has empty values. You can also use a variable from Scriptcase language system.
 1
Group By
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › GROUP BY

Group By Settings
These are the general settings of the Grid Group By, independently of it’s type, static or dynamic. Here we can define some group by viewing options, such as the use of treeview,
for example.

The option Enable TreeView isn’t available in the Infinite Scroll.

Enable TreeView : Defines the use of TreeView in breaks, which in turn allows you to expand or collapse the records displayed in Group by.

Group By Line : Sets the positioning of group by in relation to group records. The options are Before the records or After the records.

Group By Header : Lets you display the break header on all pages.

Group By sorting : It allows to order the fields respecting the group by.

Display Titles : Allows the label display of the fields within the groups.

Record count title : Sets a title for the records quantity column.

Value Separator : Define the separator between the title and the field value in the GROUP BY.

Tab a Group By : Sets the left margin of Group By. The value must be informed in pixel.

Separates the Group By : Sets the spacing between two Group By. The value must be informed in pixel.

Dynamic Group By
In this screen we define the fields available in Dynamic Group By and will be summarized in Grid and Summary when the Dynamic Group By is used.

Select Fields
In this screen we define the fields available in the Dynamic Group By and will be summed in the query and summary when the dynamic break is used.

This Group By works independently of any other Group By configuration or totals already performed, that is, the fields defined to be summarized in the Grid or summary in the
Dynamic Group will be visible only when the Dynamic Group is used.

We will be able to see all available fields for the Group By configuration and totals in the Grid Fields.

The Use Dynamic Group By option enables the Group By in the run-time application.

Fields used when using the Grid must be configured to be displayed on the Grid.
 2

Grid Fields : List of all the fields of the application.

Group By Fields : Defines the fields that are part of the Group By.

Grid Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Grid Totals.

Summary Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Summary Totals.

Group By Fields
We must drag and drop the fields that will be part of the group by in Group By Fields .

Each field can only be added once to the Group By Fields , except for the date and datetime fields .

D AT E A N D D AT E T I M E F I E L D S

For date and datetime fields, some display intervals have been added, so these fields can be added two or more times to the group by.
 3

All Grid fields can be added to the “totalizer”, the only difference being the functions available. Numeric fields can use all the available summarization functions, since the non-
numeric fields can use only the count and the different count.

The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Grid > Totals > Fields > Dynamic Group By

Summary Totals
The fields added to the Summary totals will only be visible in Summary at the time Dynamic Group By is used.

All Grid fields can be added to the “totalizer”, the only difference being the functions available. Numeric fields can use all the available summarization functions, since the non-
numeric fields can use only the count and the different count.
 4

The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Summary > Fields > Dynamic Group By

Fields
The fields added to the Grid Fields will be listed within the Fields folder so that they can be edited individually.

General Settings
C AT E G O R I E S : T E X T A N D B A R C O D E

Data Type: Defines the datatype of the field in the HTML.

Group by label : Defines a label of the fields displayed in the Group By.

Case Settings: Converts the text according to the selected option.

Upper Case: Transforms the text in upper case.

Lower Case : Transforms the text in lower case.

Capitalize first word : It transforms the first word in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this
option will make upper case only the first word.

Capitalize all words : Transforms all words in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this option will
transform upper case into all words.

Field Mask : On this field you’ll setup the display mask according to the table informed in Applications > Grid > Fields > Text.

SQL Type: Informs the data type of the field in the database.

C AT E G O R I E S : N U M B E R A N D C A L C U L AT E D

Data Type: Defines the datatype of the field in the HTML.

Group by label : Defines a label of the fields displayed in the Group By.

Field Mask : On this field you’ll setup the display mask according to the table informed in Applications > Grid > Fields > Text.

SQL Type: Informs the data type of the field in the database.

C AT E G O R I E S : S P E C I A L A N D D AT E / T I M E

Data Type: Defines the datatype of the field in the HTML.

 5
Group by label : Defines a label of the fields displayed in the Group By.

SQL Type: Informs the data type of the field in the database.

Lookup Settings
This option is available in the fields of the categories: Text, Number, Calculated, Special and Barcode.

On this option, it’s possible to setup the display lookup for the fields cited above. For more information about using the Grid Lookup, access Application > Grid > Fields > Text.

Values Format
NUMBER TYPE

Regional Settings : When active, you can apply the Regional Settings to this field. To modify the setting, access Locales > Regional Settings in the Scriptcase Menu.

Color of Negative : In this field you’ll inform the color value in hexadecimal. (Example: #000000)

CURRENCY TYPE

Regional Settings : When active, you can apply the Regional Settings to this field. To modify the setting, access Locales > Regional Settings in the Scriptcase Menu.

Currency Symbol: When activating this option, the application will display the currency symbol according to the Regional Settings.

Color of Negative : In this field you’ll inform the color value in hexadecimal. (Example: #000000)

Decimal Precision : Amount of decimal that your field will be displaying.

Complete with Zeros : Activating this option will allow the application to complete the value after the coma with zeros.

D AT E T Y P E

Regional Settings : When active, you can apply the Regional Settings to this field. To modify the setting, access Locales > Regional Settings in the Scriptcase Menu.

Display: In this field you’ll select how will the field will display it’s self.

Group By Settings

Attributes
Field Position : Defines how the information contained in the group by line will displayed and organized.

Columns : Defines the amount of columns information contained in the group by line will displayed and organized.

Display Label : Defines if the field label will be displayed.

Line break : Displays or not the the Group By line with the value divied in another line.

Records amount : Defines whether the group by row will display the number of group records.

Break PDF Page (Grid) : Defines if the PDF file, generated by the GRID, will contain each group by printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages.

Break PDF Page (Summary) : Defines if the Summary PDF file, generated by the GRID, will contain each group by printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages. .

Break HTML Page (Grid) : Displays each Grid Group By in a different HTML page.

Break HTML Page (Summary) : Displays each Summary Group By in a different HTML page.

Start TreeView : Defines the inital state of the TreeView.

Sorting : If this option is set to “Yes”, the selected fields will sorted without needing to be clicked on, the sorting will be done respecting the criterias of the Group By.

Fields : Defines which fields are going to displayed in the Group By row. It’s also possible to define if it’s going to be displayed in the Totals or in the Summary of this field by selecting
Value or Sum, before clicking on the button “On/Off”.
 6
Group By Line Layout (Label)

Layout configuration of the Group By Label.

Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font that’s going to be used in the Label.

Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Label.

Font Color : Font color for the Group By Label.

Background Color : Group By background Color.

Bold Text : Defines if the label will have a Bold Text.

Group By Line Layout (Value)

Layout configuration of the Group By Value.

Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font that’s going to be used in the Value.

Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Value.

Font Color : Font color for the Group By Value.

Bold Text : Defines if the value will have a Bold Text.

Static Group By
This type of Group By is configured by the developer, where the end user can select one of the predefined group by available in the application.

Settings
These configuration affect the Static Group By.

Static Group By Settings

Use empty Group By : Configuration used when you want the Grid to be initialized without any Group By.

Title of the empty Group By : Defines a title for the empty Group By option. (Available only when the previous option is enabled)

Initial Group By : Defines the group by used when initializing the generated application.

Sorting Groups Settings

Defines the order that the group bys will be displayed in the Grid.

New Group By
Interface to create the static group by.
 7

Name: Defines the internal name of the group by, used by ScriptCase.

Label: Defines the displayed name of the group by, that’ll be displayed in the application.

Grid Fields : List of all the fields of the application.

Group By Fields : Defines the fields that are part of the Group By.

Grid Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Grid Totals.

Summary Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Summary Totals.

Group By Fields
You need to drag and drop the fields that’ll be part of the Group By in the Group By Fields .

Each field can only be added once to the Group By Fields , except for the date and datetime fields .

D AT E A N D D AT E T I M E F I E L D S

For date and datetime fields, some display intervals have been added, so these fields can be added two or more times to the group by.
 8

Grid Totals

The fields added in this total will be visible only in the Grid (if the total field is visible in the Grid) at the time that the group by is used.

All Grid fields can be added to the “totalizer”, the only difference being the functions available. Numeric fields can use all the available summarization functions, since the non-
numeric fields can use only the count and the different count.

The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Grid > Totals > Fields > Dynamic Group By

Summary Totals
The fields added to the Summary totals will only be visible in Summary at the time Dynamic Group By is used.
 9

All Grid fields can be added to the “totalizer”, the only difference being the functions available. Numeric fields can use all the available summarization functions, since the non-
numeric fields can use only the count and the different count.

The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Summary > Fields > Dynamic Group By

Edit Group By

After the creation, the group by are listed in the Static Group By folder, below the Settings item.

Expanding the Group By Folder, you’ll see the settings icon, where you can edit the entire group by.

You can also view the fields used in the group by, that can be edited independently from the Grid Layout, see the following:

Fields
The fields added to the Grid Fields will be listed within the Fields folder so that they can be edited individually.

General Settings
C AT E G O R I E S : T E X T A N D B A R C O D E

Data Type: Defines the datatype of the field in the HTML.

Group by label : Defines a label of the fields displayed in the Group By.

Case Settings: Converts the text according to the selected option.

Upper Case: Transforms the text in upper case.
 10
Lower Case : Transforms the text in lower case.

Capitalize first word : It transforms the first word in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this
option will make upper case only the first word.

Capitalize all words : Transforms all words in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this option will
transform upper case into all words.

Field Mask : On this field you’ll setup the display mask according to the table informed in Applications > Grid > Fields > Text.

SQL Type: Informs the data type of the field in the database.

C AT E G O R I E S : N U M B E R A N D C A L C U L AT E D

Data Type: Defines the datatype of the field in the HTML.

Group by label : Defines a label of the fields displayed in the Group By.

Field Mask : On this field you’ll setup the display mask according to the table informed in Applications > Grid > Fields > Text.

SQL Type: Informs the data type of the field in the database.

C AT E G O R I E S : S P E C I A L A N D D AT E / T I M E

Data Type: Defines the datatype of the field in the HTML.

Group by label : Defines a label of the fields displayed in the Group By.

SQL Type: Informs the data type of the field in the database.

Lookup Settings

This option is available in the fields of the categories: Text, Number, Calculated, Special and Barcode.

On this option, it’s possible to setup the display lookup for the fields cited above. For more information about using the Grid Lookup, access Application > Grid > Fields > Text.

Values Format
NUMBER TYPE

Regional Settings : When active, you can apply the Regional Settings to this field. To modify the setting, access Locales > Regional Settings in the Scriptcase Menu.

Color of Negative : In this field you’ll inform the color value in hexadecimal. (Example: #000000)

CURRENCY TYPE

Regional Settings : When active, you can apply the Regional Settings to this field. To modify the setting, access Locales > Regional Settings in the Scriptcase Menu.

Currency Symbol: When activating this option, the application will display the currency symbol according to the Regional Settings.
 11
Color of Negative : In this field you’ll inform the color value in hexadecimal. (Example: #000000)

Decimal Precision : Amount of decimal that your field will be displaying.

Complete with Zeros : Activating this option will allow the application to complete the value after the coma with zeros.

D AT E T Y P E

Regional Settings : When active, you can apply the Regional Settings to this field. To modify the setting, access Locales > Regional Settings in the Scriptcase Menu.

Display: In this field you’ll select how will the field will display it’s self.

Group By Settings

Attributes
Field Position : Defines how the information contained in the group by line will displayed and organized.

Columns : Defines the amount of columns information contained in the group by line will displayed and organized.

Display Label : Defines if the field label will be displayed.

Line break : Displays or not the the Group By line with the value divied in another line.

Records amount : Defines whether the group by row will display the number of group records.

Break PDF Page (Grid) : Defines if the PDF file, generated by the GRID, will contain each group by printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages.

Break PDF Page (Summary) : Defines if the Summary PDF file, generated by the GRID, will contain each group by printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages. .

Break HTML Page (Grid) : Displays each Grid Group By in a different HTML page.

Break HTML Page (Summary) : Displays each Summary Group By in a different HTML page.

Start TreeView : Defines the inital state of the TreeView.

Sorting : If this option is set to “Yes”, the selected fields will sorted without needing to be clicked on, the sorting will be done respecting the criterias of the Group By.

Fields : Defines which fields are going to displayed in the Group By row. It’s also possible to define if it’s going to be displayed in the Totals or in the Summary of this field by selecting
Value or Sum, before clicking on the button “On/Off”.

Group By Line Layout (Label)

Layout configuration of the Group By Label.

Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font that’s going to be used in the Label.

Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Label.

Font Color : Font color for the Group By Label.

Background Color : Group By background Color.

Bold Text : Defines if the label will have a Bold Text.

Group By Line Layout (Value)

Layout configuration of the Group By Value.

Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font that’s going to be used in the Value.

Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Value.

Font Color : Font color for the Group By Value.

Bold Text : Defines if the value will have a Bold Text.

Events
These events are only available for static group by.

The OnGroupByAll event occurs after running the group by, that allows you to manipulate the totals variables.

Total variables are created based on the fields selected for group by and totals.

The following is an example of the available variables:

 12
Assuming that an application has a group by state and city and two summarization per parcel and balance, the following summarization variables are available:

{count_ger} Contains the total number of records.

{sum_parcel} Contains the general sum of the parcel field.
{sum_balance} Contains the overall sum of the balance field.
{count_state} Contains the total amount of records, from the state group by being processed.
{sum_parcel_state} Contains the general sum of the ‘state’ field and the ‘parcel’ field that are being processed.
{sum_balance_state} Contains the general sum of the ‘balance’ field and the ‘parcel’ field that are being processed.
{count_city} Contains the total number of records, of the city group by being processed.
{sum_parcel_city} Contains the general sum of the ‘parcel’ and ‘city’ field that are being processed.
{sum_balance_city} Contains the general sum of the ‘balance’ and ‘city’ fields that are being processed.
To access the summarization variables by group, simply replace the group by name with Group By . Example: {sum_balance_city} for {sum_quebra_balance}

{count_quebra} The total number of records by the group by being processed.

{sum_quebra_parcel} Contains the general sum of the parcel field, of the group by being processed.
{sum_quebra_balance} Contains the sum total of the balance field, of group by being processed.
Example:

In an application that has group by by state and city and totals a balance field in group by totals, we want to display the average in place of the balance. A method is created in the
OnGroupByAll event, with the following content:

{sum_quebra_balance} = {sum_quebra_balance} / {count_quebra};

 1
Grid totals
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › GRID TOTALS

The total fields will be displayed only when the Grid application is using at least one Group By.

Settings
The settings below can be applied for the Grid totals only.

Results in a single line. : This option sets the Grand total label and its results to be displayed in just one line.

Example for this option Enabled :

Example for this option Disabled:

Display Total : This option indicates in which pages the Grand total will be displayed. The options are: On every page , On the last page or Do not display . * Group Subtotal : If this option is
enabled, there will be subtotal after each Group By selected.

Record Count : This option allows you to view the amount of records by the Grand Total title.
Example for this option Enabled : :

Example for this option Disabled:

Select fields
Using the select fields area you can set the total fields ant the total options for each field. The same field can be used more than once in the Grid totals area, just if they are using
different summaries types.

To define the fields that will be used for totals, drag them to the area, Grid Totals .
 2
Note: The total fields will only be displayed if they are also selected to be displayed within the Grid application module.

When positioning the fields, you must define what summarization will be used, to select that you must click in the combo box and select one of the available options, that will be
according to the data type (integer, date, text…).

The summarization options available are:

Sum : Sets a sum of the values for the selected field.

Maximum : Displays the highest value identified in the selected field.

Minimum : Displays the lowest value identified in the selected field.

Average (Avg) : Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values for the selected field.

Variance : Calculates the dispersion of the values related to the average.

Standard Deviation : Measures the variability of values around the average, the minimum value of the standard deviation is 0 indicating that there is variability, i.e. that all values are equal to
the mean.

Weighted mean (WAvg) : Calculates the weighted average for the selected field. To set the weight used in the calculation of the average access field settings selected in Totals > Fields (select
the field where you are using the Weighted mean) > Weighted average weight.
Weighted average weight : Field that will be used as weighted average weight. In calculating the weighted average, each set value is multiplied by its “weight”, that is its relative
importance.

Count : Displays the total number of records for the selected field.

Distinct Count : Displays the total number of records for the selected field, distinguishing the values.

Important note: The fields in the Grid totals are displayed only on Grids with no Group by or with empty Group by.

Positioning
Defines the positioning and the label used by Grid totals. There are three display formats,, Default, Grouped or By field

Default

To add the same field two or more times in the Totals or use different types of summaries in selected fields, this option will not be displayed.

The option Default returns the result below the column being summarized. When you use the total for more than one column of the Grid, using the same type of summarization,
the results are displayed on the same line.

The line with Grand total displaying the order value .

ALIGNMENT

This option is available for display formats Default and Grouped .

Defines the placement of the label selected within the Setting > Display total option. The alignment can be in the Center, Left e Right:

Left :
 3
Right :

Center :

LABEL SETTINGS (DEFAULT)

This option allow you to customize the total labels.

As default we are going to display Grant total

Grouped

The option Grouped returns the total result, separating each type per line.

It is possible to position the total lines by dragging to the desired position.

In this example, we are displaying the sum, average, and maximum of column Order value.

ALIGNMENT

This option is available for display formats Default and Grouped .

Defines the placement of the label selected within the Setting > Display total option. The alignment can be in the Center, Left e Right:

Left :

Right :

Center :

LABEL SETTINGS (GROUPED)

This option allow you to customize the total labels.

 4

By field

This option displays the values in the left corner by positioning the results next to each other.

LINE BREAK PER FIELD

This option sets the total fields display. If selected it shows the fields in the same row or divided by line.

Separated by line:

Displayed on the same line:

LABEL SETTINGS (BY FIELD)

This option allow you to customize the total labels.

Fields
This option allows you to configure the display of values and labels of the selected fields in the Grid totals.

General Settings
Allows you to change the label displayed in the totals

Visual configuration for the Grid totals

Sets the formatting of the fields displayed in the subtotal for the group.
 5

Font family : Sets the font used.

Font size : Sets the font size.

Text color : Sets the text color

Background color : Sets the background color.

Bold : Format text in bold.

Example of formatting the subtotal for the Group:

Grand total Visual setting

Sets the formatting of the fields displayed in the Grid Grand total.

Font family : Sets the font used.

Font size : Sets the font size.

Text color : Sets the text color

Background color : Sets the background color.

Bold : Format text in bold.

Example of formatting the Grid Grand total

 1
Summary
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SUMMARY

Settings
Summary General Settings.

SUMMARY SETTINGS

Title : Defines a title for the summary, if not informed the default title will be “Summary”. For no title to be displayed, enter the HTML tag &nbsp; .

Quantity Title : Title Amount of Record.

Record Count :

Do not display : Don’t display the totals by group by.

Display only in the summary : Displays in the summary, total records by “group by”.

Display only in the summary and charts : Shows in summary, the total records by “group by” and provides the chart.

Horizontal Total: Show horizontal total for summaries of matrix type.

Vertical Total: Display vertical total for summaries of matrix type.

The chart icon positioning : Chart icon positioning (left or right).

Positioning of the Total icon : Total icon position (left or right).

Page Width : Width value for the summary page.

Width unit : Unit of measure used for width. Auto (width value is ignored), pixels and percentage.

Display SubTotal label : Displays the Total label or the Value itself.

Display line number : Display the sequence number of the record in the summary.

Display the hover on the Summary lines : Apply the hover attribute by hovering the mouse cursor over the summary lines.

L AY O U T S E T T I N G S

You can define the layout of the summary for each type of group by.

Group By Field : Group by fields selected in the Grid.

Position : Defines whether to use the x-axis or y-axis position.

Sorting: Sets the sorting by the database value or by the display value.

Fill Empty Labels : Defines whether the empty labels will be filled.

Link Grid : Creates a link in the selected field.

Alignment : Sets the layout alignment type to center, left, or right.

Tabular format: Sets the summary to the tabular format.

Toolbar
 2
The toolbar is divided into two parts, top and bottom, so you can define which buttons will be displayed in both places. Button selection works independently.

you can also define which buttons will be displayed when the application is accessed by a mobile device, just access the Mobile tab.

For more information about the toolbar, access Application > Grid > Toolbar.

Group Label
Click on Add Row, so that the group label can be added.

With this option, you can enter one or more titles for the columns of your applications.

If you have dynamic display fields, Group Label will not work.

To merge two or more cells, click the icon positioned between them.

To add a title, click the pencil icon to add a title.

Title Lets you set the title that will be displayed in your Group Label.
Font Allows you to set the font type of the title of your group label.
Font Size Lets you set the font size of the title of your group label.
Horizontal alignment Lets you set the horizontal alignment of the title of your group label. Being left, center or right.
Vertical alignment Lets you set the horizontal alignment of the title of your group label. Being middle, low or top.
Font Color Lets you set the color of the title text of your group label.
Background Color Lets you set the background color of the space where the title of your group label will be displayed.

Sorting
you can define the fields in which you wish to allow the sorting, when executing the application.

This configuration must be performed in each of the application group by.

 3

Fields : Select the fields that you want to allow sorting.

Default sorting column : Select a field for initial sorting in the summary.

Sorting Order : Choose whether the sort will be ascending or descending.

Sorting from the Group By : Select one of the group by for initial sorting.

Limit
Lets you limit the amount of records to be retrieved from SQL and displayed in the summary.

This option is only available for static group by.

Field: Defines the field that will be used to perform the limit.

Summarization: Defines the summarization function in which the limit will be performed.

Limit type: Sets the sorting that the limit will be applied, DESC or ASC.

Quantity: Sets the amount of records that will be returned.

Charts
One of the modules of the Grid application is the charts, which in turn are generated based on Grid summary information.

Scriptcase charts are generated in HTML5.

Chart Settings

In the settings screen, you can edit the settings of all available charts.

To edit the specific settings for each chart, select the chart you want to edit.

To define the available charts when running the application, check the box next to the name of the charts.
 4
Below you will detail the specific settings of each of the charts.

Barras
Font Size : Sets the font size in the chart. Enter only the font size, for example: 15.

Abbreviated value : Defines whether or not the values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.

Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the chart.

Bar - Orientation: Orientação das barras vertical ou horizontal no chart.

Bar - width (between 20 and 70) : You can set the width from 20 to 70.

Bar - Value orientation : The orientation of the chart is defined and can be placed vertically.

Bar - Value position : You can choose where the value will position itself.

Bar - Dimension: Bar Dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart.

Bar - Stacking : Stack the Bars in a single Bar (In series).

Bar - Series group : Group the Bar chart in series.

Pie
Font Size : Sets the font size in the chart. Enter only the font size, for example: 15.

Abbreviated value : Defines whether or not the values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.

Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the chart.

Pie - Format : Pie or Donut format.

Pie - Dimension: Dimension of the Pie chart.

Pie - Sorting: Ordering the Pie chart.

Pie - Values format : Formatting the displayed data.

Line
Font Size : Sets the font size in the chart. Enter only the font size, for example: 15.

Abbreviated value : Defines whether or not the values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.

Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the chart.

Line - Shape : Line Format

Line - Series group : Line grouping type.

Area
Font Size : Sets the font size in the chart. Enter only the font size, for example: 15.

Abbreviated value : Defines whether or not the values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.

Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the chart.

Area - Shape : Format of the area displayed on the chart.

Area - Stacking : Stack the areas on the chart.

Area - Series group : Group the chart in series.

Gauge
Font Size : Sets the font size in the chart. Enter only the font size, for example: 15.

Abbreviated value : Defines whether or not the values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.

Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the chart.

Gauge - Shape : Display format of the chart.

Radar
Font Size : Sets the font size in the chart. Enter only the font size, for example: 15.

Abbreviated value : Defines whether or not the values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.

Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the chart.

Funnel
Font Size : Sets the font size in the chart. Enter only the font size, for example: 15.

Abbreviated value : Defines whether or not the values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.

Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the chart.

Funnel - Dimension : Funnel dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart.

Pyramid
Font Size : Sets the font size in the chart. Enter only the font size, for example: 15.

Abbreviated value : Defines whether or not the values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.

Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the chart. Pyramid - Dimension : Dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart. Pyramid - Values format : Formatting the displayed data. Pyramid - Sliced : Display
format of the chart.
 5
Below are the settings common to all chart types.

Summary chart type : Defines how the charts will be generated: analytical, synthetic, or both.
Synthetic They should restrict themselves to the first group by the condition and allow the user to use the links to see details of the next set of criteria, increasing the level of detail.

Analytical They appear with the whole group by criteria, creating a complete detailed chart that does not allow the linking of other detailed charts.

Create link on the chart : Allows the charts to have a link in their elements for detailed grid applications or charts. The data shown will be relative to the value clicked on the chart.

Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.

Axis of Chart General Total : Option to display the chart of the grand total as column or row.

Display Y-Axis With Zero. : Force display of the zero value on the Y axis.

Label orientation on the x-axis : Sets the orientation of the labels on the X axis to vertical or horizontal. If the horizontal option is chosen and there are many values to be displayed so that
they do not fit in the scale, the orientation will be automatically changed to vertical. This option is only available for charts of type: Column, line and area.

Chart Width : Width in pixels of the generated charts.

Chart Height : Height in pixels of the charts generated.

Values sorting : Sort the values of the charts.

Column Charts
you can define the display of the column charts as well as the label for the chart and the axes. These settings are set individually for each group by.

If the user sets up more than one field, the analytical chart will only generate with the first two.

Line charts (totals)

The use of line chart (totalization) configuration is only available when you have group by with at least two fields.

To configure this option, go to the “group by” menu and create a static group by some fields or add fields to dynamic group by.

Layout
The chart theme tool enables you to fully edit chart themes.

These themes can be set only for the current application, when changed in the application itself or for all charts when these settings are performed in the charts editor.

For more information, access Layout > Chart Themes.

Fields
 6
All fields added in the summary totals, in the dynamic group by or in the static group by, will be listed here separated by the group by name.

General Settings
General settings of totalized fields in the summary.

Data Type: Defines the data type for the field.

Label: Defines the label for the displayed field in the summary.

Values Formatting
NUMBER TYPE

Regional Settings : When you activate it you apply the regional settings for this field. To configure them, click on the menu Locales > Regional Settings.

Color of Negative: In this field you can enter a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)

DECIMAL TYPE

Regional Settings : When you activate it you apply the regional settings for this field. To configure them, click on the menu Locales > Regional Settings.

Color of Negative : In this field you can enter a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)

Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places your field will have on display.

Complete with Zeros : Enables the field value to be filled with zeros.

CURRENCY TYPE

Regional Settings : When you activate it you apply the regional settings for this field. To configure them, click on the menu Locales > Regional Settings.

Currency Format : When you enable this option the application will display the currency symbol according to the regional setting.

Color of Negative : In this field you can enter a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)

Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places your field will have on display.

Complete with Zeros : Enables the field value to be filled with zeros.

V I S U A L S E T T I N G S O F T O TA L I Z AT I O N I N G R O U P B Y

Font : Allows you to define the font used in the group by label.

Font Size : Allows you to set the font size used in the group by label.

Font Color : Label color in group by.

Background Color : Group by background color.

Bold Text : Enables or disables the group by label in bold.

Text Alignment : Sets the horizontal positioning of text.

Vertical text alignment : Sets the vertical positioning of text.

V I S U A L S E T T I N G S O F T H E G E N E R A L T O TA L

Font : Allows you to define the font used in the group by label.

Font Size : Allows you to set the font size used in the group by label.

Font Color : Label color in group by.

Background Color : Group by background color.

Bold Text : Enables or disables the group by label in bold.

Text Alignment : Sets the horizontal positioning of text.

Vertical text alignment : Sets the vertical positioning of text.

Layout
HEADER

In this configuration, you can define the information that will be displayed in the header and footer of the summary.
 7

This screen may vary depending on the header format you choose within the Display folder.

Display Header : This flag determines whether the header will be displayed.

Summary Title: Lets you enter a title to be displayed in the application.

Variables : Variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox, depending on the type you need to associate a content with the required one. Below you describe the
existing types:
Field: When the “ Field” option is chosen, it will open a Combobox next to the fields that are part of the “Select”. By choosing one of these fields, you are associating the value of the field
to display in the Header or Footer.
Date : When “ Date” type is selected, the system date in mm/dd/yyyy format will be displayed in the Application Header or Footer. There are several display formats using the date
and time of the server. The format can be entered in the text field next to it. To access existing formats click on and an explanatory window will appear.

Image : When the image type field is selected, a field for filling in the image name on the server appears. To locate the existing images and select one, click on the “ Choose Image ”
icon and to make new images available on the server click on “Upload ” .

Value : When “ Value ” type is selected, the content that is filled in the text field next to option, appears in the Header or Footer. You can enter texts and “ Global variables ”. Ex:
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

FOOTER

This screen may vary depending on the Footer format you choose within the Display folder.

Display Footer: This flag determines whether the Footer will be displayed in the application.

Variables: Variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox, depending on the type you need to associate a content with the required one. Below
you describe the existing types:

Field: When the “ Field” option is chosen, it will open a Combobox next to the fields that are part of the “Select”. By choosing one of these fields, you are associating the value of the field
to display in the Header or Footer.
Date : When “ Date” type is selected, the system date in mm/dd/yyyy format will be displayed in the Application Header or Footer. There are several display formats using the date
and time of the server. The format can be entered in the text field next to it. To access existing formats click on and an explanatory window will appear.

Image : When the image type field is selected, a field for filling in the image name on the server appears. To locate the existing images and select one, click on the “ Choose Image ”
icon and to make new images available on the server click on “Upload ” .

Value : When “ Value ” type is selected, the content that is filled in the text field next to option, appears in the Header or Footer. You can enter texts and “ Global variables ”. Ex:
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Search
To define the fields that will be used in the summary search, use drag-and-drop to position the fields within Search Fields.

The order of the fields, within Search Fields, will be the display order in the generated application.

This search works only in Grid summary.

 8
Editing Fields

The same field can be added more than once to the search, these fields will be visible in the generated application since it uses distinct settings, if they are using the same
configuration only one of the fields will be displayed.

The display settings of the fields are performed individually, and can be accessed by adding the field in the search and clicking edit.

you will separate the explanation of the display settings from the fields according to the types.

Types: Text/Special

Configuration interface for text and special fields.

Choose Component

you must define how the field is used in the search. Each field type, text, number, and date have different configuration options.

Search field label : Defines the label of the field that will be displayed in the search.

Choose component type : It defines the format of use of the fields in the search, for text fields you have the Select Box and the Multiselect box.

Lookup

In this tab, you can configure the display lookup in the search field. For more information on creating a view lookup, access Application > Grid > Fields > Text.

Types: Date/Time

Configuration interface for date and date time fields.

Choose Component

you must define how the field is used in the search. Each field type, text, number, and date have different configuration options.

Search field label : Defines the label of the field that will be displayed in the search.

Choose component type : Defines the format of use of the fields in the search, for fields date and datetime, youwill have the following options: Date Range, Actual Period, Relative Period and
Seasonal Period.

C H O O S E V A L U E S - D AT E R A N G E

For datetime fields, you must enable the option Include Time so that the hours can be included in the search.
 9

CHOOSE VALUES - ACTUAL PERIOD

You must define the period that will be used in the search. When running the application, you will have a select with the dates displayed according to the selected period.

C H O O S E V A L U E S - R E L AT I V E P E R I O D

You must define which periods are available for use in the search.

CHOOSING VALUES - SEASONAL PERIOD

The available values are separated by tabs:

Quarter: Defines the quarters used in the search.

Month: Defines the usage of the months of the year.

Week : Defines the usage of the weeks of the year.

Week Day : Defines the use of the days of the week.

Day: Defines the usage of the days of the month.

Only Time: Defines the use of the day time (Available only in the datetime field)

Types: Number
Configuration interface for numeric fields.

Choose Component

you must define how the field is used in the search. Each field type, text, number, and date have different configuration options.

Search field label : Defines the label of the field that will be displayed in the search.

Choose function to apply : Defines the function that will be used in the search for setting the value. For example, when choosing sum, the range is the range between the lowest and the result
of the sum greater.
Actual Values : This option sets the display of the actual value of the field, saved in the database, without the use of any of the aggregate functions. When using this option, two types of
searches, select box and Multiselect box usage are added, as well as enabling lookup settings for numeric fields.
 10
Choose component type : Define the format used for the fields in the search, for numeric fields, you have the Range and selecting Actual Values will be displayed Select Box and Multiselect
box.

Lookup
For numeric fields, this option is available only when you use the Actual Values option and the way the field is used in the search is Select box or Multiselect box .

In this tab, you can create a display lookup in the search field. For more information about creating view lookup, go to Application > Grid > Fields > Integer.
 1
Search options
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › SEARCH OPTIONS

Settings
In the area below you can define all the options that’ll be part of the of the Search Form.

Search configuration Interface.

Attributes

Search Criteria : Allows to select the SQL command AND or OR to define the criteria of the search used;

Display Condition : Displays the condition of the search for the user to choose. In this case “AND” or “OR” will display in the search form, so that the user can choose the desired option.

Use auto-complete in the fields : The field turns into an autocomplete automatically according to the existing values in the database, If the user chooses Yes, the autocomplete will enable
automatically in all the fields that contain a relationship. If the user chooses No no autocompletes will be displayed. In the case the option selected is Defined in the field it’ll respect the
configuration individually for each field.

Search Criteria

Search configuration Interface.

In this interface, you can configure the conditions for each field of the Search form when filtering the SQL, on the left combo is displayed the field. The combo on the right are
listed the options for filtering the selected field, to select the options just click on them (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains and etc.) and the button On/Off. The arrows on the
right allows to alter the order of the fields.

For the Date type fields, you can define special conditions for the search, accessing the field configurations and editing the Special Conditions Settings.

Below the list are the buttons to enable the selected options:

On/Off : Enables or disables the field or the selected option.

All : Marks all fields or options.

None : Un marks all the fields or options.

Advanced Search
Settings

Through the table below we set all the options that will be part of the application Grid Search.
 2

Search Configuration Interface.

Attributes
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to define the horizontal alignment for the Search Form.

Margins : Allows to position the margins of the Search Form.

Keep Values : When enabled, the values from the search is maintained when the user returns to the search form.

Keep Columns and Order Selection : allows you to determine whether, at each filter, the values selected for the query and sort fields must be preserved, that is, at each filter, these
values return to the original condition.

Select fields

*Interface for filter fields selection.

Required
Defines which fields of application will be required for the search.

Required fields interface.

The application generated will be displayed a bullet (*) next to the field and an error message is generated if not assigned no value.

Configuration interface of the marker placement.

Marker position : Marker’s position relative to the field.

Display message : Displays whether or not the validation error message.

Toobar

Desktop

The toolbar of the application is divided in two parts: Top and Bottom, in a way that’s possible to define the buttons that’ll be displayed in both bars. The selection of buttons in
the top and bottom toolbar work independently allowing the buttons to display in both bars at the same time.
 3

Toolbar Interface.

Toolbar (Top / Bottom) : Allows to select and order buttons that’ll be displayed in the Search toolbar, according to what you desire. In this case, you just need to use the arrows beside the list
of buttons.

BUTTON SETTINGS

Button Settings Interface.

Button : References a Button from the toolbar.

Label : Allows to modify the Buttons label.

Hint : Allows to apply a Hint to the button.

Shortcut key : Allows to define shortcuts to the button from the keyboard.

OPTIONS

Options Interface.

Button Position(Top / Bottom) Positioning the buttons of the toolbar Top / Bottom.

Mobile

Save Search

This feature allows to organize search profiles, it creates an option Save Filter in a Search application, this way it’s possible to save the search done previously. You can add some
rules. With these details you can save a search done by the user login.

Save Filter Interface.

 4

Save Filter Interface.

Events

In event blocks can be used global variables, local, JavaScript code, CSS codes and Scriptcase macros.

ONSCRIPTINIT

This event runs the moment that the scripts of the application is initialized. This is executed before the event OnLoad ( when present ), although, it’s always executed when
running, reloading or navigating in the application.

ONREFRESH

This event runs when the refresh option of the application is enabled.

ONSAVE

This event runs when the application saves the record.

O N V A L I D AT E

This event runs when validating the information of the fields, when submitting the form.

Layout

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

BLOCKS

Conceptually a block is a “container” where you can position the fields of the Applications: Form, Control or Grid with Slide orientation.

By default, the applications created in ScriptCase are built with a only one block, with the same name as the application. You can add the amount of blocks that you want to
organize in a more convenient way. The page below, observe that theirs a column Organization, and that is where you’ll define if the next block will be set beside or below the
current one.

Application Block configuration

On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second
is to delete the block.

Organizing the position of the Blocks

See below how to modify the display order of the Blocks in one Page.

Click and drag the block that you desire to modify to its new position.

Application Block Display configuration

See how to remove a block from display

Click on the block desired and drag it to the item “Blocks not Shown”. This way, you can also drag the block to another page if desired. See the images below.
 5

Application Block Display configuration

Application Block Display configuration

Attributes
Block
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Title
Display : Flag that controls the title display of the block.

Label
Display : Flag that controls id the label of the fields will be displayed in the block.

Position : Options to display label :

Above : The label will be displayed above the field.

Beside : The label will be displayed beside the field.

Below : The label will be displayed below the field.

Fields
Columns : Amount of columns that are displayed side by side in the block.

Position : The way that the fields are displayed in the block :
Below : The fields are displayed one below the other respecting the amount of columns.

Beside : The fields are displayed one beside the other respecting the amount of columns.

Line : The fields are displayed one beside the other without the tabulation.

Organization
Next : The way that the blocks are displayed in the page:
Below : Indicates that the next block will be placed below the current one.

Beside : Indicates that the next block will be placed beside the current one.

Tabs : Indicates that the next block will be placed in a different tab then the current one.

Width : Specifies the width that block will occupy in pixels or percentage, in case the value is in percentage, inform the (%).

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

Create New Block

To include new blocks in an Application, click on the button . Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the name and label of the block. At the end
click on Create.

Creating application blocks configuration

Attributes
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Edit Blocks

To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the
parameters of the blocks. At the end click on save.
 6

Application Block editing interface

Attributes
Name : Name of the block.

Title : Block title for display.

Display Title : This option, when active, allows to display the block title.

Title Font : Font applied to the block title.

Font Size : Size of the font applied to the block title.

Font Color : Font color for the block title.

Background Color : Background Color of the block title.

Background image : Background image for the block title.

Title Height : Height in pixels of the block title line.

Horizontal Alignment : Horizontal Alignment of the block title (Left, Center and Right).

Vertical Alignment : Vertical Alignment the block title (Top, Middle and Bottom).

Display Label : Display the labels of the fields in the block.

Columns : Amount of field columns in a block.

Columns Width : How the width of the block is defined.

Label Color : Color of the field labels.

Fields Organization : How the fields are organized in the block.

Label Position : Position of the field labels relating to the data.

Next Block : Position of the next block relating to the current block.

Border Color : Border color for the block.

Border Width : Border Width for the block.

Block Width : Width for the block.

Block Height : Height for the block.

Cell Spacing : Cell Spacing in the block.

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

L AY O U T S E T T I N G S

On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.
 7

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

HEADER & FOOTER

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.
 8
Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Dynamic Search
This feature allows the user to search records the application without leaving the current screen, the developer needs to indicate which fields will be available.

Settings

Dynamic Search configuration Interface

Use the ENTER key to : Use the Enter key to tabulate from one field to the other, or to submit the search.

Select Fields

Dynamic Search Field Selection.

QuickSearch
Quick Search is an option that allows to search data in various fields of the application, by using the text box in the toolbar.
 9

Application running QuickSearch.

QuickSearch Settings

In the quicksearch settings are the following options:

QuickSearch Configuration Interface.

Button within the search - An option to inform if the search button will be in the text area of the box. Quicksearch show combo box - Displays a combo box if there’s only one
option in the quicksearch. Quicksearch Watermark - Displays a Placeholder in the quicksearch. Quicksearch width - Defines the width of the Quicksearch field. Display the Quick
search old format - Displays in the old format with the selection of the fields in the Quick search. Search anywhere - If enabled, QuickSearch will search each part of the String for
the data informed in the field.

Select Fields

In the Quicksearch Settings you need to define the fields that are part of the search.

QuickSearch selecting fields Interface.

And you can select various criteria of the search.

 10

QuickSearch search criteria configuration Interface.

You need to add the QuickSearch button in the toolbar in order to use it.

Fields
Text

Text field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text, you can inform a Text value to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Text Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 11

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 12

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Integer
 13

Integer field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Integer, you can inform number values to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Integer Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Integer Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Use Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

 14
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 15

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Decimal

Decimal field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Decimal, it’s allowed to define the format of a decimal number.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 16
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Decimal Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Decimal Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.
 17
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 18

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Percent

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT
 19

Percentage Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.
 20
Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 21

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Currency

Currency field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Currency, you can currency values to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Currency Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Currency Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 22
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 23

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Percent ( Calculated )

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 24
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 25
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 26

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Date

Date field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Date, you can inform a date.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Date Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator attribute.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Display : Select the format of the day for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters A, M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.

Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.

Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.

Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.

View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.

Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

 27
Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Date Field Special Conditions.

All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in today’s date.

Yesterday : Searches in yesterday’s date.

Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).

This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.

Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 28
Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 29

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Time

Time field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Time, you can inform a time to this field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Time Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from TIME. You need to use the characters HH , II , and SS that correspond to Day, Hour , Minutes and
Seconds.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Time Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 30

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 31

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Datetime
 32

Datetime field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Datetime, you can inform a date and time to this field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Datetime Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the day/time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from DATETIME . You need to use the characters A, M, D , HH , II , and SS that correspond to Year, Month,
Day, Hour , Minutes and Seconds.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.

Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.

Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.

Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.

View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.

Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Datetime Field Special Conditions.

All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in todays date.

Yesterday : Searches in yesterdays date.

Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).

This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.

Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.

Display Settings
 33
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 34

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Select
 35

Select field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combo box (Select Field).

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.
 36

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a
different delimiter then (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 37
Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Link : Allows to create a link to another form allowing to manipulate the list displayed on the select field. After the manipulation, the select object it updated
automatically.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :
 38

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the select field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

 39
Label Valor Inicio Tamanho

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
 40
4
Attribute PleasureDescription
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Configuração do lookup de edição Múltiplos Valores (Binário)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing
 41

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 42
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 43

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

DOUBLE SELECT

Double Select field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Double Select, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Double Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Automatic Lookup Interface..

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT key_field ,
display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

 44
Height : Allows to define the height(lines) of the field interface.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different delimiter then
(;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the option Display
original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

 45
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 46

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Checkbox

Checkbox field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Checkbox, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Checkbox Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

 47
Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
 48
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the checkbox field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).
 49

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

Label Value Start Size

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (binary)

 50
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.
 51

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 52
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 53

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Radio

Radio field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Radio, your allowed to select one of the options listed.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 54
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Radio Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.
 55

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 56

Manual Lookup Interface.

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the radio.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing
 57

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 58
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 59

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Grid Fields

Grid fields Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to “Grid Fields”, you can set the fields that’ll be part of the Grid table.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.
 60
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 61

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Sorting

Sorting field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to “Sorting”, you can set the sorting of the fields that’ll be part of the Grid table.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.
 62
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 63

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Text Auto-Complete

Text Auto-Complete field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate an
internal Text for the data.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 64
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Text Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the seach when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 65

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 66
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 67

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Number Auto-Complete

![Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_número_auto] Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search
Configuration.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Number auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate
an internal number for the data.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Number Auto-Complete Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 68

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 69

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 70

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › APPLICATION

Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.

Application Configuration Interface

Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.

Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.

Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.

Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.

Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.

Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.

Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.

Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Folder : Folder where the application’s stored in the work group.

Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.

Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.

HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.

Error Settings

Error Settings Interface.

Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.

SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.

Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.

Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
 2
Navigation
Defines the attributes of the navigation of one application to another.

Navigation Interface.

Attributes
Exit URL : URL on which the user will be redirected when exiting the application.

Close on Exit : When exiting the application, close the browser window.

Redirect URL : URL to redirect in case there isn’t any global variables available.

Redirect Variable : Name of the variable that’ll be stored the URL of a real application.

Global Variables
This screen shows the global variables in the application.

The global variable is an external parameter required for running the application. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause, field definitions and names,
event programming, and so on.

Global variables are defined in brackets ([variable]). These variables must be passed to the application being implemented through one of the methods: Session, Post, and Get

Global variables Interface.

Example:

Select CustomerID, CustomerName from Customers WHERE CustomerID = '[v_customerid]'

In this case, the variable v_customerid appears in the global variables configuration.

Global variables configuration Interface.

Shows all global variables used in the application

Attribute : name of the variable in the application.

Value : Defines the behavior of the variables, this content is divided in three blocks, they are:
Scope : Defines how the variable is received by the application. If a variable has been defined that it’s received by a POST method and has been approved by the GET method, the
content is not accepted. Methods of passing variable values:

Session : In this option, the variable must be created as a PHP session variable by another application.

GET : Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that is, visible by the browser.

POST : Defines that the variable must be passed through the POST method of a HTML form.

Settings : Does not validate (check) the variable at runtime.

Type (In / Out) : Defines whether the variable is input or output.

Description : Indicates where the variable is being used.

 1
Links
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › LINKS

New link

Links menu interface.

When you click the “New Link” item from ScriptCase application menu will, the screen below will be displayed.

Interface for creating links

Application Link
Used to edit records of a Grid Application by using a Form Application. In the generated Grid you’ll view a link for each record to edit the records. Clicking on the link, the

form selected can be displayed in various ways (in an iframe, in the same window or on another window).

Application Link creation interface.

List of Applications

Application Link list of applications available.

Application: You need to select the form application that’s going to be called by the Grid Application.

Parameters Definition
 2

Parameters Definition Interface.

On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option that’s going to be set to the parameter. The options are:

Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

Fiels Link
Used to create a link of a navigation in a column to any application of the project. When selecting the field link type, it’s displayed a select field with all the field displayed in the
Grid application.

Field Link creation interface.

List of Applications
It’s possible to create a field link to all the applications of the project (Menus, Searches, Reports PDF, Grid, Tabs, Form (Update Mode) and Control). You need to select an
application to proceed.

Field Link list of applications available.

Parameters Definition
 3

Parameters Definition Interface.

On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option that’s going to be set to the parameter. The options are:

Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

Capture Link
The capture is used specially in the Form and in the Grid Search. This type of link imports the data of another Grid to a Form or Search Field. When selecting a capture link type,
it’ll display a list of fields of the Search Form. You need to choose a files to receive the data through the link.

Capture Link creation interface.

List of Applications
It’s possible to create a capture link to the Grid Application. You need to select an application to proceed.

Capture Link list of applications available.

Parameters Definition

Parameters Definition Interface.

Fetch field value : You need to select the field that’ll call the Grid Application. This field will have the values informed when returned from the Grid Search.

Select values to pass as parameters : This option is displayed when the Grid Application has a parameter; like a Where clause for example that receives a global variable. The options for the
values that can be passed as a parameter are:
Fixed : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

 4
Button Link
Used to link a Grid application to any other type applications. In this type of link, a button is used like a link between the Grid and other applications.

Button Link creation interface.

Links Edit
In the Link Folder of the Application Menu (Image Below) are displayed the links existing in the application and also the item New Link. When clicking on the existing link it’s
displayed the screen below that allows to manage the links.

Editing Links.

Actions

Properties Change the behavior of the link, position, and how the link opens.
Link Change the application that’s being called in the link their parameters.
Delete Remove the existing link.

Link Propeties
On the screen below, you can see the attributes relevant to the link behavior of that need to be informed.

Link properties Interface.

Link Operation Mode :

Open in the same Window : Displays the Form in the same browser window.

Open in another Window : Displays the Form in another window of the browser.

Open in Iframe : The Form will be displayed in the same window, allowing to position below, above, to the left or right of the Grid.

Open in Parent : If the Grid is in a iframe, it displays the Form in the parent viewport of the page.

Modal : Opens the Form in modal, allowing to configure the size of the modal.

Display button (new row) on the grid toolbar : This option, when enabled, adds a button to the toolbar that allows to add a New Record to the Form.

Label for the button New : You can apply a Label for the button, if not informed the label will be “New”.

Hint for the button New : You can apply a Hint for the button, if not informed the hint will be “New”.

Hotkey for the button “New” : Indicates which key will be the shortcut for the New Record.

Exit URL for the target application : The URL that’s going to call after exiting the Form. In case no value is informed, the “back” button will redirect to the Grid.

Form Property

Allows to select the buttons that are going to be displayed in the Form through the link. Form properties configurations Interface.

Enable insert button on target application : Enables the Insert Button in the Form.

Enable update button on target application : Enables the Update Button in the Form.

Enable delete button on target application : Enables the Delete Button in the Form.

Enable navigation button on target application : Enables the navigation buttons (first, previous, next and last) in the Form.

Enable button to edit a grid record : Enables the edit button for each record.

Iframe properties
 5

These options are displayed when the property Link Operation Mode is set to “Open in Iframe”. Iframe properties

configurations Interface.

Display the header of the called application : Displays the header of the Form.

Iframe position relative to the main application : It can be: below, above, right or left.

Action After Insert view the list below :

Reload Grid : Does a refresh on the current page.

Move to the end of the grid : Navigate to the last page of the Grid.

Iframe height : Iframe Height in pixels.

Iframe width : Iframe Width in pixels.

 1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › GRID › PROGRAMMING

In this version of ScriptCase is incorporated the concept of programming, with the use of attributes, methods, resources and libraries. In the previous version it was already
possible to create business rules in applications using this concept the big difference now is that this can be done in a more organized, facilitating both the development as the
understanding of the rule by another developer.

Attributes
The attributes are variables that has the global scope declared in the application. An attribute that can be referenced in all the methods and events of the application.

Attributes configuration Interface.

Attributes
Attribute Name : This field, allows to inform the name of the attribute, after typing the name just click on include. In case you want to update click on the name of the attribute (located
on the tight side of the buttons), do the necessary modifications and click on update. In case it’s necessary to delete an attribute, it’s necessary to do same process as the update, but
when selecting the attribute, it’s necessary to click on the delete button. The clear button, as the name suggests, it clears the list of all the attributes listed on the right.

Internal Libraries
To use the internal libraries just select the correspondent ( Project Libraries for example). This process allows the methods existing in the library, to be visible in all the Events and
Methods of the application. See how to manage the libraries by clicking here.

Internal Libraries managment Interface

PHP Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.

Creating a new method

PHP method creation Interface

Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.

Include Method.

Methods can receive parameters.

 2

Add the amount of variables: PHP method parameter definition

Defining the variables: Defining the variables

Name : Type in the name of the variable.

Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.

Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.

Editing a parameter:

: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Edit the selected parameter of the list.

: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

 1
Charts
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › CHARTS

This application is designed for creating dynamic charts based on SQL or Procedures.

Inside the Scriptcase Charts can be created also within the Grid application, however the application Chart has more settings options to the end user within the application
generated. The idea is to apply the concept of Business Intelligence so the final system users can apply their own settings within the generated charts.

Settings within the development area use Drag and Drop for the charts creation. You can apply dimensions and metrics dynamically using different date periods and totals.

Dimensions
Dimensions are used to group the data into categories. You can choose more than one field as a dimension, each new field as a subcategory of the previous field.

To select a field, click on its name in the “Chart Fields” area and drag it to the “Dimensions” column.

Once selected the fields, you can sort them using the drag and drop to arrange the dimensions’ final display. You can choose different periods to date fields and use the same
date field more than once, with different periods. All the dimensions listed in “Dimensions” can be used by the system final user within the Chart application. You can also define
whether dimensions will be displayed or not when you start the application by selecting the checkbox.

Chart

dimensions. Field settings

Metrics
The metric is used to quantitatively view the data grouped by dimensions. Choose the fields for the chart’s metrics.

To select a field, click on its name in the “Chart Fields” area and drag it to the “Metrics” column. Once selected the fields, you can sort them using the drag and drop to arrange the
metrics’ final display, you can also chose the total function according to the field data type.

All the dimensions listed in “Metrics” can be used by the system final user within the Chart application. You can also define whether metrics will be displayed or not when you
start the application by selecting the checkbox.

The checked field value is used to set the default field just when you are not using a combination or stacked chart types, that use more than one field. If you choose more then
one field Scriptcase automatically sets a value multiple chart type (Combination). You can change the initial chart inside the option “Charts’ type” within the “Settings”. When you
check a single value (bar, line, Spline, step, Area, pie, pyramid, funnel, Radar and Gauge) you have to click and choose only one field to appear as initial value during the first
generation.
 2

Chart

Metrics.

Sorting
You can select which chart value will be ordered to start the application, and if the sort will be “ascending” or “descending”.

Chart sorting.

Initial sorting : Using this option you can set the default sorting (ascending or descending). The system final user will also be able to customize it within the generated application.

Dimension : Application starts with dimension fields sorting (ascending or descending according to the “Initial sorting”).

Metric : Application starts with metric fields sorting (ascending or descending according to the “Initial sorting”).

Search
In the “Search” option you can choose the fields that will be used as static search on the chart, the application data will be initially filtered according to the settings you apply. The
search values are chosen for each selected field during development, the final user will not be able to change that.

You are also able to apply other search options such as the Dynamic Search using the option “Search > Dynamic Search” (located on the left menu) and the “refined” search using
the option “Chart > Search”. These two types are dynamic, it means that the end user will be able to manipulate them within the generated application.
 3

Static search.

Chart options
In the tab “Chart” the developer sets other default options for the chart that will be generated such as chart type, color, theme and others. Find more details below.

Chart options.

Attributes
Chart’s type : Allows you to define the type of chart that is going to be displayed by “Default”.

Font size : Font size of the values, if leave the field blank, the size 12 is assumed.

Abbreviated value : Values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.

Display Values : Starts already displaying the values of the generated chart.

Exception for display : Types of chart that will not display the chart values, even when marked for display. These type did not recommend that the values are displayed, for aesthetic
issues, it is, however, at the discretion of the developer.

Label orientation on the x-axis : Default width in pixels of the generated charts.
 4
Chart Height : Standard height in pixels of the generated charts.

Values sorting : Sorts charts values.

Analytic or Synthetic : Sets whether the dimensions of the chart will be raises the analytical (single series) or synthetic (multiple series) mode, i.e. If it is grouped or use the drill down.

Grand Total : Check the Grand Total option to group all the values in one. This option is typically used in charts of the Gauge. *Range of data Groups all the values in one. This option is
typically used in the Gauge type. This option will only be displayed if you set the Gauge charts to be used. You will be able to set the base value (with intervals in percentage) and the
intervals (add the intervals according to your need).
 1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › SETTINGS

Chart settings
In the chart Setup screen the user can change some application viewing options, which charts will be displayed, the labels, margins and alignments. Below detailing each of the
available attributes

Chart settings interface

Attributes
Responsive Desktop : By checking this option the Chart will automatically adapt itself to the user’s screen according to the size of the browser.

Chart title : This option allows you to set a title for the chart.

Available chart types : List of available chart types for user’s choice within the final application via the button “Chart Types”. The graphics checked will be available, if the developer does
not want to display a chart type must do not check them in this interface.

Label for quantity : Label the y-axis for generic values of the record count.

Label for summarization : Label the y-axis for generic values of the summary functions - sum, average, weighted average, maximum and minimum.

Friendly URL : This field allows you to change the URL that will be called by the application. Allowed characters are the same available on URLs: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_. This option can also be
changed on the home screen, on the “Friendly URL” column at the applications list.

Horizontal Alignment : This option allows you to set the horizontal alignment of the application on page-centered, left or right

Margins : Sets the application margins in pixels (up, down, right and left).

Refresh Interval : Allows you to set a reload interval for the page, in seconds. When is set as zero, there will be no page reload.
 1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › TOOLBAR

The application’s toolbar is divided into two parts: Top Toolbar and Bottom Toolbar, so that it is possible to define which buttons will be displayed in one or both positions. The
buttons selection for the top and bottom toolbars are independent, for example, a button can be positioned in the two bars at the same time.

You can also organize the toolbar according to the device and separate which buttons will be displayed when the application is accessed on a mobile device or desktop, and its
respective positions on the toolbar.

Desktop : Within this option the toolbar can be organized for exhibition type “Classic Web Version”, i.e, these configurations will be used when the application is accessed by a Desktop .

Mobile : Within this option the toolbar can be organized for exhibition type “Mobile Version”, i.e, these configurations will be used when the application is accessed by a Mobile.

Toolbar
Find below the description for the toolbar options.

Chart

toolbar settings

Navigation : Within this attribute you can find the options to set the Chart navigation buttons.
Exit: Ends the application.

Export : Sets the format available for generating exports. ScripCase can generate exports in the following file formats:
PDF : Creates a complete report with all Chart data within a PDF file type.

Print : Creates a complete report with all Chart data within a HTML printable page

Chart
Summary : Creates a link button to access the Summary Module.

Sorting options : Creates a button to manage the fields sorting dynamically, you can configure the sorting options within the option “Charts » Sorting

Chart types : Buttons to define the types of charts that will be displayed within the application generated.

Others : Some more options available for the application, according to its settings. * Search : Creates a link button to access the Advanced Search form (Filter module). Settings for this button
can be configured within the option “Search » Settings » Advanced Search”.
Dynamic Search : Creates a link button to access the fields for the Dynamic Search. Settings for this button can be configured within the option “Search » Settings » Dynamic Search”.

Languages: Creates a combo box with the languages added to the project during the project creation. You can add or remove languages to your project or application accessing the
main menu “Project » Properties » Locales”.
*Themes: Creates a combo box with the themes added to the project during the project creation. You can add or remove application CSS themes to your project or application
accessing the main menu “Project » Properties » Themes”.

Separator
————————-: Creates a separation line between the buttons for better display, specially for grouped buttons

Button Settings
Button Group : The Group allows to create group buttons.
 2

Add Button Groups

Button Group Configuration

Name : Allows to define a name for the button group.

Label : Allows to define a name for the button group that’s going to be displayed for the user.

Hint\Title : Allows to define a hint for the group of buttons that’s going to be displayed to the user.

Button Type : Allows to define a display format for the button group ( Button, Image, Link).

Image : Allows to define an image for the button if its display format is and Image.

Display : Defines if the button will display only the Text, only the image or both.

Display Position : Defines the position of the Text or Image ( Text to the right, Image to the right ).

After creating a button group, its necessary to position the buttons below the Button Group and to the right. Like the image below:

Positioning the buttons of the button group

Mobile toolbar
 3

Positioning the mobile buttons

Contains the same options as the Desktop version, adding only the item “Copy from Desktop”, on which, when clicked it copies the items from the Desktop toolbar to the
Mobile toolbar.
 1
Export
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › EXPORT

PDF Settings

PDF export configuration

Attributes

PDF Orientation Allows to define the orientation in Portrait or Landscape if the print.
PDF Format Allows to define the format that the PDF will be printed in (Letter, A4, etc).
Print Type Defines the print color (Black/White or Color).
Records per Page Applies to the Grids with the horizontal alignment, also defines the amount of records that’ll be printed per page.
Rows per Page in Summary Define the amount of records printed in the summary PDF.
Complete Lines Until Footer Complete with the empty line until the footer.
Open PDF Directly Open the PDF file without using a page in between to display a link to the file.
Create Charts Create the summary charts in the PDF.
Configurable PDF Allows the user to configure the parameters to create the PDF during runtime.
Generate Bookmarks Generate the bookmarks automatically, the bookmarks are generated relating to the group by.
Page Numbers Format Number format of the page, if simple (1,2,3,4,5,…), Complete(1/n, 2/n, 3/n,…) or not use the Numbers.
Page numbering height Allows to align the numbers vertically, top or bottom.
Horizontal position of the page numbering Allows to align the numbers horizontally (Left, Center, Right).
Margin The value informed needs to be in millimeters so that it can be applied to the PDF margins (Top, Bottom, Right, Left).
Print Background Allows to print the background in the PDF file.
JS execution time Time(milliseconds) for the server to wait for the JS to run in the HTML file.
Timeout for chart’s image creation Time to generate each chart individually in the PDF.

Print options

Chart print options

Print type Allows you to set the print mode for the file (Both, Black & White, Color).
Print background Allows you to define whether the background will appear for printing.
 1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › SQL

SQL Settings

Grid SQL

configuration

SQL Select Statement Allows you to define the main SQL of the application. You can edit this SQL to add or delete fields.
Limit Lets you limit the amount of records that will be retrieved by SQL for the view in the query.
SQL Preparation You can enter SQL commands or procedure names that should be executed before the main select of the application.
Connection Displays the name of the connection used. This connection can be changed to another connection that has the same table.
Use Customized Message Lets you define whether the “no records” message is displayed.
No Records Message Allows you to set the message to be displayed if the query does not return any records.
Font Lets you set the font for the message, click the icon next to it field and choose the font. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Font Size Allows you to set the font size. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Font Color Allows you to set the font color. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Variable for Table These fields informed with value, allows part of the table name defined in the select to be changed before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.
The first field must be filled with the name of the variable. The second field must be filled with the part of the name of the table to be replaced.

Fields Variables Lets you exchange the name of a select field with the contents of a variable. This switch occurs before the command is executed.
The first field must contain the name of the variable, in the second field should be selected the name of the field to be replaced.

Case sensitive Allows you to configure whether the connection will be case sensitive or not. (Differentiating case).
 1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › SECURITY

Application Security Configuration

When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.
 1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › LOG

Application Log configuration

Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
 1
Campos
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › CAMPOS

On the application menu Fields, only the fields selected on the menu Select Fields are displayed.

Lista de campos da aplicação

For each selected field, a serie of atributes can be changed according to the type of the field selected.

Text
General Settings

Text field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a text, it accepts letters, numbers and special characteres.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 2

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 3

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 4

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 5
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Multiple Lines Text

General Settings

Multiple Lines Text field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Multiple Lines Text , you can inform a Text value to the field in multiple lines.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 6

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 7

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 8

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 9
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Integer
General Settings

Integer field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Ineger, it’s allowed to define the format of a number.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 10

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 11

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 12

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 13
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Decimal
General Settings

Decimal field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Decimal, it’s allowed to define the format of a decimal number.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 14

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 15

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 16

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 17
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Percent
General Settings

Percentage field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 18

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 19

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 20

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 21
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Currency
General Settings

Currency field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Decimal, it’s allowed to define the format of a currency number.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 22

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 23

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 24

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 25
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Percent(Calculated)
General Settings

Percentage field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 26

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 27

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 28

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 29
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Date
General Settings

Date field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Date and Time, it’s allowed to define the format of the date.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Date format : Format the dates used for the Group By.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

 30
Lookup Method - Automatic

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 31

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 32

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 33
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Time
General Settings

Time field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Time, it’s allowed to define the format of the time.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 34

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 35

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 36

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 37
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Date and Time

General Settings

Date and Time field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Date and Time, it’s allowed to define the format of the date.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Date format : Format the dates used for the Group By.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

 38
Lookup Method - Automatic

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 39

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 40

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 41
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Credit Card Number

General Settings

Credit Card Number Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Credit Card Number, it’s allowed to define some rules for the display format of the Credit Card.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 42

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 43

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 44

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 45
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

E-mail
General Settings

Email field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as an Email, when you click on the field you be offered a choice for your email client and send an email to that
specific email.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 46

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 47

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 48

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 49
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

URL
General Settings

URL field Configuration Interface.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é definido como URL, é permitido definir regras de formatação de URL.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 50

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 51

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 52

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 53
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Youtube
General Settings

Interface de configuração do campo youtube.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a YouTube, it allows to display a video from youtube on the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 54

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 55

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 56

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 57
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Google Maps
General Settings

Google Maps field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as Google Maps, it’ll use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Chart Applications

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 58

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 59

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 60

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 61
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Bar Code
General Settings

Configuration Interface of the Barcode Field.

Data Type : Datatype of the field for the application.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Inform the database field type.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 62

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 63

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 64

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 65
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

QRCode
Configuração Geral

QRCODE field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a QRCODE, allows you to set values into a QRCODE.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

 66

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .

The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

It’ll be displayed only one value for the field. And it’ll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
 67

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador that’ll be informed. It’s
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
 68

Setting up Multiple Values (position).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__

Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the Grid.

 69
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).

Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).

Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.

Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesn’t return any values.

Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, it’ll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the “Separated by” field.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.
 1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › LAYOUT

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

Header & Footer

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.
 2

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.
 3

Drag the selected option to the “Menu Items” area to create a new “Layer” where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the “Menu items” area.

After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the “pencil” icon to edit the layer options or click on the “trash” icon to delete it .

Layer editing

Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.

Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the “Menu Width” option
within the Menu “Settings”, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.

Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.

Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.

Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on “Application Title” within the menu “Header & Footer”.

Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y

Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.

Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].

Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option “Tools » External Libraries” from the main menu.

Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option “PHP Programming”
within the menu “Programming”

Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.

Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.

Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.

Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.

Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.

Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.

Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

 1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › EVENTS

Scriptcase uses the events to enable the developer to customize the application code. Using the events you can program custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a
record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, …) and for a specific application type. In the event areas you can use global and local variables, JavaScript, CSS,
HTML, PHP codes and also Scriptcase macros.

onApplicationInit
This event runs only once, when initializing the application.

OnScriptInit
This event runs the moment that the scripts of the application is initialized. This is executed before the event OnLoad ( when present ), although, it’s always executed when
running, reloading or navigating in the application.

onHeader
This event runs in the header of the application.

onFooter
This event runs in the footer of the application.
 1
Search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › SEARCH

Settings
In the area below you can define all the options that’ll be part of the of the Search Form.

Search configuration Interface.

Attributes

Search Criteria : Allows to select the SQL command AND or OR to define the criteria of the search used;

Display Condition : Displays the condition of the search for the user to choose. In this case “AND” or “OR” will display in the search form, so that the user can choose the desired option.

Use auto-complete in the fields : The field turns into an autocomplete automatically according to the existing values in the database, If the user chooses Yes, the autocomplete will enable
automatically in all the fields that contain a relationship. If the user chooses No no autocompletes will be displayed. In the case the option selected is Defined in the field it’ll respect the
configuration individually for each field.

Condições do Filtro

Search configuration Interface.

In this interface, you can configure the conditions for each field of the Search form when filtering the SQL, on the left combo is displayed the field. The combo on the right are
listed the options for filtering the selected field, to select the options just click on them (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains and etc.) and the button On/Off. The arrows on the
right allows to alter the order of the fields.

For the Date type fields, you can define special conditions for the search, accessing the field configurations and editing the Special Conditions Settings.

Below the list are the buttons to enable the selected options:

On/Off : Enables or disables the field or the selected option.

All : Marks all fields or options.

None : Un marks all the fields or options.

Advanced Search
Settings

Through these attributes you can define some general search settings such as alignment, width, search conditions, etc.
 2

Search settings interface.

Attributes
Horizontal Alignment : This option sets the application horizontal alignment;

Margins : Allows you to set the Search form positioning (margins).

Keep Values : When this option is activated the last searched values are going to be maintained and displayed when the system user returns to the search form screen.

Keep columns and sorting : This option determines if each search should preserve the selected values to the Grid fields columns and sorting, i.e. to each search, these values return to
original condition.

Select fields

Select fields interface.

Required
This interface has the options for you to select and set the Search form required fields.

Required fields interface.

Within the generated application will be displayed a marker(*) next to the field and an error message will also pops up if there’s no value assigned to the mandatory fields. You
will be able to set some options for the market using the options below.

Marker placement configuration interface.

Marker position : Marker’s position relative to the field (options are right, left or Do not display).

Display message : Displays whether or not the validation error message.

 3
Toolbar
Desktop

The toolbar of the application is divided in two parts: Top and Bottom, in a way that’s possible to define the buttons that’ll be displayed in both bars. The selection of buttons in
the top and bottom toolbar work independently allowing the buttons to display in both bars at the same time.

Toolbar Interface.

Toolbar (Top / Bottom) : Allows to select and order buttons that’ll be displayed in the Search toolbar, according to what you desire. In this case, you just need to use the arrows beside the list
of buttons.

BUTTON SETTINGS

Button Settings Interface.

Button : References a Button from the toolbar.

Label : Allows to modify the Buttons label.

Hint : Allows to apply a Hint to the button.

Shortcut key : Allows to define shortcuts to the button from the keyboard.

OPTIONS

Options Interface.

Button Position(Top / Bottom) Positioning the buttons of the toolbar Top / Bottom.

Mobile

Save Search
This feature allows to organize search profiles, it creates an option Save Filter in a Search application, this way it’s possible to save the search done previously. You can add some
rules. With these details you can save a search done by the user login.
 4

Save Filter Interface.

Save Filter Interface.

Events
Scriptcase uses the events to enable the developer to customize the application code. Using the events you can program custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a
record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, …) and for a specific application type. In the event areas you can use global and local variables, JavaScript, CSS,
HTML, PHP codes and also Scriptcase macros.

ONSCRIPTINIT

This event runs the moment that the scripts of the application is initialized. This is executed before the event OnLoad ( when present ), although, it’s always executed when
running, reloading or navigating in the application.

ONREFRESH

This event runs when the refresh option of the application is enabled.

ONSAVE

This event runs when the application saves the record.

O N V A L I D AT E

This event runs when validating the information of the fields, when submitting the form.

Layout

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

BLOCKS

Conceptually a block is a “container” where you can position the fields of the Applications: Form, Control or Grid with Slide orientation.

By default, the applications created in ScriptCase are built with a only one block, with the same name as the application. You can add the amount of blocks that you want to
organize in a more convenient way. The page below, observe that theirs a column Organization, and that is where you’ll define if the next block will be set beside or below the
current one.

Application Block configuration

On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second
is to delete the block.

Organizing the position of the Blocks

See below how to modify the display order of the Blocks in one Page.

Click and drag the block that you desire to modify to its new position.
 5

Application Block Display configuration

See how to remove a block from display

Click on the block desired and drag it to the item “Blocks not Shown”. This way, you can also drag the block to another page if desired. See the images below.

Application Block Display configuration

Application Block Display configuration

Attributes
Block
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Title
Display : Flag that controls the title display of the block.

Label
Display : Flag that controls id the label of the fields will be displayed in the block.

Position : Options to display label :

Above : The label will be displayed above the field.

Beside : The label will be displayed beside the field.

Below : The label will be displayed below the field.

Fields
Columns : Amount of columns that are displayed side by side in the block.

Position : The way that the fields are displayed in the block :
Below : The fields are displayed one below the other respecting the amount of columns.

Beside : The fields are displayed one beside the other respecting the amount of columns.

Line : The fields are displayed one beside the other without the tabulation.

Organization
Next : The way that the blocks are displayed in the page:
Below : Indicates that the next block will be placed below the current one.

Beside : Indicates that the next block will be placed beside the current one.

Tabs : Indicates that the next block will be placed in a different tab then the current one.

Width : Specifies the width that block will occupy in pixels or percentage, in case the value is in percentage, inform the (%).

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

Create New Block

To include new blocks in an Application, click on the button . Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the name and label of the block. At the end
click on Create.

Creating application blocks configuration

Attributes
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

 6
Edit Blocks

To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the
parameters of the blocks. At the end click on save.

Application Block editing interface

Attributes
Name : Name of the block.

Title : Block title for display.

Display Title : This option, when active, allows to display the block title.

Title Font : Font applied to the block title.

Font Size : Size of the font applied to the block title.

Font Color : Font color for the block title.

Background Color : Background Color of the block title.

Background image : Background image for the block title.

Title Height : Height in pixels of the block title line.

Horizontal Alignment : Horizontal Alignment of the block title (Left, Center and Right).

Vertical Alignment : Vertical Alignment the block title (Top, Middle and Bottom).

Display Label : Display the labels of the fields in the block.

Columns : Amount of field columns in a block.

Columns Width : How the width of the block is defined.

Label Color : Color of the field labels.

Fields Organization : How the fields are organized in the block.

Label Position : Position of the field labels relating to the data.

Next Block : Position of the next block relating to the current block.

Border Color : Border color for the block.

Border Width : Border Width for the block.

Block Width : Width for the block.

Block Height : Height for the block.

Cell Spacing : Cell Spacing in the block.

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

L AY O U T S E T T I N G S

On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.
 7

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

HEADER & FOOTER

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.
 8
Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Dynamic Search
This feature allows the user to search records the application without leaving the current screen, the developer needs to indicate which fields will be available.

Settings

Dynamic Search configuration Interface

Use the ENTER key to : Use the Enter key to tabulate from one field to the other, or to submit the search.

Select Fields

Dynamic Search Field Selection.

Fields
Text
 9

Text field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text, you can inform a Text value to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Text Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 10
Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 11

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Integer

Integer field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Integer, you can inform number values to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Integer Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT
 12

Integer Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Use Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 13
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 14

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Decimal

Decimal field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Decimal, it’s allowed to define the format of a decimal number.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Decimal Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Decimal Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings
 15
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 16

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Percent
 17

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Percentage Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 18

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 19

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Currency
 20

Currency field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Currency, you can currency values to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Currency Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Currency Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

 21
Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 22

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Percent ( Calculated )

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 23

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 24

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Date
 25

Date field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Date, you can inform a date.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Date Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator attribute.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Display : Select the format of the day for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters A, M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.

Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.

Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.

Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.

View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.

Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Date Field Special Conditions.

 26
All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in today’s date.

Yesterday : Searches in yesterday’s date.

Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).

This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.

Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 27
Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Time
 28

Time field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Time, you can inform a time to this field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Time Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from TIME. You need to use the characters HH , II , and SS that correspond to Day, Hour , Minutes and
Seconds.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Time Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

 29
Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 30

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Datetime

Datetime field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Datetime, you can inform a date and time to this field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 31
V A L U E S F O R M AT

Datetime Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the day/time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from DATETIME . You need to use the characters A, M, D , HH , II , and SS that correspond to Year, Month,
Day, Hour , Minutes and Seconds.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.

Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.

Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.

Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.

View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.

Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Datetime Field Special Conditions.

All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in todays date.

Yesterday : Searches in yesterdays date.

Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).

This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.

Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.
 32
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 33

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Select

Select field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combo box (Select Field).

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 34
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.
 35

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a
different delimiter then (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Link : Allows to create a link to another form allowing to manipulate the list displayed on the select field. After the manipulation, the select object it updated
automatically.
 36

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :
 37

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the select field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

 38
Label Valor Inicio Tamanho

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
 39
4
Attribute PleasureDescription
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Configuração do lookup de edição Múltiplos Valores (Binário)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 40

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 41

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

DOUBLE SELECT
 42

Double Select field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Double Select, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Double Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Automatic Lookup Interface..

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT key_field ,
display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Height : Allows to define the height(lines) of the field interface.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different delimiter then
(;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the option Display
 43
original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

 44
CSS of the Input Object
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 45

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Checkbox
Checkbox field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Checkbox, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Checkbox Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.
 46

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 47

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the checkbox field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .
 48
Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

Label Value Start Size

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
 49
16
Attribute Value Lookup
Music Description
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing
 50

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 51
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 52

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Radio

Radio field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Radio, your allowed to select one of the options listed.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Radio Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).
 53

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 54

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the radio.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 55

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

 56
Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 57

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Grid Fields

Grid fields Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to “Grid Fields”, you can set the fields that’ll be part of the Grid table.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.
 58
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 59

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Sorting

Sorting field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to “Sorting”, you can set the sorting of the fields that’ll be part of the Grid table.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings
 60
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 61

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Text Auto-Complete
 62

Text Auto-Complete field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate an
internal Text for the data.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Text Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the seach when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.
 63

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 64
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 65

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Number Auto-Complete
![Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_número_auto] Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search
Configuration.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Number auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate
an internal number for the data.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Number Auto-Complete Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

 66
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 67

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 68

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › APPLICATION

Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.

Application Configuration Interface

Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.

Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.

Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.

Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.

Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.

Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.

Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.

Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Folder : Folder where the application’s stored in the work group.

Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.

Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.

HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.

Error Settings

Error Settings Interface.

Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.

SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.

Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.

Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
 2
Navigation
Defines the attributes of the navigation of one application to another.

Navigation Interface.

Attributes
Exit URL : URL on which the user will be redirected when exiting the application.

Close on Exit : When exiting the application, close the browser window.

Redirect URL : URL to redirect in case there isn’t any global variables available.

Redirect Variable : Name of the variable that’ll be stored the URL of a real application.

Global Variables
This screen shows the global variables in the application.

The global variable is an external parameter required for running the application. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause, field definitions and names,
event programming, and so on.

Global variables are defined in brackets ([variable]). These variables must be passed to the application being implemented through one of the methods: Session, Post, and Get

Global variables Interface.

Example:

Select CustomerID, CustomerName from Customers WHERE CustomerID = '[v_customerid]'

In this case, the variable v_customerid appears in the global variables configuration.

Global variables configuration Interface.

Shows all global variables used in the application

Attribute : name of the variable in the application.

Value : Defines the behavior of the variables, this content is divided in three blocks, they are:
Scope : Defines how the variable is received by the application. If a variable has been defined that it’s received by a POST method and has been approved by the GET method, the
content is not accepted. Methods of passing variable values:

Session : In this option, the variable must be created as a PHP session variable by another application.

GET : Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that is, visible by the browser.

POST : Defines that the variable must be passed through the POST method of a HTML form.

Settings : Does not validate (check) the variable at runtime.

Type (In / Out) : Defines whether the variable is input or output.

Description : Indicates where the variable is being used.

 1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CHART › PROGRAMMING

In this version of ScriptCase is incorporated the concept of programming, with the use of attributes, methods, resources and libraries. In the previous version it was already
possible to create business rules in applications using this concept the big difference now is that this can be done in a more organized, facilitating both the development as the
understanding of the rule by another developer.

Attributes
The attributes are variables that has the global scope declared in the application. An attribute that can be referenced in all the methods and events of the application.

Attributes configuration Interface.

Attributes
Attribute Name : This field, allows to inform the name of the attribute, after typing the name just click on include. In case you want to update click on the name of the attribute (located
on the tight side of the buttons), do the necessary modifications and click on update. In case it’s necessary to delete an attribute, it’s necessary to do same process as the update, but
when selecting the attribute, it’s necessary to click on the delete button. The clear button, as the name suggests, it clears the list of all the attributes listed on the right.

Internal Libraries
To use the internal libraries just select the correspondent ( Project Libraries for example). This process allows the methods existing in the library, to be visible in all the Events and
Methods of the application. See how to manage the libraries by clicking here.

Internal Libraries managment Interface

PHP Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.

Creating a new method

PHP method creation Interface

Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.

Include Method.

Methods can receive parameters.

 2

Add the amount of variables: PHP method parameter definition

Defining the variables: Defining the variables

Name : Type in the name of the variable.

Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.

Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.

Editing a parameter:

: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Edit the selected parameter of the list.

: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

 1
Theme
HOME › APPLICATIONS › THEME

Preview
In this area you can customize the chart themes, you will be able to preview how it will look like according to each chart type.

If you customize the theme using this area, it will available only for the current application only. If you need to customize the theme and apply to other application, project and
users, then you will need to use the “Chart themes” option within the main menu “Layout > Chart themes”. There you will find the same interface with the option to save the
changes as “user level, project level or Scriptcase level”

Themes preview

Border
Activate this function to add a border around the chart area.

Border.

Border use : Not informed, use or do not use.

Not informed: This option will use the default option of the theme.

Use : Select the border as active, you will need to set the width.

Do not use : to remove or do not use the border.

 2
Color : Select the border color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.

Width : Sets the border width in pixels.

Opacity: Sets the border transparency.

Background
Options to configure the background color of the chart.

Background

Color : Select the background color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.

New color : Adds a new color for the background.

Opacity : Select background transparency.

Canvas
Options to configure the chart canvas.

Canvas

Background color : Selects the color of the canvas, and may report a value hexadecimal or choose picker.

New color : Adds a new color option.

Background alpha : Selects the background transparency.

Border use : Not informed, use or do not use.

Not informed: This option will use the default option of the theme.
 3
Use : Selects the border as active, you will need to set the width.

Do not use : to remove or do not use the border.

Color : Selects the canvas color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.

Width : Sets the border width in pixels.

Opacity: Sets the canvas transparency.

Title
Options to configure the formatting of the title.

Title

Title font : Selects the font, size, color, and formatting of the title.

Subtitle font : Selects the font, size, color and format of the subtitle to left, center or right.

Alignment : Selects the position of the title and subtitle.

Show on top : If this option is selected the title and the subtitle will be positioned above the chart, otherwise will be positioned below.

Axes
This option configures the formatting of the texts of the x and y axis

Axes

Font : Selects the font, size, color, and formatting of the axis.

Background color : Selects the background color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
 4
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the background color of the axis.

Border Color : Selects the color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.

Border width : Sets the width in pixels.

Border alpha: Sets the transparency.

Border dashed: If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option “Display” is checked.

Data
Options to set the chart’s data (bank records).

Data

Use gradient : Enables the data gradient.

Gradient color : Selects the gradient color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.

Gradient angle : Selects the angle of the gradient.

Gradient alpha : Selects the gradient transparency.

Show border : If this option is selected is activated the border in the data.

Border dashed : If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option “Display” is checked.

Use rounded border : This option leaves the rounded border.

Palette
Options to choose the colors of each chart palette.
 5

palette

Colors palette : Select the color of each chart palette.

Data title
Options to configure title formatting of data.

Data title

Display mode : Selects the display mode to “automatic”, “rotated”, “line break”, “in levels” and “None”, if the Automatic option is selected, select the default option.

Slant labels : Selects the number of levels to the data.

Font : Selects the font, and your formatting such as bold, italic, size and color of data.

Font alpha : Selects the transparency of data title font.

Background color : Select the background color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.

Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the background color of the title of data.

Border width : Sets the width in pixels.

Border alpha: Sets the transparency.

Border dashed: If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option “Display” is checked.
 6
Data values
Options to configure the formatting of data values.

Data values

Font : Selects the font, and your formatting such as bold, italic, size and color of the data values.

Font alpha : Select the transparency of the source of the data values.

Background color : Select the background color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.

Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the background color of the title of data.

Border Color : Selects the border color for the data values.

Border width : Selects the border width for the data values.

Border alpha : Selects the transparency of the color of the border of the data values.

Border dashed : If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option “Display” is checked.

Div Lines and Grids

Options to configure the Division of horizontal and vertical lines on the graph.

Div Lines and Grids

Amount of horizontal lines : Selects the amount of horizontal lines that will be shown in the chart.

Horizontal line color : Selects the horizontal line color.

Horizontal line thickness : Selects the thicker horizontal line.

Horizontal line alpha : Selects transparency horizontal line

 7
Horizontal line dashed : If this option is selected will horizontal line plot.

Color horizontal stripes : If this option is selected you can choose the horizontal line color.

Horizontal stripes color : Selects the color you wish to case “Coloring horizontal Ribbon” is checked.

Horizontal stripes alpha : Selects transparency horizontal ribbon.

Amount of vertical lines : Amount of vertical lines

Vertical line color : Selects the color of the vertical line.

Vertical line thickness : Selects the vertical line thicker.

Vertical line alpha : Select the transparency of the vertical track.

Vertical line dashed : If this option is selected will draw the vertical line.

Color vertical stripes : If this option is selected the developer can choose the color of the vertical line.

Vertical stripes color : Selects the color you wish to case “Color vertical stripes” is checked.

Vertical stripes alpha : Select the transparency of the vertical stripes.

Anchors
Options to configure anchors on the chart.

Anchors

Show anchors : Enables the anchors in the chart.

Anchor sides : Select the width of the anchor.

Anchor radius : Selects the size of anchor beam.

Background color : Select the color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.

Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the anchor.

Border Color : Select the anchors border color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.

Border width : Select the border width of the anchor.

Tooltip
Options to configure the tooltips in the chart.
 8

Tooltip

Background color : Select the tooltip color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.

Background alpha : Select the transparency of the background of the tooltip.

Border Color : Select the tooltip border color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker..

Shadow : Enable the shadow in the tooltip.

Tick marks
Option to the configure chart marks, this option is only possible for the “Gauge” charts.

Tick marks

Show tick marks : Enables the tick marks on the chart.

Place ticks inside : If this option is checked the marks of the chart will tile chart poker.

Show tick values : Show tick values

Show limits : If this option is selected will show the chart limits.
 9
Place values inside : If this option is selected will show the values in the chart

Major tick color : Major tick color.

Major tick alpha : Major tick transparency

Major tick thickness : Major tick thickness.

Major tick height : Select a height for the major tick.

Minor tick color : Select a color for the minor tick

Minor tick alpha : Select the transparency for the minor tick

Minor tick thickness : Minor tick thickness.

Minor tick height : Select a height for the minor tick.

Legend
Options to configure the chart legend.

Legend

Position : Selects the position of the legend, “beside” or “Below”..

Beside : Positions the legend beside the chart.

Below : Positions the legend below the chart.

Allow drag : If this option is selected it will be possible to drag the chart legend to the desired position.

Scroll background color : Selects the color of the scroll bar.

Title font : Select the font, and your formatting such as bold, italic, size and color of the legend.

Background color : Selects the background color of the legend.

Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the legend.

Border Color : Select the legend border color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker..

Border width : Selects the Border width of the legend.

Border alpha : Selects the border transparency of the legend.

 1
Form Orientation
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › FORM ORIENTATION

Orientation models for the Form application, it can be: Single record, Multiple records, Editable grid and Editable grid view.

Single record
This form orientation allows you to edit only one table record at a time. You will be able to page the form to navigate record by record.

Single record form..

Multiple records
Form orientation with various editable records per page. Update or delete processes will run on selected records via check box. You can set as many records per page as needed
to update, to delete or to add new records.

Multiple records form.

Pagination : Paging type for the multiple records form, you can choose if it is going to be partial or total.

Lines Per Page : Quantity of rows of records per page, this option is available only when the pagination is set as “Partial”.

Records for insert : You can set here the quantity of rows of records per page in the insert mode in order to add multiple records at a time.

Editable grid
Form orientation with various editable records per page. Each record has the update and delete controls available in its own line.
 2

Editable grid form.

Pagination : Paging type for the multiple records form, you can choose if it is going to be partial or total.

Lines Per Page : Quantity of rows of records per page, this option is available only when the pagination is set as “Partial”.

Editable grid view

Form orientation with various editable records per page. All records come with its data displayed in a read-only format. These data are only available for update by selecting the
Edit option in the record itself.

Editable grid view form.

Pagination : Paging type for the multiple records form, you can choose if it is going to be partial or total.

Lines Per Page : Quantity of rows of records per page, this option is available only when the pagination is set as “Partial”.

Use modal form to edit : Use a modal form to edit the records when you click to edit the record.

Related videos
Types of Forms

Ajax Processing

Default Values

Auto Complete
 1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › SETTINGS

Interface de configuração.

Friendly URL : Allows to define a name for the URL that’s going to be called by the application. The characters allowed in the URL are(a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_). The Friendly URL can be informed on the
initial screen of the project, where the applications are listed, on the “Friendly URL” column.

Line break in title : Allows to break a link on the field titles.

Horizontal Alignment : Permite definir o alinhamento da aplicação na página.

Margins : Allows to organize the display of the application according to the values of the margins (Right , Left, Up and Down) in pixels.

Table Width : Value of the application table. The applications generated by ScriptCase are generated in Plain HTML, and are organized in tablesm lines and cells.

Table Width Unit : Measurment unit for the table width defined in the previous option, being: percentage, pixel or automatic.

Table Columns : This parameter defines the column (fields) width of the table (application).

Labels width : When the previous option is set to “Provided”, this one appears and here you can inform the width of the labels.

Layout and Behavior

Layout and Behavior configuration Interface.

Automatic tab : Changes the focus to next field when the amount of chacteres reaches its defined limit.

Highlight Text on Focus : Highlights the field when selected.

Use Enter to : Allows to use the “Enter” key to pass the focus to the next field.

Field with Initial Focus : Determines which field will contain the initial focus when accessing the application. This option doesn’t work with fields that contain watermark.

Highlight Field with Error : Focus the field with error when submitting the form.

Use a template from the HTML Editor : Allows to use the TinyMCE editor. You can edit and create your own HTML Templates.
 1
Edit fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › EDIT FIELDS

This configuration allows the user to organize and edit the fields.

Fields Configuration

Edit Fields Configuration.

Fields
This column is used to display the field name.

Label

Column to edit the display name of the field in an application.

Datatype
Allows to change the field type.

New
Defines if the field will be available when inserting new records.

Update
Defines if the field will be available when updating new records.

Read-Only
Defines the field will be a label.

Required
Defines if the field has to contain a value.

PK
Defines which fields are the Primary Keys.

DB value (Insert)

Defines if the filed will receive internal values when inserting a new record, like an auto increment, date, datetime and IP.

DB value (Update)

Defines if the filed will receive internal values when updating a record, like the date, datetime and IP.

Page

Indicate the Pages in the application.

Blocks
Indicates the Blocks in the application.
 2
Page Fields Not Shown
Contains all the fields that aren’t going to be displayed in the application.

Observe that all the lines can be dragged to the desired position, blocks and page. NOTE: Fields are grouped in Blocks and the Blocks are grouped in Pages.

Display

Display Interface.

Attributes
Markers positioning : Indicates the position of the maker that’ll displayed next to the field that’s required.

Display message : Allows to display a custom message when validating the custom fields.
 1
Fields Positioning
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › FIELDS POSITIONING

Allows to set the order that the fields will be displayed.

Field Positioning

The box to the left represents the fields that aren’t displayed int he application.

The box to the right represents the fields that are displayed int he application.
 1
Unique key
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › UNIQUE KEY

With this module you can inform the fields that are unique, these fields are the one that contain a primary key in it’s table. To inform the rest of the fields that contain are a
unique key, select the fields by holding the CTRL of your keyboard and then click on the add button, the fields informed will receiv an identification for example: UK1.

Unique key configuration Interface.

 1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › TOOLBAR

The toolbar of the applciation is divided in two parts: Top and Bottom, in a way that’s possible to define which buttons will be displayed for both locations. Selecting the buttons
for the Top and Bottom toolbars work independently, allowing buttons being in both toolbars at once for example.

It’s also possible to separate which buttons will be displayed in an application that’s opened in a mobile deveice, and their respective positions in the toolbar. Like the image
below, there’s the following layout:

Desktop : Location where you should inform the configurations for the toolbar in “Classic Web Version” display, so that the configuration can be used in the application when be accessed
from a Desktop .

Mobile : Location where you should inform the configurations for the toolbar in “Mobile Version” display, so that the configuration can be used in the application when be accessed from a
Mobile.

Toolbar

Grid buttons positioning

Attribute :
Navigation : Presents the options relative to the navigation buttons that can be displayed in the application.

Next Proceeds to the next page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Previous Returns to the previous page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
First Redirects to the First page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Last Redirects to the Last page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Exit Exits the applications.
Navigation by page Displays a linl for the pages. e.g. 1 2 3 4 5
Export : Defines the formats of the generated exports. Scriptcase generates the following export formats:

PDF Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a PDF format.
WORD Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a WORD format.
XLS Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a EXCEL format.
XML Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a XML format.
CSV Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a CSV format.
RTF Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a RTF format.
Print Creates a HTML format of the application for printing.
Others : Presents a diversity of options relative to the application.

Jump to Defines the record page by the informed number.

Rows Limit It’s a combox that defines the amount of rows displayed per page.
Search When clicked, it redirects to the search form to filter the records.
Dynamic Search When clicked, it displays the search fields to filter the records.
Columns Allows to define the columns that’ll be displayed.
Sorting Options Allows to select the order of the records based on the field.
Group By Allows to select a Group By rule. ( Created previously in the application ).
Save Grid Allows to save the current state of the application.
QuickSearch Allows to do a rapid search in the records of the application.
 2
Gantt When clicked, displays a gantt chart.
Summary When clicked, displays a summary with the set of data from the records.
Form Buttons Displays the Form Buttons, when there’s an Application Link created previously.
Languages Displays a combobox with the names available, defined in the project properties.
Themes Displays a combobox with the themes available, defined in the project properties.
Rows Counter Allows to define the amount of lines displayed in the application.
HelpCase Displays a button to redirect to the help page.
Separator

————————- | Dispayes a line separating the buttons, when used the Group Buttons.

Button Group : The Group allows to create group buttons.

Add Button Groups

Button Group Configuration

Name : Allows to define a name for the button group.

Label : Allows to define a name for the button group that’s going to be displayed for the user.

Hint\Title : Allows to define a hint for the group of buttons that’s going to be displayed to the user.

Button Type : Allows to define a display format for the button group ( Button, Image, Link).

Image : Allows to define an image for the button if its display format is and Image.

Display : Defines if the button will display only the Text, only the image or both.

Display Position : Defines the position of the Text or Image ( Text to the right, Image to the right ).

After creating a button group, its necessary to position the buttons below the Button Group and to the right. Like the image below:

Positioning the buttons of the button group

Button Settings
 3

Application Button Settings

Button Buttons available in the application.

Label Allows to define the name of the button that’s going to display in the application.
Hint Allows to define the hint of the button that’s going to display in the application.
_Shortcut key Allows to define a shortcut on the keyboard for the button. ( Each browser has it’s own combination of reserved shortcuts ).

Options

Opções da consulta

Attribute
Display Summary : Defines if the summary button will be displayed for each page.

Format Row Counter : Allows to define the format that’ll be used to create the Row Counter. e.g. [1 to 10 of 200].

The number of links displayed : Defines the amount of links per page , when the navigation option is disabled.

Jump to : Defines wether the it’ll redirect to the page or the record informed.

Records per page : Defines which amount of records to be listed per page, the options will display in a combobox.

Toolbar buttons : Defines the type of display for the Toolbar buttons ( A DIV below the toolbar , Modal ).

Mobile Toolbar
 4

Positioning the mobile buttons

Contains the same options as the Desktop version, adding only the item “Copy from Desktop”, on which, when clicked it copies the items from the Desktop toolbar to the
Mobile toolbar.
 1
Export Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › EXPORT SETTINGS

PDF Settings

PDF export configuration

Attributes

PDF Orientation Allows to define the orientation in Portrait or Landscape if the print.
PDF Format Allows to define the format that the PDF will be printed in (Letter, A4, etc).
Print Type Defines the print color (Black/White or Color).
Records per Page Applies to the Grids with the horizontal alignment, also defines the amount of records that’ll be printed per page.
Rows per Page in Summary Define the amount of records printed in the summary PDF.
Complete Lines Until Footer Complete with the empty line until the footer.
Open PDF Directly Open the PDF file without using a page in between to display a link to the file.
Create Charts Create the summary charts in the PDF.
Configurable PDF Allows the user to configure the parameters to create the PDF during runtime.
Generate Bookmarks Generate the bookmarks automatically, the bookmarks are generated relating to the group by.
Page Numbers Format Number format of the page, if simple (1,2,3,4,5,…), Complete(1/n, 2/n, 3/n,…) or not use the Numbers.
Page numbering height Allows to align the numbers vertically, top or bottom.
Horizontal position of the page numbering Allows to align the numbers horizontally (Left, Center, Right).
Margin The value informed needs to be in millimeters so that it can be applied to the PDF margins (Top, Bottom, Right, Left).
Print Background Allows to print the background in the PDF file.
JS execution time Time(milliseconds) for the server to wait for the JS to run in the HTML file.
Timeout for chart’s image creation Time to generate each chart individually in the PDF.

Print Settings

Form - Print export settings

Print Type Allows you to set the print mode for the file (Both, Black & White, Color).
Print Background Allows you to define whether the background will appear for printing.
 1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › SQL

In this module the attributes related to the connection to the table in which the Form was created are defined. We can define the Primary Key, Filters, Sorts for the created form.

SQL configuration Interface.

Select primary key fields : On this function it’s displayed an Combo box with a “ * “ beside, that indicates which fields are the Compound keys or Primary Key of the SQL
table. In most cases, ScriptCase already identifies the Keys, in case that doesn’t happen the user can manually inform the key using the button beside the list to select the
keys. See how the buttons work:

On/Off : Adds or Removes the attribute that defines the primary key for the field. The field defined as the primary key will have an asterisk beside its name.

All : Defines that all the fields are Primary Keys. The field defined as the primary key will have an asterisk beside its name.

None : Unchecks all the fields. It removes the definition of the primary key for all fields.

Sorting Button : These are the arrows on the right side of the Combo box. It allows to order the fields of the Primary Key, placing it in the desired order. To order click on the field and
use the arrows to make the move.

Where clause : An optional space that allows the user to place a Where clause with the objective to filter the SQL records.

Order By : Optional space for the user to write the ORDER BY clause that will determine the order in which the records will be displayed, when the navigation bar is used by default, the order
is determined by the Primary Key.

Connection : Displays the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this connection can be changed by another one that contains the same
tables (SQL).

Table Name : Name of the table that’s being used in the Form.

Variable for Table : These fields informed with value, allows part of the table name defined in the select to be changed before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.

Variable for Table Configuration.

The first field must be filled with the name of the variable. The second field must be filled with the part of the name of the table to be replaced.

Case Sensitive : Allows you to configure whether the connection will be case sensitive or not. (Differentiating case).
 1
Sorting
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › SORTING

Field Settings

Field Sorting Configuration.

This property has the objective to define the fields that allow sorting. The sorting of a field of the application is done in runtime, just by clicking on the column (field) that you
want to sort by. By default, the Group Bys are respected while sorting the fields. Also by default, the first six fields are already marked (presenting an asterisk beside the field), so
that they can be sorted without the user worrying about this detail.

Sorting Fields Selection Configuration.

Sort Fields
Define the configuration of the sorting for each field of the application, being “Ascendant” or “Descendant”.

Sort Fields Configuration.

Advanced Sorting
Define the fields that are available when clicking on the “Sorting” of the Grid.
 2

Advanced Sort Fields Configuration.

Use displayed fields : Defines that all the fields are available when clicking on “Sorting” button of the application.

Use columns : Defines that all the fields, configured in the “Columns” option of ScriptCase, will be available when clicking on the “Sorting” button of the Grid.

Define Columns : Allows to select the fields freely:

Advanced Sort Fields Configuration.

 1
Group Label
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › GROUP LABEL

With this option, you can insert the one or more titles for the columns in the applications, allowing to modify its size, color, font and position.

If you have fields with a dynamic display, the Group Label won’t work.

Editing Group Label cell properties

Attributes

Title Allows to define a title that’ll be displayed in your Group Label.

Font Allows to define the group label title’s font.
Font Size Defines the font size for the group label title.
Horizontal Alignment Allows to define the horizontal alignment of the group label title. Being Left, Center or Right.
Vertical Alignment Allows to define the vertical alignment of the group label title. Being Middle, Bottom or Top.
Font Color Allows to define the font color for the group label title.
Background Color Allows to define to color of the background for the group label title.
 1
Procedures
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › PROCEDURES

In this module, you can configure a Form application so that it can use Stored Procedures (defined in the Database) in the Insert, Update and Delete operations. It’s not necessary
to use the three options simultaneously, in a way that the options that aren’t configured to use Procedures continue to work as ScriptCase’s default that are the commands
INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.

See below, the step-by-step to implement a Stored Procedure to insert into the Database.

Form Stored Procedures Interface.

Let check the first option: “Enable INSERT Procedure”. Next inform the Name of the Procedure the number of parameters.

Defining parameters for the Procedure.

Now define the fields that’ll reference each parameter of the Stored Procedure, as the type of parameter (Input or Output). Next click on the button save to finish the process.

Passing value to the Stored Procedure Parameters.

 1
JavaScript
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › JAVASCRIPT

The concept of editing JavaScript in Scriptcase is associated with the fields of the form and JavaScript events, so for each field edited in the JavaScript option, they will be
associated to a specific event.

Edit JavaScript Interface.

Attributes

Select the object : In this Combo box will be displayed the fields that are part of the form application, also the Form its self as an object.

Select the event : In this Combo box you need to associate the event with the selected field, that you are going to apply the JS code. View the events available:
onclick : Runs when the field is clicked.

onblur : Runs when the object loses focus.

onChange : Runs when the object loses focus and its value is modified.

onFocus : Runs when the object receives focus.

onMouseOver : Runs when the mouse pointer hovers the object.

onMouseOut : Runs when the mouse pointer is removed from above the object.

Events related to the Form : The events below are associated directly with the form.
OnLoad : This events runs when the page is loaded, also when navigating between records and clicking on the buttons (Next, Previous, etc.).

onSubmit: This event runs when clicking on the buttons “New”, “Save” and “Delete”.

Edit JavaScript
After selecting the object and the event and clicking on the button (Edit), it’ll open the page to edit the JavaScript routine, that’ll run the moment that the selected event is triggered.
On this page you can inform custom JavaScript routines or use the standard ScriptCase events, e.g. nm_recarga_form(); that refreshes the form.

Edit JavaScript Interface

After saving the JavaScript Routines by clicking on (save), it’ll conclude the work.

The JavaScript language won’t always have the same behavior in all Browsers available in the market. Always when necessary to write a block more elaborated or complex in this
language, it’s important to do the necessary tests in the browsers that the application will run.

OnClick Example

When clicking on a field of type radio, you can enable or disable a series of fields of the form according to the value selected.

if(document.F1.gender[0].checked){
document.F1.maternity.disabled = false;
document.F1.maternity.style.background='FFFFFF'
}
if(document.F1.gender[1].checked){
document.F1.maternity.disabled = true;
document.F1.maternity.style.background='FCEEBC'
}

To access a radio type field, you need to use the index.

OnBlur Example
You can define a warning around the field “weekly_work_time” when it loses the focus.
 2
if (document.F1.tp_point[0].checked && document.F1.weekly_work_time.value > '20')
{
alert("The work time exceeds the limit allowed");
document.F1.weekly_work_time.value = "";
document.F1.weekly_work_time.focus();
}

OnChange Example
By modifying the “Salary” of and employee and exiting the field, at this moment we’ll check if the “position” is “gardener”.

if (document.F1.salary.value > 2000.00 && document.F1.position.value == 'gardener'){

alert('When I grow up, I want to be a gardener);

}

OnFocus
After informing the purchase value and selecting the payment method in a Select type object “Select: pay_method”, the JavaScript code below calculates the value of
the purchase.

if (document.F1.pay_method[document.F1.pay_method.selectedIndex].text == 'Money')
{
document.F1.total.value = document.F1.pauchase_value.value;
}

OnMouseOver Example
You can change the style (background color, font etc.) when the mouse hovers the field.

document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "0FFCCA"

onMouseOut Example
Sets the background color when the mouse exists the hover of the field.

document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "FFFFFF"
 1
Dependencies
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › DEPENDENCIES

This feature allows to link the tables that contain relationships, being the tables that contain dependencies, like the tables orders and order_details. This way it’s possible to
delete a record in the table orders, all the details for that order will be deleted as well. Below you’ll see a practical example on this feature.

Firstly, you’ll define a new dependency. In this example, we’ll create a dependency between the orders (Dependent Table) with the order_details (Current Application). Click on the button
New Dependency to start.

Creating a new Dependency.

Selecting a the dependent table you’ll inform the amount of fields that are related between the both tables. In this example, only one field will be related to the orders id.

Dependency Table configuration.

Next, select the fields that link the Keys: order_details->Orderid - orders->Orderid.

Dependency Key Fields Configurations.

Creating a Dependency relationship, you only need to set the rules that the application will use. To do this, just click on the button Generate Scripts to define the Dependency Rule.

Configurando as regras da dependência.

 1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › SECURITY

Application Security Configuration

When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.

Captcha

Use Captcha : Defines if the application will have Captcha support.

Number of Characters : Amount of characters in the Captcha image.

Character List : List of characters used in the Captcha.

Label : Message displayed for the Captcha.

Error message : Captcha error message.

Height : Height of the image generated by the Captcha ( in pixels ).

Width : Width of the image generated by the Captcha ( in pixels ).

Font Size : Size of the font used in the image generated by the Captcha (in pixels).

Reload: Display the refresh button in the Captcha.

Select one layout : Offers various layouts (of positioning) for the Captcha display.

reCAPTCHA
ReCAPTCHA is a tool used through the API provided by Google for sending forms adding security at the time of form confirmation (preventing automation for submission).

reCAPTCHA sample:

First we have to request an API Key to activate reCAPTCHA in the Scriptcase application by following the steps below:

To get a Site key and Secret Key go to the link: https://www.google.com/recaptcha/admin#list. The page below will be showed:

Label: Project name which will be created to contains the reCAPTCHA keys.

Choose the type of reCaptcha : We need to choose the option reCAPTCHA V2 .

Domains : We can insert any domains (on per line ) to limit the API uses.

After that, we need to accept the Terms of Service ( “Accept the reCAPTCHA Terms of Service” ).

When click in Register the page will be reloaded showing the integration reCAPTCHA informations. In this screen we can get the Site Key and Secret Key:
 2
Now, we can setting the scriptcase application security:

Site Key : Key generated by google after reCAPTCHA project creation.

Secret Key : Key generated by google after reCAPTCHA project creation.

Theme : Defines the color which the reCAPTCHA will be displayed. We have two options:
Light :

Dark :

Type: Defines the initial type which the reCAPTCHA will be displayed. We have two options:
Audio:

Image :

Tamanho : Defines the size of reCAPTCHA. We have two options:

Normal :

Compact:

Position : Defines the reCAPTCHA component position in relation with the width of the application:
Left : Position the reCAPTCHA component at left.

Center: Position the reCAPTCHA component at center.

Rigth : Position the reCAPTCHA component at right.

 1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › LOG

Application Log configuration

Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
 1
Fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › FIELDS

In the menu “Fields”, only the fields that were selected in the menu “Select fields” will available for settings.

List of application fields

Depending on the selected field type a number of specific attributes will be displayed

Text
General Settings

Text field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text, you can inform a Text value to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Password Field : Formats the input of the field to have a password mask (*).
 2

Password configuration Interface.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field Mask : Defines the mask for field display. There are three types of masks that can be merged.

Character Description
9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9)
A Replaced by any alpha character entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z)
* Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
It’s possible to merge two or more masks simultaneously, separated by a semi coma with the smallest mas at start. The replacement occurs when the user is typing in the
number of characters form the smallest mask.

Examples

Field Mask Value Entered Value Formatted

Telephone number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Software Key (Only letters) AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA QWERTYUIASDFGHJK QWER-TYUI-ASDF-GHJK
Software Key (Letters and Numbers) **---** Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-U7I8
Car Plate AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
Scriptcase’s serial key A999A999A999- ** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-DG2P
Multiple Masks (Telephone) 9999-9999;(99)9999-9999;9999 999 9999 +99 99 9999-9999
Validate with mask : Displays an error if the user doesn’t complete the value based on the mask.

Complete to the Left : Allows to define the character that’ll be used to complete the value to the left that the user typed in to the max size of the field defined in the Field size in database
option.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Save HTML tags : This option allows to save the HTML content of the field to the database.

Text input in Javascript : Allows to save javascript code informed in the field to the database.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values Format

Format of Values Interface

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

Minimum Size : Allows to define the minimum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Maximum Size : Allows to define the maximum amount of characters accepted for the field.
 3
Allowed Characters : Allows to select a set of characters that can be typed into the field. The options are:

All : Allows any type of character to be typed into the field

Selected : Defines a set of characters allowed. Using the configuration below, will be allowed to type letters, numbers and other characters (defined in the attribute More). The letters a, b and

c (defined in the Less Attribute) aren’t allowed.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings

Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

 4
Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

 5
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 6

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Multiple Lines Text

General Settings

Multiple Lines Text field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Multiple Lines Text , you can inform a Text value to the field in multiple lines.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Lines : Allows to define the amount of lines that the field will have at start.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.
 7
Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Save HTML tags : This option allows to save the HTML content of the field to the database.

Text input in Javascript : Allows to save javascript code informed in the field to the database.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values Format

Format of Values Interface

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

Minimum Size : Allows to define the minimum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Maximum Size : Allows to define the maximum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Allowed Characters : Allows to select a set of characters that can be typed into the field. The options are:

All : Allows any type of character to be typed into the field

Selected : Defines a set of characters allowed. Using the configuration below, will be allowed to type letters, numbers and other characters (defined in the attribute More). The letters a, b and

c (defined in the Less Attribute) aren’t allowed.

Database Value
Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

 8
Lookup Settings

Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.
 9
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 10

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Integer
General Settings

Integer field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Integer, you can inform number values to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

 11
Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field Mask : Defines the mask for field display. There are three types of masks that can be merged.

Character Description
9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9)
A Replaced by any alpha character entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z)
* Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
It’s possible to merge two or more masks simultaneously, separated by a semi coma with the smallest mas at start. The replacement occurs when the user is typing in the
number of characters form the smallest mask.

Examples

Field Mask Value Entered Value Formatted

Telephone number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Software Key (Only letters) AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA QWERTYUIASDFGHJK QWER-TYUI-ASDF-GHJK
Software Key (Letters and Numbers) **---** Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-U7I8
Car Plate AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
Scriptcase’s serial key A999A999A999- ** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-DG2P
Multiple Masks (Telephone) 9999-9999;(99)9999-9999;9999 999 9999 +99 99 9999-9999
Validate with mask : Displays an error if the user doesn’t complete the value based on the mask.

Complete to the Left : Allows to define the character that’ll be used to complete the value to the left that the user typed in to the max size of the field defined in the Field size in database
option.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Maximum Size : Determines the max size of the field.

Minimum Value : Determines the min value of the field.

Maximum Value : Determines the max value of the field.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’s used to seperate the thousand.

Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.
 12
Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Show a calculator : Displays an icon next to the field, which alles the user to calculate a value for the field.

Use Spin : Atives an option to incrmente and decrement values from the field.
Smaller increment of Spin : Defines the min range of the Spin.

Increase higher Spin : Defines the max range of the Spin.

Database Value
Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings

Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 13

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 14

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Decimal
General Settings
 15

Decimal field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Decimal, you can inform decimal values to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.
 16
Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Maximum Size : Determines the max size of the field.

Minimum Value : Determines the min value of the field.

Maximum Value : Determines the max value of the field.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’s used to seperate the thousand.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Show a calculator : Displays an icon next to the field, which alles the user to calculate a value for the field.

Auto-complete with zeros : If enabled, it automatically informs the decimal places when not specified. If disabled, the user needs to always inform the decimal value.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings

Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
 17
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

 18
Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Currency
General Settings
 19

Currency field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Currency, you can currency values to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format
 20

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Currency symbol usage : Defines if the field will display the Currency Symbol of the Regional Settings.*

Maximum Size : Determines the max size of the field.

Minimum Value : Determines the min value of the field.

Maximum Value : Determines the max value of the field.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’s used to seperate the thousand.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Show a calculator : Displays an icon next to the field, which alles the user to calculate a value for the field.

Auto-complete with zeros : If enabled, it automatically informs the decimal places when not specified. If disabled, the user needs to always inform the decimal value.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings

Method used to place a description next to the field.

 21

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 22
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 23

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Date
General Settings

Date field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Date, you can inform a date.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

 24
Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator attribute.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

First Day : Define the first day of the week.

Display : Select the format of the day for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters Y , M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Minimum Date :
Fixed Date : Inform the minimum date allowed presented in the selected date format.

Current Date : Clicking on the icon next to the text field, ScriptCase offers the following options:
Actual date : It’ll place the current date as the max allowed date.

Actual date with increment : The minimum date will be the current date (+) the days or months or years that you want to increment.

Actual date with decrement : The minimum date will be the current date (-) the days or months or years that you want to decrement.

Maximum Date :
Fixed Date : Inform the minimum date allowed presented in the selected date format.

Current Date : Clicking on the icon next to the text field, ScriptCase offers the following options:
Actual date : It’ll place the current date as the max allowed date.

Actual date with increment : The minimum date will be the current date (+) the days or months or years that you want to increment.

Actual date with decrement : The minimum date will be the current date (-) the days or months or years that you want to decrement.

Display Format : Enables the Date format beside the field when informing the date.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.
 25
Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 26
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 27

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Hour
General Settings

Time field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Time, you can inform a time to this field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 28
Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from TIME. You need to use the characters HH , II , and SS that correspond to Day, Hour , Minutes and
Seconds.

Display Format : Enables the Time format beside the field when informing the time.

Use Timepicker : Use the JQuery plugin to choose the time.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 29
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 30

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Date and Hour

General Settings
 31

Date and Time field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Datetime, you can inform a date and time to this field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format
 32

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the day/time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from DATETIME . You need to use the characters Y , M, D , HH , II , and SS that correspond to Year, Month,
Day, Hour , Minutes and Seconds.

Display Format : Enables the Date and Time format beside the field when informing the date.

Group Date and Time : Groups the date and time in the same field.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.

New Calendar : Show the new jquery calendar, or the old calendar.

Years Limit : The amount of years that’ll display in the calendar.

View week number : Display the week number in the calendar.

Additional months : Display additional months in the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Allows you to select the year and month using a combo-box.

Decimal of seconds : Defines the amount of decimals for the seconds.

Database Value
Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 33

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 34

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

HTML Image
General Settings
 35

HTML Image field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as HTML Image, it allows to place an image to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Image : Defines an image that’ll be displayed. The icon “Select Image”, lists all the standard images from scriptcase and also the image that you’ve uploaded to scriptcase. The icon “Upload an
image” allows the developer to send an image to the server which is from another machine.

Border : Border size for the image in Pixels.

Width : Define the width of the image in Pixels.

Height : Define the height of the image in Pixels.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 36
Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 37

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Label
General Settings

Label field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as label, the field only display the output of the value .

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Text : You can inform the text that’ll display beside the field.

Reload : When enabled, make the text informed for the field to become a link to reload the form when clicked.

Position : Allows to position the field in the chosen block.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 38
Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 39

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Card
General Setting

Credit Card Number Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Credit Card Number, the field verifies if the value is valid.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : It’s created a placeholder on the field with the text informed.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

 40
Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the size in bytes of the fields. It’s used to determine the max amount of characters to be typed in.

Field Mask : Defines the display mask for the field. There are three types of masks that can be merged.

Character Description
9 Represents a numeric character (0-9)
A Represents an alfa numeric character (A-Z,a-z)
* Represents any alfa numeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) typed by the user.
It’s possible to merge two or more masks simultaneously, separated by a semi coma with the smallest mask at start. The replacement occurs when the user is typing when the
lowest amount of character exceeds.

Examples of Masks

Field Mask Informed Value Formatted Value

Telephone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Software Key (Only Numbers) AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA QWERTYUIASDFGHJK QWER-TYUI-ASDF-GHJK
Software Key (Letters an Numbers) **---** Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-U7I8
License Plates AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
ScriptCase License A999A999A999- ** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-DG2P
Multiple Masks (Telephone) 9999-9999;(99)9999-9999;9999 999 9999 +99 99 9999-9999
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.
 41

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 42
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 43

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Card type
General Settings

Credit Card field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Credit Card , it’ll setup a combo-box for you to select a creditcard type.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values Format
 44

Format of Values Interface.

Credit Card : Allows to define which cards will be listed and their internal value.

Use Title/Deny : Allows to inform a new value if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasn’t chosen. The label and the value of this option are
defined as the Negative Value and the Title.

Negative value : Value of the new option if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasn’t chosen.

Title : Label of the new option if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasn’t chosen.

Related Field : You’ll inform which of the fields contains the values of a Credit Card Number so that the validations can be done correctly.

Reload Form : Reloads the form when the field’s value is modified.

Database Value
Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.
 45
Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

 46
Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

 47
E-mail
General Settings

Email field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Email, the field applies validations for an email format.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Display Icon : Displays the Email icon next to the field.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.
 48
Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.
 49
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 50

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

URL
General Settings
 51

URL field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to URL, you can inform a Link value to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Display Icon : Displays an icon beside the field.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

Show the URL as a clickable link : Sets the content of the field to clickable link.

Target handling where the link will open : Target where the the lick will direct to after being clicked

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.
 52
Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings

Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.
 53
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 54

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

HTML Color
General Settings
 55

HTML Color field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to HTML Color, you can select a color to be used in the form.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Database Value
Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.
 56
Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings

Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).
 57
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 58

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

HTML Editor
Settings

HTML Editor field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the applciation. When set to HTML Editor, you can inform any type of character and they’ll be saved in HTML form.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Height : Inform the Height in pixels for the HTML Editor.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Toolbar

HTML Editor toolbar settings Interface.

 59
Properties
Position : Location of the HTML Editor toolbar

Alignment : Toolbar button alignment

Status : Status Bar Display ( Don’t Display, Top and Bottom).

Amount : The Amount of lines of the HTML Editor toolbar.

Button Organization : Allows to position the toolbar buttons.

Preview : You can visualize the toolbar according to the previous settings.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).
 60
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

 61
Localization
General Settings

Location field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as Location, you’ll se a combobox with the Languages that are part of the Project Properties.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Reload : When enabled, make the text informed for the field to become a link to reload the form when clicked.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 62
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 63

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Theme
General Settings

Theme field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Theme, you view a combo box with the list of themes that are set to your project.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Reload : Reload the form after modifying the value.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 64
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 65

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Youtube
General Settings

YouTube field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a YouTube, it allows to display a video from youtube on the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Display Mode : Defines how the you video will display in the application.

Width : Width of the video in pixels.

Height : Height of the video in pixels.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 66

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 67

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Google Maps
General Settings
 68

Google Maps field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as Google Maps, it’ll use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Form Applications

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Home : Defines what type of parameters will be used in the API.

Home Configuration Interface.

Display Mode : Indicates the display of the map. It can be opened in a Modal or in a new Window.

Width : Defines the width of the map that’s going to be displayed.

Height : Defines the height of the map that’s going to be displayed.

Zoom : Defines the initial Zoom (available from the Google API) of the Map location.

API Key : API Key for authorization to use Google Maps in the Application. (Required only for the versions 2 or earlier of the Google API.)

The API Key is a unique key, composed by a string(text) alphanumeric, which is the license to use the service. When you subscribe to use the service, the key is tied to the
domain and the directory of the server. All the pages that use the API needs to be in the same directory that was used for the subscription. In case you have a web server on
your local machine, you just need to possess a key for testing, and to do this you only need to place http://localhost in the domain of the subscription.

To get your API Key access the site by clicking here

Link Type : Defines how the link will be displayed.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 69

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 70

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Image (Database)
General Settings
 71

Image (Database) field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as an Image ( Database), all the Images files are stored and loaded directly from the Database.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Image Border : Width of the Image border. Value in Pixels.

Image Height : Image height size. Value in Pixels.

Image Width : Image width size. Value in Pixels.

Progress bar : Displays a progress bar when sending the files to the server.

Upload area : Displays a drag’n drop area to upload the file.

Maintain Aspect : Maintains the original aspect ratio of the image when resizing it.

Display link only : WHen enabled, you’ll be presented with a link to open the image in another image with the original size of the image ( without using the redimensioning ).

Open in Another Window : Allows to open the image in another window.

Extensions to allow : Extensions allowed to upload, separated by a semi coma (;). If left in blank, all the extensions are allowed. e.g. docx;jpg;png;xls

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Multi-Upload

This option allows to upload multiple files and store them on a table referencing a record from another table.

Multi-Upload Configuration.

Amount of columns : Amount of columns to displays the files in the Field.

Position of the delete : Checkbox option to delete files position.

Position on the upload : Position of the records when uploading.

Show status : Display the upload status.

Table : Select the table that’ll store the information of the files when uploading.

After selecting the table, you’ll see a list of all the fields of the chosen table, where you’ll associate the parameters for each field when inserting a new record or updating an
existing record.
 72

Multi-Upload fields of the table Configuration.

File Name : Obtains the name og the file that’s being loaded.

Upload : Obtains the binary value of the file.

Auto Increment : Used only when field in the database in an auto increment or similar.

Manual Increment : The form will be responsible for managing the auto-increment, calculating the value of the field before inserting the record.

Foreign Key : Associates the file with a value of a field in the current form.

Defined : You can specify a constant value or use a global variable. [global_var]

Date of Insertion : Obtains the data of the server when inserting the record.

Datetime de Insertion : Obtains the data and time of the server when inserting the record.

User IP : The field will contain the IP of the computer that’s accessing the application.

Calculated by the Database : The value of the field is applied in the database.

Calculated by the Database if empty : The value of the field is applied in the database if not informed by the application.

Null : The field will the null value.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 73
Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 74

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Imagem (File Name)

General Settings

Image (File Name) field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as an Image (File Name), all the images files are stored and loaded in a directory of the server (Only the image name
is stored in the database).

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Image Border : Width of the Image border. Value in Pixels.

 75
Image Height : Image height size. Value in Pixels.

Image Width : Image width size. Value in Pixels.

Maintain Aspect : Maintains the original aspect ratio of the image when resizing it.

Progress bar : Displays a progress bar when sending the files to the server.

Upload area : Displays a drag’n drop area to upload the file.

Increment file : Increments the file name if the theirs an existing one with the same name in the upload folder.

Subfolder : Subfolder’s name that the files are stored. The is sub folder is relative to the directory defined for the Document upload (see the Settings). It’s possible to use global variables or
local variables to format the name of the subfolder.

Create Subfolder : When enabled, it creates the subfolder if not already created.

Image Caching : Time in minutes that the image cache will be stored.

Hide image name : When enalbed, only the image will be displayed without it’s name.

Files Deletion : Deletes the files from the directory when the record is deleted from the database.

Display link only : WHen enabled, you’ll be presented with a link to open the image in another image with the original size of the image ( without using the redimensioning ).

Open in Another Window : Allows to open the image in another window.

Extensions to allow : Extensions allowed to upload, separated by a semi coma (;). If left in blank, all the extensions are allowed. e.g. docx;jpg;png;xls

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Multi-Upload
This option allows to upload multiple files and store them on a table referencing a record from another table.

Multi-Upload Configuration.

Amount of columns : Amount of columns to displays the files in the Field.

Position of the delete : Checkbox option to delete files position.

Position on the upload : Position of the records when uploading.

Show status : Display the upload status.

Table : Select the table that’ll store the information of the files when uploading.

After selecting the table, you’ll see a list of all the fields of the chosen table, where you’ll associate the parameters for each field when inserting a new record or updating an
existing record.
 76

Multi-Upload fields of the table Configuration.

File Name : Obtains the name og the file that’s being loaded.

Upload : Obtains the binary value of the file.

Auto Increment : Used only when field in the database in an auto increment or similar.

Manual Increment : The form will be responsible for managing the auto-increment, calculating the value of the field before inserting the record.

Foreign Key : Associates the file with a value of a field in the current form.

Defined : You can specify a constant value or use a global variable. [global_var]

Date of Insertion : Obtains the data of the server when inserting the record.

Datetime de Insertion : Obtains the data and time of the server when inserting the record.

User IP : The field will contain the IP of the computer that’s accessing the application.

Calculated by the Database : The value of the field is applied in the database.

Calculated by the Database if empty : The value of the field is applied in the database if not informed by the application.

Null : The field will the null value.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 77
Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 78

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Document (Database)
General Settings

Document (Database) field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Document ( Database), all the document files are stored and loaded directly from the Database.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Icon : Displays an icon beside the field to identify the type of document.

Progress bar : Displays a progress bar when sending the files to the server.

Upload area : Displays a drag’n drop area to upload the file.

File Name : Defines the field that contains the name of the document stored in the database ( the field that contains this information also needs to be stored in the database).

File Size : Defines the field that conatins the file size.

Extensions to allow : Extensions allowed to upload, separated by a semi coma (;). If left in blank, all the extensions are allowed. e.g. docx;jpg;png;xls

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Multi-Upload
 79
This option allows to upload multiple files and store them on a table referencing a record from another table.

Multi-Upload Configuration.

Amount of columns : Amount of columns to displays the files in the Field.

Position of the delete : Checkbox option to delete files position.

Position on the upload : Position of the records when uploading.

Show status : Display the upload status.

Table : Select the table that’ll store the information of the files when uploading.

After selecting the table, you’ll see a list of all the fields of the chosen table, where you’ll associate the parameters for each field when inserting a new record or updating an
existing record.

Multi-Upload fields of the table Configuration.

File Name : Obtains the name og the file that’s being loaded.

Upload : Obtains the binary value of the file.

Auto Increment : Used only when field in the database in an auto increment or similar.

Manual Increment : The form will be responsible for managing the auto-increment, calculating the value of the field before inserting the record.

Foreign Key : Associates the file with a value of a field in the current form.

Defined : You can specify a constant value or use a global variable. [global_var]

Date of Insertion : Obtains the data of the server when inserting the record.

Datetime de Insertion : Obtains the data and time of the server when inserting the record.

User IP : The field will contain the IP of the computer that’s accessing the application.

Calculated by the Database : The value of the field is applied in the database.

Calculated by the Database if empty : The value of the field is applied in the database if not informed by the application.

Null : The field will the null value.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 80

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 81

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Document (File Name)

Multi-Upload

This option allows to upload multiple files and store them on a table referencing a record from another table.
 82

Multi-Upload Configuration.

Amount of columns : Amount of columns to displays the files in the Field.

Position of the delete : Checkbox option to delete files position.

Position on the upload : Position of the records when uploading.

Show status : Display the upload status.

Table : Select the table that’ll store the information of the files when uploading.

After selecting the table, you’ll see a list of all the fields of the chosen table, where you’ll associate the parameters for each field when inserting a new record or updating an
existing record.

Multi-Upload fields of the table Configuration.

File Name : Obtains the name og the file that’s being loaded.

Upload : Obtains the binary value of the file.

Auto Increment : Used only when field in the database in an auto increment or similar.

Manual Increment : The form will be responsible for managing the auto-increment, calculating the value of the field before inserting the record.

Foreign Key : Associates the file with a value of a field in the current form.

Defined : You can specify a constant value or use a global variable. [global_var]

Date of Insertion : Obtains the data of the server when inserting the record.

Datetime de Insertion : Obtains the data and time of the server when inserting the record.

User IP : The field will contain the IP of the computer that’s accessing the application.

Calculated by the Database : The value of the field is applied in the database.

Calculated by the Database if empty : The value of the field is applied in the database if not informed by the application.

Null : The field will the null value.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 83

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 84

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Barcode
General Settings
 85

Configuration Interface of the Barcode Field.

Data Type : DataType of the field for the application.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will e disabled in the “Insert Mode” , “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

SQL Type : Database field type.

Barcode

Configuration Interface of the Barcode Field.

Type : Type of Barcode.

Text : Barcode Text for illustration purposes.

There are 18 types of barcodes , that are listed below:

Barcode configuratio interface.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 86
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 87

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Select
General Settings

Select field configuration Interface.

 88
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combobox (Select Field).

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 89

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.
 90
Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a
different delimiter then (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Link : Allows to create a link to another form allowing to manipulate the list displayed on the select field. After the manipulation, the select object it updated
automatically.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 91

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the select field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).
 92

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

Label Valor Inicio Tamanho

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
 93
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Configuração do lookup de edição Múltiplos Valores (Binário)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

 94
Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.
 95
Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 96

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Double Select
General Settings

Double Select field configuration Interface.

 97
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Double Select, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the size in bytes of the fields. It’s used to determine the max amount of characters to be typed in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP. .

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

 98

Automatic Lookup Interface..

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT key_field ,
display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Height : Allows to define the height(lines) of the field interface.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different delimiter then
(;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the option Display
original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 99
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 100

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

CheckBox
General Settings

Checkbox field configuration Interface.

 101
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Checkbox, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the size in bytes of the fields. It’s used to determine the max amount of characters to be typed in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP. .

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 102

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.
 103
Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

 104
You can store various values for the checkbox field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

Label Value Start Size

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.
 105
Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.
 106
Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 107

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 108

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Radio
General Settings
 109

Radio field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Radio, your allowed to select one of the options listed.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the size in bytes of the fields. It’s used to determine the max amount of characters to be typed in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP. .

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings
 110
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.
 111

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 112

Manual Lookup Interface.

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the radio.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing
 113

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 114
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 115

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Text Auto-Complete
General Settings

Text auto complete field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate an
internal Text for the data.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Complete to the Left : Allows to define the character that’ll be used to complete the value to the left that the user typed in to the max size of the field defined in the Field size in database
option.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Validate on submit : Validate the field only when the form is submitted.
 116
Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values Format

Format of Values Interface

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

Minimum Size : Allows to define the minimum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Maximum Size : Allows to define the maximum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Allowed Characters : Allows to select a set of characters that can be typed into the field. The options are:

All : Allows any type of character to be typed into the field

Selected : Defines a set of characters allowed. Using the configuration below, will be allowed to type letters, numbers and other characters (defined in the attribute More). The letters a, b and

c (defined in the Less Attribute) aren’t allowed.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 117

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 118

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 119

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Number Auto-Complete
General Settings
 120

Number auto complete field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Number auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate
an internal number for the data.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Complete to the Left : Allows to define the character that’ll be used to complete the value to the left that the user typed in to the max size of the field defined in the Field size in database
option.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Validate on submit : Validate the field only when the form is submitted.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Database Value

Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.

Database Values configuration Interface.

Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.

Defined Value configuration Interface.

 121
Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, it’s necessary to inform the name of the sequence.

Auto Increment configuration Interface.

Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field it’ll automatically calculate the next id.

Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.

Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.

User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.

Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field won’t be used in update processes. For example: it’ll be updated by a Trigger.

Null : The field will be informed the value null.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.
 122
Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 123

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

 1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › LAYOUT

Pages
Using the definition of blocks, a page is a container of blocks. Where each application is created with a least one page that has the default name “pag1”. In applications of the
type Form, Control and Search is possible to create many pages for an application. The pages are Tabs where each tab contains blocks defined in the block settings.

Pages (available only in the Form, Control and

Search applications) configuration Interface.

See the example below of the Form application using two Pages: General Data and Documents.

Form Application using Pages feature.

Pages Settings

The form application already comes with a default page, identified as Pag1, that can be renamed, with the creation of new pages. The use of pages is indicated when you have an
application that contains various fields of a table (more than 20 for example). A form with more than 20 fields vertically placed would be difficult to use. An application can
contain various pages, and in each one of them you can add various blocks.
 2

Pages Configuration Interface.

Attributes
Including A new page, just inform the two fields above the button Include, on the first field you’ll inform the name of the page and on the second field you’ll select the image that’ll
represent the icon of the folder, a then click on Include.

Deleting A page, just click on the Garbage Can icon corresponding to the line of the page.
The definition of pages is only considered in the Single Record Forms

Tab Folder configurations

Font : Allows to define which font-family will be displayed in the field. Clicking on the icon existing on the right side, it opens a page to select the font. Just select the font from the
list, and it’ll be applied to field, leaving to you just to confirm the font.

Font Size : Informs the desired size for the font.

Selected Font Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color palette.
When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.

Selected Background Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color
palette. When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.

Non Selected Font Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color
palette. When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.

Non Selected Background Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a
color palette. When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.

Blocks
Conceptually a block is a “container” where you can position the fields of the Applications: Form, Control or Grid with Slide orientation.

By default, the applications created in ScriptCase are built with a only one block, with the same name as the application. You can add the amount of blocks that you want to
organize in a more convenient way. The page below, observe that theirs a column Organization, and that is where you’ll define if the next block will be set beside or below the
current one.

Application Block configuration

On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second is to delete the block.

Organizing the position of the Blocks

See below how to modify the display order of the Blocks in one Page.

Click and drag the block that you desire to modify to its new position.
 3
Application Block Display configuration

See how to remove a block from display

Click on the block desired and drag it to the item “Blocks not Shown”. This way, you can also drag the block to another page if desired. See the images below.

Application Block Display configuration

Application Block Display configuration

Attributes
Block
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Title
Display : Flag that controls the title display of the block.

Label
Display : Flag that controls id the label of the fields will be displayed in the block.

Position : Options to display label :

Above : The label will be displayed above the field.

Beside : The label will be displayed beside the field.

Below : The label will be displayed below the field.

Fields
Columns : Amount of columns that are displayed side by side in the block.

Position : The way that the fields are displayed in the block :
Below : The fields are displayed one below the other respecting the amount of columns.

Beside : The fields are displayed one beside the other respecting the amount of columns.

Line : The fields are displayed one beside the other without the tabulation.

Organization
Next : The way that the blocks are displayed in the page:
Below : Indicates that the next block will be placed below the current one.

Beside : Indicates that the next block will be placed beside the current one.

Tabs : Indicates that the next block will be placed in a different tab then the current one.

Width : Specifies the width that block will occupy in pixels or percentage, in case the value is in percentage, inform the (%).

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

Create New Block

To include new blocks in an Application, click on the button . Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the name and label of the block. At the end
click on Create.

Creating application blocks configuration

Attributes
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Edit Blocks

To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the parameters of the blocks. At the end click on
save.
 4

Application Block editing interface

Attributes
Name : Name of the block.

Title : Block title for display.

Display Title : This option, when active, allows to display the block title.

Title Font : Font applied to the block title.

Font Size : Size of the font applied to the block title.

Font Color : Font color for the block title.

Background Color : Background Color of the block title.

Background image : Background image for the block title.

Title Height : Height in pixels of the block title line.

Horizontal Alignment : Horizontal Alignment of the block title (Left, Center and Right).

Vertical Alignment : Vertical Alignment the block title (Top, Middle and Bottom).

Display Label : Display the labels of the fields in the block.

Columns : Amount of field columns in a block.

Columns Width : How the width of the block is defined.

Label Color : Color of the field labels.

Fields Organization : How the fields are organized in the block.

Label Position : Position of the field labels relating to the data.

Next Block : Position of the next block relating to the current block.

Border Color : Border color for the block.

Border Width : Border Width for the block.

Block Width : Width for the block.

Block Height : Height for the block.

Cell Spacing : Cell Spacing in the block.

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.
 5

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

Header & Footer

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.
 6
Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.

Drag the selected option to the “Menu Items” area to create a new “Layer” where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the “Menu items” area.

After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the “pencil” icon to edit the layer options or click on the “trash” icon to delete it .

Layer editing

Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.

 7
Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the “Menu Width” option
within the Menu “Settings”, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.

Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.

Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.

Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on “Application Title” within the menu “Header & Footer”.

Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y

Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.

Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].

Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option “Tools » External Libraries” from the main menu.

Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option “PHP Programming”
within the menu “Programming”

Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.

Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.

Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.

Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.

Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.

Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.

Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

 1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › EVENTS

Within the events you can include Scriptcase global, local variables, libraries and macros, PHP, JavaScript, HTML and CSS codes.

onApplicationInit
This event runs only once, when initializing the application.

onNavigate
This event runs when navigating between pages in the application.

OnScriptInit
This event runs the moment that the scripts of the application is initialized. This is executed before the event OnLoad ( when present ), although, it’s always executed when
running, reloading or navigating in the application.

onLoadRecord
This event runs the moment that the record line is loading. The evemt OnRecord runs in a loop for each record to be loaded.

onLoad
This event runs when the application is finished loading

onRefresh
This event runs when the refresh option of the application is enabled.

onValidate
This event runs when validating the information of the fields, when submitting the form.

onValidateFailure
This event runs when the form validation gives an error.

onValidateSuccess
This event runs when the form validation doesn’t give an error.

onBeforeInsert
This event is executed before inserting a record from the application.

onAfterInsert
This event is executed after inserting a record from the application.

onBeforeInsertAll
 2
This event runs before inserting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.

onAfterInsertAll
This event runs after inserting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.

onBeforeUpdate
This event is executed before updating a record from the application.

onAfterUpdate
This event is executed after updating a record from the application.

onBeforeUpdateAll
This event runs before updating all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.

onAfterUpdateAll
This event runs after updating all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.

onBeforeDelete
This event runs before deleting the records from the Form.

onAfterDelete
This event runs after deleting the records from the Form.

onBeforeDeleteAll
This event runs before deleting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.

onAfterDeleteAll
This event runs after deleting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
 1
Ajax Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › AJAX
EVENTS

OnClick
The ajax event OnClick is executed when the field that it’s based on is clicked.

Creating a new ajax event

Creating a new ajax event

Selecting a field

Selecting a field of the ajax event

Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.

OnChange
The ajax event OnChange is executed when the value of the field that it’s based on is modified.

Creating a new ajax event

Creating a new ajax event

Selecting a field

Selecting a field of the ajax event

Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.

OnBlur
The ajax event OnBlur is executed when the focus is removed from the field that event is based on.

Creating a new ajax event

Creating a new ajax event

Selecting a field
 2

Selecting a field of the ajax event

Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.

OnFocus
The ajax event OnFocus is executed when the field that it’s based on is applied with a focus.

Creating a new ajax event

Creating a new ajax event

Selecting a field

Selecting a field of the ajax event

Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.
 1
Buttons
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › BUTTONS

In addition to the applications buttons, you can also create new manual buttons. These buttons will be placed on the application toolbar.

Creating new buttons

Creating a button
To create a new button, click the “new button” and type a name and the button type.

Form button types: (JavaScript, PHP, and Ajax).

Form button types

Deleting a button
To delete a button click on the icon next to the name of the button in the application menu (recycle bin).

Deleting a button

JavaScript
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the javascript button in Image, Button or Link.

Button

Setting up Javascript Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the javascript button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
 2
Type Description of the created button.

Image

Setting up Javascript Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the javascript button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Link

Setting up Javascript Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Type Description of the created button.

Code Block

Javascript button coding block.

In this block, only JavaScript is accepted.

PHP
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the PHP button in Image, Button or Link.

Button

Setting up PHP Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Type Description of the created button.
 3
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).

Image

Setting up PHP Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Type Description of the created button.
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).

Link

Setting up PHP Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Type Description of the created button.
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).

Code Block

*Ajax button coding block. *

In this block, you can use macros, PHP code and JavaScript.

Link
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the link button in Image, Button or Link.

Button
Setting up Link Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.
 4
Image
Setting up Link Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Link
Setting up link Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Type Description of the created button.

Setting up the Link

Selecting the applications

Choosing the application for the button link.

You should select an application to be called from the button link.

Link Parameters

Choosing the parameters for the button link.

Field Allows you to use an existing field from the current application as a parameter for the link.
Variable Allows you to use a global variable from the current application as a parameter for the link.
Fixed Allows you to inform a fixed value as a parameter for the link.
Empty No value will be passed as a parameter for the link.
Link Properties ( Grid )

Configuring the properties for the link button when the destined application is a Grid.

Link Operation Mode How the link will open (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal ).
Exit URL for the target application URL or an application that be redirect to when exiting the Grid application.
Initial Mode Allows you to define the initial mode of the grid application ( Search or Grid ).
Number of Lines Allows you to define the amount of lines displayed in the Grid.
Number of Columns Allows you to define the amount of columns displayed in the Grid.
Paging Enable the paging in the Grid.
Display Header Enable the Grid Header.
Active Navigation Buttons Enable the navigation button (First, Back, Next and Last) in the Grid.
Link Properties ( Form )

Configuring the properties for the link button when the destined application is a Form.

Link Operation Mode How the link will open (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal ).
Exit URL for the target application URL or an application that be redirect to when exiting the Form application.
Enable insert button on target application Enable the “New” button in the Form Application.
Enable update button on target application Enable the “Update” button in the Form Application.
Enable delete button on target application Enable the “Delete” button in the Form Application.
Enable navigation button on target application Enable the navigation button (First, Back, Next and Last) in the Form.
Enable button to edit a grid record Enable the buttons that allow you to edit the records of a Grid

Ajax
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the ajax button in Image, Button or Link.

Button
 5

Setting up Ajax Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Image

Setting up Ajax Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Link

Setting up Ajax Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Type Description of the created button.

Code Block

Ajax button coding block.

In this block, you can use macros, Ajax code and JavaScript.
 1
Master/detail form
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › MASTER/DETAIL FORM

This option allows you to create forms to update, on a single screen, tables with 1:N relationship.

New detail
In the application menu, you can create a new connection by clicking on the “New detail” option from Master/detail folder.

Criating a new detail.

Setting name and label

Interface to set link name and label. It is going to be displayed within the master application as a field. Name can not contain spaces nether special characters.

Interface to set link name and label.

Application list

Only the form types: Editable Grid or Editable Grid View can be used as an application detail. You must create the form detail application before you create the Master/Detail link,
because you will need to select the application during the link creation.

Interface to configure the detail application.

Parameters definition

In the left side column will be displayed all master form fields, and on the right side column are listed the detail form fields. You will need to associate the master form primary
keys with the detail form foreign keys. The 1:N relationship between the tables must to exist also within the database.
 2

Interface to configure the link parameters.

Link properties
After the link creation, you can change the properties by clicking on the link and selecting the properties option.

Link properties.

Attributes
Form properties : Within this option you can select the buttons that are going to be displayed in the detail form.

Iframe properties : This option allows you to configure the iframe height and width (in pixels) where the detail form is going to be displayed.

Other properties
Editable Grid View : Allows you to select if the detail form will be an Editable Grid view or not.

Paging : Allows you to select your form detail paging. The options are:
Partial : This option will set page layout as partial, with a limited records per page, according to the quantity informed within the option below “Lines per page”

Total : This option will set the page to display all records in one page.

Lines per page : Here you can set the amount of records that are displayed in the detail form, you will need to set that just if paging is partial.

When deleting : This option allows you to choose how the form detail dependencies will be treated in a deletion. The options are:
Warn when there are dependencies : Displays an error message if there is dependency on the detail form record that is being deleted from the master form.

Delete dependencies without warning : Deletes all existing dependencies in the detail form without warning the user.

Edit link : This button will allow you to remake the link for application details.
 1
Many-to-many relationship
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › MANY-TO-MANY RELATIONSHIP

Allows you to configure automatic update link tables in N:N relationships

Identification
This link will be handled as a field within the form application. We have to set the field name, data type, label and define if we will use a specific connection for this link. If decide
to you use a specific connection there will be a combo box with for you to seleact according to the connections available in the project.

Creating field to update link table.

Grid Information
In this step you need to inform the data source, this connection will be available for the user to select (lookup). It allows you to choose if the select command is manually
informed or if it will be based on a table.

Informing the select command.

If you check the option “Choose table” there will be 3 combo boxes for you to select according to the connections tables available in the project: table, key field and description.

Informing the select command based in a table..

Key : Value that will be stored in the table.

Description : Value that will be displayed in the update field.

SQL Select Statement

Select command informed by user or created based on a table, it is responsible for displaying the selection field contents.

Select command.

Lookup display
This option sets the display for the update field

Field object type.

 2
Display key and description : If you want to display the code and the description informed in the select command.

Display Title : Displays attribute title (see attribute).

Separator : When the option Display key and description is checked as yes you must define a separator between the code and the description.

Object : Object field type that will be displayed in the update form. The types are: Select, Radio, Check box and Double Select.

Check and Uncheck All : Option to Check and Uncheck all records (available only for when Check box object is selected).

Columns : This option sets the number of columns (available only when the objects Check box or Radio is selected)

Height : This option sets the object height (available only when the objects Select or Double Select is selected).

Link Table

Link table.

This option sets the relationship table that will be updated.

Update table selection.

Relationship Keys

link key

This option sets the application fields that are related with the link table fields.

Setting values for the fields in the update table.

Lookup Field

Lookup field.

This option sets the field from the lookup table that is related to the link table.

Defining the foreign key relationship table..

Link Attributes
This option sets the values that are recorded in the fields of the link table that are not foreign key.

Setting the assignment field.

Attributes : It is written a value without the need for user data entry, it is an application field itself.

Data entry : It is written a value reported by the user, it is necessary to create a field and relate it by the select.
 3
Search
Available only for Double Select object

Search in the double select field.

This option sets a filter for the link field.

![Search settings for the link field.][relacao_n_n_info_filtro_config] Search settings for the link field.

Limit of Records : Maximum number of records returned by the search.

Initial State : this option sets whether the form field load come Filled or empty.

Search Fields : This option sets whether the search will be displayed the code and/or Description.

General Display Settings

This option allows you to configure all general display settings from from field title and object.

Display settings.

Help Configuration
This feature allows it to be documented instructions for use of the application generated, that is, help end users to better understand the business rules of the system and the
best way to operate it.

Help Configuration

Attributes

Help Description : This option allows the inclusion of a text that will be displayed when the user to position the mouse over the field.
Help Type :
Popup : When choosing the type popup, help icon is displayed next to the field; that when clicked, will display what was reported in the attribute Describes Help.

Hint : When you pass the mouse cursor over the field, will help described in the field Describe Help.

Text : Next to the field will appear a text containing the help that was described in the field Describe Help.
 1
Search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › SEARCH

Settings
In the area below you can define all the options that’ll be part of the of the Search Form.

Search configuration Interface.

Attributes

Search Criteria : Allows to select the SQL command AND or OR to define the criteria of the search used;

Display Condition : Displays the condition of the search for the user to choose. In this case “AND” or “OR” will display in the search form, so that the user can choose the desired option.

Use auto-complete in the fields : The field turns into an autocomplete automatically according to the existing values in the database, If the user chooses Yes, the autocomplete will enable
automatically in all the fields that contain a relationship. If the user chooses No no autocompletes will be displayed. In the case the option selected is Defined in the field it’ll respect the
configuration individually for each field.

Dynamic Search
This feature allows the user to search records the application without leaving the current screen, the developer needs to indicate which fields will be available.

Settings

Dynamic Search configuration Interface

Use the ENTER key to : Use the Enter key to tabulate from one field to the other, or to submit the search.

Select Fields

Dynamic Search Field Selection.

QuickSearch
Quick Search is an option that allows to search data in various fields of the application, by using the text box in the toolbar.
 2

Application running QuickSearch.

QuickSearch Settings
In the quicksearch settings are the following options:

QuickSearch Configuration Interface.

Button within the search - An option to inform if the search button will be in the text area of the box. Quicksearch show combo box - Displays a combo box if there’s only one
option in the quicksearch. Quicksearch Watermark - Displays a Placeholder in the quicksearch. Quicksearch width - Defines the width of the Quicksearch field. Display the Quick
search old format - Displays in the old format with the selection of the fields in the Quick search. Search anywhere - If enabled, QuickSearch will search each part of the String for
the data informed in the field.

Select Fields

In the Quicksearch Settings you need to define the fields that are part of the search.

QuickSearch selecting fields Interface.

And you can select various criteria of the search.

 3

QuickSearch search criteria configuration Interface.

You need to add the QuickSearch button in the toolbar in order to use it.

Fields
Text

Text field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text, you can inform a Text value to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Text Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 4

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 5

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Integer
 6

Integer field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Integer, you can inform number values to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Integer Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Integer Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Use Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

 7
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 8

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Decimal

Decimal field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Decimal, it’s allowed to define the format of a decimal number.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 9
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Decimal Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Decimal Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.
 10
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 11

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Percent

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT
 12

Percentage Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.
 13
Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 14

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Currency

Currency field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Currency, you can currency values to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Currency Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Currency Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 15
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 16

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Percent ( Calculated )

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 17
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 18
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 19

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Date

Date field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Date, you can inform a date.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Date Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator attribute.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Display : Select the format of the day for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters A, M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.

Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.

Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.

Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.

View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.

Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

 20
Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Date Field Special Conditions.

All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in today’s date.

Yesterday : Searches in yesterday’s date.

Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).

This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.

Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 21
Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 22

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Time

Time field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Time, you can inform a time to this field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Time Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from TIME. You need to use the characters HH , II , and SS that correspond to Day, Hour , Minutes and
Seconds.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Time Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 23

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 24

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Datetime
 25

Datetime field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Datetime, you can inform a date and time to this field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Datetime Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the day/time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from DATETIME . You need to use the characters A, M, D , HH , II , and SS that correspond to Year, Month,
Day, Hour , Minutes and Seconds.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.

Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.

Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.

Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.

View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.

Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Datetime Field Special Conditions.

All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in todays date.

Yesterday : Searches in yesterdays date.

Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).

This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.

Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.

Display Settings
 26
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 27

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Select
 28

Select field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combo box (Select Field).

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.
 29

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a
different delimiter then (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 30
Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Link : Allows to create a link to another form allowing to manipulate the list displayed on the select field. After the manipulation, the select object it updated
automatically.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :
 31

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the select field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

 32
Label Valor Inicio Tamanho

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
 33
4
Attribute PleasureDescription
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Configuração do lookup de edição Múltiplos Valores (Binário)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing
 34

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 35
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 36

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

DOUBLE SELECT

Double Select field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Double Select, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Double Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Automatic Lookup Interface..

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT key_field ,
display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

 37
Height : Allows to define the height(lines) of the field interface.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different delimiter then
(;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the option Display
original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

 38
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 39

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Checkbox

Checkbox field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Checkbox, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Checkbox Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

 40
Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
 41
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the checkbox field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).
 42

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

Label Value Start Size

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (binary)

 43
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.
 44

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 45
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 46

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Radio

Radio field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Radio, your allowed to select one of the options listed.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 47
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Radio Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.
 48

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 49

Manual Lookup Interface.

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the radio.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing
 50

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 51
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 52

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Grid Fields

Grid fields Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to “Grid Fields”, you can set the fields that’ll be part of the Grid table.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.
 53
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 54

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Sorting

Sorting field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to “Sorting”, you can set the sorting of the fields that’ll be part of the Grid table.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.
 55
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 56

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Text Auto-Complete

Text Auto-Complete field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate an
internal Text for the data.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 57
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Text Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the seach when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 58

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 59
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 60

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Number Auto-Complete

![Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_número_auto] Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search
Configuration.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Number auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate
an internal number for the data.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Number Auto-Complete Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 61

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 62

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 63

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › APPLICATION

Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.

Application Configuration Interface

Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.

Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.

Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.

Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.

Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.

Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.

Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.

Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Folder : Folder where the application’s stored in the work group.

Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.

Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.

HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.

Error Settings

Error Settings Interface.

Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.

SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.

Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.

Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
 2
Navigation
Defines the attributes of the navigation of one application to another.

Navigation Interface.

Attributes
Exit URL : URL on which the user will be redirected when exiting the application.

Close on Exit : When exiting the application, close the browser window.

Redirect URL : URL to redirect in case there isn’t any global variables available.

Redirect Variable : Name of the variable that’ll be stored the URL of a real application.

Messages

Global Variables
This screen shows the global variables in the application.

The global variable is an external parameter required for running the application. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause, field definitions and names,
event programming, and so on.

Global variables are defined in brackets ([variable]). These variables must be passed to the application being implemented through one of the methods: Session, Post, and Get

Global variables Interface.

Example:

Select CustomerID, CustomerName from Customers WHERE CustomerID = '[v_customerid]'

In this case, the variable v_customerid appears in the global variables configuration.

Global variables configuration Interface.

Shows all global variables used in the application

Attribute : name of the variable in the application.

Value : Defines the behavior of the variables, this content is divided in three blocks, they are:
Scope : Defines how the variable is received by the application. If a variable has been defined that it’s received by a POST method and has been approved by the GET method, the
content is not accepted. Methods of passing variable values:

Session : In this option, the variable must be created as a PHP session variable by another application.

GET : Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that is, visible by the browser.

POST : Defines that the variable must be passed through the POST method of a HTML form.

Settings : Does not validate (check) the variable at runtime.

Type (In / Out) : Defines whether the variable is input or output.

Description : Indicates where the variable is being used.

 3
Synchronize table
This process performs a comparison between the definitions of application fields and fields of the connected database table. If there is any change within the connected table,
such as adding a new field, exclusion, or a change in the data type, the changes will appear visible as in the image below:

Table synchronization interface.

After accessing the function from the link “Synchronize table” you will see a comparison table between the application fields (left table) and the database table fields (right table),
above image, the fields highlighted in “red” will be deleted of the application, the fields highlighted in “Green” will be inserted in the form, and the fields highlighted in “orange”
will be updated, so data type will be updated.

To rename a field in the database table, the table synchronization effect, by comparison, will be the same as deleting a field that existed in the application and the inclusion of a
new field.
 1
Links
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › LINKS

New link

Links menu interface.

When you click the “New Link” ScriptCase application menu will display the screen below.

Links menu interface.

Application link
Used to edit records of a Grid Application by using a Form Application. In the generated Grid you’ll view a link for each record to edit the records. Clicking on the link, the

form selected can be displayed in various ways (in an iframe, in the same window or on another window).

Application Link creation interface.

List of Applications

Application Link list of applications available.

Application: You need to select the form application that’s going to be called by the Grid Application.

Parameters Definition
 2

Parameters Definition Interface.

On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option that’s going to be set to the parameter. The options are:

Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

Field link
Used to create a link of a navigation in a column to any application of the project. When selecting the field link type, it’s displayed a select field with all the field displayed in the
Grid application.

Field Link creation interface.

List of Applications
It’s possible to create a field link to all the applications of the project (Menus, Searches, Reports PDF, Grid, Tabs, Form (Update Mode) and Control). You need to select an
application to proceed.

Field Link list of applications available.

Parameters Definition
 3

Parameters Definition Interface.

On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option that’s going to be set to the parameter. The options are:

Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

Capture link
The capture is used specially in the Form and in the Grid Search. This type of link imports the data of another Grid to a Form or Search Field. When selecting a capture link type,
it’ll display a list of fields of the Search Form. You need to choose a files to receive the data through the link.

Capture Link creation interface.

List of Applications
It’s possible to create a capture link to the Grid Application. You need to select an application to proceed.

Capture Link list of applications available.

Parameters Definition

Parameters Definition Interface.

Fetch field value : You need to select the field that’ll call the Grid Application. This field will have the values informed when returned from the Grid Search.

Select values to pass as parameters : This option is displayed when the Grid Application has a parameter; like a Where clause for example that receives a global variable. The options for the
values that can be passed as a parameter are:
Fixed : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

 4
Button link
Used to link a Grid application to any other type applications. In this type of link, a button is used like a link between the Grid and other applications.

Button Link creation interface.

Link edit
In the Link Folder of the Application Menu (Image Below) are displayed the links existing in the application and also the item New Link. When clicking on the existing link it’s
displayed the screen below that allows to manage the links.

Editing Links.

Actions

Properties Change the behavior of the link, position, and how the link opens.
Link Change the application that’s being called in the link their parameters.
Delete Remove the existing link.

Link Properties
On the screen below, you can see the attributes relevant to the link behavior of that need to be informed.

Link properties Interface.

Link Operation Mode :

Open in the same Window : Displays the Form in the same browser window.

Open in another Window : Displays the Form in another window of the browser.

Open in Iframe : The Form will be displayed in the same window, allowing to position below, above, to the left or right of the Grid.

Open in Parent : If the Grid is in a iframe, it displays the Form in the parent viewport of the page.

Modal : Opens the Form in modal, allowing to configure the size of the modal.

Display button (new row) on the grid toolbar : This option, when enabled, adds a button to the toolbar that allows to add a New Record to the Form.

Label for the button New : You can apply a Label for the button, if not informed the label will be “New”.

Hint for the button New : You can apply a Hint for the button, if not informed the hint will be “New”.

Hotkey for the button “New” : Indicates which key will be the shortcut for the New Record.

Exit URL for the target application : The URL that’s going to call after exiting the Form. In case no value is informed, the “back” button will redirect to the Grid.

Form Property

Allows to select the buttons that are going to be displayed in the Form through the link. Form properties configurations Interface.

Enable insert button on target application : Enables the Insert Button in the Form.

Enable update button on target application : Enables the Update Button in the Form.

Enable delete button on target application : Enables the Delete Button in the Form.

Enable navigation button on target application : Enables the navigation buttons (first, previous, next and last) in the Form.

Enable button to edit a grid record : Enables the edit button for each record.

Iframe properties
 5

These options are displayed when the property Link Operation Mode is set to “Open in Iframe”. Iframe properties

configurations Interface.

Display the header of the called application : Displays the header of the Form.

Iframe position relative to the main application : It can be: below, above, right or left.

Action After Insert view the list below :

Reload Grid : Does a refresh on the current page.

Move to the end of the grid : Navigate to the last page of the Grid.

Iframe height : Iframe Height in pixels.

Iframe width : Iframe Width in pixels.

 1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › FORM › PROGRAMMING

ScriptCase has incorporated the concept of Object Oriented programming, using attributes, resources, methods and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in
applications, and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.

Attributes
The attributes are variables that has the global scope declared in the application. An attribute that can be referenced in all the methods and events of the application.

Attributes configuration Interface.

Attributes
Attribute Name : This field, allows to inform the name of the attribute, after typing the name just click on include. In case you want to update click on the name of the attribute (located
on the tight side of the buttons), do the necessary modifications and click on update. In case it’s necessary to delete an attribute, it’s necessary to do same process as the update, but
when selecting the attribute, it’s necessary to click on the delete button. The clear button, as the name suggests, it clears the list of all the attributes listed on the right.

Internal libraries
To use the internal libraries just select the correspondent ( Project Libraries for example). This process allows the methods existing in the library, to be visible in all the Events and
Methods of the application. See how to manage the libraries by clicking here.

Internal Libraries managment Interface

PHP Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.

Creating a new method

PHP method creation Interface

Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.

Include Method.

Methods can receive parameters.

 2

Add the amount of variables: PHP method parameter definition

Defining the variables: Defining the variables

Name : Type in the name of the variable.

Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.

Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.

Editing a parameter:

: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Edit the selected parameter of the list.

: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

JavaScript Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.

Creating a new method

JavaScript method creation Interface

Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.

Include Method.

Methods can receive parameters.

 3

Add the amount of variables: JavaScript method parameter definition

Defining the variables: Defining the variables

Name : Type in the name of the variable.

Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.

Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.

Editing a parameter:

: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Edit the selected parameter of the list.

: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

 1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › SETTINGS

Tab settings interface.

Within the Tab settings you can configure the following attributes:

Title : Application title that will be displayed in the toolbar.

Friendly URL : This field allows you to customize the URL that will be called by the application, the allowed characters are the same available on regular URLs: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_. This option can
also be changed within Scriptcase Home interface, on the “Friendly URL” column from the applications grid.

Organization : Allows the applications to run inside folders via iframe or embedded on the tabs application.

Type : This option sets how the folders will be organized, it can be:
Folder on the Top : Displays the folders above the application.

Folder on the Bottom : Displays the folders below the application, next to the footer.

Folder on the Left : This option allows the folders to be aligned in the left, like a vertical menu.

Folder on the Right : This option allows the folders to be aligned in the right, like a vertical menu.

Menu on the Top : This option is similar to “Folder on the Top”, but its visual schema has the menu style.

Menu on the Bottom : This option is similar to “Folder on the Bottom”, but its visual schema has the menu style. .

Menu on the Left : This option is similar to “Folder on the Left”, but its visual schema has the menu style.

Menu on the Right : This option is similar to “Folder on the Right”, but its visual schema has the menu style.

Side by Side : Display all applications in folders, one next to the other.

Table Width : Main table size.

Measure Unit : The unit used by table size. It can be: Pixel or percentage..

Tab Alignment : This option sets the tab alignment position. It can be: center, left or right.

Application alignment : This option sets the application alignment position, It can be: center, left, or right.

Exit : This option allows you to define how the exit will be presented in the application, the options:
Button on the bottom of the page;

Folder;

Button in the toolbar

In view.

Exit Icon : This option allow you to select an icon for the “Exit” option in the tab. Use the image manage to select or import a customized image.
 1
Folder settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › FOLDER SETTINGS

You will use the folder settings options to manage each folder link to an existing application.

Folder Settings Interface.

Add a folder : To create a tab, click in ‘Add’ and fill these fields: * Label : Application name that will be displayed in the tab or menu (examples: Personal Data, Finance Data,
etc.); * Image : Choose the image that will be used for this tab;

Update : Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then update the data. Finally, click on the ‘update’ button.

Clean : Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then delete the item.

Remove : This button when clicked, clears all existing folders in the box (the box located in the left).
 1
Application settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › APPLICATION SETTINGS

In this folder you can set which applications will be part of the tabs implemented, as follows:

Application Settings Interface

Initially you must click on the tab that you need to update. You have the options:

Add : Click “Add” button, and then the following screen will be displayed for selection of applications.

Edit : Select the application for the link and then click the “Edit” button. The following steps are the application selection and setting the size of the iframe, as requested in the process to add
applications.

Remove : To remove just select the application you want to delete in the folder, and then click “Remove”.

Adding and editing applications

Select the application to be placed in the folder, and click the continue button, you must see the screen below:

Application Link Interface.

Then the following screen will be displayed to complement with the link parameters to the selected application:

Parameters set Interface..

Iframe width : Width set to be used inside the folder to display the application window, leaving 100% the application will be adjusted more easily.

Iframe height : Height set to be used in the iframe to display the application window, if the it’s too small, the application will create a scroll bar to the window.

Reload Iframe : When a folder is selected the applications contained in the same run and the result is displayed, with this option turned on “Yes” when you click on the folder that contains
the application cache is created with the page loaded, this cache will be used if the user browse for other folders and return to the folder that has the application with this option enabled.

Parameters / Value : For each parameter of the application we are putting in the folder, there are three options to choose:
Variable : Global variable name where the content will be retrieved.

Value : Content to be loaded into the parameter at run time.

Empty : For this parameter the content will not be the responsibility of the Tab application
 1
PDF settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › PDF SETTINGS

PDF Settings Interface.

Create PDF : This option allows to define if the application will have output in PDF format.

PDF Orientation : This option sets the direction of the reports generated in PDF, it can be: portrait or landscape.

PDF Format : Pages format of the reports generated in PDF, such as Letter, A4, A5, etc.

Open PDF Directly : This option indicates whether the application will allow us to generate the PDF directly via button or through a link to the PDF.
 1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › SECURITY

Application Security Configuration

When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.
 1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › LOG

Application Log configuration

Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
 1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › LAYOUT

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

Header & Footer

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.
 2

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.
 3

Drag the selected option to the “Menu Items” area to create a new “Layer” where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the “Menu items” area.

After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the “pencil” icon to edit the layer options or click on the “trash” icon to delete it .

Layer editing

Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.

Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the “Menu Width” option
within the Menu “Settings”, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.

Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.

Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.

Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on “Application Title” within the menu “Header & Footer”.

Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y

Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.

Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].

Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option “Tools » External Libraries” from the main menu.

Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option “PHP Programming”
within the menu “Programming”

Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.

Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.

Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.

Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.

Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.

Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.

Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TAB › APPLICATION

General data

Settings interface.

In this folder you can set the application configuration attributes, such as:

Application Code : Code for internal use of ScriptCase. Should start by a letter.

Connection : Connection name of the used by ScriptCase to access the tables. The user can select it.

Default Profile : Default profile to be loaded into the production environment.

Language : Data formatting based on the regional settings.

Charset : Share location with other applications based on the values in the session.

Share Theme Variable : Shares themes with other applications based on the values in the session.

Exit URL :URL to which the user will be redirected to exit the application.

Folder : Folder where the application will be stored in the work group. The user can select it.

Description : Application description.

HelpCase Link : Using this option you can associate HelpCase files to your application.

Global variables
This screen shows the global variables in the application.

The global variable is an external parameter required for running the application. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause, field definitions and names,
event programming, and so on.

Global variables are defined in brackets ([variable]). These variables must be passed to the application being implemented through one of the methods: Session, Post, and Get

Global variables Interface.

Example:

Select CustomerID, CustomerName from Customers WHERE CustomerID = '[v_customerid]'

In this case, the variable v_customerid appears in the global variables configuration.
 2

Global variables configuration Interface.

Shows all global variables used in the application

Attribute : name of the variable in the application.

Value : Defines the behavior of the variables, this content is divided in three blocks, they are:
Scope : Defines how the variable is received by the application. If a variable has been defined that it’s received by a POST method and has been approved by the GET method, the
content is not accepted. Methods of passing variable values:

Session : In this option, the variable must be created as a PHP session variable by another application.

GET : Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that is, visible by the browser.

POST : Defines that the variable must be passed through the POST method of a HTML form.

Settings : Does not validate (check) the variable at runtime.

Type (In / Out) : Defines whether the variable is input or output.

Description : Indicates where the variable is being used.

 1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › DASHBOARD › SETTINGS

Dashboard settings

Add link widget

Allows you to create a link widget.

Title:

Here you will set a title for the widget.

 2
Link:
Here you can link a Scriptcase application or an external URL to display its content within the widget. To select an application, click the link and select the application you want to
connect. To use a URL link you just need to enter the complete URL. E.g.: http://www.scriptcase.com.br/

When selecting an application, if it links to other applications, you can set the location where these links will be opened.

Called application : Application that is part of the link.

Link type: Link type between the applications.

Field: If it’s a field type link, it will display the field that is part of the link.

Target: Where the linked application will be opened.

Properties:
Using this option you can set the widget execution properties.

Compact mode : This option enable/disable the compact mode. When enabled it will hide the linked application header and footer.

Display widget header : Enables/disables the display of the widget header.

Removable: This option allows the Widget to be removed at run time.

Move : This option allows the Widget can be moved at run time.

Maximize: This option enables/disables the option to maximize the widget.

Collapsible : This option allows the Widget is expanded at runtime.

Reload time : Linked application or selected URL reload time into the Widget, it must be set in seconds.

Add Index widget

Using this type of widgets you can display key performance indicators within the dashboard.
 3

Title:

Here you will set a title for the index widget.

Index:

Using the options below you can set the index options.

Connection: Connection that will be used for recovery of the values for the index;

Table name : Table that will be used for recovery of the values of the index;

Metric field: Table field that will be used for recovery of the values of the index;

Metric function : Metric function that will be used. Metric functions available for each field type are:
Integer: Sum, Average, Max, Min, Count, Distinct Count.

Text: Count, Distinct Count.

Date: Count, Distinct Count.

Binary: Count, Distinct Count.

Display as : This option sets the display form of value, which can be of types:
Percentage difference: Displays the difference in percentage form between the largest and the smallest value of the index;

Difference: Displays the difference between the largest and smallest value of the index;

Value: displays the value of the index.

Period field: Field of type DATE used for retrieving the value of the index;

Period function : Check function used for retrieving the value of the index.

Properties:

Using this option you can set the widget execution properties.
 4

Compact mode : This option enable/disable the compact mode. When enabled it will hide the linked application header and footer.

Display widget header : Enables/disables the display of the widget header.

Removable: This option allows the Widget to be removed at run time.

Move : This option allows the Widget can be moved at run time.

Maximize: This option enables/disables the option to maximize the widget.

Collapsible : This option allows the Widget is expanded at runtime.

Reload time : Linked application or selected URL reload time into the Widget, it must be set in seconds.

Widgets organization

You can change the size and arrangement of widgets on the screen. To resize a Widget, click the lower right edge of the Widget and drag. To move, click on the Widget and drag
to the desired position.

Save
 5

Saves the changes made.

 1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › DASHBOARD › SECURITY

Application Security Configuration

When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.
 1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › DASHBOARD › LOG

Application Log configuration

Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
 1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › DASHBOARD › LAYOUT

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

Header & Footer

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.
 2

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.
 3

Drag the selected option to the “Menu Items” area to create a new “Layer” where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the “Menu items” area.

After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the “pencil” icon to edit the layer options or click on the “trash” icon to delete it .

Layer editing

Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.

Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the “Menu Width” option
within the Menu “Settings”, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.

Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.

Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.

Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on “Application Title” within the menu “Header & Footer”.

Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y

Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.

Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].

Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option “Tools » External Libraries” from the main menu.

Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option “PHP Programming”
within the menu “Programming”

Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.

Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.

Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.

Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.

Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.

Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.

Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › DASHBOARD › APPLICATION

General data

Settings interface.

In this folder you can set the application configuration attributes, such as:

Application Code : Code for internal use of ScriptCase. Should start by a letter.

Connection : Connection name of the used by ScriptCase to access the tables. The user can select it.

Default Profile : Default profile to be loaded into the production environment.

Language : Data formatting based on the regional settings.

Charset : Share location with other applications based on the values in the session.

Share Theme Variable : Shares themes with other applications based on the values in the session.

Exit URL :URL to which the user will be redirected to exit the application.

Folder : Folder where the application will be stored in the work group. The user can select it.

Description : Application description.

HelpCase Link : Using this option you can associate HelpCase files to your application.

Global variables
 1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › SETTINGS

Interface de configuração.

Friendly URL : Allows to define a name for the URL that’s going to be called by the application. The characters allowed in the URL are(a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_). The Friendly URL can be informed on the
initial screen of the project, where the applications are listed, on the “Friendly URL” column.

Line break in title : Allows to break a link on the field titles.

Horizontal Alignment : Permite definir o alinhamento da aplicação na página.

Margins : Allows to organize the display of the application according to the values of the margins (Right , Left, Up and Down) in pixels.

Table Width : Value of the application table. The applications generated by ScriptCase are generated in Plain HTML, and are organized in tablesm lines and cells.

Table Width Unit : Measurment unit for the table width defined in the previous option, being: percentage, pixel or automatic.

Table Columns : This parameter defines the column (fields) width of the table (application).

Labels width : When the previous option is set to “Provided”, this one appears and here you can inform the width of the labels.

Layout and Behavior

Layout and Behavior configuration Interface.

Automatic tab : Changes the focus to next field when the amount of chacteres reaches its defined limit.

Highlight Text on Focus : Highlights the field when selected.

Use Enter to : Allows to use the “Enter” key to pass the focus to the next field.

Field with Initial Focus : Determines which field will contain the initial focus when accessing the application. This option doesn’t work with fields that contain watermark.

Highlight Field with Error : Focus the field with error when submitting the form.

Use a template from the HTML Editor : Allows to use the TinyMCE editor. You can edit and create your own HTML Templates.
 1
Edit fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › EDIT FIELDS

This configuration allows the user to organize and edit the fields.

Fields Configuration

Edit Fields Configuration.

Fields
This column is used to display the field name.

Label

Column to edit the display name of the field in an application.

Datatype
Allows to change the field type.

New
Defines if the field will be available when inserting new records.

Update
Defines if the field will be available when updating new records.

Read-Only
Defines the field will be a label.

Required
Defines if the field has to contain a value.

PK
Defines which fields are the Primary Keys.

DB value (Insert)

Defines if the filed will receive internal values when inserting a new record, like an auto increment, date, datetime and IP.

DB value (Update)

Defines if the filed will receive internal values when updating a record, like the date, datetime and IP.

Page

Indicate the Pages in the application.

Blocks
Indicates the Blocks in the application.
 2
Page Fields Not Shown
Contains all the fields that aren’t going to be displayed in the application.

Observe that all the lines can be dragged to the desired position, blocks and page. NOTE: Fields are grouped in Blocks and the Blocks are grouped in Pages.

Display

Display Interface.

Attributes
Markers positioning : Indicates the position of the maker that’ll displayed next to the field that’s required.

Display message : Allows to display a custom message when validating the custom fields.
 1
Fields positioning
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › FIELDS POSITIONING

Allows to set the order that the fields will be displayed.

Field Positioning

The box to the left represents the fields that aren’t displayed int he application.

The box to the right represents the fields that are displayed int he application.
 1
Toolbar
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › TOOLBAR

The toolbar of the applciation is divided in two parts: Top and Bottom, in a way that’s possible to define which buttons will be displayed for both locations. Selecting the buttons
for the Top and Bottom toolbars work independently, allowing buttons being in both toolbars at once for example.

It’s also possible to separate which buttons will be displayed in an application that’s opened in a mobile deveice, and their respective positions in the toolbar. Like the image
below, there’s the following layout:

Desktop : Location where you should inform the configurations for the toolbar in “Classic Web Version” display, so that the configuration can be used in the application when be accessed
from a Desktop .

Mobile : Location where you should inform the configurations for the toolbar in “Mobile Version” display, so that the configuration can be used in the application when be accessed from a
Mobile.

Toolbar

Grid buttons positioning

Attribute :
Navigation : Presents the options relative to the navigation buttons that can be displayed in the application.

Next Proceeds to the next page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Previous Returns to the previous page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
First Redirects to the First page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Last Redirects to the Last page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Exit Exits the applications.
Navigation by page Displays a linl for the pages. e.g. 1 2 3 4 5
Export : Defines the formats of the generated exports. Scriptcase generates the following export formats:

PDF Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a PDF format.
WORD Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a WORD format.
XLS Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a EXCEL format.
XML Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a XML format.
CSV Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a CSV format.
RTF Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a RTF format.
Print Creates a HTML format of the application for printing.
Others : Presents a diversity of options relative to the application.

Jump to Defines the record page by the informed number.

Rows Limit It’s a combox that defines the amount of rows displayed per page.
Search When clicked, it redirects to the search form to filter the records.
Dynamic Search When clicked, it displays the search fields to filter the records.
Columns Allows to define the columns that’ll be displayed.
Sorting Options Allows to select the order of the records based on the field.
Group By Allows to select a Group By rule. ( Created previously in the application ).
Save Grid Allows to save the current state of the application.
QuickSearch Allows to do a rapid search in the records of the application.
 2
Gantt When clicked, displays a gantt chart.
Summary When clicked, displays a summary with the set of data from the records.
Form Buttons Displays the Form Buttons, when there’s an Application Link created previously.
Languages Displays a combobox with the names available, defined in the project properties.
Themes Displays a combobox with the themes available, defined in the project properties.
Rows Counter Allows to define the amount of lines displayed in the application.
HelpCase Displays a button to redirect to the help page.
Separator

————————- | Dispayes a line separating the buttons, when used the Group Buttons.

Button Group : The Group allows to create group buttons.

Add Button Groups

Button Group Configuration

Name : Allows to define a name for the button group.

Label : Allows to define a name for the button group that’s going to be displayed for the user.

Hint\Title : Allows to define a hint for the group of buttons that’s going to be displayed to the user.

Button Type : Allows to define a display format for the button group ( Button, Image, Link).

Image : Allows to define an image for the button if its display format is and Image.

Display : Defines if the button will display only the Text, only the image or both.

Display Position : Defines the position of the Text or Image ( Text to the right, Image to the right ).

After creating a button group, its necessary to position the buttons below the Button Group and to the right. Like the image below:

Positioning the buttons of the button group

Button Settings
 3

Application Button Settings

Button Buttons available in the application.

Label Allows to define the name of the button that’s going to display in the application.
Hint Allows to define the hint of the button that’s going to display in the application.
_Shortcut key Allows to define a shortcut on the keyboard for the button. ( Each browser has it’s own combination of reserved shortcuts ).

Options

Opções da consulta

Attribute
Display Summary : Defines if the summary button will be displayed for each page.

Format Row Counter : Allows to define the format that’ll be used to create the Row Counter. e.g. [1 to 10 of 200].

The number of links displayed : Defines the amount of links per page , when the navigation option is disabled.

Jump to : Defines wether the it’ll redirect to the page or the record informed.

Records per page : Defines which amount of records to be listed per page, the options will display in a combobox.

Toolbar buttons : Defines the type of display for the Toolbar buttons ( A DIV below the toolbar , Modal ).

Mobile Toolbar
 4

Positioning the mobile buttons

Contains the same options as the Desktop version, adding only the item “Copy from Desktop”, on which, when clicked it copies the items from the Desktop toolbar to the
Mobile toolbar.
 1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › SQL

In this module the attributes related to the connection to the table in which the Form was created are defined. We can define the Primary Key, Filters, Sorts for the created form.

SQL configuration Interface.

Select primary key fields : On this function it’s displayed an Combo box with a “ * “ beside, that indicates which fields are the Compound keys or Primary Key of the SQL
table. In most cases, ScriptCase already identifies the Keys, in case that doesn’t happen the user can manually inform the key using the button beside the list to select the
keys. See how the buttons work:

On/Off : Adds or Removes the attribute that defines the primary key for the field. The field defined as the primary key will have an asterisk beside its name.

All : Defines that all the fields are Primary Keys. The field defined as the primary key will have an asterisk beside its name.

None : Unchecks all the fields. It removes the definition of the primary key for all fields.

Sorting Button : These are the arrows on the right side of the Combo box. It allows to order the fields of the Primary Key, placing it in the desired order. To order click on the field and
use the arrows to make the move.

Where clause : An optional space that allows the user to place a Where clause with the objective to filter the SQL records.

Order By : Optional space for the user to write the ORDER BY clause that will determine the order in which the records will be displayed, when the navigation bar is used by default, the order
is determined by the Primary Key.

Connection : Displays the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this connection can be changed by another one that contains the same
tables (SQL).

Table Name : Name of the table that’s being used in the Form.

Variable for Table : These fields informed with value, allows part of the table name defined in the select to be changed before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.

Variable for Table Configuration.

The first field must be filled with the name of the variable. The second field must be filled with the part of the name of the table to be replaced.

Case Sensitive : Allows you to configure whether the connection will be case sensitive or not. (Differentiating case).
 1
JavaScript
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › JAVASCRIPT

The concept of editing JavaScript in Scriptcase is associated with the fields of the form and JavaScript events, so for each field edited in the JavaScript option, they will be
associated to a specific event.

Edit JavaScript Interface.

Attributes

Select the object : In this Combo box will be displayed the fields that are part of the form application, also the Form its self as an object.

Select the event : In this Combo box you need to associate the event with the selected field, that you are going to apply the JS code. View the events available:
onclick : Runs when the field is clicked.

onblur : Runs when the object loses focus.

onChange : Runs when the object loses focus and its value is modified.

onFocus : Runs when the object receives focus.

onMouseOver : Runs when the mouse pointer hovers the object.

onMouseOut : Runs when the mouse pointer is removed from above the object.

Events related to the Form : The events below are associated directly with the form.
OnLoad : This events runs when the page is loaded, also when navigating between records and clicking on the buttons (Next, Previous, etc.).

onSubmit: This event runs when clicking on the buttons “New”, “Save” and “Delete”.

Edit JavaScript
After selecting the object and the event and clicking on the button (Edit), it’ll open the page to edit the JavaScript routine, that’ll run the moment that the selected event is triggered.
On this page you can inform custom JavaScript routines or use the standard ScriptCase events, e.g. nm_recarga_form(); that refreshes the form.

Edit JavaScript Interface

After saving the JavaScript Routines by clicking on (save), it’ll conclude the work.

The JavaScript language won’t always have the same behavior in all Browsers available in the market. Always when necessary to write a block more elaborated or complex in this
language, it’s important to do the necessary tests in the browsers that the application will run.

OnClick Example

When clicking on a field of type radio, you can enable or disable a series of fields of the form according to the value selected.

if(document.F1.gender[0].checked){
document.F1.maternity.disabled = false;
document.F1.maternity.style.background='FFFFFF'
}
if(document.F1.gender[1].checked){
document.F1.maternity.disabled = true;
document.F1.maternity.style.background='FCEEBC'
}

To access a radio type field, you need to use the index.

OnBlur Example
You can define a warning around the field “weekly_work_time” when it loses the focus.
 2
if (document.F1.tp_point[0].checked && document.F1.weekly_work_time.value > '20')
{
alert("The work time exceeds the limit allowed");
document.F1.weekly_work_time.value = "";
document.F1.weekly_work_time.focus();
}

OnChange Example
By modifying the “Salary” of and employee and exiting the field, at this moment we’ll check if the “position” is “gardener”.

if (document.F1.salary.value > 2000.00 && document.F1.position.value == 'gardener'){

alert('When I grow up, I want to be a gardener);

}

OnFocus
After informing the purchase value and selecting the payment method in a Select type object “Select: pay_method”, the JavaScript code below calculates the value of
the purchase.

if (document.F1.pay_method[document.F1.pay_method.selectedIndex].text == 'Money')
{
document.F1.total.value = document.F1.pauchase_value.value;
}

OnMouseOver Example
You can change the style (background color, font etc.) when the mouse hovers the field.

document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "0FFCCA"

onMouseOut Example
Sets the background color when the mouse exists the hover of the field.

document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "FFFFFF"
 1
Segurança
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › SEGURANÇA

Application Security Configuration

When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.

Captcha

Use Captcha : Defines if the application will have Captcha support.

Number of Characters : Amount of characters in the Captcha image.

Character List : List of characters used in the Captcha.

Label : Message displayed for the Captcha.

Error message : Captcha error message.

Height : Height of the image generated by the Captcha ( in pixels ).

Width : Width of the image generated by the Captcha ( in pixels ).

Font Size : Size of the font used in the image generated by the Captcha (in pixels).

Reload: Display the refresh button in the Captcha.

Select one layout : Offers various layouts (of positioning) for the Captcha display.

reCAPTCHA
ReCAPTCHA is a tool used through the API provided by Google for sending forms adding security at the time of form confirmation (preventing automation for submission).

reCAPTCHA sample:

First we have to request an API Key to activate reCAPTCHA in the Scriptcase application by following the steps below:

To get a Site key and Secret Key go to the link: https://www.google.com/recaptcha/admin#list. The page below will be showed:

Label: Project name which will be created to contains the reCAPTCHA keys.

Choose the type of reCaptcha : We need to choose the option reCAPTCHA V2 .

Domains : We can insert any domains (on per line ) to limit the API uses.

After that, we need to accept the Terms of Service ( “Accept the reCAPTCHA Terms of Service” ).

When click in Register the page will be reloaded showing the integration reCAPTCHA informations. In this screen we can get the Site Key and Secret Key:
 2
Now, we can setting the scriptcase application security:

Site Key : Key generated by google after reCAPTCHA project creation.

Secret Key : Key generated by google after reCAPTCHA project creation.

Theme : Defines the color which the reCAPTCHA will be displayed. We have two options:
Light :

Dark :

Type: Defines the initial type which the reCAPTCHA will be displayed. We have two options:
Audio:

Image :

Tamanho : Defines the size of reCAPTCHA. We have two options:

Normal :

Compact:

Position : Defines the reCAPTCHA component position in relation with the width of the application:
Left : Position the reCAPTCHA component at left.

Center: Position the reCAPTCHA component at center.

Rigth : Position the reCAPTCHA component at right.

 1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › LOG

Application Log configuration

Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
 1
Authentications
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › AUTHENTICATIONS

Scriptcase can link its applications using OAuth methods. These methods allow you to integrate a Scriptcase project with the following data sources:

Facebook

Facebook fields authentication interface.

When you create a button Facebook authentication, you must fill in the fields:

App ID : Facebook application ID. This ID will be provided by Facebook Developer’s page.

Secret : Secret key provided by Facebook, so the application can be executed.

Method return : Method that will be performed when Facebook service returns the requested data. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
“Programming > PHP Methods”

For building applications, visit: Facebook app development

Twitter

Twitter fields authentication interface.

When you create a button Twitter authentication, you must fill in the fields:

Key : Twitter application ID. This ID will be provided by Twitter Developer’s page .

Secret : Secret key provided by Twitter, so the application can be executed.

Method return : Method that will be performed when Twitter service returns the requested data. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
“Programming > PHP Methods”

For building applications, visit: Twitter app development

Google

Google fields authentication interface.

Application name : Name of the application created on Google+.

Client ID : Google+ application ID. This ID will be provides by Google Developer’s page.

Secret : Secret key provided by Google+, so the application can be executed.

Method return : Method that will be performed when Google+ service returns the requested data. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
“Programming > PHP Methods”

For building applications, visit: Google+ app development

PayPal
 2

PayPal fields authentication interface.

To create the integration with PayPal, you must fill in these fields:

PayPal URL : This URL can be to the PayPal SandBox or to the real PayPal API. The SandBox is used to perform tests with the application before applying the integration in a real environment.

Id : PayPal ID to receive the sales money. Usually the registered email as business.

Order number : Order Number to be stored in PayPal. Also used to treat the receipt of the IPN in order to identify and process the order as paid.

Customized field :Custom field to be stored in PayPal. Also used to treat the receipt of the IPN in order to identify and process the order as paid, if you want to do some additional checking.

Variable with the description : Using this field you can place the Global variable that will contain the description to be sent to PayPal.

Variable with the Total amount. : Method to be ran when PayPal service return the data requested.

Variable with the currency type : Use to specify the payment currency. If the currency variable is not included, the currency defaults to USD.

PayPal Method : Method that will be called after the User complete the PayPal transaction. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
“Programming > PHP Methods”

Method Cancel : Method to be executed if the user cancels the PayPal transaction. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option “Programming > PHP
Methods”

Method IPN : Method that will be called by web service from PayPal to confirm the payment of a transaction. This method is called by web service and it has no HTML output to the end-user.
You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option “Programming > PHP Methods”

For PayPal configuration, please visit: Configuring PayPal credentials

The variables list returned by the PayPal API can be found below:

[mc_gross]
[invoice]
[protection_eligibility]
[address_status]
[payer_id]
[tax]
[address_street]
[payment_date]
[payment_status]
[charset]
[address_zip]
[first_name]
[mc_fee]
[address_country_code]
[address_name]
[notify_version]
[custom]
[payer_status]
[business]
[address_country]
[address_city]
[quantity]
[verify_sign]
[payer_email]
[txn_id]
[payment_type]
[last_name]
[address_state]
[receiver_email]
[payment_fee]
[receiver_id]
 3
[txn_type]
[item_name]
[mc_currency]
[item_number]
[residence_country]
[test_ipn]
[handling_amount]
[transaction_subject]
[payment_gross]
[shipping]
[ipn_track_id]
 1
Fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › FIELDS

In the menu “Fields”, only the fields that were selected in the menu “Select fields” will available for settings.

List of application fields

Depending on the selected field type a number of specific attributes will be displayed

Text
General Settings

Text field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text, you can inform a Text value to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Password Field : Formats the input of the field to have a password mask (*).
 2

Password configuration Interface.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field Mask : Defines the mask for field display. There are three types of masks that can be merged.

Character Description
9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9)
A Replaced by any alpha character entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z)
* Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
It’s possible to merge two or more masks simultaneously, separated by a semi coma with the smallest mas at start. The replacement occurs when the user is typing in the
number of characters form the smallest mask.

Examples

Field Mask Value Entered Value Formatted

Telephone number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Software Key (Only letters) AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA QWERTYUIASDFGHJK QWER-TYUI-ASDF-GHJK
Software Key (Letters and Numbers) **---** Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-U7I8
Car Plate AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
Scriptcase’s serial key A999A999A999- ** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-DG2P
Multiple Masks (Telephone) 9999-9999;(99)9999-9999;9999 999 9999 +99 99 9999-9999
Validate with mask : Displays an error if the user doesn’t complete the value based on the mask.

Complete to the Left : Allows to define the character that’ll be used to complete the value to the left that the user typed in to the max size of the field defined in the Field size in database
option.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values Format

Format of Values Interface

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

Minimum Size : Allows to define the minimum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Maximum Size : Allows to define the maximum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Allowed Characters : Allows to select a set of characters that can be typed into the field. The options are:
 3
All : Allows any type of character to be typed into the field

Selected : Defines a set of characters allowed. Using the configuration below, will be allowed to type letters, numbers and other characters (defined in the attribute More). The letters a, b and

c (defined in the Less Attribute) aren’t allowed.

Lookup Settings

Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 4

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 5

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
 6

Multiple Lines Text field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Multiple Lines Text , you can inform a Text value to the field in multiple lines.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Lines : Allows to define the amount of lines that the field will have at start.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values Format

Format of Values Interface

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.
 7
Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

Minimum Size : Allows to define the minimum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Maximum Size : Allows to define the maximum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Allowed Characters : Allows to select a set of characters that can be typed into the field. The options are:

All : Allows any type of character to be typed into the field

Selected : Defines a set of characters allowed. Using the configuration below, will be allowed to type letters, numbers and other characters (defined in the attribute More). The letters a, b and

c (defined in the Less Attribute) aren’t allowed.

Lookup Settings

Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 8
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 9

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Integer
General Settings
 10

Integer field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Integer, you can inform number values to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field Mask : Defines the mask for field display. There are three types of masks that can be merged.

Character Description
9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9)
A Replaced by any alpha character entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z)
* Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
It’s possible to merge two or more masks simultaneously, separated by a semi coma with the smallest mas at start. The replacement occurs when the user is typing in the
number of characters form the smallest mask.

Examples

Field Mask Value Entered Value Formatted

Telephone number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Software Key (Only letters) AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA QWERTYUIASDFGHJK QWER-TYUI-ASDF-GHJK
Software Key (Letters and Numbers) **---** Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-U7I8
Car Plate AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
Scriptcase’s serial key A999A999A999- ** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-DG2P
Multiple Masks (Telephone) 9999-9999;(99)9999-9999;9999 999 9999 +99 99 9999-9999
Validate with mask : Displays an error if the user doesn’t complete the value based on the mask.

Complete to the Left : Allows to define the character that’ll be used to complete the value to the left that the user typed in to the max size of the field defined in the Field size in database
option.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.
 11
Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Maximum Size : Determines the max size of the field.

Minimum Value : Determines the min value of the field.

Maximum Value : Determines the max value of the field.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’s used to seperate the thousand.

Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Show a calculator : Displays an icon next to the field, which alles the user to calculate a value for the field.

Use Spin : Atives an option to incrmente and decrement values from the field.
Smaller increment of Spin : Defines the min range of the Spin.

Increase higher Spin : Defines the max range of the Spin.

Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.
 12
Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

 13
Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Decimal
 14
General Settings

Decimal field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Decimal, you can inform decimal values to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

 15
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Maximum Size : Determines the max size of the field.

Minimum Value : Determines the min value of the field.

Maximum Value : Determines the max value of the field.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’s used to seperate the thousand.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Show a calculator : Displays an icon next to the field, which alles the user to calculate a value for the field.

Auto-complete with zeros : If enabled, it automatically informs the decimal places when not specified. If disabled, the user needs to always inform the decimal value.

Lookup Settings

Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 16
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 17

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Currency
General Settings
 18

Currency field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Currency, you can currency values to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format
 19

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Currency symbol usage : Defines if the field will display the Currency Symbol of the Regional Settings.*

Maximum Size : Determines the max size of the field.

Minimum Value : Determines the min value of the field.

Maximum Value : Determines the max value of the field.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character that’s used to seperate the thousand.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Negative sign : Defines the chatacter that’ll be used to display negative numbers.

Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Show a calculator : Displays an icon next to the field, which alles the user to calculate a value for the field.

Auto-complete with zeros : If enabled, it automatically informs the decimal places when not specified. If disabled, the user needs to always inform the decimal value.

Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.
 20
Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 21

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

HTML Image
General Settings
 22

HTML Image field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as HTML Image, it allows to place an image to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Image : Defines an image that’ll be displayed. The icon “Select Image”, lists all the standard images from scriptcase and also the image that you’ve uploaded to scriptcase. The icon “Upload an
image” allows the developer to send an image to the server which is from another machine.

Border : Border size for the image in Pixels.

Width : Define the width of the image in Pixels.

Height : Define the height of the image in Pixels.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 23
Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 24

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Label
General Settings

Label field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as label, the field only display the output of the value .

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Text : You can inform the text that’ll display beside the field.

Reload : When enabled, make the text informed for the field to become a link to reload the form when clicked.

Position : Allows to position the field in the chosen block.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 25
Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 26

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Card
General Setting

Credit Card Number Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Credit Card Number, the field verifies if the value is valid.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : It’s created a placeholder on the field with the text informed.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

 27
Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the size in bytes of the fields. It’s used to determine the max amount of characters to be typed in.

Field Mask : Defines the display mask for the field. There are three types of masks that can be merged.

Character Description
9 Represents a numeric character (0-9)
A Represents an alfa numeric character (A-Z,a-z)
* Represents any alfa numeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) typed by the user.
It’s possible to merge two or more masks simultaneously, separated by a semi coma with the smallest mask at start. The replacement occurs when the user is typing when the
lowest amount of character exceeds.

Examples of Masks

Field Mask Informed Value Formatted Value

Telephone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Software Key (Only Numbers) AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA QWERTYUIASDFGHJK QWER-TYUI-ASDF-GHJK
Software Key (Letters an Numbers) **---** Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-U7I8
License Plates AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
ScriptCase License A999A999A999- ** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-DG2P
Multiple Masks (Telephone) 9999-9999;(99)9999-9999;9999 999 9999 +99 99 9999-9999
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

 28
Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 29

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Card type
General Settings
 30

Credit Card field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Credit Card , it’ll setup a combo-box for you to select a creditcard type.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values Format

Format of Values Interface.

Credit Card : Allows to define which cards will be listed and their internal value.

Use Title/Deny : Allows to inform a new value if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasn’t chosen. The label and the value of this option are
defined as the Negative Value and the Title.

Negative value : Value of the new option if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasn’t chosen.

Title : Label of the new option if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasn’t chosen.

Related Field : You’ll inform which of the fields contains the values of a Credit Card Number so that the validations can be done correctly.

Reload Form : Reloads the form when the field’s value is modified.

Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.
 31

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 32
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 33

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

E-mail
General Settings

Email field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Email, the field applies validations for an email format.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

 34
Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Display Icon : Displays the Email icon next to the field.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 35

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 36

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

URL
General Settings
 37

URL field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to URL, you can inform a Link value to the field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Display Icon : Displays an icon beside the field.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

Show the URL as a clickable link : Sets the content of the field to clickable link.

Target handling where the link will open : Target where the the lick will direct to after being clicked

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.
 38

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 39
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 40

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

HTML Color
General Settings

HTML Color field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to HTML Color, you can select a color to be used in the form.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.
 41
Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.

SQL Command : Defines the SQL command that’s going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, it’s possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:

SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'

The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by it’s value in the table.

Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.

Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.

Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibição do lookup.

EOF Message : Defines a message that’ll be displayed if there isn’t any results for the record.

Use in validation : When enabled, it’ll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isn’t any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).

Lookup Settings validation Interface.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 42
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 43

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

HTML Editor
Settings

HTML Editor field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the applciation. When set to HTML Editor, you can inform any type of character and they’ll be saved in HTML form.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Height : Inform the Height in pixels for the HTML Editor.

 44
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Toolbar

HTML Editor toolbar settings Interface.

Properties
Position : Location of the HTML Editor toolbar

Alignment : Toolbar button alignment

Status : Status Bar Display ( Don’t Display, Top and Bottom).

Amount : The Amount of lines of the HTML Editor toolbar.

Button Organization : Allows to position the toolbar buttons.

Preview : You can visualize the toolbar according to the previous settings.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 45
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 46

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Localization
General Settings

Location field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as Location, you’ll se a combobox with the Languages that are part of the Project Properties.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Reload : When enabled, make the text informed for the field to become a link to reload the form when clicked.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 47
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 48

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Theme
General Settings

Theme field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Theme, you view a combo box with the list of themes that are set to your project.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Reload : Reload the form after modifying the value.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 49

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 50

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Date
General Settings
 51

Date field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Date, you can inform a date.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

 52
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator attribute.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

First Day : Define the first day of the week.

Display : Select the format of the day for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters Y , M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Minimum Date :
Fixed Date : Inform the minimum date allowed presented in the selected date format.

Current Date : Clicking on the icon next to the text field, ScriptCase offers the following options:
Actual date : It’ll place the current date as the max allowed date.

Actual date with increment : The minimum date will be the current date (+) the days or months or years that you want to increment.

Actual date with decrement : The minimum date will be the current date (-) the days or months or years that you want to decrement.

Maximum Date :
Fixed Date : Inform the minimum date allowed presented in the selected date format.

Current Date : Clicking on the icon next to the text field, ScriptCase offers the following options:
Actual date : It’ll place the current date as the max allowed date.

Actual date with increment : The minimum date will be the current date (+) the days or months or years that you want to increment.

Actual date with decrement : The minimum date will be the current date (-) the days or months or years that you want to decrement.

Display Format : Enables the Date format beside the field when informing the date.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 53
Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 54

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Time
General Settings

Time field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Time, you can inform a time to this field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 55
Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from TIME. You need to use the characters HH , II , and SS that correspond to Day, Hour , Minutes and
Seconds.

Display Format : Enables the Time format beside the field when informing the time.

Use Timepicker : Use the JQuery plugin to choose the time.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

 56
CSS of the Input Object
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 57

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Date and time

General Settings

Date and Time field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Datetime, you can inform a date and time to this field.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when it’s being validated.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 58
Values format

Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the day/time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from DATETIME . You need to use the characters Y , M, D , HH , II , and SS that correspond to Year, Month,
Day, Hour , Minutes and Seconds.

Display Format : Enables the Date and Time format beside the field when informing the date.

Group Date and Time : Groups the date and time in the same field.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.

New Calendar : Show the new jquery calendar, or the old calendar.

Years Limit : The amount of years that’ll display in the calendar.

View week number : Display the week number in the calendar.

Additional months : Display additional months in the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Allows you to select the year and month using a combo-box.

Decimal of seconds : Defines the amount of decimals for the seconds.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.
 59
Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

 60
Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Image (File Name)

General Settings

Image (File Name) field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as an Image (File Name), all the images files are stored and loaded in a directory of the server (Only the image name
is stored in the database).

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Image Border : Width of the Image border. Value in Pixels.

Image Height : Image height size. Value in Pixels.

 61
Image Width : Image width size. Value in Pixels.

Maintain Aspect : Maintains the original aspect ratio of the image when resizing it.

Progress bar : Displays a progress bar when sending the files to the server.

Upload area : Displays a drag’n drop area to upload the file.

Increment file : Increments the file name if the theirs an existing one with the same name in the upload folder.

Subfolder : Subfolder’s name that the files are stored. The is sub folder is relative to the directory defined for the Document upload (see the Settings). It’s possible to use global variables or
local variables to format the name of the subfolder.

Create Subfolder : When enabled, it creates the subfolder if not already created.

Image Caching : Time in minutes that the image cache will be stored.

Display link only : WHen enabled, you’ll be presented with a link to open the image in another image with the original size of the image ( without using the redimensioning ).

Open in Another Window : Allows to open the image in another window.

Extensions to allow : Extensions allowed to upload, separated by a semi coma (;). If left in blank, all the extensions are allowed. e.g. docx;jpg;png;xls

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Multi-Upload

This option allows to upload multiple files and store them on a table referencing a record from another table.

Multi-Upload Configuration.

Amount of columns : Amount of columns to displays the files in the Field.

Position of the delete : Checkbox option to delete files position.

Position on the upload : Position of the records when uploading.

Show status : Display the upload status.

Table : Select the table that’ll store the information of the files when uploading.

After selecting the table, you’ll see a list of all the fields of the chosen table, where you’ll associate the parameters for each field when inserting a new record or updating an
existing record.

Multi-Upload fields of the table Configuration.

File Name : Obtains the name og the file that’s being loaded.

Upload : Obtains the binary value of the file.

 62
Auto Increment : Used only when field in the database in an auto increment or similar.

Manual Increment : The form will be responsible for managing the auto-increment, calculating the value of the field before inserting the record.

Foreign Key : Associates the file with a value of a field in the current form.

Defined : You can specify a constant value or use a global variable. [global_var]

Date of Insertion : Obtains the data of the server when inserting the record.

Datetime de Insertion : Obtains the data and time of the server when inserting the record.

User IP : The field will contain the IP of the computer that’s accessing the application.

Calculated by the Database : The value of the field is applied in the database.

Calculated by the Database if empty : The value of the field is applied in the database if not informed by the application.

Null : The field will the null value.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

 63
Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 64

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Document (File Name)

General Settings

Document (File Name) field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Document (File Name), all the document files are stored and loaded in a directory of the server (Only the
document name is stored in the database).

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Progress bar : Displays a progress bar when sending the files to the server.

Upload area : Displays a drag’n drop area to upload the file.

Increment file : Increments the file name if the theirs an existing one with the same name in the upload folder.

Subfolder : Subfolder’s name that the files are stored. The is sub folder is relative to the directory defined for the Document upload (see the Settings). It’s possible to use global variables or
local variables to format the name of the subfolder.

Create Subfolder : When enabled, it creates the subfolder if not already created.

Icon : Displays an icon beside the field to identify the type of document.

Extensions to allow : Extensions allowed to upload, separated by a semi coma (;). If left in blank, all the extensions are allowed. e.g. docx;jpg;png;xls

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Multi-Upload

This option allows to upload multiple files and store them on a table referencing a record from another table.
 65

Multi-Upload Configuration.

Amount of columns : Amount of columns to displays the files in the Field.

Position of the delete : Checkbox option to delete files position.

Position on the upload : Position of the records when uploading.

Show status : Display the upload status.

Table : Select the table that’ll store the information of the files when uploading.

After selecting the table, you’ll see a list of all the fields of the chosen table, where you’ll associate the parameters for each field when inserting a new record or updating an
existing record.

Multi-Upload fields of the table Configuration.

File Name : Obtains the name og the file that’s being loaded.

Upload : Obtains the binary value of the file.

Auto Increment : Used only when field in the database in an auto increment or similar.

Manual Increment : The form will be responsible for managing the auto-increment, calculating the value of the field before inserting the record.

Foreign Key : Associates the file with a value of a field in the current form.

Defined : You can specify a constant value or use a global variable. [global_var]

Date of Insertion : Obtains the data of the server when inserting the record.

Datetime de Insertion : Obtains the data and time of the server when inserting the record.

User IP : The field will contain the IP of the computer that’s accessing the application.

Calculated by the Database : The value of the field is applied in the database.

Calculated by the Database if empty : The value of the field is applied in the database if not informed by the application.

Null : The field will the null value.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 66

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 67

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Select
General Settings
 68

Select field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combobox (Select Field).

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

 69
Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a
different delimiter then (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 70

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Link : Allows to create a link to another form allowing to manipulate the list displayed on the select field. After the manipulation, the select object it updated
automatically.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 71

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the select field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).
 72

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

Label Valor Inicio Tamanho

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
 73
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Configuração do lookup de edição Múltiplos Valores (Binário)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

 74
Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.
 75
Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 76

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Double Select
General Settings

Double Select field configuration Interface.

 77
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Double Select, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the size in bytes of the fields. It’s used to determine the max amount of characters to be typed in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP. .

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Automatic Lookup Interface..

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT key_field ,
display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Height : Allows to define the height(lines) of the field interface.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different delimiter then
(;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the option Display
original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.
 78
Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.
 79
Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 80

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Check Box
General Settings

Checkbox field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Checkbox, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the size in bytes of the fields. It’s used to determine the max amount of characters to be typed in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP. .

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 81

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.
 82
Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

 83
You can store various values for the checkbox field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

Label Value Start Size

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.
 84
Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.
 85
Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 86

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 87

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Radio
General Settings
 88

Radio field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Radio, your allowed to select one of the options listed.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Field size in database : Determines the size in bytes of the fields. It’s used to determine the max amount of characters to be typed in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP. .

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).
 89

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 90

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the radio.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 91

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

 92
Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 93

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Profile
General Settings

Profile field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Profile, it’ll display a combo with the profiles setup in the project properties.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 94
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 95

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Menu Links
General Settings

Menu Links field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as Menu Links, you can define links to be listed in the application.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows it’s value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.
 96
HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values Format

Values Format Interface.

Menu Items : Control the Insert, Update and Delete the items of the menu.
Label : Defines the label for the menu item.

Link : Defines the external link that’ll be called when clicking the item.

Icon : Defines the icons that’ll be displayed beside the link.

Default : Defines the item that be selected o item do menu que virá selecionado nos modos de exibição (Select e Radio).

Insert : Insert a new item to the menu novo item no menu.

Update : Update the selected item.

Delete : Delete the selected item.

Clear : Clears the data of the selected item.

Clear All : Removes all items form the menu.

Display Mode : Defines how the menu items will display, having the types: Select , Radio and Link:

Select

Radio

Link

Hide Label : When using the display mode, you can enable or disable the label display.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.
 97
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

 98
Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Text Auto-Complete
General Settings

Text auto complete field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate an
internal Text for the data.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

 99
Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Complete to the Left : Allows to define the character that’ll be used to complete the value to the left that the user typed in to the max size of the field defined in the Field size in database
option.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Validate on submit : Validate the field only when the form is submitted.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values Format

Format of Values Interface

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

Minimum Size : Allows to define the minimum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Maximum Size : Allows to define the maximum amount of characters accepted for the field.

Allowed Characters : Allows to select a set of characters that can be typed into the field. The options are:

All : Allows any type of character to be typed into the field

Selected : Defines a set of characters allowed. Using the configuration below, will be allowed to type letters, numbers and other characters (defined in the attribute More). The letters a, b and

c (defined in the Less Attribute) aren’t allowed.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 100

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 101

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 102

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Number Auto-Complete
General Settings
 103

Number auto complete field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Number auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate
an internal number for the data.

Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be “Client Name”.

Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.

Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.

System Date : The field will receive the current server date.

If you select the System Date, then it’s not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.

Initial Value : You’ll inform the Defined Value here.

Initial Value Configuration Interface.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.

Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable that’ll receive the field value.

Complete to the Left : Allows to define the character that’ll be used to complete the value to the left that the user typed in to the max size of the field defined in the Field size in database
option.

Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. It’s used to determine the max size of characters that’s allowed to type in.

Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.

Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.

Label Configuration Interface.

Validate on submit : Validate the field only when the form is submitted.

Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in “Insert Mode”, “Update Mode” or in “Insert and Update Mode”.

HTML Type : HTML Object that’ll be used to display the field in the form.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 104

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 105

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 106

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

 1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › LAYOUT

Pages
Using the definition of blocks, a page is a container of blocks. Where each application is created with a least one page that has the default name “pag1”. In applications of the
type Form, Control and Search is possible to create many pages for an application. The pages are Tabs where each tab contains blocks defined in the block settings.

Pages (available only in the Form, Control and

Search applications) configuration Interface.

See the example below of the Form application using two Pages: General Data and Documents.

Form Application using Pages feature.

Pages Settings

The form application already comes with a default page, identified as Pag1, that can be renamed, with the creation of new pages. The use of pages is indicated when you have an
application that contains various fields of a table (more than 20 for example). A form with more than 20 fields vertically placed would be difficult to use. An application can
contain various pages, and in each one of them you can add various blocks.
 2

Pages Configuration Interface.

Attributes
Including A new page, just inform the two fields above the button Include, on the first field you’ll inform the name of the page and on the second field you’ll select the image that’ll
represent the icon of the folder, a then click on Include.

Deleting A page, just click on the Garbage Can icon corresponding to the line of the page.
The definition of pages is only considered in the Single Record Forms

Tab Folder configurations

Font : Allows to define which font-family will be displayed in the field. Clicking on the icon existing on the right side, it opens a page to select the font. Just select the font from the
list, and it’ll be applied to field, leaving to you just to confirm the font.

Font Size : Informs the desired size for the font.

Selected Font Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color palette.
When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.

Selected Background Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color
palette. When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.

Non Selected Font Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color
palette. When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.

Non Selected Background Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a
color palette. When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.

Blocks
Conceptually a block is a “container” where you can position the fields of the Applications: Form, Control or Grid with Slide orientation.

By default, the applications created in ScriptCase are built with a only one block, with the same name as the application. You can add the amount of blocks that you want to
organize in a more convenient way. The page below, observe that theirs a column Organization, and that is where you’ll define if the next block will be set beside or below the
current one.

Application Block configuration

On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second is to delete the block.

Organizing the position of the Blocks

See below how to modify the display order of the Blocks in one Page.

Click and drag the block that you desire to modify to its new position.
 3
Application Block Display configuration

See how to remove a block from display

Click on the block desired and drag it to the item “Blocks not Shown”. This way, you can also drag the block to another page if desired. See the images below.

Application Block Display configuration

Application Block Display configuration

Attributes
Block
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Title
Display : Flag that controls the title display of the block.

Label
Display : Flag that controls id the label of the fields will be displayed in the block.

Position : Options to display label :

Above : The label will be displayed above the field.

Beside : The label will be displayed beside the field.

Below : The label will be displayed below the field.

Fields
Columns : Amount of columns that are displayed side by side in the block.

Position : The way that the fields are displayed in the block :
Below : The fields are displayed one below the other respecting the amount of columns.

Beside : The fields are displayed one beside the other respecting the amount of columns.

Line : The fields are displayed one beside the other without the tabulation.

Organization
Next : The way that the blocks are displayed in the page:
Below : Indicates that the next block will be placed below the current one.

Beside : Indicates that the next block will be placed beside the current one.

Tabs : Indicates that the next block will be placed in a different tab then the current one.

Width : Specifies the width that block will occupy in pixels or percentage, in case the value is in percentage, inform the (%).

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

Create New Block

To include new blocks in an Application, click on the button . Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the name and label of the block. At the end
click on Create.

Creating application blocks configuration

Attributes
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Edit Blocks

To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the parameters of the blocks. At the end click on
save.
 4

Application Block editing interface

Attributes
Name : Name of the block.

Title : Block title for display.

Display Title : This option, when active, allows to display the block title.

Title Font : Font applied to the block title.

Font Size : Size of the font applied to the block title.

Font Color : Font color for the block title.

Background Color : Background Color of the block title.

Background image : Background image for the block title.

Title Height : Height in pixels of the block title line.

Horizontal Alignment : Horizontal Alignment of the block title (Left, Center and Right).

Vertical Alignment : Vertical Alignment the block title (Top, Middle and Bottom).

Display Label : Display the labels of the fields in the block.

Columns : Amount of field columns in a block.

Columns Width : How the width of the block is defined.

Label Color : Color of the field labels.

Fields Organization : How the fields are organized in the block.

Label Position : Position of the field labels relating to the data.

Next Block : Position of the next block relating to the current block.

Border Color : Border color for the block.

Border Width : Border Width for the block.

Block Width : Width for the block.

Block Height : Height for the block.

Cell Spacing : Cell Spacing in the block.

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.
 5

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

Header & Footer

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.
 6
Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.

Drag the selected option to the “Menu Items” area to create a new “Layer” where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the “Menu items” area.

After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the “pencil” icon to edit the layer options or click on the “trash” icon to delete it .

Layer editing

Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.

 7
Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the “Menu Width” option
within the Menu “Settings”, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.

Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.

Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.

Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on “Application Title” within the menu “Header & Footer”.

Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y

Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.

Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].

Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option “Tools » External Libraries” from the main menu.

Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option “PHP Programming”
within the menu “Programming”

Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.

Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.

Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.

Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.

Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.

Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.

Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

 1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › EVENTS

Within the events you can include Scriptcase global, local variables, libraries and macros, PHP, JavaScript, HTML and CSS codes.

onApplicationInit
This event runs only once, when initializing the application.

OnScriptInit
This event runs the moment that the scripts of the application is initialized. This is executed before the event OnLoad ( when present ), although, it’s always executed when
running, reloading or navigating in the application.

onLoad
This event runs when the application is finished loading

onRefresh
This event runs when the refresh option of the application is enabled.

onValidate
This event runs when validating the information of the fields, when submitting the form.

onValidateFailure
This event runs when the form validation gives an error.

onValidateSuccess
This event runs when the form validation doesn’t give an error.
 1
Ajax Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › AJAX
EVENTS

OnClick
The ajax event OnClick is executed when the field that it’s based on is clicked.

Creating a new ajax event

Creating a new ajax event

Selecting a field

Selecting a field of the ajax event

Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.

OnChange
The ajax event OnChange is executed when the value of the field that it’s based on is modified.

Creating a new ajax event

Creating a new ajax event

Selecting a field

Selecting a field of the ajax event

Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.

OnBlur
The ajax event OnBlur is executed when the focus is removed from the field that event is based on.

Creating a new ajax event

Creating a new ajax event

Selecting a field
 2

Selecting a field of the ajax event

Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.

OnFocus
The ajax event OnFocus is executed when the field that it’s based on is applied with a focus.

Creating a new ajax event

Creating a new ajax event

Selecting a field

Selecting a field of the ajax event

Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.
 1
Buttons
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › BUTTONS

In addition to the applications buttons, you can also create new manual buttons. These buttons will be placed on the application toolbar.

Creating new buttons

Creating a button
To create a new button, click the “new button” and type a name and the button type.

Form button types: (JavaScript, PHP, and Ajax).

Form button types

Deleting a button
To delete a button click on the icon next to the name of the button in the application menu (recycle bin).

Deleting a button

JavaScript
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the javascript button in Image, Button or Link.

Button

Setting up Javascript Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the javascript button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
 2
Type Description of the created button.

Image

Setting up Javascript Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the javascript button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Link

Setting up Javascript Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Type Description of the created button.

Code Block

Javascript button coding block.

In this block, only JavaScript is accepted.

PHP
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the PHP button in Image, Button or Link.

Button

Setting up PHP Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Type Description of the created button.
 3
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).

Image

Setting up PHP Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Type Description of the created button.
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).

Link

Setting up PHP Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Type Description of the created button.
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).

Code Block

*Ajax button coding block. *

In this block, you can use macros, PHP code and JavaScript.

Link
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the link button in Image, Button or Link.

Button
Setting up Link Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.
 4
Image
Setting up Link Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Link
Setting up link Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Type Description of the created button.

Setting up the Link

Selecting the applications

Choosing the application for the button link.

You should select an application to be called from the button link.

Link Parameters

Choosing the parameters for the button link.

Field Allows you to use an existing field from the current application as a parameter for the link.
Variable Allows you to use a global variable from the current application as a parameter for the link.
Fixed Allows you to inform a fixed value as a parameter for the link.
Empty No value will be passed as a parameter for the link.
Link Properties ( Grid )

Configuring the properties for the link button when the destined application is a Grid.

Link Operation Mode How the link will open (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal ).
Exit URL for the target application URL or an application that be redirect to when exiting the Grid application.
Initial Mode Allows you to define the initial mode of the grid application ( Search or Grid ).
Number of Lines Allows you to define the amount of lines displayed in the Grid.
Number of Columns Allows you to define the amount of columns displayed in the Grid.
Paging Enable the paging in the Grid.
Display Header Enable the Grid Header.
Active Navigation Buttons Enable the navigation button (First, Back, Next and Last) in the Grid.
Link Properties ( Form )

Configuring the properties for the link button when the destined application is a Form.

Link Operation Mode How the link will open (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal ).
Exit URL for the target application URL or an application that be redirect to when exiting the Form application.
Enable insert button on target application Enable the “New” button in the Form Application.
Enable update button on target application Enable the “Update” button in the Form Application.
Enable delete button on target application Enable the “Delete” button in the Form Application.
Enable navigation button on target application Enable the navigation button (First, Back, Next and Last) in the Form.
Enable button to edit a grid record Enable the buttons that allow you to edit the records of a Grid

Ajax
D I S P L AY M O D E

You can configure the display mode of the ajax button in Image, Button or Link.

Button
 5

Setting up Ajax Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Image

Setting up Ajax Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Icon Allows you to inform the icon that’ll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.

Link

Setting up Ajax Button.

Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
Label Text of the button that’ll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isn’t informed, no message will appear.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Type Description of the created button.

Code Block

Ajax button coding block.

In this block, you can use macros, Ajax code and JavaScript.
 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › APPLICATION

Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.

Application Configuration Interface

Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.

Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.

Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.

Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.

Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.

Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.

Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.

Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Folder : Folder where the application’s stored in the work group.

Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.

Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.

HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.

Error Settings

Error Settings Interface.

Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.

SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.

Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.

Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
 2
Navigation
Defines the attributes of the navigation of one application to another.

Navigation Interface.

Attributes
Exit URL : URL on which the user will be redirected when exiting the application.

Close on Exit : When exiting the application, close the browser window.

Redirect URL : URL to redirect in case there isn’t any global variables available.

Redirect Variable : Name of the variable that’ll be stored the URL of a real application.

Messages

Global variables
This screen shows the global variables in the application.

The global variable is an external parameter required for running the application. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause, field definitions and names,
event programming, and so on.

Global variables are defined in brackets ([variable]). These variables must be passed to the application being implemented through one of the methods: Session, Post, and Get

Global variables Interface.

Example:

Select CustomerID, CustomerName from Customers WHERE CustomerID = '[v_customerid]'

In this case, the variable v_customerid appears in the global variables configuration.

Global variables configuration Interface.

Shows all global variables used in the application

Attribute : name of the variable in the application.

Value : Defines the behavior of the variables, this content is divided in three blocks, they are:
Scope : Defines how the variable is received by the application. If a variable has been defined that it’s received by a POST method and has been approved by the GET method, the
content is not accepted. Methods of passing variable values:

Session : In this option, the variable must be created as a PHP session variable by another application.

GET : Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that is, visible by the browser.

POST : Defines that the variable must be passed through the POST method of a HTML form.

Settings : Does not validate (check) the variable at runtime.

Type (In / Out) : Defines whether the variable is input or output.

Description : Indicates where the variable is being used.

 1
Links
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › LINKS

New link

Links menu interface.

When you click the “New Link” ScriptCase application menu will display the screen below.

Links menu interface.

Application link
Used to edit records of a Grid Application by using a Form Application. In the generated Grid you’ll view a link for each record to edit the records. Clicking on the link, the

form selected can be displayed in various ways (in an iframe, in the same window or on another window).

Application Link creation interface.

List of Applications

Application Link list of applications available.

Application: You need to select the form application that’s going to be called by the Grid Application.

Parameters Definition
 2

Parameters Definition Interface.

On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option that’s going to be set to the parameter. The options are:

Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

Field link
Used to create a link of a navigation in a column to any application of the project. When selecting the field link type, it’s displayed a select field with all the field displayed in the
Grid application.

Field Link creation interface.

List of Applications
It’s possible to create a field link to all the applications of the project (Menus, Searches, Reports PDF, Grid, Tabs, Form (Update Mode) and Control). You need to select an
application to proceed.

Field Link list of applications available.

Parameters Definition
 3

Parameters Definition Interface.

On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option that’s going to be set to the parameter. The options are:

Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

Capture link
The capture is used specially in the Form and in the Grid Search. This type of link imports the data of another Grid to a Form or Search Field. When selecting a capture link type,
it’ll display a list of fields of the Search Form. You need to choose a files to receive the data through the link.

Capture Link creation interface.

List of Applications
It’s possible to create a capture link to the Grid Application. You need to select an application to proceed.

Capture Link list of applications available.

Parameters Definition

Parameters Definition Interface.

Fetch field value : You need to select the field that’ll call the Grid Application. This field will have the values informed when returned from the Grid Search.

Select values to pass as parameters : This option is displayed when the Grid Application has a parameter; like a Where clause for example that receives a global variable. The options for the
values that can be passed as a parameter are:
Fixed : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

 4
Button link
Used to link a Grid application to any other type applications. In this type of link, a button is used like a link between the Grid and other applications.

Button Link creation interface.

Link edit
In the Link Folder of the Application Menu (Image Below) are displayed the links existing in the application and also the item New Link. When clicking on the existing link it’s
displayed the screen below that allows to manage the links.

Editing Links.

Actions

Properties Change the behavior of the link, position, and how the link opens.
Link Change the application that’s being called in the link their parameters.
Delete Remove the existing link.

Link Properties
On the screen below, you can see the attributes relevant to the link behavior of that need to be informed.

Link properties Interface.

Link Operation Mode :

Open in the same Window : Displays the Form in the same browser window.

Open in another Window : Displays the Form in another window of the browser.

Open in Iframe : The Form will be displayed in the same window, allowing to position below, above, to the left or right of the Grid.

Open in Parent : If the Grid is in a iframe, it displays the Form in the parent viewport of the page.

Modal : Opens the Form in modal, allowing to configure the size of the modal.

Display button (new row) on the grid toolbar : This option, when enabled, adds a button to the toolbar that allows to add a New Record to the Form.

Label for the button New : You can apply a Label for the button, if not informed the label will be “New”.

Hint for the button New : You can apply a Hint for the button, if not informed the hint will be “New”.

Hotkey for the button “New” : Indicates which key will be the shortcut for the New Record.

Exit URL for the target application : The URL that’s going to call after exiting the Form. In case no value is informed, the “back” button will redirect to the Grid.

Form Property

Allows to select the buttons that are going to be displayed in the Form through the link. Form properties configurations Interface.

Enable insert button on target application : Enables the Insert Button in the Form.

Enable update button on target application : Enables the Update Button in the Form.

Enable delete button on target application : Enables the Delete Button in the Form.

Enable navigation button on target application : Enables the navigation buttons (first, previous, next and last) in the Form.

Enable button to edit a grid record : Enables the edit button for each record.

Iframe properties
 5

These options are displayed when the property Link Operation Mode is set to “Open in Iframe”. Iframe properties

configurations Interface.

Display the header of the called application : Displays the header of the Form.

Iframe position relative to the main application : It can be: below, above, right or left.

Action After Insert view the list below :

Reload Grid : Does a refresh on the current page.

Move to the end of the grid : Navigate to the last page of the Grid.

Iframe height : Iframe Height in pixels.

Iframe width : Iframe Width in pixels.

 1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › PROGRAMMING

ScriptCase has incorporated the concept of Object Oriented programming, using attributes, resources, methods and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in
applications, and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.

Attributes
The attributes are variables that has the global scope declared in the application. An attribute that can be referenced in all the methods and events of the application.

Attributes configuration Interface.

Attributes
Attribute Name : This field, allows to inform the name of the attribute, after typing the name just click on include. In case you want to update click on the name of the attribute (located
on the tight side of the buttons), do the necessary modifications and click on update. In case it’s necessary to delete an attribute, it’s necessary to do same process as the update, but
when selecting the attribute, it’s necessary to click on the delete button. The clear button, as the name suggests, it clears the list of all the attributes listed on the right.

Internal libraries
To use the internal libraries just select the correspondent ( Project Libraries for example). This process allows the methods existing in the library, to be visible in all the Events and
Methods of the application. See how to manage the libraries by clicking here.

Internal Libraries managment Interface

PHP Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.

Creating a new method

PHP method creation Interface

Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.

Include Method.

Methods can receive parameters.

 2

Add the amount of variables: PHP method parameter definition

Defining the variables: Defining the variables

Name : Type in the name of the variable.

Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.

Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.

Editing a parameter:

: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Edit the selected parameter of the list.

: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

JavaScript Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.

Creating a new method

JavaScript method creation Interface

Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.

Include Method.

Methods can receive parameters.

 3

Add the amount of variables: JavaScript method parameter definition

Defining the variables: Defining the variables

Name : Type in the name of the variable.

Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.

Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.

Editing a parameter:

: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Edit the selected parameter of the list.

: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

 1
User HTML
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CONTROL › USER HTML

This option is available in the Control application if the item Set the template HTML manually template is selected when creating the application.

To use the custom HTML in Control, depends on specific Markups so that the Scriptcase can include its control and validation routines.

Check
 2
Clicking the Check button, it verifies the structure to confirm which Markups were used in the content of the HTML.

When clicking on the Markups of the Check item, a modal window is displayed with tips for using the same Markup.

The Markups are divided in 3 different categories:

TIPS

These Markups are not required, however, they are used to import files from libraries, images and other features.

REQUIRED

These Markups are of obligatory use in the item HTML. If they are not used, certain internal Scriptcase routines will not be executed.

Optional

Like the category name, these Markups are optional, not influencing the correct execution of the application.

HTML
 3

In this item, we can insert the desired HTML, remembering to use the required Markups.

The control.js and control.css files refer to the contents of the JavaScript and CSS items respectively. By default, they are automatically created by the application, by default:
appName.js and appName.css.

CSS

In this item, we can use our custom CSS to take effect in the HTML code used in the previous item.

JavaScript

In this item, we can use our custom JavaScript to take effect in the code HTML used in the previous item.
 4
External Libraries
In this option, we can define if we will use the files . HTML , . CSS and . JS from an external library or if we will use the code HTML, CSS and JavaScript of the items of the
application itself.

Do not use external library

This option defines that the HTML,

CSS, and JavaScript code to be used, come from the current application’s HTML, CSS, and JavaScript items.

Use external library

When selecting this option, we define the use of external libraries that contain the HTMl, CSS and JavaScript to be used by the application. The HTML, CSS and JavaScript
items will be disabled.

Preview

You’ll see how the application will appear after its generation.

Create Fields
 5

If you use field Markup before the field is created in the menu item Fields > New Field, and the item ( Create Fields) is pressed, a modal window is displayed to synchronize the
fields, after confirmation, the fields will be displayed in the Fields menu item.

When adding fields from the menu item Campos> New Field, Scriptcase will automatically insert new mandatory Markups related to the newly created field to be used in the
HTML item.
 1
OnExecute
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › ONEXECUTE

In this menu is entered the PHP code that will executed by the application.

OnExecute.

OnExecute : This event allows to entry PHP commands, JavaScript, CSS, HTML, ScriptCase macros and libraries.
 1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › SQL

In blank applications you can use one connection to access the database by default but as in other application types (forms, inquiries and control ) you can run SQL commands
using other connections different from the native application connection.

SQL Settings.

Connection : This option allows you to choose one of your project databases connections.
 1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › SECURITY

Application Security Configuration

When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.
 1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › LOG

Application Log configuration

Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › APPLICATION

Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.

Application Configuration Interface

Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.

Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.

Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.

Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.

Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.

Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.

Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.

Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Folder : Folder where the application’s stored in the work group.

Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.

Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.

HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.

Error Settings

Error Settings Interface.

Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.

SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.

Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.

Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
 2
Global Variables
This screen shows the global variables in the application.

The global variable is an external parameter required for running the application. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause, field definitions and names,
event programming, and so on.

Global variables are defined in brackets ([variable]). These variables must be passed to the application being implemented through one of the methods: Session, Post, and Get

Global variables Interface.

Example:

Select CustomerID, CustomerName from Customers WHERE CustomerID = '[v_customerid]'

In this case, the variable v_customerid appears in the global variables configuration.

Global variables configuration Interface.

Shows all global variables used in the application

Attribute : name of the variable in the application.

Value : Defines the behavior of the variables, this content is divided in three blocks, they are:
Scope : Defines how the variable is received by the application. If a variable has been defined that it’s received by a POST method and has been approved by the GET method, the
content is not accepted. Methods of passing variable values:

Session : In this option, the variable must be created as a PHP session variable by another application.

GET : Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that is, visible by the browser.

POST : Defines that the variable must be passed through the POST method of a HTML form.

Settings : Does not validate (check) the variable at runtime.

Type (In / Out) : Defines whether the variable is input or output.

Description : Indicates where the variable is being used.

 1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › BLANK › PROGRAMMING

ScriptCase has incorporated the concept of Object Oriented programming, using attributes, resources, methods and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in
applications, and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.

Attributes
The attributes are variables that has the global scope declared in the application. An attribute that can be referenced in all the methods and events of the application.

Attributes configuration Interface.

Attributes
Attribute Name : This field, allows to inform the name of the attribute, after typing the name just click on include. In case you want to update click on the name of the attribute (located
on the tight side of the buttons), do the necessary modifications and click on update. In case it’s necessary to delete an attribute, it’s necessary to do same process as the update, but
when selecting the attribute, it’s necessary to click on the delete button. The clear button, as the name suggests, it clears the list of all the attributes listed on the right.

Internal libraries
To use the internal libraries just select the correspondent ( Project Libraries for example). This process allows the methods existing in the library, to be visible in all the Events and
Methods of the application. See how to manage the libraries by clicking here.

Internal Libraries managment Interface

PHP Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.

Creating a new method

PHP method creation Interface

Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.

Include Method.

Methods can receive parameters.

 2

Add the amount of variables: PHP method parameter definition

Defining the variables: Defining the variables

Name : Type in the name of the variable.

Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.

Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.

Editing a parameter:

: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Edit the selected parameter of the list.

: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

 1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › MENU › SETTINGS

Desktop
The menu settings allow to define the attributes of the application display, according to the following:

Menu configuration Interface.

Attributes
Horizontal Alignment of the Menu : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu (Left, Center, Right).

Vertical Alignment of the items : Defines the vertical alignment of the menu items (Top, Center, Bottom).

Horizontal Alignment of the Items : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu items (Left, Center, Right).

Toolbar Horizontal Alignment : Defines the horizontal alignment of the toolbar items (Left, Center, Right).

Friendly URL : Allows to define a name for the URL that’s going to be called by the application. The characters allowed in the URL are(a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_). The Friendly URL can be informed
on the initial screen of the project, where the applications are listed, on the “Friendly URL” column.

Menu Width : Defines the width of the menu in pixels or percentage.

Menu Height : Defines the height of the menu in pixels or percentage.

Iframe Width : Defines the width of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.

Iframe Height : Defines the height of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.

Hide menu items : When enabled and used with the security module, it’ll hide the items that the user doesn’t have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.

Hide the menu’s toolbar : When enabled and used with the security module, it’ll hide the toolbar that the user doesn’t have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.

Use theme background : If defined as Yes, it’ll use the background theme of the menu, in case it’s defined as No, it’ll use the background defined in the project.

Scroll bar : Enables the scroll bar in the Iframe.

Select Language : Allows to select the language in the menu bar.

Select Theme : Allows to select the theme in the menu bar.

Alignment of Theme and Language : Defines the horizontal alignment of the language and theme combo boxes.

Always show the items : Displays the application items, even though they don’t exist, or haven’t been generated yet.

Hide menu : Enables the option to hide the menu.

Navigation

The menu navigation settings allow to define the attributes of the tabs and the navigation path, according to the following:
 2

Menu Navigation configurations Interface.

Attributes

Open items in a tab : When enabled, the items will always open as tabs in a horizontal bar beneath the menu.

Navigating through Applications with tabs.

Tab context menu : Allows you to manage the open tabs. Application with a tab context.

Minimum tab width : Allows to inform the min width of all the tabs.

Maximum tab width : Allows to inform the max width of all the tabs.

Show navigation breadcrumb : Displays the path containing the application in the tab. Navigation path Display in the

Application.

Use default icons in the item : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each item.

Use default icons in the tab : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each tab.

Default Application : Select a default application that’s going to be initiated when the menu opens.

Show initial app as tab : Allows to open the default application in a tab.

Mobile

Mobile menu configuration Interface.

Hide menu : Enables the option to hide menu when view from a mobile device.

Menu’s initial mode : Inform the initial mode of the menu, otherwise it’ll always be visible.

Hide menu by clicking an item : When enabled, defines that when an item is clicked it’ll hide the menu.

Float menu : Hides the icon to open the menu or always displays it.
 1
Menu items
HOME › APPLICATIONS › MENU › MENU ITEMS

Menu items settings

In this screen the user menu structure, indicating which applications will be called. Presents the following attributes, which should be completed by the user:

On mobile devices, if the menu item has sub-items and link, the link will be scorned to display the sub-items.

Menu settings interface.

Label : Title for the application within the menu. You type a fixed title or use the Scriptcase language system to create lang variable for these names, according to the languages used in the
project.

Link : Here you have to enter the application name that will be linked to the menu item. You can also click search button and select from the application list. This link can also be an external
URL.

Hint : Descriptive text that helps the user to identify the application. It is an optional field.

Icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an optional field.

Active tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when active. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
optional field. If you leave it blank Scriptcase adds a default image.

Inactive tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when inactive. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
optional field. If you leave it blank Scriptcase adds a default image.

Target : This option sets how the application will be displayed, it can be target as: Same window, Another window or leave (it will log the user out from the system).

Resources for menu items creation

Insert item : This option add items to the menu

Insert Sub-Item : This option add sub-items to the menu, you might select the main item before to add the sub-items within the selected main item. You can also manage the sub-item
position using the arrows.

Remove : This option deletes the item/sub-item, you might select the items before and then remove.

Import applications : You can use this option to call an application to attach to the item. It will open the project application list.

Move up : This option allows you to move up a menu item or sub-item.

Move down : This option allows you to move down a menu item or sub-item.

Move left : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the left. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.

Move right : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the right. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.

Importing the Applications

Importing the applications is easy and fast. Allows the user to select from a list of application, the application the desired to import. After selecting the application, you just need
to organize the levels of the menu, using the positioning buttons.

Application Import Interface.

After selecting the application, the link property will receive the application name. View the image below.
 2

Application Import Interface.

 1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › MENU › SECURITY

Application Security Configuration

When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.
 1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › MENU › LOG

Application Log configuration

Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
 1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › MENU › EVENTS

Within the events you can include Scriptcase global, local variables, libraries and macros, PHP, JavaScript, HTML and CSS codes.

onApplicationInit
This event runs only once, when initializing the application.

onExecute
This event runs when the item of the menu is clicked or an application is selected.

onLoad
This event runs when the application is finished loading
 1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › MENU › LAYOUT

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

Header & Footer

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.
 2

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.
 3

Drag the selected option to the “Menu Items” area to create a new “Layer” where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the “Menu items” area.

After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the “pencil” icon to edit the layer options or click on the “trash” icon to delete it .

Layer editing

Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.

Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the “Menu Width” option
within the Menu “Settings”, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.

Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.

Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.

Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on “Application Title” within the menu “Header & Footer”.

Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y

Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.

Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].

Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option “Tools » External Libraries” from the main menu.

Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option “PHP Programming”
within the menu “Programming”

Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.

Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.

Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.

Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.

Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.

Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.

Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › MENU › APPLICATION

Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.

Application Configuration Interface

Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.

Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.

Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.

Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.

Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.

Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.

Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.

Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Folder : Folder where the application’s stored in the work group.

Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.

Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.

HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.

Error Settings

Error Settings Interface.

Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.

SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.

Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.

Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
 2
Convert menu type

Menu conversion Interface.

Convert the Menu to a Tree Menu or vice versa.

*It doesn’t change any of the applications original configuration, with the exception of the format.
 1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › MENU › PROGRAMMING

ScriptCase has incorporated the concept of Object Oriented programming, using attributes, resources, methods and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in
applications, and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.

Attributes
The attributes are variables that has the global scope declared in the application. An attribute that can be referenced in all the methods and events of the application.

Attributes configuration Interface.

Attributes
Attribute Name : This field, allows to inform the name of the attribute, after typing the name just click on include. In case you want to update click on the name of the attribute (located
on the tight side of the buttons), do the necessary modifications and click on update. In case it’s necessary to delete an attribute, it’s necessary to do same process as the update, but
when selecting the attribute, it’s necessary to click on the delete button. The clear button, as the name suggests, it clears the list of all the attributes listed on the right.

Internal libraries
To use the internal libraries just select the correspondent ( Project Libraries for example). This process allows the methods existing in the library, to be visible in all the Events and
Methods of the application. See how to manage the libraries by clicking here.

Internal Libraries managment Interface

PHP Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.

Creating a new method

PHP method creation Interface

Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.

Include Method.

Methods can receive parameters.

 2

Add the amount of variables: PHP method parameter definition

Defining the variables: Defining the variables

Name : Type in the name of the variable.

Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.

Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.

Editing a parameter:

: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Edit the selected parameter of the list.

: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

 1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › SETTINGS

Desktop
The menu settings allow to define the attributes of the application display, according to the following:

Menu configuration Interface.

Attributes
Horizontal Alignment of the Menu : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu (Left, Center, Right).

Vertical Alignment of the items : Defines the vertical alignment of the menu items (Top, Center, Bottom).

Horizontal Alignment of the Items : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu items (Left, Center, Right).

Toolbar Horizontal Alignment : Defines the horizontal alignment of the toolbar items (Left, Center, Right).

Friendly URL : Allows to define a name for the URL that’s going to be called by the application. The characters allowed in the URL are(a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_). The Friendly URL can be informed
on the initial screen of the project, where the applications are listed, on the “Friendly URL” column.

Menu Width : Defines the width of the menu in pixels or percentage.

Menu Height : Defines the height of the menu in pixels or percentage.

Iframe Width : Defines the width of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.

Iframe Height : Defines the height of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.

Hide menu items : When enabled and used with the security module, it’ll hide the items that the user doesn’t have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.

Hide the menu’s toolbar : When enabled and used with the security module, it’ll hide the toolbar that the user doesn’t have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.

Use theme background : If defined as Yes, it’ll use the background theme of the menu, in case it’s defined as No, it’ll use the background defined in the project.

Scroll bar : Enables the scroll bar in the Iframe.

Select Language : Allows to select the language in the menu bar.

Select Theme : Allows to select the theme in the menu bar.

Alignment of Theme and Language : Defines the horizontal alignment of the language and theme combo boxes.

Always show the items : Displays the application items, even though they don’t exist, or haven’t been generated yet.

Hide menu : Enables the option to hide the menu.

Navigation

The menu navigation settings allow to define the attributes of the tabs and the navigation path, according to the following:
 2

Menu Navigation configurations Interface.

Attributes

Open items in a tab : When enabled, the items will always open as tabs in a horizontal bar beneath the menu.

Navigating through Applications with tabs.

Tab context menu : Allows you to manage the open tabs. Application with a tab context.

Minimum tab width : Allows to inform the min width of all the tabs.

Maximum tab width : Allows to inform the max width of all the tabs.

Show navigation breadcrumb : Displays the path containing the application in the tab. Navigation path Display in the

Application.

Use default icons in the item : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each item.

Use default icons in the tab : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each tab.

Default Application : Select a default application that’s going to be initiated when the menu opens.

Show initial app as tab : Allows to open the default application in a tab.

Mobile

Mobile menu configuration Interface.

Hide menu : Enables the option to hide menu when view from a mobile device.

Menu’s initial mode : Inform the initial mode of the menu, otherwise it’ll always be visible.

Hide menu by clicking an item : When enabled, defines that when an item is clicked it’ll hide the menu.

Float menu : Hides the icon to open the menu or always displays it.
 1
Itens do Menu
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › ITENS DO MENU

Menu items settings

In this screen the user menu structure, indicating which applications will be called. Presents the following attributes, which should be completed by the user:

Tree menu settings interface.

Label : Title for the application within the menu. You type a fixed title or use the Scriptcase language system to create lang variable for these names, according to the languages used in the
project.

Link : Here you have to enter the application name that will be linked to the menu item. You can also click search button and select from the application list. This link can also be an external
URL.

Hint : Descriptive text that helps the user to identify the application. It is an optional field.

Icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an optional field.

Active tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when active. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
optional field. If you leave it blank Scriptcase adds a default image.

Inactive tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when inactive. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
optional field. If you leave it blank Scriptcase adds a default image.

Target : This option sets how the application will be displayed, it can be target as: Same window, Another window or leave (it will log the user out from the system).

Resources for menu items creation

Insert item : This option add items to the menu

Insert Sub-Item : This option add sub-items to the menu, you might select the main item before to add the sub-items within the selected main item. You can also manage the sub-item
position using the arrows.

Remove : This option deletes the item/sub-item, you might select the items before and then remove.

Import applications : You can use this option to call an application to attach to the item. It will open the project application list.

Move up : This option allows you to move up a menu item or sub-item.

Move down : This option allows you to move down a menu item or sub-item.

Move left : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the left. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.

Move right : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the right. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.

Importing the Applications

Importing the applications is easy and fast. Allows the user to select from a list of application, the application the desired to import. After selecting the application, you just need
to organize the levels of the menu, using the positioning buttons.

Application Import Interface.

After selecting the application, the link property will receive the application name. View the image below.
 2

Application Import Interface.

 1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › SECURITY

Application Security Configuration

When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.
 1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › LOG

Application Log configuration

Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
 1
Eventos
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › EVENTOS

Within the events you can include Scriptcase global, local variables, libraries and macros, PHP, JavaScript, HTML and CSS codes.

onApplicationInit
This event runs only once, when initializing the application.

onExecute
This event runs when the item of the menu is clicked or an application is selected.

onLoad
This event runs when the application is finished loading
 1
Layout
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › LAYOUT

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

Header & Footer

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.
 2

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.
 3

Drag the selected option to the “Menu Items” area to create a new “Layer” where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the “Menu items” area.

After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the “pencil” icon to edit the layer options or click on the “trash” icon to delete it .

Layer editing

Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.

Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the “Menu Width” option
within the Menu “Settings”, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.

Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.

Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.

Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on “Application Title” within the menu “Header & Footer”.

Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y

Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.

Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].

Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option “Tools » External Libraries” from the main menu.

Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option “PHP Programming”
within the menu “Programming”

Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.

Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.

Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.

Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.

Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.

Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.

Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › APPLICATION

Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.

Application Configuration Interface

Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.

Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.

Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.

Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.

Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.

Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.

Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.

Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Folder : Folder where the application’s stored in the work group.

Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.

Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.

HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.

Error Settings

Error Settings Interface.

Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.

SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.

Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.

Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
 2
Convert menu type

Menu conversion Interface.

Convert the Menu to a Tree Menu or vice versa.

*It doesn’t change any of the applications original configuration, with the exception of the format.
 1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › TREE MENU › PROGRAMMING

ScriptCase has incorporated the concept of Object Oriented programming, using attributes, resources, methods and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in
applications, and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.

Attributes
The attributes are variables that has the global scope declared in the application. An attribute that can be referenced in all the methods and events of the application.

Attributes configuration Interface.

Attributes
Attribute Name : This field, allows to inform the name of the attribute, after typing the name just click on include. In case you want to update click on the name of the attribute (located
on the tight side of the buttons), do the necessary modifications and click on update. In case it’s necessary to delete an attribute, it’s necessary to do same process as the update, but
when selecting the attribute, it’s necessary to click on the delete button. The clear button, as the name suggests, it clears the list of all the attributes listed on the right.

Internal libraries
To use the internal libraries just select the correspondent ( Project Libraries for example). This process allows the methods existing in the library, to be visible in all the Events and
Methods of the application. See how to manage the libraries by clicking here.

Internal Libraries managment Interface

PHP Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.

Creating a new method

PHP method creation Interface

Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.

Include Method.

Methods can receive parameters.

 2

Add the amount of variables: PHP method parameter definition

Defining the variables: Defining the variables

Name : Type in the name of the variable.

Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.

Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.

Editing a parameter:

: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Edit the selected parameter of the list.

: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

 1
Settings
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › SETTINGS

Through these attributes you can define some general search settings such as alignment, width, search conditions, etc.

Search settings interface.

Attributes
Search Criteria : Using this option you can select the SQL command as “AND” or “OR” to set the search criteria to be used;

Display Condition : If you choose “Yes”, it will be displayed all records when the search fields are blank. If the option set is “Not”, no record will be displayed;

Horizontal Alignment : This option sets the application horizontal alignment;

Friendly URL : This field allows you to change the URL that will be called by the application. Allowed characters are the same available on URLs: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_. This option can also be
changed on the home screen, on the “Friendly URL” column at the applications list;

Margins : Allows you to set the Search form positioning (margins).

Keep Values : When this option is activated the last searched values are going to be maintained and displayed when the system user returns to the search form screen.

Keep columns and sorting : This option determines if each search should preserve the selected values to the Grid fields columns and sorting, i.e. to each search, these values return to
original condition.

Table Width : This option sets the search form HTML width value, it can be in pixels or percent. You need to set the unit within the option “Table Width Unit”.

Table Width Unit : Using this option you can set set the Search form width unit;

Use Iframe : When this option is enabled the Search Form and the search results are going to be displayed in the same browser window, using two FRAMES, one above the other. The
Search form and the grid with the results are going to be part of the same page.

Show Results : This option is associated with the “Use Iframe”. When enabled it will initially displays the Search form along with the Grid inside the iframe positioned below the search
screen, when disabled initially displays only the Search screen.

Iframe Height : This option is also associated with the “Use Iframe”. It sets the height, in pixels, of the iframe where the recovered data will be displayed by the search.

Case Sensitive : This option enables the Case Sensitive option.

Use auto-complete in the fields : Using this option you can enable the auto-complete option automatically based on the existing values in the database tables. You can also define this
option one by one using the “defined in the field”
 1
Advanced search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › ADVANCED SEARCH

Select fields

Select fields interface.

Required
This interface has the options for you to select and set the Search form required fields.

Required fields interface.

Within the generated application will be displayed a marker(*) next to the field and an error message will also pops up if there’s no value assigned to the mandatory fields. You
will be able to set some options for the market using the options below.

Marker placement configuration interface.

Marker position : Marker’s position relative to the field (options are right, left or Do not display).

Display message : Displays whether or not the validation error message.

Search Criteria

Search configuration Interface.

 2
In this interface, you can configure the conditions for each field of the Search form when filtering the SQL, on the left combo is displayed the field. The combo on the right are
listed the options for filtering the selected field, to select the options just click on them (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains and etc.) and the button On/Off. The arrows on the
right allows to alter the order of the fields.

For the Date type fields, you can define special conditions for the search, accessing the field configurations and editing the Special Conditions Settings.

Below the list are the buttons to enable the selected options:

On/Off : Enables or disables the field or the selected option.

All : Marks all fields or options.

None : Un marks all the fields or options.

Toolbar
Desktop

The toolbar of the application is divided in two parts: Top and Bottom, in a way that’s possible to define the buttons that’ll be displayed in both bars. The selection of buttons in
the top and bottom toolbar work independently allowing the buttons to display in both bars at the same time.

Toolbar Interface.

Toolbar (Top / Bottom) : Allows to select and order buttons that’ll be displayed in the Search toolbar, according to what you desire. In this case, you just need to use the arrows beside the list
of buttons.

BUTTON SETTINGS

Button Settings Interface.

Button : References a Button from the toolbar.

Label : Allows to modify the Buttons label.

Hint : Allows to apply a Hint to the button.

Shortcut key : Allows to define shortcuts to the button from the keyboard.

OPTIONS

Options Interface.

Button Position(Top / Bottom) Positioning the buttons of the toolbar Top / Bottom.

Mobile
 3
Save Search
This feature allows to organize search profiles, it creates an option Save Filter in a Search application, this way it’s possible to save the search done previously. You can add some
rules. With these details you can save a search done by the user login.

Save Filter Interface.

Save Filter Interface.

Layout

Blocks
Conceptually a block is a “container” where you can position the fields of the Applications: Form, Control or Grid with Slide orientation.

By default, the applications created in ScriptCase are built with a only one block, with the same name as the application. You can add the amount of blocks that you want to
organize in a more convenient way. The page below, observe that theirs a column Organization, and that is where you’ll define if the next block will be set beside or below the
current one.

Application Block configuration

On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second is to delete the block.

Organizing the position of the Blocks

See below how to modify the display order of the Blocks in one Page.

Click and drag the block that you desire to modify to its new position.

Application Block Display configuration

See how to remove a block from display

Click on the block desired and drag it to the item “Blocks not Shown”. This way, you can also drag the block to another page if desired. See the images below.
 4

Application Block Display configuration

Application Block Display configuration

Attributes
Block
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Title
Display : Flag that controls the title display of the block.

Label
Display : Flag that controls id the label of the fields will be displayed in the block.

Position : Options to display label :

Above : The label will be displayed above the field.

Beside : The label will be displayed beside the field.

Below : The label will be displayed below the field.

Fields
Columns : Amount of columns that are displayed side by side in the block.

Position : The way that the fields are displayed in the block :
Below : The fields are displayed one below the other respecting the amount of columns.

Beside : The fields are displayed one beside the other respecting the amount of columns.

Line : The fields are displayed one beside the other without the tabulation.

Organization
Next : The way that the blocks are displayed in the page:
Below : Indicates that the next block will be placed below the current one.

Beside : Indicates that the next block will be placed beside the current one.

Tabs : Indicates that the next block will be placed in a different tab then the current one.

Width : Specifies the width that block will occupy in pixels or percentage, in case the value is in percentage, inform the (%).

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

Create New Block

To include new blocks in an Application, click on the button . Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the name and label of the block. At the end
click on Create.

Creating application blocks configuration

Attributes
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Edit Blocks

To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the parameters of the blocks. At the end click on
save.
 5

Application Block editing interface

Attributes
Name : Name of the block.

Title : Block title for display.

Display Title : This option, when active, allows to display the block title.

Title Font : Font applied to the block title.

Font Size : Size of the font applied to the block title.

Font Color : Font color for the block title.

Background Color : Background Color of the block title.

Background image : Background image for the block title.

Title Height : Height in pixels of the block title line.

Horizontal Alignment : Horizontal Alignment of the block title (Left, Center and Right).

Vertical Alignment : Vertical Alignment the block title (Top, Middle and Bottom).

Display Label : Display the labels of the fields in the block.

Columns : Amount of field columns in a block.

Columns Width : How the width of the block is defined.

Label Color : Color of the field labels.

Fields Organization : How the fields are organized in the block.

Label Position : Position of the field labels relating to the data.

Next Block : Position of the next block relating to the current block.

Border Color : Border color for the block.

Border Width : Border Width for the block.

Block Width : Width for the block.

Block Height : Height for the block.

Cell Spacing : Cell Spacing in the block.

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.
 6

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

Header & Footer

Header

In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.
 7
Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.

Drag the selected option to the “Menu Items” area to create a new “Layer” where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the “Menu items” area.

After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the “pencil” icon to edit the layer options or click on the “trash” icon to delete it .

Layer editing

Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.

 8
Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the “Menu Width” option
within the Menu “Settings”, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.

Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.

Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.

Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on “Application Title” within the menu “Header & Footer”.

Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y

Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.

Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].

Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option “Tools » External Libraries” from the main menu.

Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option “PHP Programming”
within the menu “Programming”

Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.

Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.

Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.

Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.

Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.

Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.

Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

 1
SQL
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › SQL

SQL Settings

Grid SQL

configuration

SQL Select Statement Allows you to define the main SQL of the application. You can edit this SQL to add or delete fields.
Limit Lets you limit the amount of records that will be retrieved by SQL for the view in the query.
SQL Preparation You can enter SQL commands or procedure names that should be executed before the main select of the application.
Connection Displays the name of the connection used. This connection can be changed to another connection that has the same table.
Use Customized Message Lets you define whether the “no records” message is displayed.
No Records Message Allows you to set the message to be displayed if the query does not return any records.
Font Lets you set the font for the message, click the icon next to it field and choose the font. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Font Size Allows you to set the font size. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Font Color Allows you to set the font color. Available when “Use Customized Message” is enabled.
Variable for Table These fields informed with value, allows part of the table name defined in the select to be changed before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.
The first field must be filled with the name of the variable. The second field must be filled with the part of the name of the table to be replaced.

Fields Variables Lets you exchange the name of a select field with the contents of a variable. This switch occurs before the command is executed.
The first field must contain the name of the variable, in the second field should be selected the name of the field to be replaced.

Case sensitive Allows you to configure whether the connection will be case sensitive or not. (Differentiating case).
 1
Security
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › SECURITY

Application Security Configuration

When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing “User not Authorized” when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning “User not Authorized” is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.
 1
Log
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › LOG

Application Log configuration

Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if it’ll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
 1
Campos
HOME › APPLICATIONS › CAMPOS

Texto

Interface de configuração do campo texto.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é definido como texto, o mesmo aceita letras, números, caracteres.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo texto.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Converte Letra : Permite converter as letras do campo ao perder o foco. As opções são:
Caixa Alta : Todas em maiúscula

Caixa Baixa : Todas em minúscula

Capitula Primeira Palavra : A primeira letra da primeira palavra em maiúscula

Capitula Todas as Palavras : A primeira letra de todas as palavras em maiúscula

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 2
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 3

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Número

Interface de configuração do campo número.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é definido como número, só é permitido informar números.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

 4
Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo número.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Posição entre valores : Define a posição que os objetos serao exibidos.

Texto entre valores : Texto que aparecerá entre os valores.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Formatação dos valores

Interface de configuração de formatação do campo número.

Usar configurações regionais : Aplica as configurações regionais no campo.

Agrupamento : Separador de agrupamento.

Aceitar : Tipo de valor aceito.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

 5
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 6

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Decimal

Interface de configuração do campo decimal.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é definido valor, o mesmo aceita valores decimais.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo decimal.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Posição entre valores : Define a posição que os objetos serao exibidos.

Texto entre valores : Texto que aparecerá entre os valores.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Formatação dos valores

 7

Interface de configuração de formatação do campo decimal.

Usar configurações regionais : Aplica as configurações regionais no campo.

Qtd. Decimais : Quantidade de casas decimais do campo.

Agrupamento : Separador de agrupamento.

Separador Decimal : Separador decimal do campo.

Aceitar : Tipo de valor aceito.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.
 8
Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 9

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Por cento

Interface de configuração do campo por cento.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Campos Porcentagem são como um campo de número, mas exibindo o símbolo percentual após o valor.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo por cento.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Posição entre valores : Define a posição que os objetos serao exibidos.

Texto entre valores : Texto que aparecerá entre os valores.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Formatação dos valores

Interface de configuração de formatação do campo por cento.

Usar configurações regionais : Aplica as configurações regionais no campo.

Qtd. Decimais : Quantidade de casas decimais do campo.

Agrupamento : Separador de agrupamento.

Separador Decimal : Separador decimal do campo.

 10
Aceitar : Tipo de valor aceito.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 11

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Moeda
 12

Interface de configuração do campo moeda.

Tipo do dado : Definir o tipo de aplicação no campo. Campos de moeda são formatados de acordo com as regras de formatação de moeda.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo moeda.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Posição entre valores : Define a posição que os objetos serao exibidos.

Texto entre valores : Texto que aparecerá entre os valores.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Formatação dos valores

Interface de configuração de formatação do campo moeda.

Usar configurações regionais : Aplica as configurações regionais no campo.

Qtd. Decimais : Quantidade de casas decimais do campo.

Agrupamento : Separador de agrupamento.

Separador Decimal : Separador decimal do campo.

Aceitar : Tipo de valor aceito.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.
 13
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

 14
Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Por cento ( Calculado )

Interface de configuração do campo por cento.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Campos Porcentagem são como um campo de número, mas exibindo o símbolo percentual após o valor.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo por cento.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Posição entre valores : Define a posição que os objetos serao exibidos.

Texto entre valores : Texto que aparecerá entre os valores.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.
 15
Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 16

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Data
 17

Interface de configuração do campo data.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é do tipo Data, é permitido definir regras de formatação de datas.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Formatação dos Valores

Interface de formatação dos valores do campo data.

Usar configurações regionais : Aplica as configurações regionais no campo.

Separador de data : Símbolo separador de data.

Mostrar : Tipo de exibição do campo.

Formato Interno : Formato de armazenamento do campo no banco de dados.

Usar ComboBox : Usar combobox para exibição do campo.

Ano como Combo : Usar ano como combo.
Ano Inicial : Primeiro ano que será exibido no combo.

Ano atual + : Exibe o ano atual mais a quantidade de anos informados.

Exibir Formato : Exibe formato do mês por extenso.

Exibir Calendário : Exibe um calendário para a escolha da data.

Novo Calendário : Exibie um novo calendário com jquery ou o calendário em seu formato antigo.

Limite de Anos : Quantidade de anos que serão exibidos no calendário.

Exibir número da semana : Exibe o número da semana na aplicação.

Meses adicionais : Exibe os meses adicionais no calendário.

Mostar Combo ano e mês : Exibe combo ano e mês no calendário.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo data.

Posição entre valores : Define a posição que os objetos serao exibidos.

Texto entre valores :Texto que aparecerá entre os valores.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Condições Especiais
 18

Interface de condições especiais do campo data.

Todo o período : Busca período.

Hoje : Pesquisa na data de hoje.

__Ontem __ : Pesquisa na data de ontem.

Últimos 7 dias : Pesquisa últimos 7 dias. Ex: ((21/12/2017 27/12/2017).

Este mês : Pesquisa do começo mês corrente até o dia atual.

No mês passado : Pesquisa no mês passado.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

 19
CSS of the Input Object
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 20

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Hora

Interface de configuração do campo hora.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é do tipo Hora ele permite a exibição do formato de hora.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Formatação dos Valores

Interface de formatação dos valores do campo hora.

Usar configurações regionais : Aplica as configurações regionais no campo.

Separador de hora : Símbolo separador de hora.

Exibição : Tipo de exibição do campo.

Formato Interno : Formato de armazenamento do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo hora.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 21

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 22

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Data e Hora
 23

Interface de configuração do campo data e hora.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é do tipo Data e Hora ele permite a exibição do formato de data e hora.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Formatação dos Valores

Interface de formatação dos valores do campo data.

Usar configurações regionais : Aplica as configurações regionais no campo.

Separador de data : Símbolo separador de data.

Separador de hora : Símbolo separador de hora.

Mostrar : Tipo de exibição do campo.

Formato Interno : Formato de armazenamento do campo no banco de dados.

Usar ComboBox : Usar combobox para exibição do campo.

Ano como Combo : Usar ano como combo.
Ano Inicial : Primeiro ano que será exibido no combo.

Ano atual + : Exibe o ano atual mais a quantidade de anos informados.

Exibir Formato : Exibe formato do mês por extenso.

Exibir Calendário : Exibe um calendário para a escolha da data.

Novo Calendário : Exibie um novo calendário com jquery ou o calendário em seu formato antigo.

Limite de Anos : Quantidade de anos que serão exibidos no calendário.

Exibir número da semana : Exibe o número da semana na aplicação.

Meses adicionais : Exibe os meses adicionais no calendário.

Mostar Combo ano e mês : Exibe combo ano e mês no calendário.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo data.

Posição entre valores : Define a posição que os objetos serao exibidos.

Texto entre valores :Texto que aparecerá entre os valores.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Condições Especiais

Interface de condições especiais do campo data.

Todo o período : Busca período.

Hoje : Pesquisa na data de hoje.

__Ontem __ : Pesquisa na data de ontem.

Últimos 7 dias : Pesquisa últimos 7 dias. Ex: ((21/12/2017 27/12/2017).

Este mês : Pesquisa do começo mês corrente até o dia atual.

 24
No mês passado : Pesquisa no mês passado.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 25

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

CPF
Interface de configuração do campo cpf.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é definido como CPF o campo é formatado ao perder o foco. O scriptcase se encarrega de verificar se o valor que foi
fornecido é válido, caso seja uma informação errada , será exibida uma mensagem de erro.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
 26
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro
Interface de configuração do filtro do campo cpf.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

 27
Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 28

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

CNPJ
Interface de configuração do campo cnpj.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é definido como CNPJ o campo é formatado ao perder o foco. O ScriptCase se encarrega de verificar se o valor que foi
fornecido é válido, caso seja uma informação errada, será exibida uma mensagem de erro.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo cnpj.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

 29
CSS of the Field
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 30

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

CPF e CNPj
Interface de configuração do campo cpf e cnpj.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é definido como CPF e CNPJ o campo é formatado ao perder o foco. O scriptcase se encarrega de verificar se o valor
que foi fornecido é válido, caso seja uma informação errada, será exibida uma mensagem de erro.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro
Interface de configuração do filtro do campo cpf e cnpj.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 31
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 32

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Select

Interface de configuração do campo select.

Tipo do dado : O Tipo de dados Select é um objeto drop-down que permite a seleção de informação através de uma janela deslizante.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

 33
Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo select.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.
 34

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a
different delimiter then (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Link : Allows to create a link to another form allowing to manipulate the list displayed on the select field. After the manipulation, the select object it updated
automatically.
 35

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :
 36

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the select field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

 37
Label Valor Inicio Tamanho

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
 38
4
Attribute PleasureDescription
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Configuração do lookup de edição Múltiplos Valores (Binário)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing
 39

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 40
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 41

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Duplo Select

Interface de configuração do campo duplo select.

Tipo do dado : O Tipo de dados Duplo Select é um objeto drop-down que permite a seleção múltipla através de duas janelas de seleção e um navegador entre elas.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo duplo select.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Automatic Lookup Interface..

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT key_field ,
 42
display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Height : Allows to define the height(lines) of the field interface.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different delimiter then
(;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the option Display
original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 43
Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 44

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Checkbox
Interface de configuração do campo checkbox.

Tipo do dado : Checkbox é um objeto que permite a seleção de uma ou mais informação através de uma objetos de marcação.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo checkbox.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 45

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.
 46
Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

 47
You can store various values for the checkbox field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

Label Value Start Size

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.
 48
Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.
 49
Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 50

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 51

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Radio
 52

Interface de configuração do campo radio.

Tipo do dado : Rádio é um objeto que permite a seleção de apenas uma informação de todas as que são exibidas por ele.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo radio.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.
 53

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 54

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the radio.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.
 55
Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.
 56
Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 57

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Texto Auto-Complete

Interface de configuração do campo texto auto complete.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é definido como texto, o mesmo aceita letras, números, caracteres.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.

Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo texto auto complete.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Converte Letra : Permite converter as letras do campo ao perder o foco. As opções são:
Caixa Alta : Todas em maiúscula

Caixa Baixa : Todas em minúscula

Capitula Primeira Palavra : A primeira letra da primeira palavra em maiúscula

Capitula Todas as Palavras : A primeira letra de todas as palavras em maiúscula

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 58

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 59

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 60

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Número Auto-Complete
![Interface de configuração do campo número auto complete.][filtro_cons_número_auto] Interface de configuração do campo número auto complete.

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Quando o campo é definido como número auto-complete.

Label Filtro : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label é o apelido do campo na camada de aplicação.

Usar Label da Grid : Esta opção quando ativada, permite utilizar o título do campo que está configurado na grid, neste caso a opção label filtro não pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.
 61
Tamanho Máximo : Tamanho máximo do campo

Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Configuração do Filtro

Interface de configuração do filtro do campo número auto complete.

Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.

Posição entre valores : Define a posição que os objetos serao exibidos.

Texto entre valores : Texto que aparecerá entre os valores.

Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alterações no campo.

Exibir Condição : Permite quando ativada exibir ou não a condição do filtro, a mesma só funcionará se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opção.

Formatação dos valores

Interface de configuração de formatação do campo número auto complete.

Usar configurações regionais : Aplica as configurações regionais no campo.

Qtd. Decimais : Quantidade de casas decimais do campo.

Agrupamento : Separador de agrupamento.

Separador Decimal : Separador decimal do campo.

Aceitar : Tipo de valor aceito.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.
 62

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 63
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 64

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

 1
Fields
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › FIELDS

Text

Text field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text, you can inform a Text value to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database

Field Behavior

Text Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 2
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 3

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Integer

Integer field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Integer, you can inform number values to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

 4
SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

Field Behavior

Integer Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Values format

Integer Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Use Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

 5
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 6

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Decimal

Decimal field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Decimal, it’s allowed to define the format of a decimal number.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Field Behavior

Decimal Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.
 7
Values format

Decimal Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

 8
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 9

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Percent

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

Field Behavior

Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Values format

Percentage Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.
 10
Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
 11
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Currency
 12

Currency field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Currency, you can currency values to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

Field Behavior

Currency Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Values format

Currency Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.
 13
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

 14
Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Percent ( Calculated )

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

Field Behavior

Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.
 15
Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 16

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Date
 17

Date field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Date, you can inform a date.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Date Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator attribute.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Display : Select the format of the day for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters A, M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.

Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.

Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.

Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.

View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.

Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.

Field Behavior

Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Special Conditions
 18

Date Field Special Conditions.

All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in today’s date.

Yesterday : Searches in yesterday’s date.

Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).

This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.

Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

 19
CSS of the Input Object
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 20

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Time

Time field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Time, you can inform a time to this field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Time Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from TIME. You need to use the characters HH , II , and SS that correspond to Day, Hour , Minutes and
Seconds.

Field Behavior

Time Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 21

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 22

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Datetime
 23

Datetime field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Datetime, you can inform a date and time to this field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Values format

Datetime Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the day/time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from DATETIME . You need to use the characters A, M, D , HH , II , and SS that correspond to Year, Month,
Day, Hour , Minutes and Seconds.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.

Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.

Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.

Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.

View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.

Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.

Field Behavior

Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Special Conditions

Datetime Field Special Conditions.

All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in todays date.

Yesterday : Searches in yesterdays date.

Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).

 24
This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.

Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
 25
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Select
 26

Select field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combo box (Select Field).

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Field Behavior
Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.
 27

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a
different delimiter then (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 28
Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Link : Allows to create a link to another form allowing to manipulate the list displayed on the select field. After the manipulation, the select object it updated
automatically.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :
 29

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the select field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

 30
Label Valor Inicio Tamanho

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
 31
4
Attribute PleasureDescription
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Configuração do lookup de edição Múltiplos Valores (Binário)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing
 32

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 33
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 34

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Double Select

Double Select field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Double Select, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Double Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Automatic Lookup Interface..

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT key_field ,
display_field FROM table”.
 35
The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Height : Allows to define the height(lines) of the field interface.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different delimiter then
(;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the option Display
original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

 36
Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 37

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Check box
Check box field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Check box, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Check box Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 38

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.
 39
Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

 40
You can store various values for the checkbox field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

Label Value Start Size

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.
 41
Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.
 42
Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 43

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 44

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Radio
 45

Radio field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Radio, your allowed to select one of the options listed.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Radio Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.
 46

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 47

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the radio.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 48

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

 49
Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 50

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Text Auto-Complete

Text Auto-Complete field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate an
internal Text for the data.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Text Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.
 51
Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 52

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 53

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Number Auto-Complete
! ![Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_número_auto] Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search
Configuration.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Number auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate
an internal number for the data.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.
 54
Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Number Auto-Complete Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.
 55

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 56
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 57

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

 1
Events
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › EVENTS

Scriptcase uses the events to enable the developer to customize the application code. Using the events you can program custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a
record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, …) and for a specific application type. In the event areas you can use global and local variables, JavaScript, CSS,
HTML, PHP codes and also Scriptcase macros.

onApplicationInit
This event runs only once, when initializing the application.

onScriptInit
This event runs the moment that the scripts of the application is initialized. This is executed before the event OnLoad ( when present ), although, it’s always executed when
running, reloading or navigating in the application.

onRefresh
This event runs when the refresh option of the application is enabled.

onSave
This event runs when the application saves the record.

onValidate
This event runs when validating the information of the fields, when submitting the form.
 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › APPLICATION

Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.

Application Configuration Interface

Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.

Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.

Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.

Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.

Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.

Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.

Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.

Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Folder : Folder where the application’s stored in the work group.

Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.

Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.

HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.

Error Settings

Error Settings Interface.

Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.

SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.

Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.

Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
 2
Navigation
Defines the attributes of the navigation of one application to another.

Navigation Interface.

Attributes
Exit URL : URL on which the user will be redirected when exiting the application.

Close on Exit : When exiting the application, close the browser window.

Redirect URL : URL to redirect in case there isn’t any global variables available.

Redirect Variable : Name of the variable that’ll be stored the URL of a real application.

Global Variables
This screen shows the global variables in the application.

The global variable is an external parameter required for running the application. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause, field definitions and names,
event programming, and so on.

Global variables are defined in brackets ([variable]). These variables must be passed to the application being implemented through one of the methods: Session, Post, and Get

Global variables Interface.

Example:

Select CustomerID, CustomerName from Customers WHERE CustomerID = '[v_customerid]'

In this case, the variable v_customerid appears in the global variables configuration.

Global variables configuration Interface.

Shows all global variables used in the application

Attribute : name of the variable in the application.

Value : Defines the behavior of the variables, this content is divided in three blocks, they are:
Scope : Defines how the variable is received by the application. If a variable has been defined that it’s received by a POST method and has been approved by the GET method, the
content is not accepted. Methods of passing variable values:

Session : In this option, the variable must be created as a PHP session variable by another application.

GET : Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that is, visible by the browser.

POST : Defines that the variable must be passed through the POST method of a HTML form.

Settings : Does not validate (check) the variable at runtime.

Type (In / Out) : Defines whether the variable is input or output.

Description : Indicates where the variable is being used.

Fields
 1
Links
HOME › APPLICATIONS › SEARCH › LINKS

New link

Links menu interface.

When you click the “New Link” item from ScriptCase application menu will, the screen below will be displayed.

Interface for creating links

Application Link
Used to edit records of a Grid Application by using a Form Application. In the generated Grid you’ll view a link for each record to edit the records. Clicking on the link, the

form selected can be displayed in various ways (in an iframe, in the same window or on another window).

Application Link creation interface.

List of Applications

Application Link list of applications available.

Application: You need to select the form application that’s going to be called by the Grid Application.

Parameters Definition
 2

Parameters Definition Interface.

On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option that’s going to be set to the parameter. The options are:

Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

Fiels Link
Used to create a link of a navigation in a column to any application of the project. When selecting the field link type, it’s displayed a select field with all the field displayed in the
Grid application.

Field Link creation interface.

List of Applications
It’s possible to create a field link to all the applications of the project (Menus, Searches, Reports PDF, Grid, Tabs, Form (Update Mode) and Control). You need to select an
application to proceed.

Field Link list of applications available.

Parameters Definition
 3

Parameters Definition Interface.

On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option that’s going to be set to the parameter. The options are:

Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

Capture Link
The capture is used specially in the Form and in the Grid Search. This type of link imports the data of another Grid to a Form or Search Field. When selecting a capture link type,
it’ll display a list of fields of the Search Form. You need to choose a files to receive the data through the link.

Capture Link creation interface.

List of Applications
It’s possible to create a capture link to the Grid Application. You need to select an application to proceed.

Capture Link list of applications available.

Parameters Definition

Parameters Definition Interface.

Fetch field value : You need to select the field that’ll call the Grid Application. This field will have the values informed when returned from the Grid Search.

Select values to pass as parameters : This option is displayed when the Grid Application has a parameter; like a Where clause for example that receives a global variable. The options for the
values that can be passed as a parameter are:
Fixed : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

1
2
 1
Quebras
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › QUEBRAS

Configuração
Nesta interface o usuário poderá estabelecer os critérios de quebra da consulta (Grid), ou seja, quais o(s) campo(s) que serão objetos de quebra e em qual sequência de campos
a quebra deverá ocorrer.

Interface de configuração das Quebras.

Atributos
Habilitar TreeView : Esta opção permite habilitar/desabilitar o treeview da Quebra, que permite exibir/esconder as linhas da quebra. Esta opção não está disponível para paginação
Scroll Infinito.

Posição da Quebra : Permite selecionar a posição da quebra em relação aos registros do grupo. As opções são: Antes dos registros e Após os registros.
Antes dos registros : A quebra ocorrerá antes de exibir os registros relativos.

Exibição da quebra antes dos registros

Após os registros : A quebra ocorrerá após exibir os registros relativos.

Exibição da quebra após os registros

Cabeçalho da Quebra : Permite exibir o cabeçalho da quebra em todas as páginas.

Ordenação com Quebra : Permite ordenar os campos respeitando as quebras.

Exibir Label na Quebra : Permite a exibição de label na quebra dos campos dentro da quebra.

Título para Quantidade : Permite definir um título da coluna para quantidade de registros.

Separador do Valor : Permite definir um separador entre o título e o valor de um campo na quebra.

Tabular Quebras : Define a margem esquerda da Quebra.

Dividir Quebras : Define a margem entre duas Quebras.

Quebra Dinâmica
Para configurar a Quebra Dinâmica devemos selecionar quais campos ficarão disponíveis na aplicação para que o usuário final possa selecionar e então aplicar a quebra
dinamicamente em tempo de execução.

O Usuário final poderá selecionar mais de um campo na hora de aplicar as quebras na aplicação em execução.

Selecionar Campos

Interface de Regras de Quebra Dinâmica.

Atributos
Usar Quebra Dinâmica : Opção para habilitar o uso das quebras dinâmicas.

Esconder linha de ajuda da quebra dinâmica : Opção usada para esconder o título da quebra dinâmica na aplicação gerada.

Quebra Estática
A quebra estática é usada quando o desenvolvedor criar um conjunto de quebras previamente configurada e permitindo que o usuário final selecione qual quebra deseja aplicar
na aplicação em tempo de execução.

As quebras podem possir um ou mais níveis.

Interface de Regras da Quebra Estática.

Configuração
C O N F I G U R A Ç Ã O D E A G R U P A M E N T O E S TÁT I C O

Interface de agrupamento da Quebra Estática.

Atributos
Nome : Cada regra deve ter um nome para identificação no desenvolvimento.

Label : É o nome da regra que será exibido para o usuário final na aplicação.

Campos : É onde podemos marcar / desmarcar um ou mais campos de Quebras e definir o nível de cada um deles. A quebra que virá primeiro.

C O N F I G U R A Ç Ã O D A S R E G R A S D E O R D E N A Ç Ã O E S TÁT I C A

Interface das regras de ordenação da Quebra Estática.

 2
Atributos
Usar Quebra vazia : Configuração usada quando desejamos que a consulta seja iniciada sem nenhuma quebra.

Quebra inicial : Quebra que será usada no carregamento inicial da aplicação gerada.

Usar totalização dinâmica : Permite utilizar a totalização dinâmica nas quebras do resumo.

Ordenação das Quebras : Interface usada para selecionar a ordem que as quebras serão exibidas na consulta.

Eventos
OnGroupByAll : Este evento é executado após ocorrerem todas as quebras, independente do nível e permitem a manipulação dos campos de totalização.

O Scriptcase disponibiliza todas as variáveis de totalização no escopo da consulta. Supondo que uma aplicação que tenha dois níveis de quebra (estado e cidade) e que totaliza
dois campos (parcela e saldo), podemos ter acesso aos totais, no escopo de “calcular a cada registro”, da seguinte forma:

{count_ger} contém a quantidade total dos registros.

{sum_parcela} contém o somatório geral do campo parcela.
{sum_saldo} contém o somatório geral do campo saldo.
{count_estado} contém a quantidade total dos registros, da quebra de estado que estiver sendo processada.
{sum_parcela_estado} contém o somatório geral do campo ‘estado’ e do campo ‘parcela’ que estiverem sendo processado.
{sum_saldo_estado} contém o somatório geral do campo ‘saldo’ e do campo ‘parcela’ que estiverem sendo processado.
{count_cidade} contém o a quantidade total dos registros, da quebra de cidade que estiver sendo processada.
{sum_parcela_cidade} contém o somatório geral do campo ‘parcela’ e de ‘cidade’ que estiverem sendo processado.
{sum_saldo_cidade} contém o somatório geral do campo ‘saldo’ e de ‘cidade’ que estiverem sendo processado.
Considerando que as fórmulas, definidas para serem processadas no escopo de “calcular durante as quebras” estarão atuando para os vários níveis de quebra, as variáveis
especiais de totalização, neste escopo, são referenciadas substituindo-se o nome da quebra pela palavra chave “quebra”, ou seja:

{count_ger} contém a quantidade total dos registros.

{sum_parcela} contém o somatório geral do campo parcela.
{sum_saldo} contém o somatório geral do campo saldo.
{count_quebra} contém a quantidade total dos registros, da quebra que estiver sendo processada.
{sum_quebra_parcela} contém o somatório geral do campo parcela, da quebra que estiver sendo processada.
{sum_quebra_saldo} contém o somatório geral do campo saldo, da quebra que estiver sendo processada.
Ex:

Em uma aplicação que tenha quebras por estado e cidade e que totalize um campo saldo nos totais das quebras, desejamos exibir a média em substituição ao saldo. Cria-se um
método, no evento OnGroupByAll, com o seguinte conteúdo:

{sum_quebra_saldo} = {sum_quebra_saldo} / {count_quebra};

Campos
Configuração geral do campo da quebra

Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicação. Selecionando Texto o campo exibirá qualquer caracter.

Label : Define o título do campo na aplicação. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como cmp_nome_cliente fica mais claro o __entendimento se o mesmo for
exibido como Nome do Cliente.

Converte Letra :Permite converter as letras do campo na exibição. As opções são:

Caixa Alta Todas em maiúscula

Caixa Baixa Todas em minúscula
Capitula Primeira Palavra A primeira letra da primeira palavra em maiúscula
Capitula Todas as Palavras A primeira letra de todas as palavras em maiúscula

Máscara de Consulta : Define a máscara de exibição do campo. São dois os tipos de máscara descritos na tabela abaixo:

Caracter Descrição
É substituído por quaisquer caracteres retornados pelo banco de dados. Seu preenchimento é obrigatório e quando forem retornados menos caracteres do que o tamanho da
X
máscara, o valor será completado com zeros à esquerda.
É substituído por quaisquer caracteres retornados pelo banco de dados. Seu preenchimento é opcional e quando forem retornados menos caracteres do que o tamanho da
Z máscara, nada será feito em relação aos caracteres que estão faltando. Além disso os zeros à esquerda serão suprimidos. Obrigatoriamente o uso deste caracter é à esquerda da
máscara quando usado em conjunto com o X
Exemplos de máscaras:

Máscara Valor do campo Valor formatado

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
 3
(zz) xxxx - xxxx Valor
Máscara 0012345678 ( ) 1234
do campo Valor - 5678
formatado

Tipo SQL : Informa o tipo do campo no banco de dados.

Lookup de Consulta

Forma utilizada para modificar a exibição de um determinado campo na consulta. Por exemplo, um campo sexo no banco de dados com valores M ou F pode ser substituído por
Masculino ou Feminino (ver Lookup Manual ) ou ainda, de forma dinâmica, ter esses valores recuperados de uma tabela do banco de dados (ver Lookup Automatico ).

Interface Lookup de Consuta Automático.

L O O K U P D E C O N S U L TA - A U T O M ÁT I C O

Lookup usado para modificar a exibição do campo de forma dinâmica, recuperando os valores de uma tabela.

Interface Lookup de Consuta Automático.

Atributos
Comando Select : Define o comando SQL que irá recuperar o valor a ser exibido no campo da consulta. O comando deverá ter o seguinte formato SELECT campo_a_ser_exibido FROM
tabela WHERE campo_chave = {campo_da_consulta} .

OBS : O campo da consulta deve ser referenciado sempre entre chaves {} . No momento da execução, o campo entre chaves será substituido pelo seu valor na tabela.

Múltiplas Opções : Quando o Comando Select informado retornar vários valores, a opção Sim deve ser selecionada.

Delimitador : Define o separador dos valores retornados pelo Comando Select, esta opção deverá ser preenchida quando estiver marcado Sim no atributo Múltiplas Opções.

Usar o lookup em
Consulta : Aplica o lookup em todas as formas de consulta (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF).

Resumo : Aplica o lookup somente no resumo (HTML e PDF).

Ambos : Equivale à marcação das opções Consulta e Resumo.

Valor Default : Define um valor padrão, usado nos casos onde o comando select não retorna nenhum valor.

Exibir valor original e lookup : Quando selecionado Não, é exibido apenas o valor retornado pelo Comando Select. Caso contrário, serão exibidos o valor original do campo e o valor
retornado pelo Comando Select separados pelo caracter definido em Separados por.

Separados Por : Define o(s) caracter(es) que será(ão) usado(s) para separar o valor orignal do campo e o valor retornado pelo Comando Select. Esta opção deverá ser preenchida
quando estiver marcado Sim no atributo Mostrar valor original e lookup.

Usar conexão específica : Permite selecionar uma outra conexão existente no projeto diferente da conexão atual da consulta.

L O O K U P D E C O N S U L TA - M A N U A L

Lookup usado para modificar a exibição do campo com valores pré-definidos.

Interface Lookup de Consuta Manual.

Atributos
Tipos de Lookup : Define o modo de funcionamento do lookup, podendo ser : Simples Valor , Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador), Múltiplos Valores (Posição) e Múltiplos
Valores (Binário).

Simples Valor

Será exibido apenas um valor para o campo. É feita uma substituição direta do valor armazenado no banco por um label definido em uma lista.

Configuração do lookup Simples Valor

Label : Texto que será exibido na consulta.

Valor : Atributo que corresponde ao valor armazenado na tabela. Por exemplo, o valor M será substituído por Masculino.

Múltiplos Valores (Delimitador)

Poderão ser exibidos vários valores para o campo selecionado. Os valores devem ser separados por um delimitador a ser informado. É feita uma substituição das
partes de uma string armazenada no campo, separadas por um delimitador, por valores contidos em uma lista.

Configuração do lookup Múltiplos Valores (delimitador)

Label : Texto que será exibido na consulta.

Valor : Atributo que corresponde ao valor armazenado na tabela. Por exemplo, o valor E;C será substituído por Esportes Cinema .

Delimitador : Caracter usado para separar os valores dentro de uma mesma string.

Múltiplos Valores (Posição)

Permite recuperar diversas informações armazenadas em uma única string do campo selecionado. Para que estas informações sejam recuperadas são informados,
além do label, a posição inicial e a quantidade de bytes que cada informação ocupa dentro da string.

Como exemplo usaremos uma string para armazenar Sexo , Estado civil e Hobby respectivamente. Sexo ocupa um byte, estado civil um byte e hobby dois bytes.

Para tanto definimos a lista como:

 4
Label Valor Inicio Tamanho
Masculino M 1 1
Feminino F 1 1
Casado C 2 1
Solteiro S 2 1
Estudar ED 3 2
Esportes ES 3 2
Leitura LE 3 2
Exemplo: A string MCED seria apresentada na consulta como: MasculinoCasado Estudar.

Configuração do lookup Múltiplos Valores (Posição)

Label : Texto que será exibido na consulta.

Valor : Atributo que corresponde ao valor armazenado na tabela. Por exemplo, o valor M será substituído por Masculino.

Início : Posição inicial na string onde a informação está gravada. A primeira posição é sempre 1.

Tamanho : Quantidade de bytes que a informação ocupa na string.

Múltiplos Valores (Binário)

Permite recuperar diversas informações armazenadas em forma decimal do campo selecionado.

Como exemplos usaremos a seguinte lista (apesar de não ser informado na interface de inclusão de valores na lista, cada item possui um valor atribuido
automaticamente de acordo com a ordem):

Valor Atribuído Descrição no Lookup

1 Esportes
2 Cultura
4 Lazer
8 Leitura
16 Música
Para exibição dos dados é realizada uma decomposição do número decimal armazenado no banco. Por exemplo: os números 11 e 12 (gravados na base de dados
seriam decompostos da seguinte forma:

11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Esportes - Cultura - Leitura)

Valor Atribuído Descrição no Lookup

1 Esportes
2 Cultura
4 Lazer
8 Leitura
16 Música
12 = 4 + 8 = ( Lazer - Leitura)

Valor Atribuído Descrição no Lookup

1 Esportes
2 Cultura
4 Lazer
8 Leitura
16 Música
Configuração do lookup Múltiplos Valores (Binário).

Label : Texto que será exibido na consulta.

Botão Incluir : Inclui na lista os valores preenchidos nos atributos Label e Valor.

Botão Alterar : Altera os atributos do item selecionado.

Botão Excluir : Exclui o item selecionado.

Botão Limpar : Limpa os atributos.

Botão Salvar : Salva a lista de valores informados para que possa ser reutilizado.

Carregar Definição de Lookup : Permite carregar uma Lista de valores pré-definida para uso como lookup.

Usar o lookup em
Consulta : Aplica o lookup em todas as formas de consulta (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF).

Resumo : Aplica o lookup somente no resumo (HTML, PDF).

Ambos : Equivale à marcação das opções Consulta e Resumo.

Valor Default : Define um valor padrão, usado nos casos onde o valor armazenado não corresponde a nenhum valor da lista.

Exibir valor original e lookup : Quando selecionado Não, é exibido apenas o valor informado no Label, caso contrário será exibido o valor do campo selecionado e o valor
informado no Label separado pelo caracter definido em Separados por.

Separados Por : Define o(s) caracter(es) que será(ão) usado(s) para separar o valor do campo selecionado e o valor retornado pelo Comando Select. Esta opção deverá ser
preenchida quando estiver marcado Sim no atributo Mostrar valor original e lookup.

CONFIGURAÇÃO DA QUEBRA
 5
Interface Configuração Geral do Campo.

Atributos
Organização dos campos : Define como as informações contidas na linha de quebra serão dispostas ou organizadas.

Colunas : Define em quantas colunas as informações contidas na linha de quebra serão dispostas ou organizadas.

Exibe label : Define se o label do campo será exibido.

Linha de quebra : Exibe ou não a linha de quebra com o valor a ser quebrado.

Linha de sumarização (Resumo) : Define se na tela de resumo a linha de totalização desta quebra será exibida.

Quantidade de registros : Define se na linha de quebra será exibida a quantidade de registros da mesma.

Quebra Página PDF (Consulta) : Define se no arquivo pdf, gerado pela consulta. Se cada vez que esta quebra ocorrer será gerada uma nova página.
Ex. Em um relatório podemos querer que os pedidos de cada estado serão exibidos em páginas diferentes.

Quebra Página PDF (Resumo) : Define se no resumo do arquivo pdf, gerado pela consulta. Se cada vez que esta quebra ocorrer será gerada uma nova página. Ex. Em um relatório
podemos querer que os pedidos de cada estado serão exibidos em páginas diferentes.

Quebra Página HTML (Consulta) : Quebra página no HTML da consulta

Quebra Página HTML (Resumo) : Quebra página no HTML da Resumo

Iniciar TreeView : Define o estado inicial do TreeView.

Ordenação : Se esta opção estiver selecionada com “Sim” , os campos que estiverem marcados para permitir ordenação ao serem clicados, será feita a ordenação respeitando os
critérios da quebra.

Campos : Define quais campos serão exibidos nesta linha de quebra. Ainda é possível dizer se será exibida a totalização ou sumarização deste campo chaveando VALOR ou
SUMARIZAÇÃO, antes de clicar no botão ligar.

CONFIGURAÇÃO DA VISUALIZAÇÃO DO LABEL NA QUEBRA

Interface Configuração da Visualização Label na Quebra.

Atributos
Fonte do Texto : Permite definir a fonte utilizada no label da quebra.

Tamanho da Fonte : Permite definir o tamanho da fonte utilizada no label da quebra.

Cor do Texto : Cor do label na quebra.

Cor do Fundo : Cor de fundo da Quebra.

Texto Negrito : Permite habilitar ou desabilitar o label da quebra em negrito.

CONFIGURAÇÃO DA VISUALIZAÇÃO DO CAMPO NA QUEBRA

Interface Configuração da Visualização(campo).

Atributos
Fonte do Texto : Permite definir a fonte utilizada no Campo da quebra.

Tamanho da Fonte : Permite definir o tamanho da fonte utilizada no Campo da quebra.

Cor do Texto : Cor do label no campo.

Texto Negrito : Permite habilitar ou desabilitar o Campo da quebra em negrito.

C O N F I G U R A Ç Ã O D A V I S U A L I Z A Ç Ã O D A L I N H A D E T O TA L I Z A Ç Ã O

Interface Configuração da Visualização (linha).

Atributos
Fonte do Texto : Permite definir a fonte utilizada na linha de totalização da quebra.

Tamanho da Fonte : Permite definir o tamanho da fonte utilizada na totalização da quebra.

Cor do Texto : Cor da totalização da quebra.

Cor do Fundo : Cor de fundo da Quebra.

Texto Negrito : Permite habilitar ou desabilitar a totalização da quebra em negrito.

 1
Totalização
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › TOTALIZAÇÃO

Configuração
Nesta interface se define quais totais relativos aos campos de quebra serao exibidos e os seus respectivos labels.

Interface Configuração da Totalização.

Atributos
Total em Linha Única : Permite exibir o título Total Geral e os valores totalizados em uma única linha.

“Sim” :

“Não” :

Exibir Total Geral : Indica em quais páginas o total geral será exibido. As opções são as seguintes: “Em todas as páginas”, “Na última página” ou “Não exibir”.

Sub-Total do Grupo : Diz respeito a como vai ser visualizado os totais da quebra:
“Sim” : Exibir sub-totais da quebra após ocorrer a quebra.

“Não” : Exibir sub-totais da quebra no inicio antes de ocorrer a quebra.

Quantidade de Registros : Permite exibir a quantidade de registros junto ao total geral.

“Sim” :

“Não” :

Configuração do Layout
Na interface abaixo, é onde se define como serão exibidos os nomes dos campos da quebra e se eles serão realmente exibidos na aplicação:

Interface Configuração do Layout.

Atributos
Campo de quebra : Campos selecionados na quebra.

Label : Descrição do label exibido.

Exibir : Permite exibir ou nao a linha de totais da quebra.

Selecionar Campos
Esta interface é onde se definem os campos que serão totalizados e o tipo de totalização do campo.
 2

Interface Campos da

Totalização.

Serão listados apenas os campos dos tipos Numeral, Decimal e Moeda . Para atribuir uma operação a ser utilizada numa coluna (campo), basta selecionar o tipo de totalização
desejada, marcando o Checkbox logo abaixo.

Soma : Define que seja gerado uma soma dos valores referente ao campo selecionado.

Média : Calcula a média aritmética dos valores referente ao campo selecionado.

Mínimo : Exibe o menor valor identificado no campo selecionado.

Máximo : Exibe o maior valor identificado no campo selecionado.

Média ponderada : Calcula a média ponderada referemte ao campo selecionado.

Peso de média ponderada : Peso utilizado para calcular a média ponderada.

Utilizar a mesma configuração no resumo : Atribui a mesma configuração da totalização ao resumo.

Os campos selecionados serão exibidos quando ocorrer uma quebra ou no final da consulta.

Posicionamento
A ordenação dos campos da totalização consiste em exibir a totalização em formato Padrão , Agrupado ou Por campo .

Configuração de posicionamento de campos da totalização

Padrão

A opção Padrão retorna o valor exatamente abaixo da coluna que está sendo totalizado.

Interface da Ordenação dos Campos da Totalização ( Padrão ).

A linha com o Total exibe a totalização da coluna Limite de Crédito . Como é mostrado no caso abaixo:
 3

Ordenação Padrão gerada.

ALINHAMENTO

O alinhamento da totalização é referente a posição que será exibida a “Mensagem linha totalização”, as opções são Centralizado , Esquerda e Direita:

Interface da Ordenação dos campos da totalização ( Alinhamento )

Esquerda :

Direita :

Centralizado :

LABEL

Nas Configurações Label ( Padrão ), é possível modificar o nome dos tipos de totalização, como mostrado a seguir:

Configuração do valor do label.

Agrupado

Interface da Ordenação dos

Campos da Totalização ( Agrupado ).

É possível alterar na Interface a posição que será exibida os tipos de totalização (Soma, Média, Máximo e Mínimo), clicando e arrastando para cima ou para baixo o mouse na
lacuna.

Alterando o posicionamento das

 4
linhas.

Neste exemplo, o Total exibe a soma e a média das colunas Limite de Crédito e Pontos :

Ordenação Agrupado gerada.

ALINHAMENTO

O alinhamento da totalização é referente a posição que será exibida a “Mensagem linha totalização”, as opções são Centralizado , Esquerda e Direita:

Interface da Ordenação dos campos da totalização ( Alinhamento )

Esquerda :

Direita :

Centralizado :

LABEL

Nas Configurações Label (Agrupado), é possível modificar o nome dos tipos de totalização, como mostrado a seguir:

Edição dos labels.

Por campo
A opção Por campo, organiza cada campo da totalização pelos nomes dos campos, sem respeitar a formatação das colunas.
 5

Interface da Ordenação dos

Campos da Totalização ( Por Campo ).

QUEBRA DE LINHA POR CAMPO

Habilitando a opção Quebra linha por Campo será exibido em cada linha um único campo com os tipos escolhidos (Soma, Média, Máximo e Mínimo).

Ordenação gerada, com a opção “Quebra linha por campo habilitada”.

Desabilitando a opção Quebra linha por Campo temos os campos um ao lado do outro de forma corrida.

Ordenação gerada, com a opção “Quebra linha por campo desabilitada”.

LABEL

Nas Configurações Label (Por Campo), é possível modificar o nome dos tipos de totalização, como mostrado a seguir:

Edição dos labels.

Campos
Configuração da visualização do label na totalização

Interface Configuração da Totalização

Fonte do Texto : Permite definir uma fonte para o campo texto.

Tamanho da Fonte : Permite definir o tamanho da fonte.

Cor do Texto : Permite definir a cor do texto.

Cor do Fundo : Permite definir a cor do fundo.

Texto Negrito : Permite formatar o texto em negrito.

Como exemplo desta configuração, veja como resultará na aplicação gerada:

Visualicação do label em aplicação gerada

Configuração da visualização na linha de total geral

 6

Interface Configuração da linha Total Geral.

Fonte do Texto : Permite definir uma fonte para o campo texto.

Tamanho da Fonte : Permite definir o tamanho da fonte.

Cor do Texto : Permite definir a cor do texto.

Cor do Fundo : Permite definir a cor do fundo.

Texto Negrito : Permite formatar o texto em negrito.

Como exemplo desta configuração, veja como resultará na aplicação gerada:

Visualicação do label em aplicação gerada

 1
Resumo
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › RESUMO

Configuração

Interface Configuração Resumo.

Atributos
Título : Permite informar um Título para o resumo, caso não seja informado nenhum nome para este campo o scriptcase admite o título padrão para o resumo, assim o título ficará
“RESUMO”, porém se desejar que nenhum título seja exibido será necessário informar na propriedade título a tag HTML &nbsp; .
Campo Título sendo informado com a Tag HTML.

Título Quantidade : Título da quantidade de registros.

Quantidade de Registros :
Não mostrar : Não mostrar o total de registro por quebra.

Mostra apenas no resumo : Mostra no resumo o total de registros por quebra.

Mostra no resumo e no gráfico : Mostra no resumo o total de registros por quebra e disponibiliza gráfico.

Total Horizontal : Exibir total horizontal para resumos do tipo matriz.

Posição do ícone do gráfico : Posicionamento do ícone do Gráfico (esquerda ou direita).

Posição do ícone do total : Posicionamento do ícone Total (esquerda ou direita).

Total Vertical : Exibir total vertical para resumos do tipo matriz.

Largura do Resumo : Valor da largura para o resumo.

Unidade da Largura do Resumo : Unidade de medida usado para a largura. Automático (valor da largura é ignorado), pixels e porcentagem.

Configuração do Layout

Interface Configuração Resumo.

Atributos
Campo da quebra : Campos da quebra selecionados na consulta.

Posição : Define entre posição do eixo x ou do eixo y.

Ordenação : Define a ordenação pelo valor de banco ou pelo valor de exibição.

Preencher labels vazios : Define se os labels vazios vão ser preenchidos.

Link Grid : Cria um link no campo selecionado.

Alinhamento : Define o tipo de alinhamento do layout para centralizado, esquerda ou direita.

Formato tabular : Define o resumo com o formato tabular.

Barra de ferramentas
Neste quadro podemos fazer as configurações referentes ao resumo. O resumo ocorre sempre que a aplicação de consulta contém exibir resumo, tipo de resumo, posição do
resumo, ordenação do resumo, tecla de atalho, quantidade de registros, tipo do gráfico, largura do gráfico, altura do gráfico, margem do gráfico, aspecto do gráfico, gráfico em
outra janela, largura do resumo e unidade da largura do resumo.
 2

Interface Configuração do Resumo.

Atributos
Formatos : Permite selecionar os formatos de geração de resumo.

Botões : Permite selecionar os botões que serão exibidos na barra de ferramentas.

Ordenação dos Botões : Permite ordenar os botões na barra de ferramentas conforme necessário, utilizando a barra de seleção (lado direito da tabela).

Selecionar Campos
Nesta interface se definem os campos que serão totalizados e seu tipo de totalização.

Interface Campos do Resumo.

Serão listados apenas os campos dos tipos Numeral, Decimal e Moeda. Para atribuir uma operação a ser utilizada numa coluna (campo), basta selecionar o tipo de totalização
desejada, marcando o Checkbox logo abaixo.

Soma : Define que seja gerado uma soma dos valores referente ao campo selecionado.

Média : Calcula a média aritmética dos valores referente ao campo selecionado.

Máximo : Exibe o maior valor identificado no campo selecionado.

Mínimo : Exibe o menor valor identificado no campo selecionado.

Média ponderada : Exibe o cálculo realizado pela média ponderada no campo selecionado.

Peso de média ponderada : Opção para escolha do peso utilizado no cálculo da média ponderada.

Os campos selecionados serão exibidos quando ocorrer a quebra ou no final da consulta.

Posicionamento
Nesta interface podemos configurar o posicionamento dos campos da totalização.

Interface posicionamento dos campos do Resumo.

Arraste e solte as opções para a posição desejada.

 3
Group Label

Interface do Group Label do Resumo

Com essa opção, você pode inserir um ou mais títulos para suas colunas em suas aplicações, podendo alterar seu tamanho, sua cor, sua fonte e posiciona-los como desejar.

Caso você tenha campos com exibição dinâmica o Group Label não irá funcionar.

Edição de propriedades da célula do group label

Atributos

Título Permite definir o título que será exibido em seu Group Label.
Fonte de texto Permite definir a fonte do título de seu group label.
Tamanho da fonte Permite definir o tamanho da fonte do título de seu group label.
Alinhamento horizontal Permite definir o alinhamento horizontal do título de seu group label. Sendo esquerda, centro ou direita.
Alinhamento vertical Permite definir o alinhamento horizontal do título de seu group label. Sendo meio, baixo ou topo.
Cor de texto Permite definir a cor do texto do título de seu group label.
Cor de fundo Permite definir a cor de fundo do espaço onde o título de seu group label será exibido.

Ordenação

Interface Ordenação dos campos do Resumo.

Atributos
Campos : Selecione os campos que você deseja permitir a ordenação.

Ordenação Inicial : Selecione um campo para ordenação inicial no resumo.

Tipo de ordenação : Escolha se a ordenação será ascendente ou descendente.

Ordenar a partir da Quebra : Selecione uma das quebras para ordenação inicial.
 4
Gráficos
Neste quadro podemos informar as configurações dos Graficos. Como por exemplo: tipo do gráfico, largura, altura, margens, etc.

Se existir duas ou mais Regras de Quebra, devemos configurar as opções de gráficos para cada Regra de Quebra criada.

O gráfico do tipo “Analítico” só funciona quando se utiliza 2 campos configurados nas quebras. Se o usuário configurar mais de um campo, o gráfico analítico só irá gerar com
os dois primeiros.

Interface Geração dos Gráficos de Coluna.

Interface Geração de Gráficos de Linhas (Totais).

Estas configurações estão disponíveis somente para Regras de Quebras com mais de 1 campo.

Configuração dos gráficos

Interface de Configurações de Gráficos.

Todos os gráficos utilizam HTML5

Atributos
Tipo de gráfico : Permite definir o tipo de gráfico que será exibido por “Default “ caso a opção Gráfico Configurável esteja ativa, ou o tipo de gráfico a ser exibido caso a opção esteja
desativada.

Barra
 5
Barra

Tamanho da fonte : Define o tamanho da fonte no gráfico.

Subtítulo : Define o subtítulo exibido no gráfico.
Barra - Orientação : Orientação das barras vertical ou horizontal no gráfico.
Barra - Dimensão : Dimensão das Barras (2D ou 3D) no gráfico.
Barra - Empilhamento : Empilha as Barras em uma única Barra (Em série).
Barra - Agrupamento de séries : Agrupa o gráfico de Barras em série.
Barra - Valores ao lado : Exibe os valores ao lado das Barras.
Barra - Largura : Pode-se definir a largura entre 20 e 70.
Barra - Orientação do valor : Define-se a orientação do gráfico, podendo coloca-lo na vertical.
Barra - Posicionamento do valor : Pode-se esolher onde o valor irá se posicionar.
Pizza

Tamanho da fonte : Define o tamanho da fonte no gráfico.

Subtítulo : Define o subtítulo exibido no gráfico.
Pizza - Formato : Formato de Pizza ou Donut.
Pizza - Dimensão : Dimensão do gráfico de Pizza.
Pizza - Ordenação : Ordenação do gráfico Pizza.
Pizza - Formatação de Valores : Formatação dos dados exibidos.
Linha

Tamanho da fonte : Define o tamanho da fonte no gráfico.

Subtítulo : Define o subtítulo exibido no gráfico.
Linha - Forma : Formato da Linha.
Linha - Series Group : Linha grouping type.
Area

Tamanho da fonte : Define o tamanho da fonte no gráfico.

Subtítulo : Define o subtítulo exibido no gráfico.
Area - Forma : Formato da área exibida no gráfico.
Area - Empilhamento : Empilha as areas no gráfico.
Area - Agrupamento de séries : Agrupa o gráfico em série.
Gauge
 6
Gauge

Tamanho da fonte : Define o tamanho da fonte no gráfico.

Subtítulo : Define o subtítulo exibido no gráfico.
Gauge - Forma : Formato de exibição do gráfico.
Radar

Tamanho da fonte : Define o tamanho da fonte no gráfico.

Subtítulo : Define o subtítulo exibido no gráfico.
Funil

Tamanho da fonte : Define o tamanho da fonte no gráfico.

Subtítulo : Define o subtítulo exibido no gráfico.
Funil - Dimensão : Dimensão do Funil (2D ou 3D) no gráfico.
Pirâmide

Tamanho da fonte : Define o tamanho da fonte no gráfico.

Subtítulo : Define o subtítulo exibido no gráfico.
Pirâmide - Dimensão : Dimensão (2D ou 3D) no gráfico.
Pirâmide - Formatação de Valores : Formatação dos dados exibidos.
Pirâmide - Forma : Formato de exibição do gráfico.
Opções em comum
Tipo de gráfico : Selecione o tipo de gráfico entre analítico ou sintético.
Gráficos analíticos e Gráficos sintéticos são formas diferentes de lidar com múltiplos grupos pelos critérios de criação dos gráficos.

Gráficos sintéticos devem restringir-se ao primeiro grupo pela condição e permitirá que o usuário use os links para ver detalhes do próximo grupo de critérios, aumentando o
nível de detalhe.

Gráficos analíticos surgem com todo o grupo por critérios, criando um gráfico detalhado completo que não permite a vinculação de outros gráficos detalhados.

Criar link no gráfico : Permite que os gráficos tenham um link em seus elementos para aplicações de grid detalhada ou gráficos. Os dados mostrados serão relativos ao valor clicado no
gráfico.

Exibir Valores : Exibe os valores do gráfico gerado.

Eixo do gráfico total geral : Opção para exibir o gráfico do total geral como coluna ou linha..

Exibir eixo Y com Zero : Forçar exibição do valor zero no eixo Y.

Largura do Gráfico : Largura em pixels dos gráficos gerados.

Altura do Gráfico : Altura em pixels dos gráficos gerados.

Ordenação dos valores : Ordena os valores dos gráficos.

Altura para legenda : Altura em porcentagem entre o gráfico e a margem superior reservado para as legendas.
 7
Modo de exibição dos gráficos : Define se os gráficos serão mostrados em uma nova janela, lado a lado com o aplicativo, ou carregados na mesma janela do navegador.

Layout do Gráfico

Interface de configuração do Layout de cores dos gráficos.

Atributos
Paleta de cores do background do gráfico : Escolha o tema de sua preferência para aplicar nos gráficos.

Paleta de cores para trama de dados : Escolha o tema que você gostaria de aplicar a sua trama de dados dos gráficos.

Temas de Gráficos : Temas de gráficos personalizados

Layout
Cabeçalho
Neste bloco é feita a definição dos conteudos variáveis que farão parte do cabeçalho.

Configuração do cabeçalho do resumo

Esta tela pode variar dependendo do formato de cabeçalho escolhido dentro da pasta Visualização.

Exibir Cabeçalho : Esta flag determina se o cabeçalho será exibido.

Título da Consulta : Permite informar um título para ser exibido na aplicação.

Variáveis de Cabeçalho : Os campos variáveis podem ser preenchidos com qualquer um dos tipos exibidos no Combobox. Dependendo do tipo, será necessário associar um conteúdo ao
mesmo. Abaixo descrevemos os tipos existentes:
Campo : Quando se escolhe a opção do tipo “ Campo”, abrirá um Combobox ao lado com os campos que fazem parte do “Select”. Escolhendo um desses campos, estará associando o
valor do campo para exibição no cabeçalho.

Título : Esta opção quando selecionada exibirá no cabeçalho o valor preenchido no “ Título do Filtro ”.
 8
Data : Quando é selecionado o tipo “ Data”, será exibido no cabeçalho da controle a data do sistema no formato dd/mm/aaaa. Existem diversos formatos de exibição utilizando a data e
a hora do servidor. O formato poderá ser informado no campo texto que aparece ao lado. Para ter acesso aos formatos existentes clique em e aparecerá uma tela explicativa.

Imagem : Quando selecionado o campo tipo imagem, aparece um campo para o preenchimento do nome da imagem existente no servidor. Para localizar as imagens existentes e
selecionar uma, clique no ícone “Escolher imagem ” e para disponibilizar novas imagens no servidor clique em “ Fazer upload de uma imagem ” .

Valor : Quando selecionado o tipo “ Valor”, o conteúdo preenchido no campo texto que aparece ao lado será exibido no cabeçalho, pode ser informado textos e “ Variáveis globais ”. Ex:
“Nome do Funcionário: [v_nome]”.

Rodapé

Configuração do rodapé do resumo

Esta tela pode variar dependendo do formato de Rodapé escolhido dentro da pasta Visualização.

Exibir Rodapé : Esta flag determina se o Rodapé será exibido na aplicação.

Variáveis de Rodapé : Os campos variáveis podem ser preenchidos com qualquer um dos tipos exibidos no Combobox, dependendo do tipo será necessário associar um conteúdo ao
mesmo. Abaixo descrevemos os tipos existentes:
Campo : Quando se escolhe a opção do tipo “ Campo”, abrirá um Combobox ao lado com os campos que fazem parte do “Select”. Escolhendo um desses campos, estará associando o
valor do campo para exibição no Rodapé.

Data : Quando é selecionado o tipo “ Data”, será exibido no Rodapé da aplicação a data do sistema no formato dd/mm/aaaa. Existem diversos formatos de exibição utilizando a data e a
hora do servidor. O formato poderá ser informado no campo texto que aparece ao lado. Para ter acesso aos formatos existentes clique em e aparecerá uma tela explicativa.

Imagem : Quando selecionado o campo tipo imagem, aparece um campo para o preenchimento do nome da imagem existente no servidor. Para localizar as imagens existentes e
selecionar uma, clique no ícone “Escolher imagem ” e para disponibilizar novas imagens no servidor clique em “ Fazer upload de uma imagem ”.

Valor : Quando selecionado o tipo “ Valor”, o conteúdo preenchido no campo texto que aparece ao lado será exibido no Rodapé. Pode ser informado textos e “ Variáveis globais ”. Ex:
“Nome do Funcionário: [v_nome]”.
 1
Search
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › SEARCH

Settings
In the area below you can define all the options that’ll be part of the of the Search Form.

Search configuration Interface.

Attributes

Search Criteria : Allows to select the SQL command AND or OR to define the criteria of the search used;

Display Condition : Displays the condition of the search for the user to choose. In this case “AND” or “OR” will display in the search form, so that the user can choose the desired option.

Use auto-complete in the fields : The field turns into an autocomplete automatically according to the existing values in the database, If the user chooses Yes, the autocomplete will enable
automatically in all the fields that contain a relationship. If the user chooses No no autocompletes will be displayed. In the case the option selected is Defined in the field it’ll respect the
configuration individually for each field.

Search Criteria

Search configuration Interface.

In this interface, you can configure the conditions for each field of the Search form when filtering the SQL, on the left combo is displayed the field. The combo on the right are
listed the options for filtering the selected field, to select the options just click on them (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains and etc.) and the button On/Off. The arrows on the
right allows to alter the order of the fields.

For the Date type fields, you can define special conditions for the search, accessing the field configurations and editing the Special Conditions Settings.

Below the list are the buttons to enable the selected options:

On/Off : Enables or disables the field or the selected option.

All : Marks all fields or options.

None : Un marks all the fields or options.

Advanced Search
Settings

Through the table below we set all the options that will be part of the application Grid Search.
 2

Search Configuration Interface.

Attributes
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to define the horizontal alignment for the Search Form.

Margins : Allows to position the margins of the Search Form.

Keep Values : When enabled, the values from the search is maintained when the user returns to the search form.

Keep Columns and Order Selection : allows you to determine whether, at each filter, the values selected for the query and sort fields must be preserved, that is, at each filter, these
values return to the original condition.

Select fields

*Interface for filter fields selection.

Required
Defines which fields of application will be required for the search.

Required fields interface.

The application generated will be displayed a bullet (*) next to the field and an error message is generated if not assigned no value.

Configuration interface of the marker placement.

Marker position : Marker’s position relative to the field.

Display message : Displays whether or not the validation error message.

Toobar

Desktop

The toolbar of the application is divided in two parts: Top and Bottom, in a way that’s possible to define the buttons that’ll be displayed in both bars. The selection of buttons in
the top and bottom toolbar work independently allowing the buttons to display in both bars at the same time.
 3

Toolbar Interface.

Toolbar (Top / Bottom) : Allows to select and order buttons that’ll be displayed in the Search toolbar, according to what you desire. In this case, you just need to use the arrows beside the list
of buttons.

BUTTON SETTINGS

Button Settings Interface.

Button : References a Button from the toolbar.

Label : Allows to modify the Buttons label.

Hint : Allows to apply a Hint to the button.

Shortcut key : Allows to define shortcuts to the button from the keyboard.

OPTIONS

Options Interface.

Button Position(Top / Bottom) Positioning the buttons of the toolbar Top / Bottom.

Mobile

Save Search

This feature allows to organize search profiles, it creates an option Save Filter in a Search application, this way it’s possible to save the search done previously. You can add some
rules. With these details you can save a search done by the user login.

Save Filter Interface.

 4

Save Filter Interface.

Events

In event blocks can be used global variables, local, JavaScript code, CSS codes and Scriptcase macros.

ONSCRIPTINIT

This event runs the moment that the scripts of the application is initialized. This is executed before the event OnLoad ( when present ), although, it’s always executed when
running, reloading or navigating in the application.

ONREFRESH

This event runs when the refresh option of the application is enabled.

ONSAVE

This event runs when the application saves the record.

O N V A L I D AT E

This event runs when validating the information of the fields, when submitting the form.

Layout

On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.

BLOCKS

Conceptually a block is a “container” where you can position the fields of the Applications: Form, Control or Grid with Slide orientation.

By default, the applications created in ScriptCase are built with a only one block, with the same name as the application. You can add the amount of blocks that you want to
organize in a more convenient way. The page below, observe that theirs a column Organization, and that is where you’ll define if the next block will be set beside or below the
current one.

Application Block configuration

On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second
is to delete the block.

Organizing the position of the Blocks

See below how to modify the display order of the Blocks in one Page.

Click and drag the block that you desire to modify to its new position.

Application Block Display configuration

See how to remove a block from display

Click on the block desired and drag it to the item “Blocks not Shown”. This way, you can also drag the block to another page if desired. See the images below.
 5

Application Block Display configuration

Application Block Display configuration

Attributes
Block
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Title
Display : Flag that controls the title display of the block.

Label
Display : Flag that controls id the label of the fields will be displayed in the block.

Position : Options to display label :

Above : The label will be displayed above the field.

Beside : The label will be displayed beside the field.

Below : The label will be displayed below the field.

Fields
Columns : Amount of columns that are displayed side by side in the block.

Position : The way that the fields are displayed in the block :
Below : The fields are displayed one below the other respecting the amount of columns.

Beside : The fields are displayed one beside the other respecting the amount of columns.

Line : The fields are displayed one beside the other without the tabulation.

Organization
Next : The way that the blocks are displayed in the page:
Below : Indicates that the next block will be placed below the current one.

Beside : Indicates that the next block will be placed beside the current one.

Tabs : Indicates that the next block will be placed in a different tab then the current one.

Width : Specifies the width that block will occupy in pixels or percentage, in case the value is in percentage, inform the (%).

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

Create New Block

To include new blocks in an Application, click on the button . Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the name and label of the block. At the end
click on Create.

Creating application blocks configuration

Attributes
Name : Name of the Block.

Label : Title of the block that’ll be displayed in the application.

Edit Blocks

To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, you’ll see the following interface to define the
parameters of the blocks. At the end click on save.
 6

Application Block editing interface

Attributes
Name : Name of the block.

Title : Block title for display.

Display Title : This option, when active, allows to display the block title.

Title Font : Font applied to the block title.

Font Size : Size of the font applied to the block title.

Font Color : Font color for the block title.

Background Color : Background Color of the block title.

Background image : Background image for the block title.

Title Height : Height in pixels of the block title line.

Horizontal Alignment : Horizontal Alignment of the block title (Left, Center and Right).

Vertical Alignment : Vertical Alignment the block title (Top, Middle and Bottom).

Display Label : Display the labels of the fields in the block.

Columns : Amount of field columns in a block.

Columns Width : How the width of the block is defined.

Label Color : Color of the field labels.

Fields Organization : How the fields are organized in the block.

Label Position : Position of the field labels relating to the data.

Next Block : Position of the next block relating to the current block.

Border Color : Border color for the block.

Border Width : Border Width for the block.

Block Width : Width for the block.

Block Height : Height for the block.

Cell Spacing : Cell Spacing in the block.

Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.

L AY O U T S E T T I N G S

On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.
 7

Application Display Theme

Configuration

Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Header of the application.

Footer Template : Allows to choose the template that’s going to be used as the Footer of the application.

Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, it’ll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) that’ll be part of the application.

HEADER & FOOTER

Header
In this block, it’s the definition of the variables content that’ll be part of the header.

Application Header Configuration

This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.

Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.

Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the header.

Title : This option when selected it’ll display in the header the value informed in the “ Application Title ”.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.
 8
Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.

Footer

Application Footer Configuration

This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.

Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.

Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, it’ll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option “ Field”, it’ll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, it’ll associate the value of the field with the footer.

Date : When selected the “ Date” type, it’ll display the system’s date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and you’ll view a page display the formats.

Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon “ Choose
Image ” and to upload new images click on the button “ Upload ” .

Value : When selecting the type “ Value ”, the content informed in the text field that appears beside, it’ll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and “ Global Variables ”. e.g.
“Employee Name: [v_name]”.

Dynamic Search
This feature allows the user to search records the application without leaving the current screen, the developer needs to indicate which fields will be available.

Settings

Dynamic Search configuration Interface

Use the ENTER key to : Use the Enter key to tabulate from one field to the other, or to submit the search.

Select Fields

Dynamic Search Field Selection.

QuickSearch
Quick Search is an option that allows to search data in various fields of the application, by using the text box in the toolbar.
 9

Application running QuickSearch.

QuickSearch Settings

In the quicksearch settings are the following options:

QuickSearch Configuration Interface.

Button within the search - An option to inform if the search button will be in the text area of the box. Quicksearch show combo box - Displays a combo box if there’s only one
option in the quicksearch. Quicksearch Watermark - Displays a Placeholder in the quicksearch. Quicksearch width - Defines the width of the Quicksearch field. Display the Quick
search old format - Displays in the old format with the selection of the fields in the Quick search. Search anywhere - If enabled, QuickSearch will search each part of the String for
the data informed in the field.

Select Fields

In the Quicksearch Settings you need to define the fields that are part of the search.

QuickSearch selecting fields Interface.

And you can select various criteria of the search.

 10

QuickSearch search criteria configuration Interface.

You need to add the QuickSearch button in the toolbar in order to use it.

Fields
Text

Text field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text, you can inform a Text value to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Text Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 11

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 12

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Integer
 13

Integer field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Integer, you can inform number values to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Integer Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Integer Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Use Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

 14
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 15

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Decimal

Decimal field configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Decimal, it’s allowed to define the format of a decimal number.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 16
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Decimal Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Decimal Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.
 17
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 18

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Percent

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT
 19

Percentage Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.
 20
Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 21

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Currency

Currency field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Currency, you can currency values to the field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Currency Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Currency Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 22
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 23

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Percent ( Calculated )

Percentage field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When it’s defined as a Percentage, it’s allowed to define the format of a percentage.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 24
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 25
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 26

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Date

Date field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Date, you can inform a date.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Date Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator attribute.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Display : Select the format of the day for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters A, M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.

Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.

Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.

Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.

View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.

Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

 27
Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Date Field Special Conditions.

All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in today’s date.

Yesterday : Searches in yesterday’s date.

Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).

This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.

Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
 28
Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 29

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Time

Time field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Time, you can inform a time to this field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Time Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from TIME. You need to use the characters HH , II , and SS that correspond to Day, Hour , Minutes and
Seconds.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Time Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 30

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 31

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Datetime
 32

Datetime field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Datetime, you can inform a date and time to this field.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Datetime Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, it’ll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.

Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.

Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.

Display : Select the format of the day/time for display.

Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from DATETIME . You need to use the characters A, M, D , HH , II , and SS that correspond to Year, Month,
Day, Hour , Minutes and Seconds.

Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.

Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.

Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.

Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.

Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.

View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.

Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.

Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Datetime Field Special Conditions.

All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.

Today : Searches in todays date.

Yesterday : Searches in yesterdays date.

Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).

This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.

Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.

Display Settings
 33
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 34

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Select
 35

Select field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combo box (Select Field).

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.
 36

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a
different delimiter then (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 37
Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Link : Allows to create a link to another form allowing to manipulate the list displayed on the select field. After the manipulation, the select object it updated
automatically.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :
 38

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the select field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

 39
Label Valor Inicio Tamanho

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Multiple Values (binary)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
 40
4
Attribute PleasureDescription
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Configuração do lookup de edição Múltiplos Valores (Binário)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the select field.

Height : Defines the height for the select object.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing
 41

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 42
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 43

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

DOUBLE SELECT

Double Select field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Double Select, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Double Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Automatic Lookup Interface..

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT key_field ,
display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

 44
Height : Allows to define the height(lines) of the field interface.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different delimiter then
(;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the option Display
original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

 45
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 46

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Checkbox

Checkbox field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Checkbox, your allowed to have multiple options selected.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Checkbox Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

 47
Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
 48
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.

Manual Lookup Interface.

Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :

Setting up Single Value Lookup

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (delimiter)

You can store various values for the checkbox field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).
 49

Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (position)

Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.

For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.

The example below:

Label Value Start Size

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.

Setting up Multiple Values (position)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .

Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isn’t any valued selected on the field.

Start : Starting position of the string that’s going to be stored. The first position is always 1.

Size : Amount of bytes that’s going to occupy in the string.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Multiple Values (binary)

 50
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.

In this example uses the following list (although it’s not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, it’s done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.

Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3

Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13

Setting up Multiple Values (Binary)

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.
 51

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

 52
CSS of the Title
Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 53

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Radio

Radio field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Radio, your allowed to select one of the options listed.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 54
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Radio Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

Lookup Methods

You’ll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).

Selecting the lookup type.

Lookup Method - Automatic

Lookup used to list the values that’ll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.

Automatic Lookup Interface.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure “SELECT
key_field , display_field FROM table”.

The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.

Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.
 55

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Lookup Method - Manual

This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values that’ll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesn’t have a table that contains this information.
 56

Manual Lookup Interface.

Label : Text that’ll be displayed in the item list of the radio.

Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value that’s stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .

Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.

Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.

Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.

Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.

Clear Button : Clear the Fields.

Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on load lookup definition.

Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. It’ll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.

Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).

Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.

Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.

Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if there’s a change to the selected object in the field.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

Displaying the original lookup.

Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. It’s only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.

Ajax Processing
 57

Ajax Processing configuration Interface.

Allows to define the field that’ll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.

For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
 58
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 59

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Grid Fields

Grid fields Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to “Grid Fields”, you can set the fields that’ll be part of the Grid table.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.
 60
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.
 61

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Sorting

Sorting field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to “Sorting”, you can set the sorting of the fields that’ll be part of the Grid table.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

Display Settings

The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.
 62
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.
 63

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Text Auto-Complete

Text Auto-Complete field Configuration Interface.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate an
internal Text for the data.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

 64
FIELD BEHAVIOR

Text Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.

Lower Case : All in Lower Case.

Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.

Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the seach when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

Lookup Settings

A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
 65

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
 66
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

 67

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

Number Auto-Complete

![Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_número_auto] Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search
Configuration.

Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Number auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and it’ll manipulate
an internal number for the data.

Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, it’ll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be “Client Name”.

Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isn’t used.

Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.

Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.

SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.

FIELD BEHAVIOR

Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.

Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.

Text between values : Text that will appear between values.

OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when there’s modifications to the field.

Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, it’ll only work if there’s at least one option selected.

V A L U E S F O R M AT

Number Auto-Complete Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.

Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.

Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.

Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.

Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.

Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.

Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
 68

Lookup Settings Display for the field.

SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command that’ll recover the values that’ll be displayed on the form field.

Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.

Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).

Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).

Capture Text : When not enabled, you’ll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.

lookup Settings configuration Interface.

Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.

lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.

Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.

Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.

Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
 69

Display Settings Interface.

CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the title of the field.

Height : To define a height for the title of the field.

CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the field.

Height : To define a height for the field.

CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc

Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.

Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.

Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.

Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.

Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.

Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.

Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.

Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).

Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).

Width : To define a width for the Input Object.

Height : To define a height for the Input Object.

Help Settings

This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
 70

Help configuration Interface.

Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.

Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, it’ll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ‘ll view a popup with help description.

Help type - Popup configuration Interface.

Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, you’ll view a hint with the help description.

Help type - Hint configuration Interface.

Text : It’ll display the help description beside the field.

Help type - Text configuration Interface.

 1
Application
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › APPLICATION

Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.

Application Configuration Interface

Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application that’s determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.

Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.

Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.

Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.

Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.

Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.

Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.

Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.

Folder : Folder where the application’s stored in the work group.

Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.

Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.

HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.

Error Settings

Error Settings Interface.

Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.

SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.

Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.

Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
 2
Navigation
Defines the attributes of the navigation of one application to another.

Navigation Interface.

Attributes
Exit URL : URL on which the user will be redirected when exiting the application.

Close on Exit : When exiting the application, close the browser window.

Redirect URL : URL to redirect in case there isn’t any global variables available.

Redirect Variable : Name of the variable that’ll be stored the URL of a real application.

Global Variables
This screen shows the global variables in the application.

The global variable is an external parameter required for running the application. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause, field definitions and names,
event programming, and so on.

Global variables are defined in brackets ([variable]). These variables must be passed to the application being implemented through one of the methods: Session, Post, and Get

Global variables Interface.

Example:

Select CustomerID, CustomerName from Customers WHERE CustomerID = '[v_customerid]'

In this case, the variable v_customerid appears in the global variables configuration.

Global variables configuration Interface.

Shows all global variables used in the application

Attribute : name of the variable in the application.

Value : Defines the behavior of the variables, this content is divided in three blocks, they are:
Scope : Defines how the variable is received by the application. If a variable has been defined that it’s received by a POST method and has been approved by the GET method, the
content is not accepted. Methods of passing variable values:

Session : In this option, the variable must be created as a PHP session variable by another application.

GET : Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that is, visible by the browser.

POST : Defines that the variable must be passed through the POST method of a HTML form.

Settings : Does not validate (check) the variable at runtime.

Type (In / Out) : Defines whether the variable is input or output.

Description : Indicates where the variable is being used.

 1
Links
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › LINKS

New link

Links menu interface.

When you click the “New Link” item from ScriptCase application menu will, the screen below will be displayed.

Interface for creating links

Application Link
Used to edit records of a Grid Application by using a Form Application. In the generated Grid you’ll view a link for each record to edit the records. Clicking on the link, the

form selected can be displayed in various ways (in an iframe, in the same window or on another window).

Application Link creation interface.

List of Applications

Application Link list of applications available.

Application: You need to select the form application that’s going to be called by the Grid Application.

Parameters Definition
 2

Parameters Definition Interface.

On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option that’s going to be set to the parameter. The options are:

Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

Fiels Link
Used to create a link of a navigation in a column to any application of the project. When selecting the field link type, it’s displayed a select field with all the field displayed in the
Grid application.

Field Link creation interface.

List of Applications
It’s possible to create a field link to all the applications of the project (Menus, Searches, Reports PDF, Grid, Tabs, Form (Update Mode) and Control). You need to select an
application to proceed.

Field Link list of applications available.

Parameters Definition
 3

Parameters Definition Interface.

On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option that’s going to be set to the parameter. The options are:

Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.

Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

Capture Link
The capture is used specially in the Form and in the Grid Search. This type of link imports the data of another Grid to a Form or Search Field. When selecting a capture link type,
it’ll display a list of fields of the Search Form. You need to choose a files to receive the data through the link.

Capture Link creation interface.

List of Applications
It’s possible to create a capture link to the Grid Application. You need to select an application to proceed.

Capture Link list of applications available.

Parameters Definition

Parameters Definition Interface.

Fetch field value : You need to select the field that’ll call the Grid Application. This field will have the values informed when returned from the Grid Search.

Select values to pass as parameters : This option is displayed when the Grid Application has a parameter; like a Where clause for example that receives a global variable. The options for the
values that can be passed as a parameter are:
Fixed : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.

 4
Button Link
Used to link a Grid application to any other type applications. In this type of link, a button is used like a link between the Grid and other applications.

Button Link creation interface.

Links Edit
In the Link Folder of the Application Menu (Image Below) are displayed the links existing in the application and also the item New Link. When clicking on the existing link it’s
displayed the screen below that allows to manage the links.

Editing Links.

Actions

Properties Change the behavior of the link, position, and how the link opens.
Link Change the application that’s being called in the link their parameters.
Delete Remove the existing link.

Link Propeties
On the screen below, you can see the attributes relevant to the link behavior of that need to be informed.

Link properties Interface.

Link Operation Mode :

Open in the same Window : Displays the Form in the same browser window.

Open in another Window : Displays the Form in another window of the browser.

Open in Iframe : The Form will be displayed in the same window, allowing to position below, above, to the left or right of the Grid.

Open in Parent : If the Grid is in a iframe, it displays the Form in the parent viewport of the page.

Modal : Opens the Form in modal, allowing to configure the size of the modal.

Display button (new row) on the grid toolbar : This option, when enabled, adds a button to the toolbar that allows to add a New Record to the Form.

Label for the button New : You can apply a Label for the button, if not informed the label will be “New”.

Hint for the button New : You can apply a Hint for the button, if not informed the hint will be “New”.

Hotkey for the button “New” : Indicates which key will be the shortcut for the New Record.

Exit URL for the target application : The URL that’s going to call after exiting the Form. In case no value is informed, the “back” button will redirect to the Grid.

Form Property

Allows to select the buttons that are going to be displayed in the Form through the link. Form properties configurations Interface.

Enable insert button on target application : Enables the Insert Button in the Form.

Enable update button on target application : Enables the Update Button in the Form.

Enable delete button on target application : Enables the Delete Button in the Form.

Enable navigation button on target application : Enables the navigation buttons (first, previous, next and last) in the Form.

Enable button to edit a grid record : Enables the edit button for each record.

Iframe properties
 5

These options are displayed when the property Link Operation Mode is set to “Open in Iframe”. Iframe properties

configurations Interface.

Display the header of the called application : Displays the header of the Form.

Iframe position relative to the main application : It can be: below, above, right or left.

Action After Insert view the list below :

Reload Grid : Does a refresh on the current page.

Move to the end of the grid : Navigate to the last page of the Grid.

Iframe height : Iframe Height in pixels.

Iframe width : Iframe Width in pixels.

 1
Programming
HOME › APPLICATIONS › STORED PROCEDURES › PROGRAMMING

In this version of ScriptCase is incorporated the concept of programming, with the use of attributes, methods, resources and libraries. In the previous version it was already
possible to create business rules in applications using this concept the big difference now is that this can be done in a more organized, facilitating both the development as the
understanding of the rule by another developer.

Attributes
The attributes are variables that has the global scope declared in the application. An attribute that can be referenced in all the methods and events of the application.

Attributes configuration Interface.

Attributes
Attribute Name : This field, allows to inform the name of the attribute, after typing the name just click on include. In case you want to update click on the name of the attribute (located
on the tight side of the buttons), do the necessary modifications and click on update. In case it’s necessary to delete an attribute, it’s necessary to do same process as the update, but
when selecting the attribute, it’s necessary to click on the delete button. The clear button, as the name suggests, it clears the list of all the attributes listed on the right.

Internal Libraries
To use the internal libraries just select the correspondent ( Project Libraries for example). This process allows the methods existing in the library, to be visible in all the Events and
Methods of the application. See how to manage the libraries by clicking here.

Internal Libraries managment Interface

PHP Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.

Creating a new method

PHP method creation Interface

Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.

Include Method.

Methods can receive parameters.

 2

Add the amount of variables: PHP method parameter definition

Defining the variables: Defining the variables

Name : Type in the name of the variable.

Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.

Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.

Editing a parameter:

: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.

: Edit the selected parameter of the list.

: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

 1
General View
HOME › TOOLS

Scriptcase offers tools that helps you out on developing systems, with the goal of optimizing the time of development making it easier to maintain your product.

Data Dictionary - This tool offers the option to create langs for the applications of your current project.

Express Edit - This tool offers the option to edit various applications simultaneously, it contains some options to be edited in the applications.

External Libraries - This tool offers the option to include external libraries to your project like JavaScript, CSS, HTML and other libraries. This allows you to integrate the
libraries to your applications.

Internal Libraries - This tool offers the option to create PHP functions to be used in the applications.

To-Do List - Allows you to create a To-Do List and assign Tasks to your developers.

Messages - Allows the developers to exchange messages between themselves in the same ScriptCase .

Converters - This tool offers the option to convert your projects from previous versions of ScriptCase to the current version.

Database Import - This tool offers the option to import tables in the formats (XLS, CSV and ACCESS) for the following databases: MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and SQL Server

SQL Builder - This tool is an interface that provides some options to create a SELECT query to be used in your applications.

Database Builder - This tool is an interface to manage your database directly from ScriptCase, without needing to use any other software. It supports the Databases: MySQL,
SqlServer (not ODBC), SQLite, Oracle, Postgres.
 1
Data Dictionary
HOME › TOOLS › DATA
DICTIONARY
The Data Dictionary is used to internationalize your system, by using this feature, you can create a data repository and associate it too one or more tables.

To access this functionality, you need to access it from the main menu Tools > Data Dictionary.

Creating a Data Dictionary

Inform all the necessary date for the creation of the repository. the files with an asterisk ar required.

The option Associate dictionary with connection , define a connection to associate with the repository data, allowing that the new applications, created using the tables
associated with the repository, have indexes in the language files with the field labels from the tables.

Add tables to the Data Repository

Here we need to select the tables that’ll be added to this repository. After selecting the desired tables click on next.

After selecting the desired tables, you should choose whether or not to create the indexes (langs) on the field labels of the existing applications of the project.

Generate the indexes in the language files of the table fields - On this option the field labels are replaced with he indexes that can be edited in one place when accessing Locales >
Application Language.

An example of an index created by the Data Dictionary:

Overwriting the indexes in the language files - On this option, the existing indexes will be overwritten with new data based on the database.

Next, we can view a list of tables added to the repository data, where we can view a couple of information about these tables, like the name of the table of the database and the
 2
index created for each table, on the label field, and the version of the Data Dictionary of each field.

The tables that weren’t added can be viewed when accessing the Dictionary tables, the process of including these tables to the repository of data is the same.

When doing a modification to the structure of the database tables, the same should be updated using the option SYNCHRONIZE DICTIONARY .

Table status

Next to the name of the tables there’s an icon that indicates the status of the tables.

Green - Indicates that the tables and the repository are updated.

Red - Indicates that the tables don’t exist in the database, in this case you should delete it from the repository.

Yellow - Indicates that the tables aren’t updated because of some modification in its structure. In these cases, you should click o the link edit referring to the table and click on update, so that
the data of the repository could update.

Edit Tables
Can be found on the right side, in the list of tables.

This option allows you to edit the fields from the chosen table, like the data types and the indexes created by the repository for example.

Other properties of the fields can be accessed when clicking the more icon on the right side of the field list.

Syncing Dictionary

This option is activated when selecting one or more tables, on this option we’ll update the data dictionary according to the database.
 3

When synchronizing the tables, a yellow icon will be displayed on the side of the updated tables, Se how to remove it . In case of change the structure of the tables, then you
need to resync them again.

Synchronizing Applications
After doing all the desired configurations on the tables and fields, you need to sync the changes to the existing applications, so that the changes can be applied.

First, you need to select the tables that’ll be synchronized.

Next, you can define what will be done and which applications will suffer the modifications. A list of applications, that received the changes, are based on the tables that they
used.

When clicking on synchronizing, when finishing the process, you’ll see a summary of the procedure done.

Clicking to show the log, you can view all the modifications done, where it’ll display the previous state (blue) and the result of the modification (red)

Clicking on Back you’ll return to the Page of definition of modifications.

 4
To finish the process, click on the Close.

Editing the Data Dictionary Properties

On the top part, we can view the dictionary properties, informed when created.

You have three possible actions, Edit, Reload and Close.

Edit - Allows you to change the properties of the data dictionary, like the modification of the connection used to associated with repository for example.

Reload - Updates all the information of the Data Dictionary, like the status of the table for example.

Close - Closes the current data dictionary and you are redirected to the list of dictionary.

Editing Indexes
To edit the created indexes in the repository, access Locales > Application Language .

On the side panel is possible to view all the lang from ScriptCase. The langs referring to the data dictionary will be in the folder Project Messages .
 1
Express Edit
HOME › TOOLS › EXPRESS EDIT

This tool offers the option to edit multiple applications of your project simultaneously, where you can define value for various common attributes for these applications.

Some configurations are available.

Se below how to use the express edit.

This tool can be accessed from the menu Tools > Edit Express .

Select applications which will be edited

Firstly, we need to inform which applications we want to edit.

All - All the applications existing in the project without exceptions, will be edited.

Select Applications - All the applications existing in the project will be listed, so that you can select the applications that you want to edit.

Apply Modifications
After selecting the applications, you need to define the modifications that you want for those applications. In this page, we can define how can the modifications take place.

Appling to all the applications

This option allows to apply the same configurations, to all the selected applications, automatically.
 2
Header Image - Define the image for the header of the applications.

Use Security - Define if the application will the user to be logged in so that it can run.

Enable direct call by URL - Allow the applications to be called directly by the URL.

Enable CSRF - Enables the protection “Cross-Site Request Forgery”. (This option only applies for the Control and Form applications)

Show HTML content - Defines if the HTML code that’s stored in the database will be interpreted by the browser. (This option only applies for the Grid application)

Remove the HTML tags - Defines if the HTML code that’s stored in the database will have the HTML tags removed for display.

Run content in JavaScript - Defines if the JavaScript code that’s stored in the database will run on the browser.

Save HTML tags - Stores the HTML tags informed within the Application field to the database. (This option only applies for the Form application)

Text input in JavaScript - Stores the JavaScript informed within the Application field to the database. (This option only applies for the Form application)

Language - Applies the selected language for all the selected applications in the project.

Connection - Apply the desired connection (Connections created in the “New Connection” module) for the applications.

Connection for fields - Apply the desired connection (Connections created in the “New Connection” module) for the fields in the applications.

Theme - Apply the desired Theme (Only the ones included in the Project properties) to all the applications.

Template - Change the Header and Footer template of the applications.

After selecting the modifications that you want to do for all the select applications, you’ll be presented a list with all the selected attributes will be listed for modification.

Apply individually

This option allows you to apply the modifications individually for each application selected.

This option contains, not only the previous attributes, but also three exclusive attributes.

Description - Apply a description individually for the selected applications.

Friendly URL - Apply a friendly URL individually for each selected application.

Title - Apply the title individually for each application.

After selecting the modifications individually for all the select applications, you’ll be presented a list with all the selected attributes will be listed for modification.

When you apply the modifications, you’ll be presented a list of the applications that were modified.
 1
Helpcase
HOME › TOOLS › HELPCASE

This tool is used to create a documentation for your system, that works integrated with the projects related by ScriptCase.

This tool can be accessed from the menu at Tools > HelpCase.

How to Create a HelpCase

The creation process is simple, needing only to inform the name of the documentation.

After creating the helpcase, you need to generate the content of the documented manual of the functionalities and description of the project.

On the left side, in the block ‘WebHelp’, we’ll see the folder structure. Still in this block we can create the folders of the documentation.

Select the root or any other folder on the side panel and click on the folder icon. This way a folder will be created in the select directory.

Inform the directory name (Special characters aren’t acceptable) and the display name in the documentation menu.

To create .html files, where you’ll place your content, you need to select the directory where you’ll place the files in.

Inform the name of the file (Special characters aren’t acceptable) and the display name in the documentation menu.

Editing the helpcase

Selecting the folder that you’ll create, you’ll view some new option with the create button.
 2

Icon (Folder with letters) - Allows you to rename the archives and the display name for the menu.

Icon (Recycle Bin) - Deletes the directory with all its content.

Icon (Eye) - View the directory in the documentation menu.

Icon (Slashed Eye) - Disable the view of the directory in the documentation menu.

After created, the files will be displayed on the list, when clicking on the directory that were created. Details about the files can be viewed, like the display title on the menu and
its actual size, also other options like rename and delete.

View - View the content of the file.

Edit - Open the file to place your content in it.

Link - Create a link between the file and the applications selected.

Copy - Creates a copy of the file.

Rename - Rename the file and it’s display menu.

Delete - Deletes the chosen file.

After the creation or clicking on edit a file, you can insert the content that’ll be displayed for the end user.

Upload
You can upload already created content or images to use in the manual. The upload of these files, can be done by clicking on the upload button, on the upload page you’ll see the
supported formats and size limit of the files.

General Settings
Settings

Allows you to setup some things, like the header display and the search tab.
 3

Initial Page

Allows to write content of the initial page of the documentation. The modification can be done also when selecting the _home.htm file on the files panel.

View

Define a template to be used in the header of the manual, it’s possible to edit or create new templates in the editor.

This editor can be accessed from the menu Layout > HTML Templates

Header

Allows to configure what will be displayed in the header.

CSS
Allows to modify the HelpCase CSS.
 4

After creating all the content and the configuration of the layout, you need to associate the create files with the applications, so that the end user can have access to the
information that he needs in a quick way.

Associating Applications
You can start associating all the applications at once by clicking on links, or clicking on link, where you can associate only the chosen file to various applications.

Links
On this option, you’ll see a list of the applications, where you should select the applications that’ll be associated.

Link

Clicking on link, you’ll be presented a list of all the applications, in this case you need to select the files that’ll be associated for each application.

Generating Manual
Generating the manual is the last step of its creation, after doing all the configurations, click on generate.
 5
After generating the manual, you can download or access it.

For you to have access to the manual from the applications, you need to click on the button WebHelp on the toolbar of the applications that have a link to the manual.
 1
External Libraries
HOME › TOOLS › EXTERNAL LIBRARIES

This feature allows to import complete libraries and create files of any extension (.JS, .CSS, .PHP…) that can be used in your projects, making it easier to reuse some of the source
code.

This feature is available in the menu Tools > External Libraries, where you can manage the libraries of your project.

To use this functionality, you need to use the macro, sc_url_library() and the sc_include_library() (Only for PHP files)to import the library to the applications.

Creating a new library

To create a library, click on Create a new library. Next, inform the library name and the access level of the library.

Public - Available for all the ScriptCase projects.

Project - Available only for the project it was created in.

Managing the Libraries

All the public and project libraries are listed here. This page allows you to select the libraries that’ll be part of the project, delete the unnecessary libraries, rename or edit them.

Using a Library
This option defines a library that’ll be used in the current project. The enabled libraries, for this project, can be differentiated by the checkmark next to the name of the library.

Selecting a library to be used in the project, the icon changes color when you click on the button “Save the library to the project” and enabled, you need to click on the button to
save the modifications.

Rename

To rename a library just click on “rename”, and then inform the new name for the library.

To rename a library, you’ll need to change all the includes of the library in the events of the applications.
 2

Editing a Library
Clicking on “Editing”, you can create or upload files to the libraries. You can create files in a folder, with the goal to organize your files.

On Footer of the page, you can view the options to create or upload the files.

New Directory

To create a directory, click on “New Directory” and inform the name of the directory.

New File
To create a file, click on “New File” and inform the name and extension (it’s indispensable to inform the file extension).

Upload Files

This tool, allows to upload files and external libraries and used them in the project.

Clicking on upload, select the desired file.

Delete

Delete the libraries and all the files contained in them.

Before deleting the library, be certain that it’s not being used, you won’t be able to recover deleted libraries.

Importing libraries into the applications

 3
Like mentioned before, to use the libraries, you need to use the macro sc_url_library() and the sc_include_library() (Only for PHP files).

The macro sc_url_library() returns the path to the file in the library and the sc_include_library() is used to include php files into applications from the external library:

This example changes the background color of a grid application, se the code in the style.css file
 1
Internal Libraries
HOME › TOOLS › INTERNAL LIBRARIES

This tool allows to create or upload php routines that can be reused in various applications of the project or other projects, depending on the level of access that they were
saved.

There are three types of access levels that can be used.

User - Only for the user that created the script will have access.

Project - All the users linked to the project will have access to the script.

Public - All the users from ScriptCase will have access to the script.

You can’t create or modify scriptcase that are in the Scriptcase Level, the scripts from this level are available to be used but nor modified.

Creating a Script

The item Internal Libraries are accessed from the tools menu.

Select the level that the script is being saved, in this example the user level was used.

Next, inform a name for the file, place your code and save it.

Using the Script

To use the Scripts, firstly you need to enable them in the applications that you want to use.

All the libraries that you have access will be listed, just select the the ones you desire to enable and use them.

To use the libraries, you need to import them by using the macro sc_include .

Example of using the macro: sc_include("File", "Origin");

 1
To-Do List
HOME › TOOLS › TO-DO LIST

Tool that allows the creation of a list of tasks for the users registered in the same ScriptCase, with a progress control for the task.

A message that’ll be displayed for the users that possess a task pending, always when they login.

To access the feature, go to the menu Tools > To-Do List

Accessing it, you’ll see all the registered tasks with the information about each one of them.

Creating a Task
The tasks can be created in four levels.

Public List - All the ScriptCase users can view the tasks of the this level.

My List - Only the Creator and the user responsible for the task can view.

Project: Public List - All the users of ScriptCase, linked to the project that the task was created, can view them. (This option is available only when a project is opened)

Project: My List - Only the Creator and the Responsible user can view this task, they need to have access to the project where the task was created. (This option is available only when a
project is opened)

Firstly, you need to select where you’re going to create the task. Selecting the folder, the “New Task” button will be enabled.

Next, after clicking on “New Task”, you need to fill up the required fields.

Task list - Name of da tarefa, que será exibido na lista das tarefas.

Percentage done - Inform the percentage of the task conclusion.

Deadline - Define the date and time that the task need to be concluded.

Responsible - Define which of the ScriptCase users are responsible for the task.

Who can change - Defines who can modify the current task:
Owner - Only the user that created the task.

Responsible - Only the user responsible for the task.

All - All the ScriptCase users can modify the task.

Application - Inform the application of the project that the responsible user needs to edit. (This option will only be available for task created in a project.)

Description - Task Description.

Task Status

This tool is used to inform the status of the task, using colors to symbolize the progress.

Open tasks - Tasks recently created within the deadline, are represented in yellow.

Completed tasks - Tasks that finished completely, are represented in blue.

Expired tasks - Tasks that passed the deadline, are represented in red.
2
 1
Messages
HOME › TOOLS › MESSAGES

The message system allows the communication between the registered developers on the same ScriptCase.

You can access this feature. Tools > Messages.

New Message
After clicking on the New Message button, you need to select the user that’s going to receive the message.

One message can be sent to many users.

After typing the message, click on send.

Inbox
Receiving the message, the users will be notified by an alert.

You can click on the notification bell or access Tools > Message to view the received messages.

Accessing the inbox where all the received messages are stored and ordered by the date.

Outbox
The sent messages are stored in the outbox.

By sending a message to various users, it’ll be registered a message for each user in the outbox.

Read and Reply

Click on the message that you want to read.
 2

When reading a message, you can reply the received message.

Received Response

In the Outbox, a responded message can be identified with a Re: before the subject

The original message, will be highlighted in the received response.

Delete Messages
You can delete the messages individually by clicking on the delete link.

You can also delete various messages. Select all the messages that you want to delete and then click on the delete button.
 1
Converters
HOME › TOOLS › CONVERTERS

The Project Converter, allows to convert the projects developed in previous versions of ScriptCase to the current version of ScriptCase.

Basically, it’s an import of the projects from different versions of ScriptCase.

The risk of converting is almost zero, when following the tutorial of converting. The process of conversion doesn’t modify any of the information of your project.

To prevent eventual problems, it’s recommend to create a backup of your projects.

The conversion of the projects has the same action for all ScriptCase versions.

Coping Scriptcase

Firstly, you need to copy the ScriptCase folder, of the previous version, and place it next to the current ScriptCase folder, that’ll receive the projects.

In this example:

Scriptcase8 folder - Old version of the tool.

Scriptcase9 folder - Version that’ll receive all the projects.

Path to Scriptcase

In ScriptCase, select the converter (compatible to the version that you want to convert), you need to inform the complete path to the folder of the old version of ScriptCase.

Next, select the server that ScriptCase was placed. In this case, select “Same Server”.

In case the converter can’t find the ScriptCase Database of the previous version installed, the page below will be displayed, so that you can inform the correct directives to the

ScriptCase database.

Select the projects that you want to convert.

 2

Next, you’ll view a log of everything that has been converted. With this the selected projects are already in the current ScriptCase and ready for use.
 1
Import Database
HOME › TOOLS › IMPORT
DATABASE
This tool allows you to convert the stored tables in .XLS, .CSV, .accdb and .mdb files to the following databases: MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and SQL Server.

All the options to import databases, you can find them in the menu Database.

Access Import
Allows you to convert one or more data sources to one structured database.

Selecting Files

First, inform the files that’ll be converted. You can inform the absolute path to the file, drag’n drop the file or select the file in the option Select Files.

Configuring the tables

After selecting the file, you need to access the configuration page.

On this page, you’ll see the password field, that’s used only with ACCESS files that were selected and require a password to list the tables. In these cases, after informing the
password, click on list tables .

Still in the same page, you can view the tabs Tables and Advanced.

Table Tabs

We can view a list of the tables that can be converted. Beside the name of the tables, are two options: Edit and Preview.

On the option Edit , you can modify the table structure that’ll be created, like the name, field size, and the data type and other options.

in Preview you’ll see a preview of how the table will be imported.

 2

Advanced Tab

On the “Advanced” tab are available the configurations import script for the table. You can configure the script that’ll be created for the generation of the tables of new database.

Add DROP TABLE - Adds a DROP TABLE IF EXISTS before the CREATE of the tables, so that if the tables exist with the same name in the database, they’ll be deleted first.

Recreate the database structure - Where you’ll define the table structure and the data that’ll be imported.

Recreate the structure - Where you’ll define only the structure the table that’ll be imported.

Recreate data - Where you’ll define only the data of the tables that’ll be imported (In case the tables exist in the database with the same structure of the ones being imported)

Connection
On this step, we need to select the connection (Database) to where you’ll import the tables. You can select a connection existing in the project or create a new one.

Next, you’ll be presented with a log of the tables that have been imported and the total of records inserted.

XLS Import
Allows you to convert one or more data sources to one structured database.

Selecting Files

First, inform the files that’ll be converted. You can inform the absolute path to the file, drag’n drop the file or select the file in the option Select Files.

Configuring the tables

After selecting the file, you need to access the configuration page.
 3
On this page, you need to inform first the line that the name of the columns are, this way all the information that’s below will be considered a record of the table. If you don’t
inform the line, all the file content will be considered a record.

Still in the same page, you can view the tabs Tables and Advanced.

You can view below the list of tables of the files, with the names of the tables and the name of the file. In the case of XLS or CSV files, the table names are obtained through the
name of the tab in the file.

Table Tabs

We can view a list of the tables that can be converted. Beside the name of the tables, are two options: Edit and Preview.

On the option Edit , you can modify the table structure that’ll be created, like the name, field size, and the data type and other options.

in Preview you’ll see a preview of how the table will be imported.

Advanced Tab

On the “Advanced” tab are available the configurations import script for the table. You can configure the script that’ll be created for the generation of the tables of new database.

Add DROP TABLE - Adds a DROP TABLE IF EXISTS before the CREATE of the tables, so that if the tables exist with the same name in the database, they’ll be deleted first.

Recreate the database structure - Where you’ll define the table structure and the data that’ll be imported.

Recreate the structure - Where you’ll define only the structure the table that’ll be imported.

Recreate data - Where you’ll define only the data of the tables that’ll be imported (In case the tables exist in the database with the same structure of the ones being imported)

Connection

On this step, we need to select the connection (Database) to where you’ll import the tables. You can select a connection existing in the project or create a new one.
 4

Next, you’ll be presented with a log of the tables that have been imported and the total of records inserted.

CSV Import
Allows you to convert one or more data sources to one structured database.

Selecting Files
First, inform the files that’ll be converted. You can inform the absolute path to the file, drag’n drop the file or select the file in the option Select Files.

Configuring the tables

After selecting the file, you need to access the configuration page.

On this page, you need to inform first the line that the name of the columns are, this way all the information that’s below will be considered a record of the table. If you don’t
inform the line, all the file content will be considered a record.

Still in the same page, you can view the tabs Tables and Advanced.

You can view below the list of tables of the files, with the names of the tables and the name of the file. In the case of XLS or CSV files, the table names are obtained through the
name of the tab in the file.

Table Tabs
We can view a list of the tables that can be converted. Beside the name of the tables, are two options: Edit and Preview.

On the option Edit , you can modify the table structure that’ll be created, like the name, field size, and the data type and other options.
 5

in Preview you’ll see a preview of how the table will be imported.

Advanced Tab

On the “Advanced” tab are available the configurations import script for the table. You can configure the script that’ll be created for the generation of the tables of new database.

Add DROP TABLE - Adds a DROP TABLE IF EXISTS before the CREATE of the tables, so that if the tables exist with the same name in the database, they’ll be deleted first.

Recreate the database structure - Where you’ll define the table structure and the data that’ll be imported.

Recreate the structure - Where you’ll define only the structure the table that’ll be imported.

Recreate data - Where you’ll define only the data of the tables that’ll be imported (In case the tables exist in the database with the same structure of the ones being imported)

Connection
On this step, we need to select the connection (Database) to where you’ll import the tables. You can select a connection existing in the project or create a new one.

Next, you’ll be presented with a log of the tables that have been imported and the total of records inserted.
 1
SQL Builder
HOME › TOOLS › SQL BUILDER

This tool helps on the construction of Queries in a Wizard form. These queries can be saved and used later.

Database
Any SQL can run directly from the Run tab that’ll be available after selecting the database.

First you need to select the connection(Database) that you want to use.

Tables
All the existing tables in the database are listed in the Tables tab.

Select the tables desired to create the query.

You can select various tables, although they need to have a relationship between them.

Fields
Select the fields that’ll be part of the query. The fields can be ordered alphabetically (Ascendant) or in the order that they were created (Default)

It’s possible to create an alias for the selected tables, this option can be found below the field list were also all the selected tables will be listed.

Joins
Defining the fields, it’s necessary to configure the join. To do that, you need to select the tables that have a relationship, next you’ll select the type of join that’ll used in the field
Type then click on Add.
 2

After clicking on add, click on Confirm , so that you can inform the fields that do the relationship between the tables.

Defining the fields, you’ll be redirected to the run tab.

To add a “Where” clause to the SQL, click on the tab Conditions

Conditions

You can add the “where” clauses where the query was created.

Order By

Define the sorting of the query result display.

Run

This is where you can run the SQL commands. The result of the query configuration wizard will be displayed on this tab. You can run DML (Data Manipulation Language)
commands here and also DDL (Definition Data Language) commands.
 3

You can define a total of records per page.

Saved

To save the created commands, just inform the name of the query and click on the save button. The commands that are already, will be listed.
 1
General View
HOME › LAYOUT

In Layout, you can edit or create visualization standards that’ll be placed in the developed project with ScriptCase. In this area, you can alter each part of the application, being
from presentation of the applications to the buttons and menu on which they’ll be presented in.
 1
CSS Applications (Themes)
HOME › LAYOUT › CSS APPLICATIONS
(THEMES)
In the CSS Applications, using the editor, it’s possible to create layouts for the applications. It’s possible to create new themes or edit existing ones.

To create new themes, click on “Create new Theme”. And modifications done to the theme, is already displayed in the preview in real-time.
 1
CSS Buttons
HOME › LAYOUT › CSS
BUTTONS
While editing the buttons, we can create new button schemes and link them to themes. We can create or edit button schemes being text buttons or image buttons.

Creating a new button scheme

Clicking on the “New” button located on the Button Scheme toolbar.

On the first tab (Buttons) are displayed the buttons used in ScriptCase. Each button can have its own customization, being able to select between an image, text button or link. In
case you use the image type, you’ll see a field to upload an image to be used for the button. For the text buttons and link types, use the tabs: Button Styles and Link Styles to edit
the appearance of the buttons.
 2
Editing the button styles
On this tab, we can define the CSS styles of the text buttons used in your schemes. All the schemes already have their standard style that can’t be deleted. If you need to more
than one layout for the text buttons in your scheme, just click on “New” to configure a new style. And select the tab Button Styles and then select the created style.

Configuring Style of Link Type Buttons

Using the same principals displayed in the styles for the text buttons, can be applied to the link buttons. IN a way that you can define that one or more buttons will be a link type
and their CSS style or a new one that you can create.
 1
HTML Templates
HOME › LAYOUT › HTML TEMPLATES

In the Templates, we can edit and create models for the Headers, Footers or the User HTML (Grid and Control). These models define the interface structure of the applications.
It’s possible to create a HTML file and define where the entry data will be, by use curly brackets {} to specify a variable. The user HTML option is used in Grid and Control
applications, where it’s possible to define all the structure of the report in HTML and associate the fields of the applications with the variables created on the body of the HTML
file. With this it’s possible to create Control and Grid applications with a different layout, being possible to place the fields anywhere on the page.

Header and Footer

In the editor for the Header and Footer, you need to create or edit existing models.

To create a new model, there’s a standard code to use as a base of all the HTML.

The creation of fields in the HTML needs to be done with curly brackets, for example {variable}.

Code example:

<div style="width: 100%">

<div {NM_CSS_FUN_CAB} style="height:11px; display: block; border-width:0px; "></div>
<div style="height:37px; background-color:#FFFFFF; border-width:0px 0px 1px 0px; border-style: dashed; border-color:#ddd; display: block">
<table style="width:100%; border-collapse:collapse; padding:0;">
<tr>
<td id="lin1_col1" {NM_CSS_CAB}><span>{LIN1_COL1}</span></td>
<td id="lin1_col2" {NM_CSS_CAB}><span>{LIN1_COL2}</span></td>
</tr>
</table>
</div>
</div>

These fields are visualized in the application where the template is going to be used.

After saving the template, you need to open the application that you’re going to use the template in and go to “Layout > Settings”, select the model for the Header and Footer that
you’ll use in “Layout > Header & Footer” you’ll associate the create fields in the template with the desired information available by ScriptCase.

User HTML
 2

In the User Defined HTML we can specify where the fields of the applications will be presented in the HTML file by using curly brackets {variable}. Like the example below:

<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">

<tr>
<td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center">
<font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px">
<b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City} - {State}<br>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
</tr>
</table>

The preview of the code above will be like the following: {Name} {Address} {City}-{State} {ZIP}

Remember that all the content that has curly brackets are considered a field of the application, this is why when you have {Name}, it’ll be referencing a field called ‘Name’ in your
application.

In the template we can define a delimitator by using “ ”:

<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">

<tr>
<!-- BEGIN bl2 -->
<td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center">
<font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px">
<b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}- {State}<br>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
<!-- END bl2 -->
</tr>
</table>

These parts are defined where the loop is going to start and end. The quantity of delimitators are defined as the “Columns per page” on the Grid application.

e.g.: If the Grid application the option “Lines Per Page” is 3, you’ll see the following result.

<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">

<tr>
<td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center">
<font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px">
<b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}- {State}<br>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
<td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center">
<font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px">
<b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}- {State}<br>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
<td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center">
<font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px">
<b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}- {State}<br>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
</tr>
</table>

The preview of the code above will be the following:

{Name} {Name} {Name}

{Address} {Address} {Address}
{City}-{State} {City}-{State} {City}-{State}
{ZIP} {ZIP} {ZIP}
If you have a HTML File created in the standards above, you can include it in ScriptCase by accessing “Layout > HTML Templates > User HTML > New Template”. On “New
Template” you’ll inform the file that you want to import or create a new template by writing the code in the ScriptCase editor.
 3
After having the User HTML, the next step is open the application that supports the Template (Control or Grid) and “Position the Fields” and associate the fields with the
application fields.
 1
CSS Menu
HOME › LAYOUT › CSS MENU

The option CSS Menu is used to create and/or edit styles layouts of the Menu Applications.

To create a new theme for the menu it’s necessary to first select a theme to be used as base of the new theme.

After clicking on “New”, to create a new theme for the menu, you’ll have various options to change the colors that are part of the menu you chosen. Also, you can change the font
size of the items.

Before saving the theme that you created, you need to select the access level like Public, Project or User.

Public the theme is available for everyone that uses Scriptcase on your machine.

Project the theme is available for the project that it was created in.

User the theme is available only for the user that created the theme.

After selecting the access level, inform the name of the theme and click on “Save”.
 1
Menu Icons
HOME › LAYOUT › MENU ICONS

While editing the menu icons, you can change the icons of the active and nonactive tabs that are open on the menu. These icons are linked to the opened applications.

On the page below, we can view the icons divided in blocks for each type of application, so each icon corresponds to an application from ScriptCase.

Select the icons that you desire for each state for the menu tabs, being active or nonactive.
 1
Images Manager
HOME › LAYOUT › IMAGES MANAGER

The Images Manager is where you’ll organize and upload new images that’ll be used in your project.

To upload new images, you need to select the scope of which the image will be part, after selecting the folder where the image will be stored at and after that click on File >
Upload.

When the image is uploaded, the image’s name is modified depending on the scope of which it’s part of (public, project or user) and the type of image (background, button, icons,
menu or general) following the pattern below:

sys__NM__ (Public)

grp__NM__ (Project)

usr__NM__ (User)

Image Type:

bg__NM__ (background images)

btn__NM__ (button images)

img__NM__ (general images)

ico__NM__ (icons)

menu_img__NM__ (menu images)

This way, the image called 001.jpg that was added to the public and icon scope will receive the name sys__NM__ico__NM__001.jpg

The image will be in the folder “app/project_name/_lib/img” in the development environment and in the production, will be “/project_name/_lib/img”.

After uploading the image to the project, you need to insert the image in the applications that you desire, to do that in the applications desired, go to Applications > Settings >
Application images and click on the icon next to the garbage icon to add an image.
 1

1. Home
2. Layout
3. Chart Themes

Chart Themes
The chart theme tool offers the option for you to create different themes for the chart applications of your project. The chart theme allows you to modify some options like the
background color, font, margin, data, border and shadow.

To create new themes, you need to select an existing theme so that you can use it as a base and on top of it you’ll customize it to the way you feel satisfied.
 1
HTML Editor Templates
HOME › LAYOUT › HTML EDITOR TEMPLATES

The html editor tool offers you the option to modify the toolbar of the html editor field present in the applications.

You can create a new template theme and/or edit an existing one.

To create a new theme, just select an existing one and click on “Save As”, to edit an existing theme just select the theme and click on “Save”.
 1
General View
HOME › LOCALES

ScriptCase offers a complete generator, so that you can define the languages and regional settings that your project will support.
 1
Application Language
HOME › LOCALES › APPLICATION LANGUAGE

The language menu for the applications allows you to translate the ScriptCases default messages, and also create custom messages to be used in different parts of the
applications.

Messages
Using the messages menu, it’s possible to select and edit messages. The messages being divided in in categories, “ScriptCase Messages” and “Project Messages”. New categories
can be created using the item “New Folder”.

Selecting a lang to be modified, a new page will appear with the columns of each language of your project, you’ll inform the value of the message in each language.
 1
Regional Settings
HOME › LOCALES › REGIONAL SETTINGS

The regional settings allow you to define some parameters of the monetary unit, date and number according to the country or region where your application is going be used.
Clicking on Customizing, you can modify the values that’ll be used in your applications.

Customizing Regional Settings

In the Number Group, we have some parameters like the Decimal Symbol, digit grouping and negative format. These parameters are used in the applications that use the
decimal type field.

In the Currency Unit Group, we have some parameter like the monetary symbol, Currency positive format, etc. These parameters are used in the applications that use the
Currency type field.

In the groups of Time and Date are available the parameters of Date and time, that can be used in the fields of the Type Time, Date and Date time.
 1
General View
HOME › MODULES

Scriptcase offers a complete generator for your system security through the Security and Log modules. Check below how to create these two modules within Scriptcase.

Security Module
It creates an access control with restrictions according to the system users/groups. There are four types of security with different control levels. Scriptcase will create all the
necessary database tables and applications to manage the system security according to the type applied.

Scriptcase has five types of security, they are similar, diverging only in how the permissions are applied: User security, Application security, Group security and LDAP security.

Configure Security Modules is simple and quick. Check the following link to see how to set the module. click here.

Log Module
Using the Log Module, you will be able to track and monitor all actions that the system users will make within the systems developed with the Scriptcase. Together with the
Security Module, you will have a complete and effective security system rapidly developed for your applications.

Check the following link to see how to set the Log Module within very simple steps, click here.
 1
Security Module
HOME › MODULES › SECURITY MODULE

Making use of the security modules, you can implement a complete access rules for systems developed by ScriptCase. The process for the security module creation is quick and
simple.

Scriptcase has five types of security, they are similar, diverging only in how the permissions are applied.

User Security Type

Under this security type all users have access to all applications. It works only for user authentication. Scriptcase will create one table to store the user and password information
and validate the acess using a login screen.

In this security type Scriptcase creates these tables:

User - Login, Password, Name, E-mail, Active, Activation Code and admin privileges

Logged users - Login, login date, Session, IP address

The table Logged users will be created only if the option Protect Logged users is checked during the Security Module creation.

Application Security Type

Under this type Scriptcase will also control login and password as the User Security and also create a restricted access control to the applications or system options according to
the logged user. It is possible to define which applications is accessible to each user.

In this security type Scriptcase creates these tables:

User - Login, Password, Name, E-mail, Active, Activation Code and admin privileges

Application - Code, Description, Application type

User / Application - Login, Application Name, Access privileges, Insert privileges, Delete privileges, Update privileges, Export privileges, Print privileges

Logged users - Login, login date, Session, IP address

The table Logged users will be created only if the option Protect Logged users is checked during the Security Module creation.

Group Security Type

This type of security includes the options of User and Application types, however with the Group Security type you will group the users and define the permissions to access the
applications or system options according to the groups. One user can belong to one or more groups.

In this security type Scriptcase creates these tables:

User - Login, Password, Name, E-mail, Active, Activation Code and admin privileges

Group - Description and ID

Application - Code, Description, Application type

User / Group - Login, Group ID

Group / Application - Group ID, Application name, Access privileges, Insert privileges, Delete privileges, Update privileges, Export privileges, Print privileges

Logged users - Login, login date, Session, IP address

The table Logged users will be created only if the option Protect Logged users is checked during the Security Module creation.

LDAP Security Type

The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is an open, vendor-neutral, industry standard application protocol for accessing and maintaining distributed directory
information services over an Internet Protocol (IP) network. You can use this protocol within Scriptcase Security module to authentication users in two ways: (Authentication only,
performs only a simple user authentication, similar to User Security Type and the Total Control, where we can define the access by groups, similar to the Group Security Type.

In this security type Scriptcase creates these tables:

User - Login, Password, Name, E-mail, Active, Activation Code and admin privileges

Application - Code, Description, Application type

User / Application - Login, Application Name, Access privileges, Insert privileges, Delete privileges, Update privileges, Export privileges, Print privileges

Logged users - Login, login date, Session, IP address

The table Logged users will be created only if the option Protect Logged users is checked during the Security Module creation.

See how to create each security type:

 2
User security creation
Security Type
First you should select the security type.

Connection

After the security type definition, you must select the connection that will be used to create the tables that make up the security module.

Connection - Sets the connection that will be used for the creation of the security tables.

Use existing tables -Enables you to use pre-existing tables in your database. These tables must have at least the same fields used by Scriptcase security module. We recommend that you use
this option if the tables have already been created by Scriptcase Security Module, to minimize errors.

Create tables - This option creates all necessary security tables inside the selected database.

Tables prefix - You can set a prefix of the tables that will be created by the Security Module. By default Scriptcase uses the prefix: sec_

Delete if tables already exist - This option is available only when you select Create Tables . By selecting this option, if your database has tables with the same names, they will be deleted and
replaced by new tables created by the Security Module.

Protect Logged Users - Protection to prevent users to perform simultaneous logins in different sessions.

Tables link

This step is important if the option Use existing tables is selected. In this case, you must associate the fields from the existing tables to fields of security applications (applications
generated by the Security Module).

In these cases, the existing database tables must contain a minimum number of fields so that they can be associated to the fields of security applications.

The required tables for each type of security are described at the beginning of this article.

If you have selected the option Create tables , in the previous step the fields will be automatically associated, just click continue.

Settings
In this step we will define the security module settings.

General

User password encryption, the folder where the applications are created, the log module used among other things.

Applications Prefix - Prefix for the applications that will be created automatically by the Security Module.
 3
Encryption - Encryption used for to store the password in the table of users.

Enable Security - Activate the flag Application Security of all project applications.

Enable Captcha - Activates the captcha for the login application created by the Security Module.
No - Does not display the captcha in the login application.

Captcha - Uses the built-in scriptcase library for captcha display.

reCAPTCHA - Uses Google’s reCAPTCHA V2. To configure click here.

Folder - Folder name that will be created to store the applications generated by Security Module.

Theme - Theme that is used for the applications created by the Security Module.

Log - This option is available if the project has a Log Module previously created. Click here and check out how to create a Log Module

Menu - This option is only available if your project has a Menu Application previously created. You can associate this existing Menu and include all applications generated by the Security
Modulo to it. If you don’t select an existing Menu here, Scriptcase Security Module will create a new Menu Application exclusively for the security applications.

Menu Type - Security Module menu type (option only available if you do not select and existing menu in the previous item)

Login

Here you can set the type and amount of characters allowed for the username and password fields.

Minimum size - Minimum amount of characters used by the user.

Maximum size - Maximum size of the characters used by the user.

Characters allowed - Define which characters are allowed when creating a password.

Password recovery settings

Defines how password recovery will work in the system created by the Security Module.

These password recovery options works only when the SMTP server is configured properly, please check the Email settings.

Send the password by e-mail - The system will send the user password directly by email just if the SMTP has been correctly set up and the password is not encrypted.

Reset password and send new one by email - The system will reset the password automatically and send it to the user by email just if the SMTP has been correctly set up.

Send a link to e-mail with reset option - The system will send a link by e-mail for the user to access an application and reset the passoword.

New Users
Settings for creating new users in the secutity system.

The options activation by email and send an email to admin work only when the SMTP server is configured properly, access Email settings to set it up.

System allows new users registration - This option sets the availability of users registration directly in the login system. If this option is not checked, only users with administrative access to
the system will be able to insert new users.

System requires activation by email - This option sets whether the new user will have to perform a validation email to activate the account (This option is available only if the email SMTP is
configured)

System requises the user to send an email to admin - This option sets whether the system administrator will receive an e-mail whenever a new user is created (This option is available only if
the email SMTP is configured)

Email settings

This option sets the provider that will be used for sending e-mails from the system.

The information from this example may change according to the SMTP. We are using the Gmail SMTP for this example..
 4

SMTP Server - Must enter the SMTP server address.

SMTP Port - Enter the SMTP server port. This information must comply with the secure connection option. Use 465 for SSL, 587 for TLS or 25 for unsafe connection. If you do not inform the
port Scriptcase will apply a defauld one: 25.

Secure Connection - Use SSL or TSL, or leave it blank for unsecure connection.

SMTP User - Enter the SMTP User information.

SMTP Password - Enter the SMTP password information.

SMTP E-mail - Enter the SMTP outgoing email.

Logged Users
Defines the system behavior for login protection.

This option is available if you have checked Protect logged users during the connection step.

Display logges users - If you check this option Scriptcase will also create with the Security Module a Grid Application to display a report with all users current logged on the system

Brute Force Attack Protection - Enables/disables the blocking of users after some unsuccessful access attempts.

Brute Force lockout time (in Minutes) - Time, in minutes, that the user will remain inaccessible after several unsuccessful access attempts. (Available only when rute Force Attack Protection is
enabled)

Numbers of attempts before lock - Number of failed access attempts, until the protection is enabled. (Available only when enable protection for brute force attacks)

Enter the first record

This option insert the first user inside the security tables. This user will have full administrator permissions in order to manage the security system and add new users.

Login - This option sets the system administrator user.

Password - This option sets the system administrator passwrod.

Name - This option sets the system administrator name.

E-mail - This option sets the system administrator user E-mail.

Group - This option sets the group name that will receive the administrator privileges and that the registed user will be part.

The group option, is available only for Group Security , in the remaining modules this option will not be displayed.

Add applications
This option add the applications already created in the project to the Security Module application’ table.

Save profile

Using this option you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.
 5

Save Profile - Allows you to save a profile with all the current security module settings.

Name - Profile name

Target - This option sets who will have access to the saved profile in the future.
Public - Your security profile will be available in all projects from your Scriptcase.

Project - Your security profile will be available only in the project in which it was created.

User - Your security profile will be available only to the logged user.

Using a saved security profile

The saved profiles can be selected at the beginning of a new Security Module creation, before you choose the security type.

Application security creation

Security Type
First you should select the security type.

Connection
After the security type definition, you must select the connection that will be used to create the tables that make up the security module.

Connection - Sets the connection that will be used for the creation of the security tables.

Use existing tables -Enables you to use pre-existing tables in your database. These tables must have at least the same fields used by Scriptcase security module. We recommend that you use
this option if the tables have already been created by Scriptcase Security Module, to minimize errors.

Create tables - This option creates all necessary security tables inside the selected database.

Tables prefix - You can set a prefix of the tables that will be created by the Security Module. By default Scriptcase uses the prefix: sec_

Delete if tables already exist - This option is available only when you select Create Tables . By selecting this option, if your database has tables with the same names, they will be deleted and
replaced by new tables created by the Security Module.

Protect Logged Users - Protection to prevent users to perform simultaneous logins in different sessions.

Tables link

This step is important if the option Use existing tables is selected. In this case, you must associate the fields from the existing tables to fields of security applications (applications
generated by the Security Module).

In these cases, the existing database tables must contain a minimum number of fields so that they can be associated to the fields of security applications.

The required tables for each type of security are described at the beginning of this article.

If you have selected the option Create tables , in the previous step the fields will be automatically associated, just click continue.
 6
Settings

In this step we will define the security module settings.

General

User password encryption, the folder where the applications are created, the log module used among other things.

Applications Prefix - Prefix for the applications that will be created automatically by the Security Module.

Encryption - Encryption used for to store the password in the table of users.

Enable Security - Activate the flag Application Security of all project applications.

Enable Captcha - Activates the captcha for the login application created by the Security Module.
No - Does not display the captcha in the login application.

Captcha - Uses the built-in scriptcase library for captcha display.

reCAPTCHA - Uses Google’s reCAPTCHA V2. To configure click here.

Folder - Folder name that will be created to store the applications generated by Security Module.

Theme - Theme that is used for the applications created by the Security Module.

Log - This option is available if the project has a Log Module previously created. Click here and check out how to create a Log Module

Menu - This option is only available if your project has a Menu Application previously created. You can associate this existing Menu and include all applications generated by the Security
Modulo to it. If you don’t select an existing Menu here, Scriptcase Security Module will create a new Menu Application exclusively for the security applications.

Menu Type - Security Module menu type (option only available if you do not select and existing menu in the previous item)

Login

Here you can set the type and amount of characters allowed for the username and password fields.

Minimum size - Minimum amount of characters used by the user.

Maximum size - Maximum size of the characters used by the user.

Characters allowed - Define which characters are allowed when creating a password.

Password recovery settings

Defines how password recovery will work in the system created by the Security Module.

These password recovery options works only when the SMTP server is configured properly, please check the Email settings.

Send the password by e-mail - The system will send the user password directly by email just if the SMTP has been correctly set up and the password is not encrypted.

Reset password and send new one by email - The system will reset the password automatically and send it to the user by email just if the SMTP has been correctly set up.

Send a link to e-mail with reset option - The system will send a link by e-mail for the user to access an application and reset the passoword.

New Users
 7
Settings for creating new users in the secutity system.

The options activation by email and send an email to admin work only when the SMTP server is configured properly, access Email settings to set it up.

System allows new users registration - This option sets the availability of users registration directly in the login system. If this option is not checked, only users with administrative access to
the system will be able to insert new users.

System requires activation by email - This option sets whether the new user will have to perform a validation email to activate the account (This option is available only if the email SMTP is
configured)

System requises the user to send an email to admin - This option sets whether the system administrator will receive an e-mail whenever a new user is created (This option is available only if
the email SMTP is configured)

Email settings

This option sets the provider that will be used for sending e-mails from the system.

The information from this example may change according to the SMTP. We are using the Gmail SMTP for this example..

SMTP Server - Must enter the SMTP server address.

SMTP Port - Enter the SMTP server port. This information must comply with the secure connection option. Use 465 for SSL, 587 for TLS or 25 for unsafe connection. If you do not inform the
port Scriptcase will apply a defauld one: 25.

Secure Connection - Use SSL or TSL, or leave it blank for unsecure connection.

SMTP User - Enter the SMTP User information.

SMTP Password - Enter the SMTP password information.

SMTP E-mail - Enter the SMTP outgoing email.

Logged Users

Defines the system behavior for login protection.

This option is available if you have checked Protect logged users during the connection step.

Display logges users - If you check this option Scriptcase will also create with the Security Module a Grid Application to display a report with all users current logged on the system

Brute Force Attack Protection - Enables/disables the blocking of users after some unsuccessful access attempts.

Brute Force lockout time (in Minutes) - Time, in minutes, that the user will remain inaccessible after several unsuccessful access attempts. (Available only when rute Force Attack Protection is
enabled)

Numbers of attempts before lock - Number of failed access attempts, until the protection is enabled. (Available only when enable protection for brute force attacks)

Enter the first record

This option insert the first user inside the security tables. This user will have full administrator permissions in order to manage the security system and add new users.
 8

Login - This option sets the system administrator user.

Password - This option sets the system administrator passwrod.

Name - This option sets the system administrator name.

E-mail - This option sets the system administrator user E-mail.

Group - This option sets the group name that will receive the administrator privileges and that the registed user will be part.

The group option, is available only for Group Security , in the remaining modules this option will not be displayed.

Add applications

This option add the applications already created in the project to the Security Module application’ table.

Save profile

Using this option you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.

Save Profile - Allows you to save a profile with all the current security module settings.

Name - Profile name

Target - This option sets who will have access to the saved profile in the future.
Public - Your security profile will be available in all projects from your Scriptcase.

Project - Your security profile will be available only in the project in which it was created.

User - Your security profile will be available only to the logged user.

Using a saved security profile

The saved profiles can be selected at the beginning of a new Security Module creation, before you choose the security type.

Group security creation

Security Type

First you should select the security type.

Connection

After the security type definition, you must select the connection that will be used to create the tables that make up the security module.
 9

Connection - Sets the connection that will be used for the creation of the security tables.

Use existing tables -Enables you to use pre-existing tables in your database. These tables must have at least the same fields used by Scriptcase security module. We recommend that you use
this option if the tables have already been created by Scriptcase Security Module, to minimize errors.

Create tables - This option creates all necessary security tables inside the selected database.

Tables prefix - You can set a prefix of the tables that will be created by the Security Module. By default Scriptcase uses the prefix: sec_

Delete if tables already exist - This option is available only when you select Create Tables . By selecting this option, if your database has tables with the same names, they will be deleted and
replaced by new tables created by the Security Module.

Protect Logged Users - Protection to prevent users to perform simultaneous logins in different sessions.

Tables link

This step is important if the option Use existing tables is selected. In this case, you must associate the fields from the existing tables to fields of security applications (applications
generated by the Security Module).

In these cases, the existing database tables must contain a minimum number of fields so that they can be associated to the fields of security applications.

The required tables for each type of security are described at the beginning of this article.

If you have selected the option Create tables , in the previous step the fields will be automatically associated, just click continue.

Settings

In this step we will define the security module settings.

General

User password encryption, the folder where the applications are created, the log module used among other things.

Applications Prefix - Prefix for the applications that will be created automatically by the Security Module.

Encryption - Encryption used for to store the password in the table of users.

Enable Security - Activate the flag Application Security of all project applications.

Enable Captcha - Activates the captcha for the login application created by the Security Module.
No - Does not display the captcha in the login application.

Captcha - Uses the built-in scriptcase library for captcha display.

reCAPTCHA - Uses Google’s reCAPTCHA V2. To configure click here.

Folder - Folder name that will be created to store the applications generated by Security Module.

Theme - Theme that is used for the applications created by the Security Module.

Log - This option is available if the project has a Log Module previously created. Click here and check out how to create a Log Module

Menu - This option is only available if your project has a Menu Application previously created. You can associate this existing Menu and include all applications generated by the Security
Modulo to it. If you don’t select an existing Menu here, Scriptcase Security Module will create a new Menu Application exclusively for the security applications.

Menu Type - Security Module menu type (option only available if you do not select and existing menu in the previous item)

Login

Here you can set the type and amount of characters allowed for the username and password fields.
 10

Minimum size - Minimum amount of characters used by the user.

Maximum size - Maximum size of the characters used by the user.

Characters allowed - Define which characters are allowed when creating a password.

Password recovery settings

Defines how password recovery will work in the system created by the Security Module.

These password recovery options works only when the SMTP server is configured properly, please check the Email settings.

Send the password by e-mail - The system will send the user password directly by email just if the SMTP has been correctly set up and the password is not encrypted.

Reset password and send new one by email - The system will reset the password automatically and send it to the user by email just if the SMTP has been correctly set up.

Send a link to e-mail with reset option - The system will send a link by e-mail for the user to access an application and reset the passoword.

New Users
Settings for creating new users in the secutity system.

The options activation by email and send an email to admin work only when the SMTP server is configured properly, access Email settings to set it up.

System allows new users registration - This option sets the availability of users registration directly in the login system. If this option is not checked, only users with administrative access to
the system will be able to insert new users.

System requires activation by email - This option sets whether the new user will have to perform a validation email to activate the account (This option is available only if the email SMTP is
configured)

System requises the user to send an email to admin - This option sets whether the system administrator will receive an e-mail whenever a new user is created (This option is available only if
the email SMTP is configured)

Email settings
This option sets the provider that will be used for sending e-mails from the system.

The information from this example may change according to the SMTP. We are using the Gmail SMTP for this example..

SMTP Server - Must enter the SMTP server address.

SMTP Port - Enter the SMTP server port. This information must comply with the secure connection option. Use 465 for SSL, 587 for TLS or 25 for unsafe connection. If you do not inform the
port Scriptcase will apply a defauld one: 25.

Secure Connection - Use SSL or TSL, or leave it blank for unsecure connection.

SMTP User - Enter the SMTP User information.

SMTP Password - Enter the SMTP password information.

SMTP E-mail - Enter the SMTP outgoing email.

Logged Users
 11
Defines the system behavior for login protection.

This option is available if you have checked Protect logged users during the connection step.

Display logges users - If you check this option Scriptcase will also create with the Security Module a Grid Application to display a report with all users current logged on the system

Brute Force Attack Protection - Enables/disables the blocking of users after some unsuccessful access attempts.

Brute Force lockout time (in Minutes) - Time, in minutes, that the user will remain inaccessible after several unsuccessful access attempts. (Available only when rute Force Attack Protection is
enabled)

Numbers of attempts before lock - Number of failed access attempts, until the protection is enabled. (Available only when enable protection for brute force attacks)

Enter the first record

This option insert the first user inside the security tables. This user will have full administrator permissions in order to manage the security system and add new users.

Login - This option sets the system administrator user.

Password - This option sets the system administrator passwrod.

Name - This option sets the system administrator name.

E-mail - This option sets the system administrator user E-mail.

Group - This option sets the group name that will receive the administrator privileges and that the registed user will be part.

The group option, is available only for Group Security , in the remaining modules this option will not be displayed.

Add applications
This option add the applications already created in the project to the Security Module application’ table.

Save profile

Using this option you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.

Save Profile - Allows you to save a profile with all the current security module settings.

Name - Profile name

Target - This option sets who will have access to the saved profile in the future.
Public - Your security profile will be available in all projects from your Scriptcase.

Project - Your security profile will be available only in the project in which it was created.

User - Your security profile will be available only to the logged user.

Using a saved security profile

The saved profiles can be selected at the beginning of a new Security Module creation, before you choose the security type.
 12
LDAP Creation - Authentication Only
Security type
First you should select the security type.

Connection

After the security type, you will have to select the connection where you want to store the security module tables.

Settings

In this step, you will define the general security module settings.

General

Applications Prefix - Prefix for the applications that will be created automatically by the Security Module.

Encryption - Encryption used for to store the password in the table of users.

Enable Security - Activate the flag Application Security of all project applications.

Enable Captcha - Activates the captcha for the login application created by the Security Module.

Folder - Folder name that will be created to store the applications generated by Security Module.

Theme - Theme that is used for the applications created by the Security Module.

Log - This option is available if the project has a Log Module previously created. Click here and check out how to create a Log Module

Menu - This option is only available if your project has a Menu Application previously created. You can associate this existing Menu and include all applications generated by the Security
Modulo to it. If you don’t select an existing Menu here, Scriptcase Security Module will create a new Menu Application exclusively for the security applications.

Menu Type - Security Module menu type (option only available if you do not select and existing menu in the previous item)

Login

Here you can set the type and amount of characters allowed for the username and password fields.

Minimum size - Minimum amount of characters used by the user.

Maximum size - Maximum size of the characters used by the user.

Characters allowed - Define which characters are allowed when creating a password.
 13
LDAP

Under this option, you have to inform correctly your LDAP server settings.

Server - Enter here the LDAP server IP.

DN - Enter the input attributes.

Port - Enter here the port for access to the server. Default port is 389.

Sufix - Enter the user suffix.

Enter the first record

This option insert the first user inside the security tables. This user will have full administrator permissions in order to manage the security system and add new users.

Login - This option sets the system administrator user.

Password - This option sets the system administrator password.

Name - This option sets the system administrator name.

E-mail - This option sets the system administrator user E-mail.

Save profile

Using this option, you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.

Save Profile

Save Profile - Allows you to save a profile with all the current security module settings.

Name - Profile name

Target - This option sets who will have access to the saved profile in the future.
Public - Your security profile will be available in all projects from your Scriptcase.

Project - Your security profile will be available only in the project in which it was created.

User - Your security profile will be available only to the logged user.

Using a saved security profile

The saved profiles can be selected at the beginning of a new Security Module creation, before you choose the security type.

LDAP Creation - Total control

Security type

First you should select the security type.

 14
Connection

After the security type, you will have to select the connection where you want to store the security module tables.

Connection - Sets the connection that will be used for the creation of the security tables.

Use existing tables -Enables you to use pre-existing tables in your database. These tables must have at least the same fields used by Scriptcase security module. We recommend that you use
this option if the tables have already been created by Scriptcase Security Module, to minimize errors.

Create tables - This option creates all necessary security tables inside the selected database.

Tables prefix - You can set a prefix of the tables that will be created by the Security Module. By default, Scriptcase uses the prefix: sec_

Delete if tables already exist - This option is available only when you select Create Tables . By selecting this option, if your database has tables with the same names, they will be deleted and
replaced by new tables created by the Security Module.

Protect Logged Users - Protection to prevent users to perform simultaneous logins in different sessions.

Tables link

This step is important if the option Use existing tables is selected. In this case, you must associate the fields from the existing tables to fields of security applications (applications
generated by the Security Module).

In these cases, the existing database tables must contain a minimum number of fields so that they can be associated to the fields of security applications.

The required tables for each type of security are described at the beginning of this article.

If you have selected the option Create tables , in the previous step the fields will be automatically associated, just click continue.

Settings

In this step we will define the security module settings.

General

User password encryption, the folder where the applications are created, the log module used among other things.

Applications Prefix - Prefix for the applications that will be created automatically by the Security Module.

Encryption - Encryption used for to store the password in the table of users.

Enable Security - Activate the flag Application Security of all project applications.

Enable Captcha - Activates the captcha for the login application created by the Security Module.

Folder - Folder name that will be created to store the applications generated by Security Module.

Theme - Theme that is used for the applications created by the Security Module.

Log - This option is available if the project has a Log Module previously created. Click here and check out how to create a Log Module

Menu - This option is only available if your project has a Menu Application previously created. You can associate this existing Menu and include all applications generated by the Security
Modulo to it. If you don’t select an existing Menu here, Scriptcase Security Module will create a new Menu Application exclusively for the security applications.

Menu Type - Security Module menu type (option only available if you do not select and existing menu in the previous item)

Login

Here you can set the type and amount of characters allowed for the username and password fields.
 15

Minimum size - Minimum amount of characters used by the user.

Maximum size - Maximum size of the characters used by the user.

Characters allowed - Define which characters are allowed when creating a password.

Email settings
This option sets the provider that will be used for sending e-mails from the system.

The information from this example may change according to the SMTP. We are using the Gmail SMTP for this example.

SMTP Server - Must enter the SMTP server address.

SMTP Port - Enter the SMTP server port. This information must comply with the secure connection option. Use 465 for SSL, 587 for TLS or 25 for unsafe connection. If you do not inform the
port Scriptcase will apply a default one: 25.

Secure Connection - Use SSL or TSL, or leave it blank for unsecure connection.

SMTP User - Enter the SMTP User information.

SMTP Password - Enter the SMTP password information.

SMTP E-mail - Enter the SMTP outgoing email.

LDAP

Under this option, you have to inform correctly your LDAP server settings.

Server - Enter here the LDAP server IP.

DN - Enter the input attributes.

Port - Enter here the port for access to the server. Default port is 389.

Sufix - Enter the user suffix.

Logged Users
Defines the system behavior for login protection.

This option is available if you have checked Protect logged users during the connection step.

Display logged users - If you check this option Scriptcase will also create with the Security Module a Grid Application to display a report with all user’s current logged on the system

Brute Force Attack Protection - Enables/disables the blocking of users after some unsuccessful access attempts.

Brute Force lockout time (in Minutes) - Time, in minutes, that the user will remain inaccessible after several unsuccessful access attempts. (Available only when brute Force Attack Protection
is enabled)

Numbers of attempts before lock - Number of failed access attempts, until the protection is enabled. (Available only when enable protection for brute force attacks)
 16
Registering the admin user

In this step, you must inform a user to connect to the LDAP server. The informed user will have full administrator permissions on the system where you are applying the Security
Module.

Login - This option sets the system LDAP administrator user.

Password - This option sets the system LDAP administrator LDAP password.

Name - This option sets the system LDAP administrator name.

E-mail - This option sets the system LDAP administrator E-mail.

Add applications

This option adds the applications already created in the project to the Security Module application’ table.

Save profile

Using this option, you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.

Save Profile - Allows you to save a profile with all the current security module settings.

Name - Profile name

Target - This option sets who will have access to the saved profile in the future.
Public - Your security profile will be available in all projects from your Scriptcase.

Project - Your security profile will be available only in the project in which it was created.

User - Your security profile will be available only to the logged user.

Using a saved security profile

The saved profiles can be selected at the beginning of a new Security Module creation, before you choose the security type.

reCAPTCHA
ReCAPTCHA is a tool used through the API provided by Google for sending forms adding security at the time of form confirmation (preventing automation for submission).

reCAPTCHA sample:

First we have to request an API Key to activate reCAPTCHA in the Scriptcase application by following the steps below:

To get a Site key and Secret Key go to the link: https://www.google.com/recaptcha/admin#list. The page below will be showed:

Label: Project name which will be created to contains the reCAPTCHA keys.

Choose the type of reCaptcha : We need to choose the option reCAPTCHA V2 .

 17
Domains : We can insert any domains (on per line ) to limit the API uses.

After that, we need to accept the Terms of Service ( “Accept the reCAPTCHA Terms of Service” ).

When click in Register the page will be reloaded showing the integration reCAPTCHA informations. In this screen we can get the Site Key and Secret Key:

Now, we can setting the reCAPTCHA keys on security module:

Site Key : Key generated by google after reCAPTCHA project creation.

Secret Key : Key generated by google after reCAPTCHA project creation.

Related videos
Control Application

Facebook Authentication

Twitter Authentication

Google Authentication
 1
Log Module
HOME › MODULES › LOG MODULE

Using the log module, you can create multiple log schemas, each project application can be linked to a different log schema, which will be configured individually. Each project
can have one or more log schemes applied to its applications.

Schemas list
Access the menu Modules > Log and chick Create / Edit Log Module .

If you are creating your first log schema project, proceed direct to step three, for the schema Creation/editing.

It lists all log schemes previously created. On this screen, we can manage the schemas created.

Edit Applications - Edits the relation between the applications and the schemes.

New scheme - Creates a new Log scheme in the project.

Create Application Log - Creates a report using the log table, that’s also be used by the default scheme of the project.

Edit Scheme Icon - Edits the Log scheme.

Delete Scheme Icon - Deletes the Log scheme.

Schema Creation/editing
Access the menu Modules > Log and check Create / Edit Log Module .

New Schema

Name - Log schema name that will be created. It is a mandatory field.

Description - Short description for the new schema.

Connection - Connection on where the log table will be created. It is a mandatory field.

Table - Table name on where the log information will be stored. It is a mandatory field.

Existing Table - This option deletes the table that has the same name in the database and create a new one. If you want to use the existing table to store the log data just leave this option
unchecked.

Default Schema - It sets the schema that is being created as the default one for project.

Login - Global variable used to store the logged user information into the system. This variable must be the same used in the Security Module. By default, Scriptcase sets this variable on
both modules as [usr_login] .

Default Values

Events - Actions that will be stored in the log table.

Storage mode - User data that will be stored in the log table.
 2
A confirmation screen will appear when you save, just click Close to leave and save the schema.

Close to save the schema - Saves the schema you created, and redirects to the applications screen.

See SQL - Display the SQL used by Scriptcase to create the table ‘sc_log’ that will be used to store the log events.

Download SQL - This option will download the SQL used by Scriptcase to create the table ‘sc_log’.

Close Icon - This option cancels the schema creation and redirects to a new schema creation.

After the confirmation, you will be redirected to link the log schemas to the project applications.

Link Applications
In this step, you must define which log schema will be used in each project application. The list of applications can be filtered by type or by log schema used.

At the top, you can apply actions to all rows or you can select only one action for each row individually.

Apply schema - Select the schema that will be used for the applications. (when you select a schema, the other information is filled according to what was previously
configured).

Store for the Log - User data that will be stored in the Log table.

Access - This event stores the information every time the application is accessed.

Insert - This event stores the information when inserting a record.

Update - This event stores the information when updating a record.

Delete - This event stores the information when deleting a record.

Log Report
In this report, you can see all stored information according to the schema selected during the report creation.
 3

Schema - Log schema that the application will be based on

Name - Application name

Folder - Folder name where the application will be stored

Theme - Theme used for the generated application

Security - This option attaches a security profile to the log schema.

 1
General View
HOME › OPTIONS

Gathers the main configurations of ScriptCase. For the users with administrator privileges, it’s possible to register the ScriptCase, manage the system users, do backups and
restore projects and other configurations.

For the other users, without administrator privileges, can define the default language for ScriptCase, customize Scriptcase’s toolbar and other options that when done, will be
available for the users that did them, for those who won’t change these configurations, they’ll use the default configurations from ScriptCase.
 1
Settings
HOME › OPTIONS › SETTINGS

Access restricted to users with administrative privileges. We have access to the main settings of ScriptCase.

Access Options > Settings.

Left side Menu of the Settings page from ScriptCase.

Below we can see some detailed information of each option.

System Settings
Page where you can define various settings that’ll be used by all the users of ScriptCase.
 2

Language - Defines the default Language for the projects.

Quantity of compilations in parallel - Defines number of compliers used to generate the applications.

Display the compile-time of the applications individually - Allows to compile each application individually.

Number of automatic application copies - Define the amount of copies that application restores module can save.

Send an alert if the last backup is older than(days) - Define the amount of the days for the system to alert the user that the last backup is becoming obsolete.

Show backup alert for - Defines the user group that’s going to receive the alert of the back.

Check for ScriptCase update versions after login - Sets ScriptCase to validate on every login, if there’s a new update released.

Periodic verification of Scriptcase’s database - Feature the does a periodic backup of ScriptCase’s database (Not the projects).

Check version every - Allows you to select the day of the week that’ll occur the verification of the new update.

ScriptCase Session Timeout (min) - Time limit for the execution of the PHP scripts, during the application development, example compile the applications, select analysis, save the applications
and etc. (in seconds).

Show Generation Status Message - Allows you to define the messages of the actions of ScriptCase, when it’s compiling or running your applications, in the options:
Main - Displays a subgroup of the messages;

None - Doesn’t display the messages;

All - Enables the display of all the messages.

Use cache for table fields - With this feature enabled, makes the applications faster while consulting the data.

To recover the ScriptCase password, available at the login, it’s necessary to setup correctly the options below.

SMTP Server - You should inform the address of your SMTP server, that’s responsible for your email.

SMTP Port - Inform the port for the SMTP server. This information is according to the option of secure. Use 465 for SSL and 25 for unsecure connections. Not informing the port, scriptcase will
place 25 by default.

SSL - Define if you’re going to use SSL or not.

SMTP User - Inform the user for the SMTP server.

SMTP Password - Inform the password for the SMTP server.

SMTP E-Mail - Inform the e-mail for the origin of the messages.

PROXY Server - Inform the IP for the Proxy Server.

PROXY Gateway - Inform the Gateway of your Proxy Server.

PROXY User - Inform the Proxy User.

PROXY Password - Informe a senha do usuário do proxy.

 3
Use session in database - Allows to use the session in the database.

Show an option on the deployment wizard to store the PHP session variables in a Database - Allows to display the option to use the session of the deployment in the database.

Pass the PHP Session ID in the URL - Allows to pass the PHP Session id in the URL.

Timezone Sets the Timezone to be used in ScriptCase.

Default Values
With this configuration, it’s possible to standardize the creation of the applications of the projects, increasing the productivity in development of the applications. To change the
settings only for a project, access from the menu Project > Default Values .

Common Settings

Logo - The favicon that’s going to use with the project. Customize the project using the same favicon in all the application.

Records per page - Amount of records per page.

Theme - Default theme for the projects

Show Summary - Displays the number of records in the page and the total of the records in the application. This option will execute only if the line option in the Grid toolbar is disabled.

Use template in the HTML Editor - Selecting Yes, you will be using the new templated of the HTML Editor field, these themes should be setup in Layout > HTML Editor Templates .

HTML Editor template - Defines the template for editing of the field HTML Editor.

Initial sort fields

Text - Set the initial sorting for the text fields.

Date - Set the initial sorting for the date fields.

Number - Set the initial sorting for the number fields.

Currency - Set the initial sorting for the currency fields.

Grid

Table Width - Defines the length for the application table. this option is available to select Pixel or Percent in the table width unit.

Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the width of the application. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the size of the fields); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that should be
informed in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)

Tab a Group By - Defines the left margin of the Group By.

Separates the Group - Defines the margin between two Group Bys.

Lines per page - Defines the option for the user to select and list the amount of records desired by page. If you need an option to list all the records, ads “all” to the options. Ex.: 10,20,30, all

Form
 4
Table Width - Defines the length for the application table. this option is available to select Pixel or Percent in the table width unit.

Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the width of the application. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the size of the fields); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that should be
informed in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)

Tab

Tab Alignment - Display alignment of the tabs in the application.

Menu

Horizontal Alignment of the Menu - Menu alignment.

Horizontal Alignment of the Items - Menu item alignment

Template
Defines the templates used by default on the Header and Footer.

Toolbar Buttons
Define the buttons that’ll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.

System Directories
Directories where information and models will be stored. All the directories are configured automatically in the automatic installation of ScriptCase and in the manual installation
when using the Typical installation method, making unnecessary any modifications from the user. We recommend not changing any of the fields without contacting the support
first.
 5

Root Directory for the Web Server files - Root of the Web Server, where scriptcase is installed. On IIS servers, the default directory would be “inetpub/wwwroot”.

Application Path - Location where the applications will have stored when created.

Production Path - Path to where the “prod” directory is located in ScriptCase, in this directory is located all the libraries that the generated applications need to execute.

Documents Directory - Directory on which the documents used by the applications will be stored.

Images Directory - Directory on which the images used in the applications will be stored. The images loaded in the applications, using the upload field (Image File Name) will be stored in this
directory.

Temporary Files Directory - Directory where the images manipulated by the application is stored temporary. This temporary storage is a condition the the HTML code requires, so that the
images can be opened correctly and the specific directory for these images so that they don’t get mixed up with the images from the gallery.

Security Type
We need to define the method of the access information storage and the type of security used.

Security Type - Method of data storage. We can select between ScriptCase or LDAP.

Scriptcase - The access data is stored in the ScriptCase Database.

LDAP - The access data is stored in the LDAP Server, that scriptcase will check to validate the access.

Security Level - Type of security that’ll be used, this option is the same independently of the storage method.

User - The permissions are defined for each user. On this option, the permissions need to be configured individually.

Group - The permissions are defined for the User Groups. On this option, we’ll tie the users to one or more groups, and define the permissions for each group, users that are part of the
groups will inherited the permissions.

User/Groups - On this option, the permissions are defined by the groups and/or individually by the users. This security level, the permissions for the group and the user is added. This way, we
can have users existing in the same groups but with different permissions.

The security level option is the same independently of the Security Type. (Scriptcase or LDAP)

Users
User management page of the the system, on it you’ll view a list with all the users registered on the system. We also have other options, like including new users and editing the
existing ones.

This option will be available on the left side menu when select it in the Security Type
 6

User - Login of the registered Users.

Insert - Date and time of the user’s creation.

Applications - Number of applications for each user.

Action

Detail - Gives you a detailed view of the user, like it’s email, it’s privileges, projects and groups of users on which it’s part of.

Edit - You can change the privileges and the projects that it has access.

Change Password - Change the password for the user.

Below, we’ll specify some options listed above.

New User
When clicking on the button, New User we’ll be redirected to the page to inform the data for user like login, password, privileges and other things.

Users - Inform a login for the user.

e-mail - Defining the user e-mail.

New Password - Defining the password for the user.

Confirm Password - Confirming the password that’s being registered.

Privileges

Administration - Permission for the user to access the administrative area of ScriptCase.

Projects - Actions that user can do when accessing a project.

Application - Permission to create applications.

Database - Actions that user can do with the database configurations in the projects it has access to.

Project - Projects that the user has access.

Next, we’ll be redirected to a page where you can select which projects will managed by the user. In the example below, I’m defining the user sc as the administrator of the project
gradebook.

The project administrator, can change various preferences of the project, existing connections.
 7

Editing a User

The editing page is similar to the creation of the users, having the same options of configurations.

Users - Users login.

e-mail - The e-mail registered for the user.

Privileges

Administration - Permission for the user to access the administrative area of ScriptCase.

Projects - Actions that user can do when accessing a project.

Application - Permission to create applications.

Database - Actions that user can do with the database configurations in the projects it has access to.

Project - Projects that the user has access.

Like the procedure for creating a user, we’ll be redirected to a page where you can select which projects will managed by the user. In the example below, I’m defining the user sc
as the administrator of the project documents_library.

Changing the Password

On this page, you need to inform the new password for the user.

Delete Users

We can delete more than one user at the same time

 8
When deleting a user that has applications linked to its login, you need to inform if you want to delete the applications or if you want to move them to another user.

Delete Application - All the applications created by the user will be deleted.

Move Application - All the applications will be moved to the user informed.

Groups
Managing user groups. You’ll see a list of the existing groups and some information about them.

This option will only be available on the left side menu when we select the Groups option in the Security Type

Name - Name of the groups.

Description - Group Description.

Users - Users that are part of this group.

Projects - Projects that the users of this group have access to.

Actions

Users - Defines the users that’ll be part of this group.

Edit - Edits the group.

Delete - Delete the group.

You’ll see more details below about the existing options.

New Group

Creating the groups, we can define the privileges.

 9

Name - Name of the group.

Description - Group Description.

Admin Privilege - Defines if the users that are in the group, will have Administrator Privileges for ScriptCase.

Privileges

Project - Defines if the users from this group will have access to do some actions in the projects.

Application - Defines the permission to create applications (By type).

Connections - Defines the privileges to the options of the database of the project.

Projects - Defines the projects that’ll be accessed by the group.

Admin projects - Defines if the group will have Administrator Permission for the project. On this Example, the users from the Group C will be Administrators of the the gradbook project.

Users

After creating the group, we can define which users will be part of the group.

LDAP
Page where you will sync with LDAP. We recommend using the LDAP Administrator user, this way, all the group users of the server will be listed. So, that you can connect with
LDAP in ScriptCase and have the LDAP privileges in ScriptCase.

This option will be available on the left side menu, if you selected the LDAP option in Security Type
 10

Server - IP of the LDAP server (Needs to be setup before proceeding).

Suffix - Domain of the server.

DN - Domain Component.

User - Administrator of the Server.

Password - Senho do usuário informado.

Port - Server Port.

After saving the LDAP server connection, the users and groups listed in the Users and Groups tabs according to the server. Initially, only the administrator user (The same used for
the LDAP connection) will have access to ScriptCase. The other users need to be enabled and their permission needs to be setup also with the groups.

Users

This option is displayed when selecting users in the Security Level, lists all the users from the LDAP server. We can manage the privileges of each user with the projects and
options of ScriptCase.

Groups

Option displayed when selecting the group option in the Security Level, lists all the groups from the LDAP server. You need to access this tab to enable the groups and set their
privileges.
 11

User / Groups
When selecting a security level of User/Groups, two tabs will be displayed. In this case, the permissions are defined for the group of users and/or individually by user. On this type
of security, the permissions of the group and the user are added. So, that can user exist in a group and have different users.

Projects
List of Scriptcase existing projects. You can view all projects details, such as users who have access, the current version of projects, number of applications, among other
information.

=======

Project - Project name.

Description - Project description.

Creation - Project creation date

Applications - Number of applications from each project version. 1:33(Versions count: number of applications)

Action - Project details.

By clicking on the magnifying glass next to the number of applications, you can see more details of the project. In addition to some information previously views on the list of
projects.
 12

Connections - Lists of connections of the project.

User - Users that have access to the project. The users will have the basic permissions, like create applications.

Administrators - User/Groups that are administrators of the project. It’s possible to create and edit connections in the properties of the project, with this permission.

The permission of each user needs to be setup individually as the group permission also needs to be.

Backup
ScriptCase’s backup works in a similar way as the project export, but the backup does an export of all the applications from ScriptCase, with all the files necessary for them to
work. To do a backup, just inform the name of the file to be generated.

Fianlly, download the generated file and save it in a secure location.

Restore
This option is similar to Project Import, however using the restore you can import more than one project at a time. When you access the restore you will see a list of backups
performed recently, you will be able to restore these backups or to import a backup exported from other Scriptcase installation.

Backup - Backup generated files.

Created in - Creation date and time of the listed backups.

Restore - Backup restore.

Detail - Backup details.

Delete - Deletes the backup permanently.

To restore another backup, which is not in the list above, select zip restore and upload a backup file created by Scriptcase.

After choosing the backup that is going to be restored you will be redirected to a confirmation page. At this moment, you must inform you if we want to overwrite duplicate files or
keep the existing files in Scriptcase.
 13
Log Settings
ScriptCase maintains in its database a log of the main actions done by the users. By default, all the actions are stored in our database. On this option, we can customize the log
registry, by marking and unmarking the actions that should be stored.

View Log
This option allows you to view the main actions done by the users, being stored separately by day. On the calendar, we can select the desired date to view the information on the
table on the side. The days that have log, have a blueish background color.

Login - Login of the user responsible for the action.

IP - IP of the work station that the user did the actions described.

Time - Time when the action was done.

Type - The type of action done.

Action - What action was done.

Info - Details of the action;

Scriptcase Update
ScriptCase update area. All the update process is done by the internet, using our servers. We recommend using a fast connection.

Firstly, we will verify if the there is a new version of ScriptCase available.

We can later define if the offline documentation and the prod used by ScriptCase are updated.
 14
Next, we can visualize the total of updates found.

After started the update, the process can’t be interrupted.

After downloading and updating all the files, you’ll view a screen with the option to view log of modifications done in the process: Click here to view ScriptCase update log .

If you’re having problems connecting to our server, check if your firewall is allowing the connections to the links: .scriptcase.com.br__; __.scriptcase.net;

Online registration
For the online registration, you must be connected to the internet. There will be an online communication between your server and Scriptcase servers. We are going to validate
the information that you enter and send you back the confirmation online. It’s quick and simple.

In order to register your Scriptcase you essentially need to have the account owner information (user, password and serial key). This information is created during the license
purchase.

Enter your account details (User login, password and serial key).

User - Account user login linked to serial (License owner details, same information used to access My Scriptcase options under the website)

Password - Account password

Serial - Active and available for registration (open) serial key.

To complete the register, you will need to log out of Scriptcase.

Offline Registration
Used for cases where the machine where Scriptcase is installed does not have internet access. The offline registration is done in two steps: Request (request the registration file)
and Register (register the file).
 15
In order to register your Scriptcase you essentially need to have the account owner information (user, password and serial key). This information is created during the license
purchase.

Request
You can access the Request option under the menu License > Offline Request

Inside this option you request a encrypted file containing relevant information to Scriptcase registry (.req file).

User - Account user login linked to serial (License owner details, same information used to access My Scriptcase options under the website)

Password - Account password

Serial - Active and available for registration (open) serial key.

After completing the request, you need to access the website through the link https://www.scriptcase.net/licenserequest/ to upload the file and get the registry file

Enter the serial you want to use for the registry and upload the file .rec delivered by Scriptcase during the file request step. You will receive another file called: .lic , download
this file and go back to Scriptcase registration step.

Registration
Back to Scriptcase, please access: Licenses > Offline Registration .

Reenter the account information and the serial key, upload the .lic downloaded from the website.

User - Same login used to generate the file .rec (License owner details, same information used to access My Scriptcase options under the website)
 16
Password - Account password

Serial - Active and available for registration (open) serial key.

Upload - Upload the file .lic downloaded from the website.

To complete the register you will need to log out of Scriptcase.

 1
My ScriptCase
HOME › OPTIONS › MY SCRIPTCASE

Interface where you can define the configuration of ScriptCase. All the users have access to this interface, and the modifications done are tied to the login you currently using.
This way each user can have their own configuration for ScriptCase as they desire.

Language - ScriptCase interface language. When informing the language in My ScriptCase , the selected language at the login won’t be considered.

Security Resources - When unchecking these options, the security configurations won’t be considered when running the applications in the development environment. When deploying the
applications, they’ll respect the security configurations normally.

Initial Information - Defines the information that’ll be displayed on the application listing.

Show Friendly URL - Defines the display of the field to inform the Friendly URL in the application.

Main Menu Interface - Defines the width of the left side menu of the home page, where the applications are listed and the option of incrementation.

Application Settings Interface - Defines the width of the left side menu of the applications settings and the option of incrementation.

Auto Save - Allows the modifications to be saved automatically.

Display INSERT CODE on events - Defines if the examples will be displaying in the events of the applications.

Show folders at home - Allows for the subfolders to be listed with the applications, when selecting a folder on the side menu in the home of the project.

Welcome Tour - Defines the display of the ‘Welcome Tour’ in case there isn’t any projects created.

Project creation Tour - Allows the display of the Project creation tour, in case there isn’t any projects created.
 1
Change Password
HOME › OPTIONS › CHANGE PASSWORD

Interface where you can change the password of your user. We always recommend using passwords with a certain level of complexity, to prevent hacks of brute force.

Inform your current password, and the new password twice just to confirm it.

For the option of password recovery to work, the administrator need to setup the SMTP configurations correctly in ScriptCase’s settings.

Old Password - Inform your current password.

New Password - Inform your new password.

Confirmation - Confirm the new password.

 1
My Toolbar
HOME › OPTIONS › MY TOOLBAR

Allows each user to customize their toolbar, by including and removing unnecessary items for your usage, giving you a better experience while developing the applications. This
options is option is tied to the user that did the modification, this way each user can modify their own toolbar the way they desire.

The icons are divided in categories. To include an it to the toolbar, we need to drag it to the toolbar.

Toolbar - Icons that’ll be displayed on the toolbar of ScriptCase.

Buttons

Save - Save the modifications done to the toolbar.

Add Separator - Adds a separator to the toolbar, after the last item of the current setup.

Create item - Creates a new item in the toolbar. Inform the URL, icon and description of the new item.

Return to default - Restores the toolbar to its default configuration.

 1
General View
HOME › DEPLOY

A deploy is the final thing you’ll need to do with your project, so that your applications can be accessed by in the production environment. Basically, it the final phase of the
development, where the ScriptCase user will find the help to implant the project on a WEB server, this server being correctly setup to guarantee the perfect functionality of the
applications.

Scriptcase offers two ways to deploy your project, both of them are detailed below:

We recommend that the PHP version of the production environment, needs to be the same as the Development environment, due to capabilities of the functions between the
versions.

Typical Deploy

Is the type which the production environment is automatically setup, with all the common libraries used in the applications. In case you need to customize the deploy directories,
like the image directory or the temporary directory for example, this type of deployment isn’t recommended, considering that theses directories are setup by ScriptCase default,
not allowing customizing their locations, to deploy with the liberty to choose the location of the directories you’ll need to do the “Advance” deployment.

To proceed with the Typical Deploy Click Here.

Advanced Deploy

It’s a deploy that gives the ScriptCase User the possibility to choose the default directories for the project, like these: Image Directory, Document Directory, Prod (Common
Libraries) Directory and etc. This type of deployment is recommended if you need to specify the directories for the WEB Server, to be used be your projects.

To proceed with the Advanced Deploy Click Here.

 1
Typical Deploy
HOME › DEPLOY › TYPICAL DEPLOY

Pre-Requirements:
Web Server (ex: Apache, IIS).

PHP version 5.6 or later.

Access to the project database that’s going to be used in the production environment.

This type of deploy is for users that want the Production Environment (Common Libraries) with the default settings from ScriptCase, the basic setup is done already be
ScriptCase. The process will be describing below:

1 - Access your project and choose the option “Project -> Deploy Applications” , available on the top menu.

ScriptCase “Project” Menu

2 - After clicking the on Deploy, you’ll have the option to deploy all the applications from the project or you can select the applications that you want to deploy.

All Applications

Select the applications to be deployed

Select the applications

Select the applications to be deployed

List of available applications

 2

Select the applications to be deployed

3 - Choose the type of deploy that you’ll use (Typical).

Select the applications to be deployed

4 - Choose the initial application.

Select the initial application for the deployment

It’s necessary to select the common libraries, which are the files responsible for the “Production Environment”. It’s necessary to select the common files, for the images, css
and custom messages to be sent at the moment of the deploy.

5 - Generating the files to deploy:

Generate the ZIP with the applications (recommended):

The final process that’ll be give you a link to download the deploy package.

Select the ZIP method

Note: This option is recommended because it doesn’t on other services to be done.

Deploy on a server directory:

Deploys the project in the informed directory. This option should be used, in the case that the deploy is going to be in the same sever where ScriptCase is installed, otherwise this
option isn’t valid.

Choose the Directory to deploy

Deploy on a FTP server:

Deploys the application automatically on a remote FTP server.
 3

Select the FTP method

FTP server : Server where you’ll deploy your project. Inform the domain or IP of the server.

User : User for the FTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it won’t work.

Password: Password for the FTP user.

FTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.

Note: To use this option it’s necessary that the server to offer the FTP service the user to have write permission on the server folder.

Deploy on a SFTP server:

Deploys the application automatically on a remote SFTP server.

Select the SFTP method

SFTP server: Server where you’ll deploy your project. Inform the domain or IP of the server.

User : User for the SFTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it won’t work.

Password: Password for the SFTP user.

SFTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.

Note: To use this option it’s necessary that the server to offer the SFTP service the user to have write permission on the server folder.

6 - On the final process you’ll a report with all the application deployed with the download link of the project.

Last Page of Deploy

 1
Advanced Deploy
HOME › DEPLOY › ADVANCED DEPLOY

Pre-Requirements:
Web Server (ex: Apache, IIS).

PHP version 5.6 or later.

Access to the project database that’s going to be used in the production environment.

Note: Different from the typical deploy, where the setup of the directories is the done from ScriptCase using the default settings, the advanced deployment allows you to
choose the directories is according to the architecture of the server where it’s going to be deployed to.

1 - Access your project and choose the option “Project -> Deploy Applications” , available on the top menu.

ScriptCase “Project” Menu

2 - After clicking the on Deploy, you’ll have the option to deploy all the applications from the project or you can select the applications that you want to deploy.

All Applications

Select the applications to be deployed

Select the applications

Select the applications to be deployed

List of available applications

 2

Select the applications to be deployed

3 - Choose the type of deploy that you’ll use (Advanced).

Select the applications to be deployed

4 - Create a template for the deployment so that the settings can save and reused each time you deploy the current application.

Choose the name of the template to deploy

5 - Define the structure of the directories of the production environment defined in the production server. You can see two examples of different setup examples.

Example 1:

Note: It’s necessary to create the directories in the production server, so that it can store the Production environment (Common Libraries) of the deployment, remembering
that the documents directory needs to be informed the absolute path until the folder. On this example, we’re using the production folder.

Example 1: Choose the Example 1: Choose the

structure of the deploy folders

structure of the deploy folders

Example 2:

Note: On this example, it’s necessary to create the image, documents and temporary directories, on your production server, remembering that the documents directory needs
to be informed the absolute path. Relating to the Production Environment (Common Libraries), it’s necessary to take the “prod” folder generated at the end of the deploy to the
server. In this case, we’re using different directories form the previous example.
 3

Example 2: Choose the

Example 2: Choose the

structure of the deploy folders

structure of the deploy folders

Note: On both examples on top, in case you want after the conclusion the deployment process, there’ll be a link to download and deploy the common files, check the option
“Deploy with common files (css, buttons, images, messages)”.

Common Libraries Folder : Library and service package used by the deployed applications. Inform the relative path to the prod directory, ex: /production/prod or /prod

Images Folder (used for uploading service) : Folder where will be stored all the images, when an application uses a field of the type “Image (File Name)”. Inform the relative path to the image
directory: /production/file/img

Temp Folder : Folder where be stored the generated temporary files during runtime of the applications. The files of this directory will be removed periodically according to the specific
settings, by default it’s 120 minutes. Inform here the relative path to the tmp directory, ex: /production/tmp or /temporay_files/tmp

Documents Folder (used for uploading serviced) : older where will be stored all the documents, when an application uses a field of the type “Image(File Name)”. Absolute Path (Full Path) to
the doc directory, ex: C:/Apache/htdocs/productions/file/doc or C:/Apache/htdocs/my_documents/doc

Note: The Character “/”, means the root of the Web Server, it’s used for relative paths.

6 - Define the connection name that’ll be used by the project after deploying.

Choose the name of the connection

7 - Choose the the way method of deploy that’s going to be used. ScriptCase offers 4 options:

Generate the ZIP with the applications (recommended):

The final process that’ll be give you a link to download the deploy package.

Select the ZIP method

Note: This option is recommended because it doesn’t on other services to be done.

Deploy on a server directory:

Deploys the project in the informed directory. This option should be used, in the case that the deploy is going to be in the same sever where ScriptCase is installed, otherwise this
option isn’t valid.
 4

Choose the Directory to deploy

Deploy on a FTP server:

Deploys the application automatically on a remote FTP server.

Select the FTP method

FTP server : Server where you’ll deploy your project. Inform the domain or IP of the server.

User : User for the FTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it won’t work.

Password: Password for the FTP user.

FTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.

Note: To use this option it’s necessary that the server to offer the FTP service the user to have write permission on the server folder.

Deploy on a SFTP server:

Deploys the application automatically on a remote SFTP server.

Select the SFTP method *

SFTP server: Server where you’ll deploy your project. Inform the domain or IP of the server.

User : User for the SFTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it won’t work.

Password: Password for the SFTP user.

SFTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.

Note: To use this option it’s necessary that the server to offer the SFTP service the user to have write permission on the server folder.

8 - On the final process you’ll a report with all the application deployed with the download link of the project, also with the common libraries, that are the necessary routine to
run the applications on the production environment, that’s why they are required to upload with the deployment.
 5

Last Page of Deploy

Note: The advanced deploy requires that you download the “Production Environment”, that is the package that contains the common libraries. If you don’t want to download
the Production Environment (Common Libraries) from the link generated by the deploy, you can download it by Clicking Here. If you deploy the project again, you don’t need
to download the common libraries, but this information isn’t valid if the common libraries were updated in a new ScriptCase release.
1
2
3